1. 第一品显示巴利原文
1. Paṭhamavaggo
《根经》的注释显示巴利原文
1. Mūlasuttavaṇṇanā
50 《三集》第一品中,“三”是数量的限定。“这些”是将其呈于目前。“不善根”是对所限定法的说明。其中,“不善”与“根”合称,故为“不善根”。另有一释:不善法的因、缘、发生、令生、令起、令生起,依此义而成为根,故名“不善根”,即是不善法之原因。所谓原因,“从它而果得以转起”故名因,“依此而到来”故名缘,“从此发生”故名发生,“令己果生起”故名令生,“使之生起”故名令起,“使之产生”故名令生起。同样,以安住之义为根。因此,“不善根”即是令不善法得以安立者,也就是原因。显示巴利原文
50. Tikanipātassa paṭhame tīṇīti gaṇanaparicchedo. Imānīti abhimukhīkaraṇaṃ. Akusalamūlānīti paricchinnadhammanidassanaṃ. Tattha akusalāni ca tāni mūlāni cāti akusalamūlāni. Atha vā akusalānaṃ hetupaccayapabhavajanakasamuṭṭhāpakanibbattakaṭṭhena mūlāni cāti akusalamūlāni, akusaladhammānaṃ kāraṇānīti attho. Kāraṇañhi yathā hinoti etasmā phalaṃ pavattatīti hetu, paṭicca etasmā etīti paccayo, pabhavati etasmāti pabhavo, attano phalaṃ janetīti janakaṃ, samuṭṭhāpetīti samuṭṭhāpakaṃ, nibbattetīti nibbattakanti ca vuccati. Evaṃ patiṭṭhaṭṭhena mūlanti, tasmā akusalamūlānīti akusalānaṃ suppatiṭṭhitabhāvasādhanāni, kāraṇānīti vuttaṃ hoti.
然而,有一些人说:「正如稻谷等的稻种,以及宝石的光泽等对于宝石那样,贪等能成就不善的不善性——这就是根的含义。」若如此,对于由不善心生起的色法,它们就不能成为这些色法的因缘。因为那些色法并不成就它们的不善性,而它们(贪等)却也并非不是那些色法的缘。正如所说:显示巴利原文
Keci pana ‘‘sāliādīnaṃ sālibījādīni viya maṇippabhādīnaṃ maṇivaṇṇādayo viya ca akusalānaṃ akusalabhāvasādhako lobhādīnaṃ mūlaṭṭho’’ti vadanti. Evaṃ sante akusalacittasamuṭṭhānarūpesu tesaṃ hetupaccayabhāvo na siyā. Na hi tāni tesaṃ akusalabhāvaṃ sādhenti, na ca paccayā na honti. Vuttañhetaṃ –
「因对于因相应的诸法,以及因等起的色法,以因缘为缘。」(《发趣论·第一·缘分别·1》)显示巴利原文
‘‘Hetū hetusampayuttakānaṃ dhammānaṃ taṃsamuṭṭhānānañca rūpānaṃ hetupaccayena paccayo’’ti (paṭṭhā. 1.paccayaniddesa.1).
再者,无因的痴若没有其他能令其成就不善性的根,便不应有不善性(但并非如此)。若是以为贪等的不善性等是由自性成就的,而与它们相应的心所则依赖于贪等(而获得不善性),那么如同贪等一样,无贪等的善性等也应是由自性成就的,如此无贪等就只能是善法,而非无记法了。但事实并非如此。因此,正如在相应法中那样,对于诸根,也应探究善性等问题。因为,应如此把握:正如如理作意等是善性的原因,非如理作意等是不善性的原因。这样一来,不以成就不善性的方式,而以成就良好安立性的方式来理解贪等的根的含义,便没有任何过失。因为获得了因缘的诸法,犹如根深蒂固的树木,坚固而良好地安立;无因的法则如同从胡麻种子长出的微细苔藓等,不能良好安立。因此,以因等意义资助不善的,即是不善的根,故称「不善根」。又因为没有任何不善心的生起能脱离诸根,所以应知,通过这三根,一切不善的积聚已被完全囊括和显示。显示巴利原文
Ahetukassa ca mohassa akusalabhāvo na siyā akusalabhāvasādhakassa mūlantarassa abhāvato. Athāpi siyā lobhādīnaṃ sabhāvasiddho akusalādibhāvo, taṃsampayuttānaṃ pana lobhādipaṭibaddhoti. Evampi yathā lobhādīnaṃ, evaṃ alobhādīnampi sabhāvasiddho kusalādibhāvoti alobhādayo kusalā eva siyuṃ, na abyākatā, na ca honti. Tasmā yathā sampayuttesu, evaṃ mūlesupi kusalādibhāvo pariyesitabbo. Yonisomanasikārādiko viya hi kusalabhāvassa, ayonisomanasikārādiko akusalabhāvassa kāraṇanti gahetabbaṃ. Evaṃ akusalabhāvasādhanavasena lobhādīnaṃ mūlaṭṭhaṃ aggahetvā suppatiṭṭhitabhāvasādhanavasena gayhamāne na koci doso. Laddhahetupaccayā hi dhammā virūḷhamūlā viya pādapā thirā honti suppatiṭṭhitā, heturahitā pana tilabījakādisevālā viya na suppatiṭṭhitāti hetuādiatthena akusalānaṃ upakārakattā mūlānīti akusalamūlāni. Yasmā pana mūlena mutto akusalacittuppādo natthi, tasmā tīhi mūlehi sabbo akusalarāsi pariyādiyitvā dassitoti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
为了显示那些不善根的自性,才说「贪是不善根」等。此处,关于贪等所应阐述的内容,前面已经说过了。然而,前文所说的是第三道所断的贪等,此处则是无余的一切不善根,这就是差别所在。显示巴利原文
Tāni akusalamūlāni sarūpato dassetuṃ ‘‘lobho akusalamūla’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha lobhādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā vuttameva. Tattha pana tatiyamaggavajjhā lobhādayo āgatā, idha pana anavasesāti ayameva viseso.
在偈颂中,「恶心思」:指因与不善法相应,故为低劣之心。「迫害」:指在它自身生起的刹那,以及将来感果的刹那,都会加以逼迫折磨。「自所生」:指于自身中生起。「以皮为心材」:是指外有皮包裹、内部缠结中空的东西,也就是竹子之类。「与自果俱」:即带着它自身的果。这段话的意思是:就像枳吒树、黄檀树等,它们内部并没有真正的心材,只以外皮充作心材,因此得到‘皮心材’这个名称的竹子之类,它们自己所结出的果,会反过来迫害它、毁坏它;同样地,一个内心没有戒等真实心材、只怀有低劣心的补特伽罗,正是由自身中生起的贪等不善法,来毁灭他。显示巴利原文
Gāthāyaṃ pāpacetasanti akusaladhammasamāyogato lāmakacittaṃ. Hiṃsantīti attano pavattikkhaṇe āyatiṃ vipākakkhaṇe ca vibādhenti. Attasambhūtāti attani jātā. Tacasāranti gaṇṭhitaṃ, veḷunti attho. Samphalanti attano phalaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – khadirasīsapādayo viya antosāro ahutvā bahisāratāya tacasāranti laddhanāmaṃ veḷuādiṃ yathā attasambhūtameva phalaṃ hiṃsati vināseti, evameva anto sīlādisārarahitaṃ lāmakacittaṃ puggalaṃ attasambhūtāyeva lobhādayo vināsentīti.
2. 界经注释显示巴利原文
2. Dhātusuttavaṇṇanā
51 51. 在第二部经里,「界」:以能承载自己的果报与自性之义,故称为界。而在这里面,凡是能产生果报的,便以承载自己的果报与自性而称为界;其余不产生果报的,则只以承载自性之义而称为界。「色界」:即色有。在提到‘界’之处,应以‘有’来作限定;在提到‘有’之处,应以‘界’来作限定。此处便是以‘有’来作限定的。因此——显示巴利原文
51. Dutiye dhātuyoti attano phalassa sabhāvassa ca dhāraṇaṭṭhena dhātuyo. Yañcettha phalanibbattakaṃ, taṃ attano phalassa sabhāvassa ca, itaraṃ sabhāvasseva dhāraṇaṭṭhena dhātu. Rūpadhātūti rūpabhavo. Dhātuyā āgataṭṭhāne bhavena paricchinditabbaṃ, bhavassa āgataṭṭhāne dhātuyā paricchinditabbanti idha bhavena paricchedo kathito. Tasmā –
“哪些是色界所行法?向下以梵天世界为下际,向上以阿迦腻吒天为上际,凡在此范围内活动、归属此范围的蕴、界、处,这些便是色界所行法。”(《法集论》1289)显示巴利原文
‘‘Katame dhammā rūpāvacarā? Heṭṭhato brahmalokaṃ pariyantaṃ karitvā uparito akaniṭṭhe deve anto karitvā etthāvacarā ettha pariyāpannā khandhadhātuāyatanā, ime dhammā rūpāvacarā’’ti (dha. sa. 1289) –
如此所说的色界所行法,即是色界。“无色界”,即无色有。于此,同样是以“有”来作为限定——显示巴利原文
Evaṃ vuttā rūpāvacaradhammā rūpadhātu. Arūpadhātūti arūpabhavo. Idhāpi bhavena paricchedo kathitoti –
“哪些是无色界所行法?向下以空无边处天为下际,向上以非想非非想处天为上际,凡在此范围内活动、归属此范围的蕴、界、处,这些便是无色界所行法。”(《法集论》1291)——如此所说的无色界所行法,即是无色界。显示巴利原文
‘‘Katame dhammā arūpāvacarā? Heṭṭhato ākāsānañcāyatanūpage deve anto karitvā, uparito nevasaññānāsaññāyatanūpage deve anto karitvā, etthāvacarā ettha pariyāpannā khandhadhātuāyatanā, ime dhammā arūpāvacarā’’ti (dha. sa. 1291) –
“灭界”:当知即是涅槃。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ vuttā arūpāvacaradhammā arūpadhātu. Nirodhadhātūti nibbānaṃ veditabbaṃ.
复有另一释法:与色俱行、系属于色的法之转起,为色界,即五蕴有与一蕴有,由此含摄一切欲有与色有。离色的法之转起,为无色界,即四蕴有,由此含摄无色有。如是,以两句显示了所有三有、一切轮回的转起。第三句则唯摄无为界,故在此处,道与果便成为超越三界之法。然而,有说:“色界即是具有色自性的法,无色界即是具有无色自性的法,以此两句无余地摄取了五蕴。”又有说:“成为色渴爱所缘境的法是色界,成为无色渴爱所缘境的法是无色界。”这些说法于此皆不获认可。是故,应唯依前述之义而解。显示巴利原文
Aparo nayo – rūpasahitā, rūpapaṭibaddhā, dhammappavatti rūpadhātu, pañcavokārabhavo, ekavokārabhavo ca, tena sakalo kāmabhavo rūpabhavo ca saṅgahito. Rūparahitā dhammappavatti arūpadhātu, catuvokārabhavo, tena arūpabhavo saṅgahito. Iti dvīhi padehi tayo bhavā sabbā saṃsārappavatti dassitā. Tatiyapadena pana asaṅkhatadhātuyeva saṅgahitāti maggaphalāni idha tikavinimuttadhammā nāma jātā. Keci pana ‘‘rūpadhātūti rūpasabhāvā dhammā, arūpadhātūti arūpasabhāvā dhammāti padadvayena anavasesato pañcakkhandhā gahitā’’ti. ‘‘Rūpataṇhāya visayabhūtā dhammā rūpadhātu, arūpataṇhāya visayabhūtā arūpadhātū’’ti ca vadanti, taṃ sabbaṃ idha nādhippetaṃ. Tasmā vuttanayeneva attho veditabbo.
偈颂中:“遍知色界”——即以知遍知等三种遍知,遍知系属于色的法之转起。“于无色界不依住”——即于无色界法,不因有贪而安住,不因有见而安住,无所黏着。亦有读作“于无色不依住”,其义相同。至此,已说遍知三地之法。“于灭中得解脱者”——即那些人,依最上道与果之力,于涅槃所缘中,以断除与止息,从一切无余烦恼中解脱。“他们是胜死者”——这些漏尽者,已超越死亡。显示巴利原文
Gāthāsu rūpadhātuṃ pariññāyāti rūpapaṭibaddhadhammapavattiṃ ñātapariññādīhi tīhi pariññāhi parijānitvā. Āruppesu asaṇṭhitāti arūpāvacaradhammesu bhavarāgavasena bhavadiṭṭhivasena ca na patiṭṭhitā anallīnā. ‘‘Arūpesu asaṇṭhitā’’ti ca paṭhanti, so eva attho. Ettāvatā tebhūmakadhammānaṃ pariññā vuttā. Nirodhe ye vimuccantīti ye nibbāne ārammaṇabhūte aggamaggaphalavasena samucchedapaṭippassaddhīhi anavasesakilesato vimuccanti. Te janā maccuhāyinoti te khīṇāsavajanā maraṇaṃ samatītā.
如此显示通过超越三界而证得不死之后,为了激发他们的精进,便说出第二首偈颂:‘这条道路,以及我所行之道,已为你们开示。’其中,‘以身’指以名身,即以道与果。‘触证’即证得。‘无依’即远离蕴等一切依止。‘弃舍依’即这些依止被舍离的因。因为当以道智现证涅槃时,一切依止皆被舍离,故涅槃是他们被舍离之因。‘作证’即恒时进入果定,亲自证得之后,无漏的正自觉者便开示这离忧、离垢的涅槃境界。因此,应为了证得此涅槃而精勤努力。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ dhātuttayasamatikkamena amatādhigamaṃ dassetvā ‘‘ayañca paṭipadā mayā gatamaggo ca tumhākaṃ dassito’’ti tattha nesaṃ ussāhaṃ janento dutiyaṃ gāthamāha. Tattha kāyenāti nāmakāyena maggaphalehi. Phusayitvāti patvā. Nirūpadhinti khandhādisabbūpadhirahitaṃ. Upadhippaṭinissagganti tesaṃyeva ca upadhīnaṃ paṭinissajjanakāraṇaṃ. Nibbānassa hi maggañāṇena sacchikiriyāya sabbe upadhayo paṭinissaṭṭhā hontīti taṃ tesaṃ paṭinissajjanakāraṇaṃ. Sacchikatvāti kālena kālaṃ phalasamāpattisamāpajjanena attapaccakkhaṃ katvā anāsavo sammāsambuddho tameva asokaṃ virajaṃ nibbānapadaṃ deseti. Tasmā tadadhigamāya ussukkaṃ kātabbanti.
第一受经注释显示巴利原文
3. Paṭhamavedanāsuttavaṇṇanā
52 52. 在第三经中,‘受’:领受所缘之味,感受、体验,故称为受。为了显示其分类,而说‘乐受’等。其中,‘乐’一词,依释义的方式,前文已说。而‘苦’一词,在‘生也是苦’(《长部》2.387;《分别论》190)等中,用于指苦的事例;在‘摩诃梨,因为色是苦,随逐于苦,陷入于苦’(《相应部》3.60)等中,用于苦的所缘;在‘恶业的积聚是苦’(《法句经》117)等中,用于苦的因缘;在‘诸比丘,乃至以言语都难以表达地狱有多苦’(《中部》3.250)等中,用于苦缘所在的处所;在‘由于乐之舍断与苦之舍断’(《长部》1.232;《法集论》165)等中,用于苦受。在此,也正是指苦受。显示巴利原文
52. Tatiye vedanāti ārammaṇarasaṃ vediyanti anubhavantīti vedanā. Tā vibhāgato dassetuṃ ‘‘sukhā vedanā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sukha-saddo atthuddhāravasena heṭṭhā vuttoyeva. Dukkha-saddo pana ‘‘jātipi dukkhā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.387; vibha. 190) dukkhavatthusmiṃ āgato. ‘‘Yasmā ca kho, mahāli, rūpaṃ dukkhaṃ dukkhānupatitaṃ dukkhāvakkanta’’ntiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 3.60) dukkhārammaṇe. ‘‘Dukkho pāpassa uccayo’’tiādīsu (dha. pa. 117) dukkhapaccaye. ‘‘Yāvañcidaṃ, bhikkhave, na sukarā akkhānena pāpuṇituṃ, yāva dukkhā nirayā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 3.250) dukkhapaccayaṭṭhāne. ‘‘Sukhassa ca pahānā dukkhassa ca pahānā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.232; dha. sa. 165) dukkhavedanāyaṃ. Idhāpi dukkhavedanāyameva.
再从词义来说,‘乐’:令快乐,故为乐;‘苦’:令痛苦,故为苦;‘不苦不乐’:非苦非乐,其中m音是随句连声而说。在它们之中,乐受的特征是体验可意,苦受的特征是体验不可意,不苦不乐受的特征是体验与这两者相反。因此,乐受与苦受的生起是明显的,不苦不乐受则不然。当乐生起时,它令整个身体震动、挤压、遍满,如同啖食百次提炼的酥油,如同涂抹百次熬煮的油,如同以千壶水熄灭热恼一般,生起时令人发出‘啊,乐!啊,乐!’的声音。当苦生起时,它令整个身体扰动、挤压、遍满,如同插入烧热的犁头,如同灌注熔化的铜汁一般,生起时令人号叫奔走:‘啊,苦!啊,苦!’。如此,乐受与苦受的生起是明显的。显示巴利原文
Vacanatthato pana sukhayatīti sukhā. Dukkhayatīti dukkhā. Na dukkhā na sukhāti adukkhamasukhā, makāro padasandhivasena vutto. Tāsu iṭṭhānubhavanalakkhaṇā sukhā, aniṭṭhānubhavanalakkhaṇā dukkhā, ubhayaviparītānubhavanalakkhaṇā adukkhamasukhā. Tasmā sukhadukkhavedanānaṃ uppatti pākaṭā, na adukkhamasukhāya. Yadā hi sukhaṃ uppajjati, sakalasarīraṃ bhentaṃ maddantaṃ pharamānaṃ satadhotasappiṃ khādāpentaṃ viya, satapākatelaṃ makkhentaṃ viya, ghaṭasahassena pariḷāhaṃ nibbāpayamānaṃ viya ca ‘‘aho sukhaṃ, aho sukha’’nti vācaṃ nicchārayamānameva uppajjati. Yadā dukkhaṃ uppajjati, sakalasarīraṃ khobhentaṃ maddantaṃ pharamānaṃ tattaphālaṃ pavesentaṃ viya vilīnatambalohaṃ āsiñcantaṃ viya ca ‘‘aho dukkhaṃ, aho dukkha’’nti vippalāpentameva uppajjati. Iti sukhadukkhavedanānaṃ uppatti pākaṭā.
然而,不苦不乐受则难以觉知,难以说明,隐晦于黑暗之中,无法彰显。它是在乐与苦灭除之时,依对治合意与不合意的作用方式,呈现为中舍的状态。唯有依循道理而握持者,它才变得清晰。如同什么?好比在前后尘垢密布的地方,鹿依其所惯行的路径,在平坦石头上留下的蹄迹;同样地,通过对可意与不可意所缘的乐与苦经验,也能以经验中舍所缘的方式觉知它。对中舍所缘的把握,正如在平坦石头上行走一般,因为此时没有对可意与不可意所缘的取著。而那里那种经验,就是不苦不乐受。显示巴利原文
Adukkhamasukhā pana dubbijānā duddīpanā andhakārā avibhūtā. Sā sukhadukkhānaṃ apagame sātāsātapaṭipakkhavasena majjhattākārabhūtā nayato gaṇhantasseva pākaṭā hoti. Yathā kiṃ? Yathā pubbāparaṃ sapaṃsuke padese upacaritamaggavasena piṭṭhipāsāṇe migena gatamaggo, evaṃ iṭṭhāniṭṭhārammaṇesu sukhadukkhānubhavanenapi majjhattārammaṇānubhavanabhāvena viññāyati. Majjhattārammaṇaggahaṇaṃ piṭṭhipāsāṇagamanaṃ viya iṭṭhāniṭṭhārammaṇaggahaṇābhāvato . Yañca tatrānubhavanaṃ, sā adukkhamasukhāti.
如是,在此处依乐、苦、不苦不乐的性质立为三受,但于余处,也有依乐与苦的性质立为二受。如世尊所说:“阿难,我也说过二受,即方便说的乐受与苦受。”(《中部》2.89)在另一些地方,三种受又各自依乐、苦、不苦不乐的性质分别而说:“乐受是住立时乐、变坏时苦;苦受是住立时苦、变坏时乐;不苦不乐受是智相应时为乐、无智相应时为苦。”(《中部》1.465)在有些地方,一切受悉皆依苦的性质而说。正如世尊所说的:“凡所有被感受到的,这一切我说为苦。”(《相应部》4.259)显示巴利原文
Evamettha sukhadukkhaadukkhamasukhabhāvena tidhā vuttāpi katthaci sukhadukkhabhāvena dvidhā vuttā. Yathāha – ‘‘dvepi mayā, ānanda, vedanā vuttā, pariyāyena sukhā vedanā, dukkhā vedanā’’ti (ma. ni. 2.89). Katthaci tissopi visuṃ visuṃ sukhadukkhaadukkhamasukhabhāvena ‘‘sukhā vedanā ṭhitisukhā vipariṇāmadukkhā, dukkhā vedanā ṭhitidukkhā vipariṇāmasukhā, adukkhamasukhā vedanā ñāṇasukhā aññāṇadukkhā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.465). Katthaci sabbāpi dukkhabhāvena. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘yaṃ kiñci vedayitaṃ, sabbaṃ taṃ dukkhasminti vadāmī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.259).
于此,可能会有这样的疑问:既然诸如此处的教法,以及在其余同类的经典与阿毗达摩中,都未如此宣说而只立三受,为何却又说“凡所有被感受到的,这一切我说为苦”,以及“阿难,我也说过二受”呢?这是别有意趣而说,因此属于方便教说。世尊确实这样说过:显示巴利原文
Tattha siyā – yadi tisso vedanā yathā idha vuttā, aññesu ca edisesu suttesu abhidhamme ca evaṃ avatvā kasmā evaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘yaṃ kiñci vedayitaṃ, sabbaṃ taṃ dukkhasminti vadāmī’’ti, ‘‘dvepi mayā, ānanda, vedanā vuttā’’ti ca? Sandhāyabhāsitametaṃ, tasmā sā pariyāyadesanā. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā –
阿难,我是针对诸行无常、针对诸行变易而说:‘凡所感受的一切,皆为苦。’”(《相应部》4.259)显示巴利原文
‘‘Saṅkhārāniccataṃ, ānanda, mayā sandhāya bhāsitaṃ saṅkhāravipariṇāmataṃ, ‘yaṃ kiñci vedayitaṃ, sabbaṃ taṃ dukkhasmi’’’nti (saṃ. ni. 4.259).
阿难,我也曾以方便说二受。”(《相应部》4.259)显示巴利原文
‘‘Dvepi mayā, ānanda, vedanā vuttā pariyāyenā’’ti ca (saṃ. ni. 4.259).
在此处,若就了义而言,乐受与不苦不乐受这两种受并非苦。然而,世尊为了随顺所化众生的心意,令其对此不生爱著,而以方便说将其称为苦。因此那样的教说属于方便说。但此三种受的教说,是依真实本性而说,故属了义说。这是诸师一致的说法。显示巴利原文
Ettha hi sukhā adukkhamasukhāti imāsaṃ dvinnaṃ vedanānaṃ nippariyāyena dukkhabhāvo natthi, veneyyajjhāsayena pana tattha nicchandadassanatthaṃ pariyāyena dukkhabhāvo vuttoti sā tādisī pariyāyadesanā. Ayaṃ pana vedanattayadesanā sabhāvakathāti katvā nippariyāyadesanāti ayamettha ācariyānaṃ samānakathā.
然而,有诡辩者说:“因为提到了两种苦性,所以关于三种受的教导也只是方便说。”对此,应这样回答他:“切莫如此认为!”因为,世尊是依内心意趣而说一切受为苦的,即:“阿难,我针对诸行的无常性、针对诸行的变异性而说:凡所感受者,一切皆苦。”如果三种受的教导在此也是方便说,那么世尊就应当说“我针对此而说三种受”,但事实上并未这样说过。显示巴利原文
Vitaṇḍavādī panāha ‘‘dukkhatādvayavacanato pariyāyadesanāva vedanattayadesanā’’ti. So ‘‘mā heva’’ntissa vacanīyo, yasmā bhagavatā sabbāsaṃ vedanānaṃ dukkhabhāvo adhippāyavasena vutto ‘‘saṅkhārāniccataṃ, ānanda, mayā sandhāya bhāsitaṃ saṅkhāravipariṇāmataṃ ‘yaṃ kiñci vedayitaṃ, sabbaṃ taṃ dukkhasmi’’’nti. Yadi panettha vedanattayadesanā pariyāyadesanā siyā, ‘‘idaṃ mayā sandhāya bhāsitaṃ tisso vedanā’’ti vattabbaṃ siyā, na panetaṃ vuttaṃ.
再者,应这样问他:“朋友,教导三种受的意趣是什么?”如果他回答:“微细的苦受说为乐,剧烈的苦受说为苦,中等的说为不苦不乐,这是随所化众生之心而说的。因为对这些众生而言,在这些受中,所谓的乐受等并非真正的增益。”对此,应再反问:“朋友,那么苦受以什么为自性,而能说一切受都是苦呢?如果一种受生起时,众生唯愿脱离它,这可以视为苦受的自性。然而,一种受生起时,众生唯愿不脱离它;另一种受生起时,众生对二者都无所愿求——这样的受又如何成为苦受呢?或者,如果说凡损害自己所依处的受就是苦,那么凡利益自己所依处的受又怎么会是苦呢?再者,如果说圣者们以苦来观照的,即是苦受的自性,那么圣者们是以行苦性来观照受的,而行苦性是恒常存在的。既然如此,那些受又怎会有微细、猛烈、中等的苦性差别呢?而且,如果仅由行苦性诸受便成为苦,那么‘诸比丘,有这三种苦性:苦苦性、变坏苦性、行苦性’(《长部》3.305)这样对苦性的分别解说,便成了毫无意义。如果那样,也就……”显示巴利原文
Apicāyameva vattabbo ‘‘ko, panāvuso, vedanattayadesanāya adhippāyo’’ti? Sace vadeyya ‘‘mudukā dukkhā vedanā sukhā, adhimattā dukkhā, majjhimā adukkhamasukhāti veneyyajjhāsayena vuttā. Tāsu hi na sattānaṃ sukhādivaḍḍhī’’ti. So vattabbo – ko panāvuso dukkhavedanāya sabhāvo, yena ‘‘sabbā vedanā dukkhā’’ti vucceyyuṃ? Yadi yāya uppannāya sattā viyogameva icchanti, so dukkhavedanāya sabhāvo. Yāya ca pana uppannāya sattā aviyogameva icchanti, yāya na ubhayaṃ icchanti, sā kathaṃ dukkhavedanā siyā? Atha yā attano nissayassa upaghātakārī, sā dukkhā. Yā anuggahakārī, sā kathaṃ dukkhā siyā. Atha pana yadariyā dukkhato passanti, so dukkhavedanāya sabhāvo, saṅkhāradukkhatāya vedanaṃ ariyā dukkhato passanti, sā ca abhiṇhasabhāvāti kathaṃ tāsaṃ vedanānaṃ mudumajjhimādhimattadukkhabhāvo siyā? Yadi ca saṅkhāradukkhatāya eva vedanānaṃ dukkhabhāvo siyā, ‘‘tisso imā, bhikkhave, dukkhatāyo dukkhadukkhatā, vipariṇāmadukkhatā, saṅkhāradukkhatā’’ti (dī. ni. 3.305) ayaṃ dukkhatānaṃ vibhāgadesanā nippayojanā siyā. Tathā ca sati suttameva paṭibāhitaṃ siyā, purimesu ca tīsu rūpāvacarajjhānesu mudukā dukkhā vedanāti āpajjati sukhavedanāvacanato. Catutthajjhāne arūpajjhānesu ca majjhimā, adukkhamasukhavedanāvacanato. Evaṃ sante purimā tisso rūpāvacarasamāpattiyo catutthajjhānasamāpattiyā arūpasamāpattīhi ca santatarāti āpajjati. Kathaṃ vā santatarappaṇītatarāsu samāpattīsu dukkhavedanāya adhikabhāvo yujjati? Tasmā vedanattayadesanāya pariyāyadesanābhāvo na yuttoti.
至于经中说“于苦作乐想,是为想颠倒”(《增支部》4.49;《无碍解道》1.236),这又该如何理解呢?这是针对那些对变坏苦性和行苦性不能如实了知,而一味执著乐想,以及在苦相上执取乐相的情况而说的。即便如此,“诸比丘,乐受应当视之为苦”(《如是语》53)这句话又如何理解呢?这是为了在观照变坏时,令修行者与之相系、导向厌离而说的。因为这种观照是令离欲生起的方便,也因为乐受伴随众多之苦。确实,乐是苦的因,为无量苦法所系缚,因此智者于乐亦视之为苦。显示巴利原文
Yaṃ pana vuttaṃ ‘‘dukkhe sukhanti saññāvipallāso’’ti (a. ni. 4.49; paṭi. ma. 1.236), taṃ kathanti? Vipariṇāmadukkhatāya saṅkhāradukkhatāya ca yathābhūtānavabodhena yā ekantato sukhasaññā, yā ca dukkhanimitte sukhanimittasaññā, taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Evampi ‘‘sukhā, bhikkhave, vedanā dukkhato daṭṭhabbā’’ti (itivu. 53) idaṃ pana kathanti? Idaṃ pana vipariṇāmadassane sanniyojanatthaṃ vuttaṃ tassa tattha virāguppattiyā upāyabhāvato sukhavedanāya bahudukkhānugatabhāvato ca. Tathā hi dukkhassa hetubhāvato anekehi dukkhadhammehi anubaddhattā ca paṇḍitā sukhampi dukkhamicceva paṭipannā.
即便如此,乐受也根本不存在,因为乐因没有确定性。那些被认为是乐受之因的——如食物、衣服等,若在过度的情形下、在不适时的情形下受用,反而成为苦受的因。然而,不能说“由某个因产生乐,由同一个因就产生苦”,这不合理。因此,它们并非乐因;只是在苦消失时,无知者生起乐想,如同长久保持站立等威仪后转换为其他威仪时,以及背负重担的人放下重担得到休息时。那么,难道就“根本没有乐”吗?这种说法,正是由于未能如实了知乐因,而臆想它没有确定性。要知道,仅仅把“所缘”当作唯一的乐因,才会这样说。应当理解为:外在的所缘与内在身体的特定分位状态,这两者和合,才是乐等感受的因。而且,某种特定的内外和合状态是乐受的因,这种状态任何时候都不会成为苦受的因。如此,乐等感受的因其实是确定的。这就好比火界,对于稻谷、大麦等作物,当它达到某种特定分位时,是甘甜可口的因;同样的火界,在达到这种特定状态时,任何时候也不会成为不甜不可口的因。应如此理解。显示巴利原文
Evampi nattheva sukhā vedanā, sukhahetūnaṃ niyamābhāvato. Ye hi sukhavedanāya hetusammatā ghāsacchādanādayo, te eva adhimattaṃ akāle ca paṭiseviyamānā dukkhavedanāya hetubhāvamāpajjanti. Na ca yeneva hetunā sukhaṃ, teneva dukkhanti yuttaṃ vattuṃ. Tasmā na te sukhahetū, dukkhantarāpagame pana aviññūnaṃ sukhasaññā yathā cirataraṃ ṭhānādiiriyāpathasamaṅgī hutvā tadaññairiyāpathasamāyoge mahantañca bhāraṃ vahato bhāranikkhepe ceva vūpasame ca, tasmā nattheva sukhanti? Tayidaṃ sammadeva sukhahetuṃ apariññāya tassa niyamābhāvaparikappanaṃ. Ārammaṇamattameva hi kevalaṃ sukhahetuṃ manasikatvā evaṃ vuttaṃ, ajjhattikasarīrassa avatthāvisesaṃ samuditaṃ pana ekajjhaṃ tadubhayaṃ sukhādihetūti veditabbaṃ. Yādisañca tadubhayaṃ sukhavedanāya hetu, tādisaṃ na kadācipi dukkhavedanāya hetu hotīti vavatthitā eva sukhādihetu. Yathā nāma tejodhātu sāliyavaḍākasassādīnaṃ yādisamavatthantaraṃ patvā sātamadhurabhāvahetu hoti, na tādisameva patvā kadācipi asātaamadhurabhāvahetu hoti, evaṃsampadamidaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
有时,在苦消失之后会生起乐受。于此,这是在“乐”本身上生起乐想,并非仅仅在苦消失这一点上。例如,一个因长途跋涉而疲累困乏的人,在得到按摩或变换威仪时;否则,若是在其他时候疲劳消失,也应生起类似的乐想,但事实并非如此。如果仅仅把苦的消失就认定为乐,便无法觉知受的差别了。这一点必须如此接受:因为众生总是以极大的努力去追求那些最胜妙的所缘,而对于所生起的渴爱,不可能用任何随手得来的资具便得满足。这正是“以受为缘而生爱”的道理。在爱生起的过程中,对于香、味、乐触等所缘,随着它们本身的优劣差别而生起的殊胜乐想,其实是于鼻门、舌门、身门,以及在耳门听闻如同天乐般的五支乐器声时,某种特定苦相的息灭。因此,并非在苦受本身的苦消失时才有乐想,也并非苦的消失就是乐。从圣教与正理两方面确定,三种受是存在的。世尊关于三种受的教导,是究竟了义的,不是有余未了义的,对此应当确信。如此理解是恰当的,也是善巧的。若不这样认为,那就让他继续自己的论说,随他去吧,只说:“随你的便。”显示巴利原文
Dukkhāpagameva kadāci sukhavedanantaraṃ upalabbhati. Tattha sukheyeva sukhasaññā, na dukkhāpagamamatte yathā addhānagamanaparissamakilantassa sambāhane iriyāpathaparivattane ca, aññathā kālantarepi parissamāpagame tādisī sukhasaññā siyā. Dukkhāpagamamatte pana sukhanti parikappanā vedanāvisesassa anupalabbhamānattā. Ekanteneva cetaṃ evaṃ sampaṭicchitabbaṃ, yato paṇītappaṇītāniyeva ārammaṇāni mahatā āyāsena sattā abhipatthayanti, na ca nesaṃ yena kenaci yathāladdhamattena paccayena patikāraṃ kātuṃ sakkā taṇhuppādenāti . Vedanāpaccayā hi taṇhāupādi, tathābhāve ca sugandhamadhurasukhasamphassādivatthūnaṃ itarītarabhāvena sukhavisesasaññā jāyamānā katamassa dukkhavisesassa apagamane ghānajivhākāyadvāresu, sotadvāre ca dibbasaṅgītasadisapañcaṅgikatūriyasaddāvadhāraṇe. Tasmā na dukkhavedanāyameva dukkhantarāpagame sukhasaññā, nāpi kevale dukkhāpagamamatteti āgamato yuttitopi vavatthitā tisso vedanāti bhagavato vedanattayadesanā nītatthāyeva, na neyyatthāti saññāpetabbaṃ. Evañcetaṃ upeti, iccetaṃ kusalaṃ, no ce, kammaṃ katvā uyyojetabbo ‘‘gaccha yathāsukha’’nti.
如此,这三种受各自具有相互对立的自性与确定的特征,是世尊所教导的。而世尊如此教导,是为了令修习观禅的瑜伽行者以“受”为入门,为他们开示无色业处。业处有两种:色业处与无色业处。其中,世尊在开示色业处时,会以简略作意、广作意或四界差别等方式来宣说。在开示无色业处时,则会以触、受或心的方式来宣说。何以故?因为有的人在将注意力转向所缘时,显著地见到诸心心所法中第一个生起的“触”——它接触所缘而生起,非常显著;有的人则显著地见到体验所缘而生起的“受”;还有的人显著地见到了知所缘而生起的“识”。如此,随着各人不同的兴趣与倾向,世尊便根据他们各自察觉显著的法,以触、受等为入门,将无色业处分作了三种开示方式。显示巴利原文
Evametā aññamaññapaṭipakkhasabhāvavavatthitalakkhaṇā eva tisso vedanā bhagavatā desitā. Tañca kho vipassanākammikānaṃ yogāvacarānaṃ vedanāmukhena arūpakammaṭṭhānadassanatthaṃ. Duvidhañhi kammaṭṭhānaṃ rūpakammaṭṭhānaṃ, arūpakammaṭṭhānanti. Tattha bhagavā rūpakammaṭṭhānaṃ kathento saṅkhepamanasikāravasena vā vitthāramanasikāravasena vā catudhātuvavatthānādivasena vā katheti. Arūpakammaṭṭhānaṃ pana kathento phassavasena vā vedanāvasena vā cittavasena vā katheti. Ekaccassa hi āpāthagate ārammaṇe āvajjato tattha cittacetasikānaṃ paṭhamābhinipāto phasso taṃ ārammaṇaṃ phusanto uppajjamāno pākaṭo hoti, ekaccassa taṃ ārammaṇaṃ anubhavantī uppajjamānā vedanā pākaṭā hoti, ekaccassa taṃ ārammaṇaṃ vijānantaṃ uppajjamānaṃ viññāṇaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti. Iti tesaṃ tesaṃ puggalānaṃ ajjhāsayena yathāpākaṭaṃ phassādimukhena tidhā arūpakammaṭṭhānaṃ katheti.
其中,若有人对‘触’格外明显,他便这样把握:‘并非只有触生起,与它一起,体验同一所缘的受也生起,认知的想也生起,意愿的思也生起,了别的识也生起。’他便如此把握了以触为首的五个法。若有人对‘受’格外明显,他也这样把握:‘并非只有受生起,与它一起,接触所缘的触也生起,认知的想、意愿的思、了别的识也都生起。’他便同样把握了以触为首的五个法。若有人对‘识’格外明显,他也是如此把握:‘并非只有识生起,与它一起,接触同一所缘的触也生起,体验的受、认知的想、意愿的思也都生起。’他同样把握了以触为首的五个法。显示巴利原文
Tattha yassa phasso pākaṭo hoti, sopi ‘‘na kevalaṃ phassova uppajjati, tena saddhiṃ tadeva ārammaṇaṃ anubhavamānā vedanāpi uppajjati, sañjānamānā saññāpi, cetayamānā cetanāpi, vijānamānaṃ viññāṇampi uppajjatī’’ti phassapañcamakeyeva pariggaṇhāti. Yassa vedanā pākaṭā hoti, sopi ‘‘na kevalaṃ vedanāva uppajjati, tāya saddhiṃ phusamāno phassopi uppajjati, sañjānamānā saññāpi, cetayamānā cetanāpi , vijānamānaṃ viññāṇampi uppajjatī’’ti phassapañcamakeyeva pariggaṇhāti. Yassa viññāṇaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti, sopi ‘‘na kevalaṃ viññāṇameva uppajjati, tena saddhiṃ tadevārammaṇaṃ phusamāno phassopi uppajjati, anubhavamānā vedanāpi, sañjānamānā saññāpi, cetayamānā cetanāpi uppajjatī’’ti phassapañcamakeyeva pariggaṇhāti.
接着,他观察‘这些以触为第五的法依止于什么’,从而了知‘依止于依处’。此处的依处,就是业生身。关于这一点,经中有言:‘我的这个识,正是依于此、系着于此。’(《长部》1.235;《中部》2.252)。从究竟义上说,此依处即是四大种与所造色。如此,在这里,依处是色,以触为第五的法是名。于是他只见到名色。在这里,色即是色蕴,名即是四种无色蕴,正合为五蕴。因为,离开名色便无五蕴,离开五蕴亦无名色。他进一步探究‘此五蕴以何为因’,从而了知‘以无明等为因’。此后,他了知‘这仅仅是缘与缘所生之法,并无另外的有情或补特伽罗存在,纯粹只是一堆行的聚合’。于是,他以这种有因有缘的名色为基础,将三相运用上去,按观修的次第不断思惟:‘这是无常的、是苦的、是无我的’。他心中期盼着‘就在今天’能够通达。在那样的时刻,他获得适宜的环境、适宜的人、适宜的食物、适宜听法等条件,便以结跏趺坐端身正坐,将观修推向顶峰,最终安住于阿拉汉果。显示巴利原文
So ‘‘ime phassapañcamakā dhammā kiṃnissitā’’ti upadhārento ‘‘vatthunissitā’’ti pajānāti. Vatthu nāma karajakāyo. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘idañca pana me viññāṇaṃ etthasitaṃ etthapaṭibaddha’’nti (dī. ni. 1.235; ma. ni. 2.252). So atthato bhūtā ceva upādārūpāni ca, evamettha vatthu rūpaṃ, phassapañcamakā nāmanti nāmarūpamattameva passati. Rūpañcettha rūpakkhandho, nāmaṃ cattāro arūpino khandhāti pañcakkhandhamattaṃ hoti. Nāmarūpavinimuttā hi pañcakkhandhā, pañcakkhandhavinimuttaṃ vā nāmarūpaṃ natthi. So ‘‘ime pañcakkhandhā kiṃhetukā’’ti upaparikkhanto ‘‘avijjādihetukā’’ti, tato ‘‘paccayo ceva paccayuppannañca idaṃ, añño satto vā puggalo vā natthi, suddhasaṅkhārapuñjamattamevā’’ti sappaccayanāmarūpavasena tilakkhaṇaṃ āropetvā vipassanāpaṭipāṭiyā ‘‘aniccaṃ dukkhamanattā’’ti sammasanto vicarati. So ‘‘ajja ajjā’’ti paṭivedhaṃ ākaṅkhamāno tathārūpe samaye utusappāyaṃ, puggalasappāyaṃ, bhojanasappāyaṃ, dhammassavanasappāyaṃ vā labhitvā ekapallaṅkena nisinnova vipassanaṃ matthakaṃ pāpetvā arahatte patiṭṭhāti. Evaṃ imesaṃ tiṇṇaṃ janānaṃ yāva arahattā kammaṭṭhānaṃ veditabbaṃ. Idha pana bhagavā vedanāvasena bujjhanakānaṃ ajjhāsayena arūpakammaṭṭhānaṃ kathento vedanāvasena kathesi. Tattha –
相、依处、生起,以及随眠;
处、转起时、根,以及二类等分。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Lakkhaṇañca adhiṭṭhānaṃ, uppatti anusayo tathā; Ṭhānaṃ pavattikālo ca, indriyañca dvidhāditā’’ti. –
应当知道,此属杂论。其中“相”已如前说。“依处”指触。依“触缘受”之说,触是受的依处。正因触作为受的依处,故以“常乳牛”为喻。其中,可感乐受的触是乐受的依处,可感苦受的触是苦受的依处,可感不苦不乐受的触是不苦不乐受的依处;此处“依处”意为近因。那么,受又是谁的近依处呢?依“受缘爱”之说,受是爱的近依处,因为那是众生所希求的状态。乐受为爱的近依处自不必说,其余二受如何是呢?答:处乐之人尚希求同等乃至更胜之乐,何况正受苦者?而不苦不乐受,由于其寂静性,亦可称为一种乐。因此,所有这三种受,都是爱的近依处。显示巴利原文
Idaṃ pakiṇṇakaṃ veditabbaṃ – tattha lakkhaṇaṃ heṭṭhā vuttameva. Adhiṭṭhānanti phasso. ‘‘Phassapaccayā vedanā’’ti hi vacanato phasso vedanāya adhiṭṭhānaṃ. Tathā hi so vedanādhiṭṭhānabhāvato niccammagāvīupamāya upamito. Tattha sukhavedanīyo phasso sukhāya vedanāya adhiṭṭhānaṃ, dukkhavedanīyo phasso dukkhāya vedanāya, adukkhamasukhavedanīyo phasso adukkhamasukhāya vedanāya adhiṭṭhānaṃ, āsannakāraṇanti attho. Vedanā kassa padaṭṭhānaṃ? ‘‘Vedanāpaccayā taṇhā’’ti vacanato taṇhāya padaṭṭhānaṃ abhipatthanīyabhāvato. Sukhā vedanā tāva taṇhāya padaṭṭhānaṃ hotu, itarā pana kathanti? Vuccate sukhasamaṅgīpi tāva taṃsadisaṃ tato vā uttaritaraṃ sukhaṃ abhipattheti, kimaṅga pana dukkhasamaṅgībhūto. Adukkhamasukhā ca santabhāvena sukhamicceva vuccatīti tissopi vedanā taṇhāya padaṭṭhānaṃ.
“生起”即生起之因。七行若成为可爱所缘,便是乐受的生起之因;他们行若成为不可爱所缘,便是苦受的生起之因;若成为中性所缘,便是不苦不乐受的生起之因。而在此,诸行可爱或不可爱,应依果报及执取业相来理解。显示巴利原文
Uppattīti uppattikāraṇaṃ. Iṭṭhārammaṇabhūtā hi sattasaṅkhārā sukhavedanāya uppattikāraṇaṃ, te eva aniṭṭhārammaṇabhūtā dukkhavedanāya, majjhattārammaṇabhūtā adukkhamasukhāya. Vipākato tadākāraggahaṇato cettha iṭṭhāniṭṭhatā veditabbā.
「随眠」:于此三受中,对乐受,贪随眠随增;对苦受,嗔随眠随增;对不苦不乐受,无明随眠随增。此义已说——显示巴利原文
Anusayoti imāsu tīsu vedanāsu sukhāya vedanāya rāgānusayo anuseti, dukkhāya vedanāya paṭighānusayo, adukkhamasukhāya vedanāya avijjānusayo anuseti. Vuttañhetaṃ –
“贤友毗舍佉,对乐受,贪随眠随增……”等(《中部》1.465)。显示巴利原文
‘‘Sukhāya kho, āvuso visākha, vedanāya rāgānusayo anusetī’’tiādi (ma. ni. 1.465).
此处,见随眠与慢随眠应归入贪分。因为嬉乐于乐受者,他们持邪见者即执“此是常”等而执取有身;而慢性者则起慢心,谓“我是胜”等。至于疑随眠,则应归入无明分。诚如《缘起分别》中(《分别论》288-289)所说:“依受为缘而有疑。”再者,所谓随眠,以于各各相续中未断之状态而有强力。是故,“对乐受,贪随眠随增”之意为:因未以道断除故,当得遇合宜之缘时,彼贪欲即如眠伏于乐受中而生起。此义亦适用于其余诸随眠。显示巴利原文
Diṭṭhimānānusayā cettha rāgapakkhiyā kātabbā. Sukhābhinandanena hi diṭṭhigatikā ‘‘sassata’’ntiādinā sakkāye abhinivisanti, mānajātikā ca mānaṃ jappenti ‘‘seyyohamasmī’’tiādinā. Vicikicchānusayo pana avijjāpakkhiko kātabbo. Tathā hi vuttaṃ paṭiccasamuppādavibhaṅge (vibha. 288-289) ‘‘vedanāpaccayā vicikicchā’’ti. Anusayānañca tattha tattha santāne appahīnabhāvena thāmagamanaṃ. Tasmā ‘‘sukhāya vedanāya rāgānusayo anusetī’’ti maggena appahīnattā anurūpakāraṇalābhe uppajjanāraho rāgo, tattha sayito viya hotīti attho. Esa nayo sesesupi.
「处」:身与意是受生起之处。这正如经中所说:“其时,有由身触所生的身乐受,是适意、愉悦的感受。”(《法集论》449)“其时,有由意触所生之意乐受,是适意、愉悦的感受。”(《法集论》471)显示巴利原文
Ṭhānanti kāyo cittañca vedanāya ṭhānaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘yaṃ tasmiṃ samaye kāyikaṃ sukhaṃ kāyasamphassajaṃ sātaṃ sukhaṃ vedayitaṃ (dha. sa. 449). Yaṃ tasmiṃ samaye cetasikaṃ sukhaṃ cetosamphassajaṃ sātaṃ sukhaṃ vedayita’’nti (dha. sa. 471) ca.
「转起时」:即转起的刹那,也指转起的作用。正是基于转起刹那,乐受与苦受的乐性与苦性才得以确立。正如所说:显示巴利原文
Pavattikāloti pavattikkhaṇo, pavattanākalanañca. Pavattikkhaṇena hi sukhadukkhavedanānaṃ sukhadukkhabhāvo vavatthito. Yathāha –
“毗舍佉贤友,乐受安住时乐,变易时苦;毗舍佉贤友,苦受安住时苦,变易时乐。”(《中部》1.465)显示巴利原文
‘‘Sukhā kho, āvuso visākha, vedanā ṭhitisukhā vipariṇāmadukkhā, dukkhā kho, āvuso visākha, vedanā ṭhitidukkhā vipariṇāmasukhā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.465).
意思是:有乐受即乐,无乐受即苦;有苦受即苦,无苦受即乐。对于不苦不乐受,其生起时的扰动或不扰动、了知或不了知,便确定了它的苦乐性。这也已说过:显示巴利原文
Sukhāya vedanāya atthibhāvo sukhaṃ, natthibhāvo dukkhaṃ. Dukkhāya vedanāya atthibhāvo dukkhaṃ, natthibhāvo sukhanti attho. Adukkhamasukhāya vedanāya pavattanākalanaṃ pavattiyā ākalanaṃ anākalanañca jānanaṃ ajānanañca sukhadukkhabhāvavavatthānaṃ. Vuttampi cetaṃ –
“毗舍佉贤友,不苦不乐受,以知为乐,以不知为苦。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Adukkhamasukhā kho, āvuso visākha, vedanā ñāṇasukhā aññāṇadukkhā’’ti.
“根”:这些以乐等为首的三受,依增上义而说为根,并分为五种:乐根、苦根、喜根、忧根、舍根。身体上的适悦称为乐根,不适悦称为苦根;心理上的适悦称为喜根,不适悦称为忧根;非此二者、既不适悦也非不适悦的,称为舍根。然而,既然身心的苦、乐受被分别说为“乐根、喜根”和“苦根、忧根”,为何对不苦不乐受不作同样的分别?因为没有差别。乐受与苦受各自具有饶益与逼迫的特性,对身体和心以不同方式分别起饶益与逼迫作用,而不苦不乐受并非如此,故因无差别而不作分别。显示巴利原文
Indriyanti etā hi sukhādayo tisso vedanā sukhindriyaṃ, dukkhindriyaṃ, somanassindriyaṃ, domanassindriyaṃ, upekkhindriyanti adhipateyyaṭṭhena indriyato pañcadhā vibhattā. Kāyikañhi sātaṃ sukhindriyanti vuttaṃ, asātaṃ dukkhindriyanti. Mānasaṃ pana sātaṃ somanassindriyanti vuttaṃ, asātaṃ domanassindriyanti. Duvidhampi neva sātaṃ nāsātaṃ upekkhindriyanti. Kiṃ panettha kāraṇaṃ – yathā kāyikacetasikā sukhadukkhavedanā ‘‘sukhindriyaṃ somanassindriyaṃ, dukkhindriyaṃ domanassindriya’’nti vibhajitvā vuttā, na evaṃ adukkhamasukhāti? Bhedābhāvato. Yatheva hi anuggahasabhāvā bādhakasabhāvā ca sukhadukkhavedanā aññathā kāyassa anuggahaṃ bādhakañca karonti, cittassa ca aññathā, na evaṃ adukkhamasukhā, tasmā bhedābhāvato vibhajitvā na vuttā.
「二种等」:一切受,就感受的意义而言虽只是一种,但依所依的差别而有二种——身受与心受;依乐、苦、不苦不乐而有三种;依四生而有四种;依根与投生趣而有五种;依门与所缘而有六种;依七识界相应而有七种;以八世间法为缘而有八种;依乐受等各自过去等分别而有九种;这些又依内与外的差别而有十八种。同样,在色等六所缘上,每一所缘都能生起乐、苦、不苦不乐三种受,如此也有十八种。或者,依十八意近行而有十八种。正如经中所说:显示巴利原文
Dvidhāditāti sabbāpi hi vedanā vedayitaṭṭhena ekavidhāpi nissayabhedena duvidhā – kāyikā cetasikāti, sukhā, dukkhā, adukkhamasukhāti tividhā, catuyonivasena catubbidhā, indriyavasena, gativasena ca pañcavidhā, dvāravasena ca ārammaṇavasena ca chabbidhā, sattaviññāṇadhātuyogena sattavidhā, aṭṭhalokadhammapaccayatāya aṭṭhavidhā, sukhādīnaṃ paccekaṃ atītādivibhāgena navavidhā, tā eva ajjhattabahiddhābhedena aṭṭhārasavidhā, tathā rūpādīsu chasu ārammaṇesu ekekasmiṃ sukhādivasena tisso tisso katvā. Rūpārammaṇasmiñhi sukhāpi uppajjati, dukkhāpi, adukkhamasukhāpi, evaṃ itaresupi. Atha vā aṭṭhārasamanopavicāravasena aṭṭhārasa. Vuttañhi –
以眼见色后,他于能引生喜悦的色近行,于能引生忧的色近行,于能引生舍的色近行;以耳闻声后……乃至……以意识知法后,他于能引生喜悦的法近行,于能引生忧的法近行,于能引生舍的法近行。(增支部3.62)显示巴利原文
‘‘Cakkhunā rūpaṃ disvā somanassaṭṭhāniyaṃ rūpaṃ upavicarati, domanassaṭṭhāniyaṃ, upekkhāṭṭhāniyaṃ rūpaṃ upavicarati, sotena saddaṃ…pe… manasā dhammaṃ viññāya somanassaṭṭhāniyaṃ dhammaṃ upavicarati, domanassaṭṭhāniyaṃ, upekkhāṭṭhāniyaṃ dhammaṃ upavicaratī’’ti (a. ni. 3.62).
如此便有十八种。此外,有六种依在家的喜、六种依在家的忧、六种依在家的舍,以及六种依出离的喜、六种依出离的忧、六种依出离的舍——这样合为三十六种。过去有三十六种,未来有三十六种,现在有三十六种,总计一百零八种。这里应如此了知「二种等」的含义。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ aṭṭhārasavidhā honti. Tathā cha gehassitāni somanassāni, cha gehassitāni domanassāni, cha gehassitā upekkhā, tathā nekkhammassitā somanassādayoti evaṃ chattiṃsavidhā . Atīte chattiṃsa, anāgate chattiṃsa, paccuppanne chattiṃsāti aṭṭhuttarasatampi bhavanti. Evamettha dvidhāditā veditabbāti.
于诸偈中:「定者」:指安住于近行定或安止定的人,以此显示其修习止。「正知者」:指具备义正知等四种正知的人,以此显示其修习观。「具念者」:指安住于正念的人,以此显示依止观之道,诸法达到修习圆满,并具足这些成就。而「了知受」:即他如是了知「这些是受,这些是种种受」,依受的自性而分别了知;在初始阶段,他以「无常、苦、变易法」等无常等相,依三种遍知而遍知,增长观之后,依圣道的遍知通达而了知。又「受的集起」:即集谛。「这些在哪里灭」:指这些受灭去之处,即是灭谛。「导向灭尽」:指他了知导向受灭尽的圣道,这是关联。而「由于受的灭尽」:如此通达四谛,以圣道使受不再生起而灭尽。「无饥、般涅槃」:即无有渴爱、已断尽渴爱,依烦恼般涅槃与蕴般涅槃而成为般涅槃者。显示巴利原文
Gāthāsu samāhitoti upacārappanābhedena samādhinā samāhito. Tena samathabhāvanānuyogaṃ dasseti. Sampajānoti sātthakasampajaññādinā catubbidhena sampajaññena sampajāno. Tena vipassanānuyogaṃ dasseti. Satoti satokārī. Tena samathavipassanānayena dhammā bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchanti. Tena samannāgatattaṃ dasseti. Vedanā ca pajānātīti ‘‘imā vedanā, ettakā vedanā’’ti sabhāvato vibhāgato ‘‘aniccā dukkhā vipariṇāmadhammā’’ti aniccādilakkhaṇato ca pubbabhāge tīhi pariññāhi parijānanto vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā ariyamaggena pariññāpaṭivedhena pajānāti. Vedanānañca sambhavanti samudayasaccaṃ. Yattha cetā nirujjhantīti ettāvatā vedanā yattha nirujjhanti, taṃ nirodhasaccaṃ. Khayagāminanti vedanānaṃ khayagāminaṃ ariyamaggañca pajānātīti sambandho. Vedanānaṃkhayāti evaṃ cattāri saccāni paṭivijjhantena ariyamaggena vedanānaṃ anuppādanirodhā. Nicchāto parinibbutoti nittaṇho, pahīnataṇho, kilesaparinibbānena, khandhaparinibbānena ca parinibbuto hoti.
4.《第二感受经》的注释显示巴利原文
4. Dutiyavedanāsuttavaṇṇanā
53 第五十三段中,「应观为苦」:乐受应从变坏苦的角度,以智慧之眼观见为苦。「应观为箭」:苦受以难拔出、刺入内部、逼恼的意义,应当观见为箭。「应观为无常」:由于已生复灭、有生有灭、暂时性、与常相对等缘故,不苦不乐受应当观见为无常。然而,此处虽一切受皆应观为无常,但观察无常能特别有力地成为引发离贪之因,也能成为观察苦的因,导师为了显明此理,才说:‘诸比丘,乐受应观为苦,苦受应观为箭。’另一种解释则是:于凡夫一向执取乐受之处,为令生起厌离,故作如是说。由此,显示了乐受依行苦而有的苦性。当说‘凡是无常的,就是苦’时,依变坏苦而说‘诸比丘,乐受应观为苦’;心中正思惟‘乐尚且如此,苦又当如何?’的人,则依苦苦而说‘苦受应观为箭’;而不苦不乐受正是依行苦而为苦,为显明此义,便说:‘不苦不乐受应观为无常’。显示巴利原文
53. Catutthe dukkhato daṭṭhabbāti sukhavedanā vipariṇāmadukkhavasena dukkhāti ñāṇacakkhunā passitabbā. Sallato daṭṭhabbāti dunnīharaṇaṭṭhena antotudanaṭṭhena pīḷanaṭṭhena dukkhadukkhabhāvena dukkhavedanā sallanti passitabbā. Aniccatoti hutvā abhāvato udayabbayavantato tāvakālikato niccapaṭipakkhato ca adukkhamasukhā vedanā aniccāti passitabbā. Kāmañcettha sabbāpi vedanā aniccato passitabbā, aniccadassanato pana sātisayaṃ virāganimittaṃ dukkhadassananti imamatthaṃ dassento satthā ‘‘sukhā, bhikkhave, vedanā dukkhato daṭṭhabbā, dukkhā vedanā sallato daṭṭhabbā’’ti āha. Atha vā yattha puthujjanā sukhābhinivesino, tattha nibbedajananatthaṃ tathā vuttaṃ. Tenassā saṅkhāradukkhatāya dukkhabhāvo dassito. Yadaniccaṃ, taṃ dukkhanti vipariṇāmadukkhatāya ‘‘sukhā, bhikkhave, vedanā dukkhato daṭṭhabbā’’ti vatvā ‘‘sukhāpi tāva edisī, dukkhā nu kho kīdisī’’ti cintentānaṃ dukkhadukkhatāya ‘‘dukkhā vedanā sallato daṭṭhabbā’’ti āha, itarā pana saṅkhāradukkhatāya eva dukkhāti dassento ‘‘adukkhamasukhā vedanā aniccato daṭṭhabbā’’ti avoca.
此处,「乐受应观为苦」一句,显示了断除贪的方便,因为于乐受中,贪随眠便随之随眠。「苦受应观为箭」一句,显示了断除嗔的方便,因为于苦受中,嗔恚随眠便随之随眠。「不苦不乐受应观为无常」一句,显示了断除痴的方便,因为于不苦不乐受中,无明随眠便随之随眠。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca ‘‘sukhā vedanā dukkhato daṭṭhabbā’’ti etena rāgassa samugghātanūpāyo dassito. Sukhavedanāya hi rāgānusayo anuseti. ‘‘Dukkhā vedanā sallato daṭṭhabbā’’ti etena dosassa samugghātanūpāyo dassito. Dukkhavedanāya hi paṭighānusayo anuseti. ‘‘Adukkhamasukhā vedanā aniccato daṭṭhabbā’’ti etena mohassa samugghātanūpāyo dassito. Adukkhamasukhavedanāya hi avijjānusayo anuseti.
同样,第一句显示了断除渴爱这一染污,因为乐受是贪著之因;第二句显示了断除恶行这一染污,因为对真实之苦未能遍知的人,为了逃避苦而造作恶行;第三句显示了断除邪见这一染污,因为观无常者没有见的染污,而见的染污是以无明为因的,不苦不乐受也以无明为因。或者,第一句是变坏苦的遍知,第二句是苦苦的遍知,第三句是行苦的遍知。或者,第一句是对可爱所缘的遍知,第二句是对不可爱所缘的遍知,第三句是对中性所缘的遍知——因为在那些已离染的相应法中,其所缘的种种对象也随之离染。又或者可以这样理解:由第一句举示断除贪的说明,便彰显了由苦随观而生的无愿解脱;由第二句举示断除嗔的说明,便彰显了由无常随观而生的无相解脱;由第三句举示断除痴的说明,便彰显了由无我随观而生的空解脱。显示巴利原文
Tathā paṭhamena taṇhāsaṃkilesassa pahānaṃ dassitaṃ tassa sukhassādahetukattā, dutiyena duccaritasaṃkilesassa pahānaṃ. Yathābhūtañhi dukkhaṃ aparijānantā tassa pariharaṇatthaṃ duccaritaṃ caranti. Tatiyena diṭṭhisaṃkilesassa pahānaṃ aniccato passantassa diṭṭhisaṃkilesābhāvato avijjānimittattā diṭṭhisaṃkilesassa, avijjānimittañca adukkhamasukhā vedanā. Paṭhamena vā vipariṇāmadukkhapariññā, dutiyena dukkhadukkhapariññā, tatiyena saṅkhāradukkhapariññā. Paṭhamena vā iṭṭhārammaṇapariññā, dutiyena aniṭṭhārammaṇapariññā, tatiyena majjhattārammaṇapariññā. Virattesu hi tadārammaṇadhammesu ārammaṇānipi virattāneva hontīti. Paṭhamena vā rāgappahānaparikittanena dukkhānupassanāya appaṇihitavimokkho dīpito hoti, dutiyena dosappahānaparikittanena aniccānupassanāya animittavimokkho, tatiyena mohappahānaparikittanena anattānupassanāya suññatavimokkho dīpito hotīti veditabbaṃ.
Yato(从何时/由于):指“当……时”或“由于……”。Ariya(圣):因远离烦恼而安住于清净者。Sammaddaso(正见者):对一切感受,或对四谛,无颠倒而见者。Acchecchi taṇhaṃ(他断除渴爱):意指以最上道断除以受为根本的渴爱,无余断尽。Vivattayi saṃyojanaṃ(他消除结缚):意即翻转十种结缚,令其彻底断根。Sammā(正当地):指由因、由缘。Mānābhisamayā(由于慢的现观):指对慢的见现观或断现观。因为阿拉汉道在作用层面上能“看见”慢,这就是慢的见现观;而被此道所见到的慢,当时便立刻断除,犹如被毒蛇所见的众生性命一般,这便是慢的断现观。Antamakāsi dukkhassa(他作苦之边际):意思是,如此经由阿拉汉道见慢、断慢之后,对于这一切轮回之苦的顶点——即所谓的边际,他作出了分界、作出了终结;也就是说,只余下这最后身所依的一点点苦。显示巴利原文
Yatoti yadā, yasmā vā. Ariyoti kilesehi ārakā ṭhito parisuddho. Sammaddasoti sabbāsaṃ vedanānaṃ catunnampi vā saccānaṃ aviparītadassāvī. Acchecchi taṇhanti vedanāmūlakaṃ taṇhaṃ aggamaggena chindi, anavasesato samucchindi. Vivattayi saṃyojananti dasavidhaṃ saṃyojanaṃ parivattayi, nimmūlamakāsi. Sammāti hetunā kāraṇena. Mānābhisamayāti mānassa dassanābhisamayā, pahānābhisamayā vā. Arahattamaggo hi kiccavasena mānaṃ passati, ayamassa dassanābhisamayo. Tena diṭṭho pana so tāvadeva pahīyati diṭṭhavisena diṭṭhasattānaṃ jīvitaṃ viya, ayamassa pahānābhisamayo. Antamakāsi dukkhassāti evaṃ arahattamaggena mānassa diṭṭhattā pahīnattā ca sabbasseva vaṭṭadukkhassa koṭisaṅkhātaṃ antaṃ paricchedaṃ parivaṭumaṃ akāsi, antimasamussayamattāvasesaṃ dukkhamakāsīti vuttaṃ hoti.
在这些偈颂中,yo 指那位圣弟子。Addā(他见):即“见”,意指他将乐受视为苦。因为乐受如同掺了毒的食物,在受用时给予人美味,一旦变坏便纯然是苦。Dukkhamaddakkhi sallato(他见苦受为箭):如同箭在将入身、已入身和被拔出时,都只会产生逼恼,同样地,苦受在刚刚生起时、住立时、坏灭时,也全然只是伤害,因此这位圣弟子将苦受视之如箭。Addakkhinaṃ aniccatoti(他见不苦不乐受为无常):因为不苦不乐受比起苦受和乐受,本性寂静,属于更为安静的一类,但正因为它是无常的,他便将它视作无常。显示巴利原文
Gāthāsu yoti yo ariyasāvako. Addāti addasa, sukhavedanaṃ dukkhato passīti attho. Sukhavedanā hi visamissaṃ viya bhojanaṃ paribhogakāle assādaṃ dadamānā vipariṇāmakāle dukkhāyevāti. Dukkhamaddakkhi sallatoti yathā sallaṃ sarīraṃ anupavisantampi paviṭṭhampi uddhariyamānampi pīḷameva janeti, evaṃ dukkhavedanā uppajjamānāpi ṭhitippattāpi bhijjamānāpi vibādhatiyevāti taṃ sallato vipassīti vuttaṃ. Addakkhinaṃ aniccatoti sukhadukkhato santasabhāvatāya santatarajātikampi naṃ adukkhamasukhaṃ aniccantikatāya aniccato passi.
“Sa ve sammaddaso(他确实是正见者)”:即他如此正确地看见这三种受是苦等。“Yato(由于)”:即由于。“Tattha(于彼处)”:即在那受上。“Vimuccati(得解脱)”:由断除的解脱而得解脱。这里的意思是:由于他看见了乐受等是苦等,因此在那受上,通过舍断与之相连的欲贪,以断除的方式而得解脱。因为在语句中,说了“yaṃ”这个词,就应当引出“taṃ”这个词与之配合。或者另一种解释,“Yato”的意思是以身、语、意而调御已调御者,或已精进、已努力而策励,即已致力于修行。“Abhiññāvositoti(已通智究竟者)”:即通过感受为门,修习四谛业处,由第六神通达到究竟,所作已办。“Santo(寂静者)”:由贪等烦恼的平息而成为寂静。“Yogātigo(度越轭者)”:超越了欲轭等四种轭。“Munīti(牟尼)”:因观察自利利他,故称牟尼。显示巴利原文
Sa ve sammaddasoti so evaṃ tissannaṃ vedanānaṃ sammadeva dukkhādito dassāvī. Yatoti yasmā. Tatthāti vedanāyaṃ. Vimuccatīti samucchedavimuttivasena vimuccati. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yasmā sukhādīni dukkhādito addasa, tasmā tattha vedanāya tappaṭibaddhachandarāgappahānena samucchedavasena vimuccati. Yaṃsadde hi vutte taṃsaddo āharitvā vattabbo. Atha vā yatoti kāyavācācittehi saṃyato yatatto, yatati padahatīti vā yato, āyatatīti attho. Abhiññāvositoti vedanāmukhena catusaccakammaṭṭhānaṃ bhāvetvā chaṭṭhābhiññāya pariyosito katakicco. Santoti rāgādikilesavūpasamena santo. Yogātigoti kāmayogādiṃ catubbidhampi yogaṃ atikkanto. Ubhayahitamunanato munīti.
第五品 第一寻求经注释显示巴利原文
5. Paṭhamaesanāsuttavaṇṇanā
54 第五部分,“寻求”(esanā):即寻找、遍求、探索。为说明其分类,故说“欲寻求”等。其中,“欲寻求”(kāmesanā):即对各种欲乐的寻求,或者以欲为名的寻求,就是欲寻求。这就是所说的:显示巴利原文
54. Pañcame esanāti gavesanā pariyesanā magganā. Tā vibhāgato dassetuṃ ‘‘kāmesanā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha kāmesanāti kāmānaṃ esanā, kāmasaṅkhātā vā esanā kāmesanā. Vuttañhetaṃ –
其中,什么是“欲寻求”?即对于诸欲的欲爱、欲贪、欲喜、欲爱、欲渴爱、欲迷执、欲黏着,这就称为欲寻求。(《分别论》919)显示巴利原文
‘‘Tattha katamā kāmesanā? Yo kāmesu kāmacchando, kāmarāgo, kāmanandī, kāmasneho , kāmapipāsā, kāmamucchā, kāmajjhosānaṃ, ayaṃ vuccati kāmesanā’’ti (vibha. 919).
因此,欲贪应被理解为欲的寻求。对于有的寻求,道理也是同样。正如经中所说:显示巴利原文
Tasmā kāmarāgo kāmesanāti veditabbo. Bhavesanāyapi eseva nayo. Vuttampi cetaṃ –
其中,什么是有寻求?对于种种有,若有欲、有贪、有喜、有爱、有渴爱、有痴迷、有联结,这就称为有寻求。(《分别论》919)显示巴利原文
‘‘Tattha katamā bhavesanā? Yo bhavesu bhavacchando…pe… bhavajjhosānaṃ, ayaṃ vuccati bhavesanā’’ti (vibha. 919).
因此,对于有的贪求,以及对于色界、无色界有的希求,应被理解为有寻求。对梵行的寻求,即是梵行寻求。正如所说:显示巴利原文
Tasmā bhavesanarāgo rūpārūpabhavapatthanā bhavesanāti veditabbā. Brahmacariyassa esanā brahmacariyesanā. Yathāha –
其中,什么是梵行寻求?即认为‘世间是常’,或‘世间是无常’,或‘世间有边’,或‘世间无边’,或‘命即是身’,或‘命异身异’,或‘如来死后存在’,或‘如来死后不存在’,或‘如来死后亦存在亦不存在’,或‘如来死后非存在非不存在’——凡此类见解、见丛、见林、见荒漠、见扭曲、见动摇、见结缚,以及执取、执持、固执、把持,邪道、邪路、邪性、外道之所依、颠倒执取,即称为梵行寻求。显示巴利原文
‘‘Tattha katamā brahmacariyesanā? Sassato lokoti vā, asassato lokoti vā, antavā lokoti vā, anantavā lokoti vā, taṃ jīvaṃ taṃ sarīranti vā, aññaṃ jīvaṃ aññaṃ sarīranti vā, hoti tathāgato paraṃ maraṇāti vā, na hoti tathāgato paraṃ maraṇāti vā, hoti ca na ca hoti tathāgato paraṃ maraṇāti vā, neva hoti na na hoti tathāgato paraṃ maraṇāti vā, yā evarūpā diṭṭhi diṭṭhigataṃ diṭṭhigahanaṃ diṭṭhikantāro diṭṭhivisūkāyikaṃ diṭṭhivipphanditaṃ diṭṭhisaññojanaṃ gāho patiṭṭhāho abhiniveso parāmāso kummaggo micchāpatho micchattaṃ titthāyatanaṃ vipariyesaggāho, ayaṃ vuccati brahmacariyesanā’’ti (vibha. 919).
因此,应知执取邪见的梵行寻求即是见的梵行寻求。至此,已阐明贪与见即是寻求。不独贪与见是寻求,与之相应的业也是寻求。此亦曾有言说:显示巴利原文
Tasmā diṭṭhigatasammatassa brahmacariyassa esanā diṭṭhibrahmacariyesanāti veditabbāti. Ettāvatā rāgadiṭṭhiyo esanāti dassitā honti. Na kevalañca rāgadiṭṭhiyova esanā, tadekaṭṭhaṃ kammampi. Vuttampi cetaṃ –
其中,什么是欲的寻求?欲贪及与之相应的不善身业、不善语业、不善意业,即称为欲的寻求。其中,什么是有之寻求?有贪及与之相应的不善身业、不善语业、不善意业,即称为有之寻求。其中,什么是梵行寻求?执取边见的邪见及与之相应的不善身业、不善语业、不善意业,即称为梵行寻求。显示巴利原文
‘‘Tattha katamā kāmesanā? Kāmarāgo tadekaṭṭhaṃ akusalaṃ kāyakammaṃ vacīkammaṃ manokammaṃ, ayaṃ vuccati kāmesanā. Tattha katamā bhavesanā? Bhavarāgo tadekaṭṭhaṃ akusalaṃ kāyakammaṃ vacīkammaṃ manokammaṃ, ayaṃ vuccati bhavesanā. Tattha katamā brahmacariyesanā? Antaggāhikā diṭṭhi tadekaṭṭhaṃ akusalaṃ kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, manokammaṃ, ayaṃ vuccati brahmacariyesanā’’ti (vibha. 919) –
应当这样了知这三种寻求。显示巴利原文
Evametā tisso esanā veditabbā.
在偈颂中,“这些在这里生起”(sambhavo)的意思为:作为这些寻求生起之因的无明等和渴爱,即是“生起”,亦即“集”的意思。“它们在那里熄灭”的意思:应知梵行的寻求由初道灭尽,欲的寻求由不还道灭尽,有的寻求由阿拉汉道灭尽。其余的解释如前所述。显示巴利原文
Gāthāsu sambhavanti ettha esanānaṃ uppattihetubhūtā avijjādayo taṇhā cāti sambhavo, samudayoti attho. Yatthacetā nirujjhantīti brahmacariyesanā paṭhamamaggena nirujjhati, kāmesanā anāgāmimaggena, bhavesanā arahattamaggena nirujjhatīti veditabbaṃ. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
6. 第二寻求经注释显示巴利原文
6. Dutiyaesanāsuttavaṇṇanā
55 在第六经中,“与梵行的寻求一起”(brahmacariyesanā sahā)意为与梵行的寻求一道。此处是通过省略格尾来说明,或者说是将具格的意义用作主格。也就是说:与梵行的寻求一起,加上欲的寻求、有的寻求,共为这三种寻求。为了从本身的特质上显示梵行的寻求,经中说:“如此真实执,诸见依处为积聚。”它的意思是:“唯此是真实”(iti evaṃ saccaṃ)——这样的执取即是“如此真实执”。这显示了见生起的方式。由于诸见本身是一切不幸之因,故称“见的依处”。这也有说道:“比丘们,我说邪见是最极端的过恶。”而当这些见辗转增长时,由于它们与贪等烦恼的积聚相应,便也称作“积聚”。因此,那些执著“唯有这个是真实的,其余皆虚妄”而陷入邪执、成为一切不幸之因、成为烦恼与苦积集之因的诸见,即被称为“梵行的寻求”。应知如此即从活动方式与生起方式显示了梵行的寻求。显示巴利原文
55. Chaṭṭhe brahmacariyesanā sahāti brahmacariyesanāya saddhiṃ. Vibhattilopena hi ayaṃ niddeso, karaṇatthe vā etaṃ paccattavacanaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti ‘‘brahmacariyesanāya saddhiṃ kāmesanā, bhavesanāti tisso esanā’’ti. Tāsu brahmacariyesanaṃ sarūpato dassetuṃ ‘‘itisaccaparāmāso, diṭṭhiṭṭhānā samussayā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tassattho – iti evaṃ saccanti parāmāso itisaccaparāmāso. Idameva saccaṃ, moghamaññanti diṭṭhiyā pavattiākāraṃ dasseti. Diṭṭhiyo eva sabbānatthahetubhāvato diṭṭhiṭṭhānā. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘micchādiṭṭhiparamāhaṃ, bhikkhave, vajjaṃ vadāmī’’ti (a. ni. 1.310). Tā eva ca uparūpari vaḍḍhamānā lobhādikilesasamussayena ca samussayā, ‘‘idameva saccaṃ, moghamañña’’nti micchābhinivisamānā sabbānatthahetubhūtā kilesadukkhūpacayahetubhūtā ca diṭṭhiyo brahmacariyesanāti vuttaṃ hoti. Etena pavattiākārato nibbattito ca brahmacariyesanā dassitāti veditabbā.
「于一切贪离染者」:指已对一切欲贪与有贪离染之人。正因如此,他于灭尽渴爱之涅槃中得解脱,故为渴爱灭尽解脱的阿拉汉。「诸寻求已彻底舍弃」:谓欲的寻求与有的寻求,已彻底舍断、断除。「诸见依处已被拔除」:谓称为梵行寻求的诸见依处,亦已由最初之道彻底根除。「由于诸寻求的灭尽」:指此三种寻求的灭尽——即不再生起的灭尽——因烦恼已破除故。而所谓「比丘」,乃于一切处皆无欲求者;称为「无期望者」,因与见相应的疑、犹豫之箭已断除,故亦名「无疑惑者」。显示巴利原文
Sabbarāgavirattassāti sabbehi kāmarāgabhavarāgehi virattassa. Tato eva taṇhakkhayasaṅkhāte nibbāne vimuttattā taṇhakkhayavimuttino arahato. Esanā paṭinissaṭṭhāti kāmesanā, bhavesanā ca sabbaso nissaṭṭhā pahīnā. Diṭṭhiṭṭhānā samūhatāti brahmacariyesanāsaṅkhātā diṭṭhiṭṭhānā ca paṭhamamaggeneva samugghātitā. Esanānaṃ khayāti evametāsaṃ tissannaṃ esanānaṃ khayā anuppādanirodhā bhinnakilesattā. Bhikkhūti ca sabbaso āsābhā vā. Nirāsoti ca diṭṭhekaṭṭhassa vicikicchākathaṃkathāsallassa pahīnattā akathaṃkathīti ca vuccatīti.
7-8. 二漏经的解释显示巴利原文
7-8. Āsavasuttadvayavaṇṇanā
56-57 第七经中,「欲漏」:指于诸欲之漏,或称为欲的漏,故名欲漏。据义理,欲贪与对色等所缘之耽乐,即是欲漏。于色界、无色界有中的欲贪、对禅那的渴爱、与常见相应的贪、以及对有的期盼,这些是有漏。无明本身即是无明漏。显示巴利原文
56-57. Sattame kāmāsavoti kāmesu āsavo, kāmasaṅkhāto vā āsavo kāmāsavo , atthato pana kāmarāgo rūpādiabhirati ca kāmāsavo. Rūpārūpabhavesu chandarāgo jhānanikanti sassatadiṭṭhisahagato rāgo bhavapatthanā ca bhavāsavo. Avijjāva avijjāsavo.
而诸漏生起之因:不如理作意与无明等烦恼,即是诸漏生起之因。正如世尊所说——显示巴利原文
Āsavānañca sambhavanti ettha ayonisomanasikāro avijjādayo ca kilesā āsavānaṃ sambhavo. Vuttañhetaṃ –
比丘们,若不如理作意,未生的漏便生起,已生的漏便增长。(《中部》1.15)显示巴利原文
‘‘Ayoniso, bhikkhave, manasikaroto anuppannā ceva āsavā uppajjanti, uppannā ca āsavā pavaḍḍhantī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.15).
比丘们,无明是诸不善法的先导,无惭与无愧紧随其后。(《如是语》40)显示巴利原文
‘‘Avijjā, bhikkhave, pubbaṅgamā akusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ samāpattiyā anvadeva ahirikaṃ anottappa’’nti (itivu. 40) ca.
「导向灭尽之道」:即导向诸漏灭尽的圣道。于此,欲漏由不还道断除,有漏与无明漏则由阿拉汉道断除。据说,正如欲取一样,欲漏也不被最上道(阿拉汉道)所断除。其余的解释方法相同。第八经中没有新的义理。显示巴利原文
Maggañca khayagāminanti āsavānaṃ khayagāminaṃ ariyamaggañca. Tattha kāmāsavo anāgāmimaggena pahīyati, bhavāsavo avijjāsavo ca arahattamaggena. Kāmupādānaṃ viya kāmāsavopi aggamaggavajjhoti ca vadanti. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva. Aṭṭhame apubbaṃ natthi.
9. 渴爱经的解释显示巴利原文
9. Taṇhāsuttavaṇṇanā
58 第九经中,“渴爱”:因具有渴求的特性,故为渴爱;或者说,它对色等所缘境生起渴求,故为渴爱。今为分别显示其义,而说“欲爱”等。其中,五种欲功德所摄的贪,名为欲爱。于色界、无色界有之中,对禅那的喜爱、与常见俱行的贪,以及基于有的渴求而生起的期望,名为有爱。与断灭见俱行的贪,名为非有爱。除了后两种爱,其余一切渴爱都只是欲爱。如经中所说:显示巴利原文
58. Navame taṇhāyanaṭṭhena taṇhā, rūpādivisayaṃ tasatīti vā taṇhā. Idāni taṃ vibhajitvā dassetuṃ ‘‘kāmataṇhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha pañcakāmaguṇiko rāgo kāmataṇhā. Rūpārūpabhavesu chandarāgo jhānanikanti sassatadiṭṭhisahagato rāgo bhavavasena patthanā ca bhavataṇhā. Ucchedadiṭṭhisahagato rāgo vibhavataṇhā. Apica pacchimataṇhādvayaṃ ṭhapetvā sesā sabbāpi taṇhā kāmataṇhā eva. Yathāha –
“其中,什么是有爱?与常见俱行的贪、染着、心的染着——这称为有爱。其中,什么是非有爱?与断灭见俱行的贪、染着、心的染着——这称为非有爱。其余的渴爱则是欲爱。”(《分别论》916)显示巴利原文
‘‘Tattha katamā bhavataṇhā? Sassatadiṭṭhisahagato rāgo sārāgo cittassa sārāgo – ayaṃ vuccati bhavataṇhā. Tattha katamā vibhavataṇhā? Ucchedadiṭṭhisahagato rāgo sārāgo cittassa sārāgo, ayaṃ vuccati vibhavataṇhā . Avasesā taṇhā kāmataṇhā’’ti (vibha. 916).
而这三种渴爱——即色渴爱……乃至法渴爱——依所缘境的差别,每一种又可各分六种,如此便成十八种。它们于内色等所缘有十八种,于外色等所缘有十八种,合为三十六种。再依过去三十六种、未来三十六种、现在三十六种的时间区分,则成一百零八种。若再作归纳,不依时间差别而取,便只有三十六种;若不对色等作内外的区分,则只有十八种;若仅依色等所缘的差别而取,则只有六种;若连所缘的差别也不作而取,便只有三种。显示巴利原文
Imā ca tisso taṇhā rūpataṇhā…pe… dhammataṇhāti visayabhedato paccekaṃ chabbidhāti katvā aṭṭhārasa honti. Tā ajjhattarūpādīsu aṭṭhārasa, bahiddhārūpādīsu aṭṭhārasāti chattiṃsa, iti atītā chattiṃsa, anāgatā chattiṃsa, paccuppannā chattiṃsāti vibhāgato aṭṭhasataṃ honti. Puna saṅgahe kariyamāne kālabhedaṃ anāmasitvā gayhamānā chattiṃseva honti, rūpādīnaṃ ajjhattikabāhiravibhāge akariyamāne aṭṭhāraseva, rūpādiārammaṇavibhāgamatte gayhamāne chaḷeva, ārammaṇavibhāgampi akatvā gayhamānā tissoyeva hontīti.
在偈颂中,「以渴爱之轭」:指以其名为渴爱的轭,也就是欲轭与有轭。「相连」:即相连接,或被系缚于有等诸处。由此而说「对有与非有心染着」,意思是:无论于小有或大有,心皆粘着。或者,「有」为常见,「非有」为断灭见。因此,「对有与非有」即指于常见与断灭见中,有情所粘着、所系缚之心。此即显示了有爱与非有爱。在此解释中,应知「以渴爱之轭」唯指欲爱。那些被轭系缚者,即为魔罗所属:那些处于如是状态的人,被名为魔罗套索的轭所系缚、所捆绑。因为贪染即称为魔罗之轭、魔罗之套索。如所说:显示巴利原文
Gāthāsu taṇhāyogenāti taṇhāsaṅkhātena yogena, kāmayogena, bhavayogena ca. Saṃyuttāti sambandhā, bhavādīsu saṃyojitā vā. Tenevāha ‘‘rattacittā bhavābhave’’ti. Khuddake ceva mahante ca bhave laggacittāti attho. Atha vā bhavoti sassatadiṭṭhi, abhavoti ucchedadiṭṭhi. Tasmā bhavābhave sassatucchedadiṭṭhīsu sattavisattacittāti. Etena bhavataṇhā, vibhavataṇhā ca dassitā. Imasmiṃ pakkhe ‘‘taṇhāyogenā’’ti iminā kāmataṇhāva dassitāti veditabbā. Te yogayuttā mārassāti te evaṃbhūtā puggalā mārassa pāsasaṅkhātena yogena yuttā baddhā. Rāgo hi mārayogo mārapāsoti vuccati. Yathāha –
「那游走于虚空、游走于意门的套索,
我将以彼套索折磨你,沙门,你无法从我这里解脱。」(《相应部》1.151;《大品》33)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Antalikkhacaro pāso, yvāyaṃ carati mānaso; Tena taṃ bādhayissāmi, na me samaṇa mokkhasī’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 1.151; mahāva. 33);
「轭安稳」:不被四种轭所迫,故为轭安稳,即指涅槃与阿罗汉果。因未证得此,故为「非安稳者」。「人」:因次第生起烦恼与诸行,故名为人,即诸有情。「有情」:于色等境中被贪著、被系缚,故称有情。显示巴利原文
Catūhi yogehi anupaddutattā yogakkhemaṃ, nibbānaṃ arahattañca, tassa anadhigamena ayogakkhemino. Uparūpari kilesābhisaṅkhārānaṃ jananato janā, pāṇino. Rūpādīsu sattā visattāti sattā.
“种种蕴的次第,以及界、处的次第;
当其持续流转不息时,便称为‘轮回’。”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Khandhānañca paṭipāṭi, dhātuāyatanāna ca; Abbocchinnaṃ vattamānā, saṃsāroti pavuccatī’’ti. –
他们流转于如上所述的、以诸蕴等反复生起为特征的轮回之中,不得出离。何以故?因为他们被渴爱的轭所系缚。他们是“走向生与死者”,即习性上反复经历生死之人。至此显示了流转,今为显示还灭,而说“而那些断除渴爱者”此偈。此偈之义,依前文所述之理,易于理解。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ vuttaṃ khandhādīnaṃ aparāparuppattisaṅkhātaṃ saṃsāraṃ gacchanti, tato na muccanti. Kasmā? Taṇhāyogayuttattā . Jātimaraṇagāmino punappunaṃ jananamaraṇasseva upagamanasīlāti. Ettāvatā vaṭṭaṃ dassetvā idāni vivaṭṭaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ye ca taṇhaṃ pahantvānā’’ti gāthamāha. Sā heṭṭhā vuttanayattā suviññeyyāva.
10. 《魔罗领域经》注释显示巴利原文
10. Māradheyyasuttavaṇṇanā
59 第十经是如何产生的呢?据说,有一天,导师被众多有学比丘围绕而坐,观察了他们的意乐后,为激发他们向上求证殊胜成就的精进力,赞叹无学之境界,而宣说了这部经。其中,“超越”等词,其简要释义为:“超越”即超出、征服。“魔罗之境”即魔罗的领域与自在之处。“如同太阳”:正如太阳脱离云雾等随烦恼,具足神通、威力、光芒三种功德,升上天空时,能超出、征服、驱散虚空中的一切黑暗,随后照耀、普照、放射光芒;同样地,漏尽比丘具足三种法,脱离一切随烦恼,征服了名为魔罗之境的三界诸法之流转后,朗然照耀。显示巴利原文
59. Dasamassa kā uppatti? Ekadivasaṃ kira satthā sekkhabahulāya parisāya parivuto nisinno tesaṃ ajjhāsayaṃ oloketvā upari visesādhigamāya ussāhaṃ janetuṃ asekkhabhūmiṃ thomento idaṃ suttaṃ abhāsi. Tattha atikkammātiādīsu ayaṃ saṅkhepattho – atikkamma atikkamitvā abhibhavitvā. Māradheyyaṃ mārassa visayaṃ issariyaṭṭhānaṃ. Ādiccova yathā ādicco abbhādiupakkilesavimutto attano iddhiyā ānubhāvena tejasāti tīhi guṇehi samannāgato nabhaṃ abbhussakkamāno sabbaṃ ākāsagataṃ tamaṃ atikkamma atikkamitvā abhibhavitvā vidhamitvā virocati, obhāsati, tapati; evameva khīṇāsavo bhikkhu tīhi dhammehi samannāgato sabbupakkilesavimutto māradheyyasaṅkhātaṃ tebhūmakadhammappavattaṃ abhibhavitvā virocatīti.
关于“以无学”(Asekkhena)一词:此处,“于诸学生起者”名为有学;或者,“能令七种有学生起者”名为有学;或者,“因未完成所学而自身尚在学者”名为有学——这是指诸道法及三种下位果法。至于最上果法,则因更无所学之处,故非有学,而为无学。实际上,凡是对有学性可能生起疑惑之处,便在此予以遮止;因此,于世间法及涅槃中,应知并不存在不得称为无学的过失。因为,所谓戒学、定学、慧学,已与各自所对治的烦恼脱离而得清净,且不再成为随烦恼的所缘,故可恰当地称为最殊胜之学;它们存在于八种道果之中。因此,如同对四道与三种低位果法一样,对于阿罗汉果法,也可能生起这样的疑惑:认为它们也是“于彼诸学生起者”;认为具足彼学的阿罗汉也如同其他圣者一般具有有学性;从而认为“这些属于有学”,以及认为“他们的学处即是戒等”,因而视其为有学。为遮除此疑,故遮止如上所述之有学性,而说为“无学”。因为,于阿罗汉果中生起的诸学,由于所作已办,不再执行学的功用,唯以学果的状态而存在。是故,它们不配称为“学”。显示巴利原文
Asekkhenāti ettha sikkhāsu jātāti sekkhā, sattannaṃ sekkhānaṃ eteti vā sekkhā, apariyositasikkhattā sayameva sikkhantīti vā sekkhā maggadhammā heṭṭhimaphalattayadhammā ca. Aggaphaladhammā pana upari sikkhitabbābhāvena na sekkhāti asekkhā. Yattha hi sekkhabhāvāsaṅkā atthi, tatthāyaṃ paṭisedhoti lokiyadhammesu nibbāne ca asekkhabhāvānāpatti daṭṭhabbā. Sīlasamādhipaññāsaṅkhātā hi sikkhā attano paṭipakkhakilesehi vippayuttā parisuddhā upakkilesānaṃ ārammaṇabhāvampi anupagamanato sātisayaṃ sikkhāti vattuṃ yuttā, aṭṭhasupi maggaphalesu vijjanti; tasmā catumaggaheṭṭhimaphalattayadhammā viya arahattaphaladhammāpi ‘‘tāsu sikkhāsu jātā’’ti ca, taṃsikkhāsamaṅgino arahato itaresaṃ viya sekkhatte sati ‘‘sekkhassa ete’’ti ca ‘‘sikkhā sīlaṃ etesa’’nti ca sekkhāti āsaṅkā siyunti tadāsaṅkānivattanatthaṃ asekkhāti yathāvuttasekkhabhāvappaṭisedhaṃ katvā vuttaṃ. Arahattaphale pavattamānā hi sikkhā pariniṭṭhitakiccattā na sikkhākiccaṃ karonti, kevalaṃ sikkhāphalabhāvena pavattanti. Tasmā tā na sikkhāvacanaṃ arahanti, nāpi taṃsamaṅgino sekkhavacanaṃ, na ca taṃsampayuttadhammā sikkhanasīlā. ‘‘Sikkhāsu jātā’’ti evamādiatthehi aggaphaladhammā sekkhā na honti. Heṭṭhimaphalesu pana sikkhā sakadāgāmimaggavipassanādīnaṃ upanissayabhāvato sikkhākiccaṃ karontīti sikkhāvacanaṃ arahanti, taṃsamaṅgino ca sekkhavacanaṃ, taṃsampayuttā dhammā ca sikkhanasīlā. Sekkhadhammā yathāvuttehi atthehi sekkhā hontiyeva.
再者,“有学”指未完成修学者,“无学”则指已完成修学者;因此,世间法与涅槃并不成为无学。若在有学法中,某些达到增长者成为无学,则此增长即指阿罗汉道法获得了无学性。问:依上述诸义,它们既称有学,如何又成无学?并非如此,因为对于相似的事物,可以不同名称来称述。实则,阿罗汉果与阿罗汉道,除遍知等作用差别及异熟性质之外,并无不同;因此,完全可以说,正是那些有学法,转成了阿罗汉果的状态。而且,异熟乐较之善乐更为寂静、更为殊胜;所以,这些法自身已达到增长,故称为“无学”。显示巴利原文
Atha vā sekkhāti apariyositasikkhānaṃ vacananti, asekkhāti padaṃ pariyositasikkhānaṃ dassananti na lokiyadhammanibbānānaṃ asekkhabhāvāpatti. Vuḍḍhippattā sekkhā asekkhā ca sekkhadhammesu eva kesañci vuḍḍhippattānaṃ asekkhatā āpajjatīti arahattamaggadhammā vuḍḍhippattā. Yathāvuttehi ca atthehi sekkhāti katvā asekkhā āpannāti ce? Taṃ na, sadisesu tabbohārato. Arahattamaggato hi ninnānākaraṇaṃ arahattaphalaṃ ṭhapetvā pariññādikiccakaraṇaṃ vipākabhāvañca, tasmā te eva sekkhā dhammā arahattaphalabhāvaṃ āpannāti sakkā vattuṃ. Kusalasukhato ca vipākasukhaṃ santataratāya paṇītataranti vuḍḍhippattāva te dhammā hontīti ‘‘asekkhā’’ti vuccanti.
然而,世尊将那些无学法按蕴分析为三类,通过具足这些法的漏尽者的威力加以阐明,于是说:“以无学的戒蕴……”等语。在此,“戒”的含义前面已说。“蕴”一词,则在积聚、施设、惯用语、功德等多种意义上被使用。例如,在“不可计算、不可测量,唯以‘大水蕴’之名计数……”等经文中,即用于“积聚”义。在“世尊见一大木蕴正被恒河水流冲走……”等经文中,即用于“施设”义。在“心、意、意思、心脏、白净意、意处、识、识蕴……”等中,即用于“惯用语”义。在“朋友毗舍佉,不是以圣八支道摄集三蕴,而是以三蕴摄集圣八支道……”等经文中,即用于“功德”义。此处也应视为“功德”义。因此,“无学的、称为戒的功德”即此义。“具足”:与之相应,成为具备者。“定”:以此而令心等持,或自身即等持,或……显示巴利原文
Te pana asekkhadhamme khandhavasena idha tidhā vibhajitvā tehi samannāgamena khīṇāsavassa ānubhāvaṃ vibhāvento bhagavā ‘‘asekkhena sīlakkhandhenā’’tiādimāha. Tattha sīlasaddassa attho heṭṭhā vutto. Khandhasaddo pana rāsimhi paññattiyaṃ ruḷhiyaṃ guṇeti bahūsu atthesu diṭṭhappayogo. Tathā hi ‘‘asaṅkheyyo appameyyo mahāudakakkhandhotveva saṅkhyaṃ gacchatī’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 4.51; 6.37) rāsimhi āgato. ‘‘Addasā kho bhagavā mahantaṃ dārukkhandhaṃ gaṅgāya nadiyā sotena vuyhamāna’’ntiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 4.241) paññattiyaṃ. ‘‘Cittaṃ mano mānasaṃ hadayaṃ paṇḍaraṃ mano manāyatanaṃ viññāṇaṃ viññāṇakkhandho’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. 63, 65) ruḷhiyaṃ. ‘‘Na kho, āvuso visākha, ariyena aṭṭhaṅgikena maggena tayo khandhā saṅgahitā, tīhi ca kho, āvuso visākha, khandhehi ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo saṅgahito’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.462) guṇe. Idhāpi guṇeyeva daṭṭhabbo. Tasmā asekkhena sīlasaṅkhātena guṇenāti attho. Samannāgatoti sampayutto samaṅgībhūto. Samādahati etena, sayaṃ vā samādahati, samādhānameva vāti samādhi. Pakārehi jānāti yathāsabhāvaṃ paṭivijjhatīti paññā. Sīlameva khandho sīlakkhandho. Sesesupi eseva nayo.
这里,属于最高果位的正语、正业和正命,就其体性而言,正是“无学戒蕴”;同样地,正定是“无学定蕴”;而正精进和正念因其有资助作用,便归入定蕴。同样地,正见是“无学慧蕴”;正思惟因其有资助作用,便归入慧蕴。应当这样理解:在此,八种阿拉汉果法由三蕴所摄而显示出来。显示巴利原文
Tattha aggaphalabhūtā sammāvācā, sammākammanto, sammāājīvo ca sabhāveneva asekkho sīlakkhandho nāma, tathā sammāsamādhi asekkho samādhikkhandho. Tadupakārakato pana sammāvāyāmasammāsatiyo samādhikkhandhe saṅgahaṃ gacchanti. Tathā sammādiṭṭhi asekkho paññākkhandho. Tadupakārakato sammāsaṅkappo paññākkhandhe saṅgahaṃ gacchatīti evamettha aṭṭhapi arahattaphaladhammā tīhi khandhehi saṅgahetvā dassitāti veditabbaṃ.
“这些法于谁善修习”:意指,于哪位阿罗汉这些无学法蕴——即戒等——已得善修习、善增长,他便如日轮般照耀。这是说明其中的关联。也有版本读作“这些于谁”,其中的“ca”字仅为语气助词。如是,在此品中,第一经讲述了轮转,最后一经讲述了还灭,其余诸经则既讲轮转也讲还灭。显示巴利原文
Yassa ete subhāvitāti yena arahatā ete sīlādayo asekkhadhammakkhandhā subhāvitā suṭṭhu vaḍḍhitā, so ādiccova virocatīti sambandho. ‘‘Yassa cete’’tipi paṭhanti. Tesañca saddo nipātamattaṃ. Evametasmiṃ vagge paṭhamasutte vaṭṭaṃ, pariyosānasutte vivaṭṭaṃ, itaresu vaṭṭavivaṭṭaṃ kathitaṃ.
2. 第二品显示巴利原文
2. Dutiyavaggo
《福行事处经》的解释(第一)显示巴利原文
1. Puññakiriyavatthusuttavaṇṇanā
60 「福行事」:「福」是指能产生应受恭敬的果报,或能净化自身的相续;而这些福又因须借由因缘条件而造作,故亦是“行”,因此称为「福行」。这些福行本身又是种种利益的所依处,故称为「福行事」。「施所成」:对于那些尚未断除轮回根本的人,出于护助或以恭敬之心,将自己应施之物施予他人,这一思即是「施」——依此而行布施,故为施,此施本身即是施所成。具体而言,对于衣等四种资具、食物等十种施物,或色等六种所缘,当施与这些对象时,从这些对象的生起开始,在预备施舍之时,以及事后以喜悦心随念之时——在这三个时段中,依所述方式转起的思,便称作施所成福行事。显示巴利原文
60. Dutiyavaggassa paṭhame puññakiriyavatthūnīti pujjabhavaphalaṃ nibbattenti, attano santānaṃ punantīti vā puññāni, puññāni ca tāni hetupaccayehi kattabbato kiriyā cāti puññakiriyā. Tā eva ca tesaṃ tesaṃ ānisaṃsānaṃ vatthubhāvato puññakiriyavatthūni. Dānamayanti anupacchinnabhavamūlassa anuggahavasena pūjāvasena vā attano deyyadhammassa paresaṃ pariccāgacetanā dīyati etāyāti dānaṃ, dānameva dānamayaṃ. Cīvarādīsu hi catūsu paccayesu annādīsu vā dasasu dānavatthūsu rūpādīsu vā chasu ārammaṇesu taṃ taṃ dentassa tesaṃ uppādanato paṭṭhāya pubbabhāge pariccāgakāle pacchā somanassacittena anussaraṇe cāti tīsu kālesu vuttanayena pavattacetanā dānamayaṃ puññakiriyavatthu nāma.
「戒所成」:有人为了圆满戒行,通过恒常戒、布萨戒、自制等方式受持五戒、八戒或十戒;当他为圆满戒而前往寺院出家,满心欢喜地想:“我如今出家,实在太好了”,并以信心圆满护持别解脱律仪,以智慧省察衣等资具,以正念防护经由眼门等现前的色等所缘,以精进清净活命之道——在这些情况下转起的思,即是“戒”,因此称为戒所成福行事。显示巴利原文
Sīlamayanti niccasīlauposathaniyamādivasena pañca, aṭṭha, dasa vā sīlāni samādiyantassa sīlapūraṇatthaṃ pabbajissāmīti vihāraṃ gacchantassa pabbajantassa manorathaṃ matthakaṃ pāpetvā ‘‘pabbajito vatamhi sādhu suṭṭhū’’ti āvajjentassa saddhāya pātimokkhaṃ paripūrentassa paññāya cīvarādike paccavekkhantassa satiyā āpāthagatesu rūpādīsu cakkhudvārādīni saṃvarantassa vīriyena ājīvaṃ sodhentassa ca pavattā cetanā sīlatīti sīlamayaṃ puññakiriyavatthu nāma.
同样,按照《无碍解道》所说的观道,观照眼为无常、苦、无我,亦观照耳、鼻、舌、身、意;观照色……乃至法,观照眼识……乃至意识,观照眼触……乃至意触,观照眼触所生受……乃至意触所生受,观照色想……乃至法想,观照老死为无常、苦、无我——于这些观照中生起的思;以及住于地遍等三十八所缘中的禅那思;以及于无过失的业处、技艺处、知识处中,以熟练作意等方式转起的思:所有这些思,因“以此修习”而称为“修”,由此成为修所成福行事。显示巴利原文
Tathā paṭisambhidāyaṃ (paṭi. ma. 1.48) vuttena vipassanāmaggena cakkhuṃ aniccato dukkhato anattato vipassantassa sotaṃ, ghānaṃ, jivhaṃ, kāyaṃ, manaṃ. Rūpe…pe… dhamme, cakkhuviññāṇaṃ…pe… manoviññāṇaṃ. Cakkhusamphassaṃ…pe… manosamphassaṃ, cakkhusamphassajaṃ vedanaṃ…pe… manosamphassajaṃ vedanaṃ. Rūpasaññaṃ…pe… dhammasaññaṃ. Jarāmaraṇaṃ aniccato dukkhato anattato vipassantassa yā cetanā, yā ca pathavīkasiṇādīsu aṭṭhatiṃsāya ārammaṇesu pavattā jhānacetanā, yā ca anavajjesu kammāyatanasippāyatanavijjāṭṭhānesu paricayamanasikārādivasena pavattā cetanā, sabbā bhāveti etāyāti bhāvanāmayaṃ vuttanayena puññakiriyavatthu cāti.
其中,每一种福行事依其适当情况而言:从准备阶段开始,以身造作者,为身业;为此而说出话语者,为语业;不发动身语,唯以心思惟者,为意业。布施食物等时,若作意“我施食物等”,或先随念布施巴拉密等而后行施,彼时即成为施所成福行事。若将承担义务置于首位而行布施,则成戒所成福行事;若从坏灭、衰灭、业的角度起遍作观而行布施,则成修所成福行事。显示巴利原文
Ekamekañcettha yathārahaṃ pubbabhāgato paṭṭhāya kāyena karontassa kāyakammaṃ hoti, tadatthaṃ vācaṃ nicchārentassa vacīkammaṃ, kāyaṅgaṃ vācaṅgañca acopetvā manasā cintentassa manokammaṃ. Annādīni dentassa cāpi ‘‘annadānādīni demī’’ti vā dānapāramiṃ āvajjetvā vā dānakāle dānamayaṃ puññakiriyavatthu hoti. Vattasīse ṭhatvā dadato sīlamayaṃ, khayato vayato kammato sammasanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā dadato bhāvanāmayaṃ puññakiriyavatthu hoti.
另外,还有七种福行事:恭敬俱行福行事、服务俱行福行事、回向功德、随喜功德、教示所成、听闻所成、见正直福行事。即便是皈依,也摄在见正直之中。至于此处应予详释的内容,后文将会明了。显示巴利原文
Aparānipi satta puññakiriyavatthūni – apacitisahagataṃ puññakiriyavatthu veyyāvaccasahagataṃ pattianuppadānaṃ abbhanumodanaṃ desanāmayaṃ savanamayaṃ diṭṭhijugataṃ puññakiriyavatthūti. Saraṇagamanampi hi diṭṭhijugateneva saṅgayhati. Yaṃ panettha vattabbaṃ, taṃ parato āvi bhavissati.
其中,见到年长者时,通过起身迎接、接取衣钵、恭敬问讯、让路等行持,应当知道这就是「恭敬俱行」。对于年长者履行应尽的义务与礼仪;见比丘入村乞食时,接过他的钵,在村中托满食物后奉上;或听闻‘去取比丘们的钵来’之后,迅速前去取钵等,应当知道这就是「服务俱行」。以四事资具作布施,或以花香等供养三宝,或修习类似的其他福德之后,将功德回向而说‘愿一切众生得此功德’,这就是「回向功德」。同样地,对他人所作的回向,乃至仅对他人所造的福德,以‘善哉!善妙!’的方式随喜,这就是「随喜功德」。不期待回报,怀着利益他人的心愿,为他人开示自己所熟习的法——这称作「教示所成福行事」。然而,若有人抱着‘这样人们便会知道我是说法师’的期望,倚仗利养、恭敬、名誉而说法,则不成大果。以‘此法确是自利利他之道的实践’这样的如理作意为先导,以充满慈心的柔软之心听闻法,则成为「听闻所成福行事」。若仅是为了‘这样人们便会知道我是有信仰的人’而听闻,则不成大果。见正直即见解的端正,这是指‘有布施’等正见的别名。因为此见显示巴利原文
Tattha vuḍḍhataraṃ disvā paccuggamanapattacīvarapaṭiggahaṇābhivādanamaggasampadānādivasena apacāyanasahagataṃ veditabbaṃ. Vuḍḍhatarānaṃ vattapaṭipattikaraṇavasena, gāmaṃ piṇḍāya paviṭṭhaṃ bhikkhuṃ disvā pattaṃ gahetvā gāme bhikkhaṃ sampādetvā upasaṃharaṇavasena ‘‘gaccha bhikkhūnaṃ pattaṃ āharā’’ti sutvā vegena gantvā pattāharaṇādivasena ca veyyāvaccasahagataṃ veditabbaṃ. Cattāro paccaye datvā pupphagandhādīhi ratanattayassa pūjaṃ katvā aññaṃ vā tādisaṃ puññaṃ katvā ‘‘sabbasattānaṃ patti hotū’’ti pariṇāmavasena pattianuppadānaṃ veditabbaṃ. Tathā parehi dinnāya pattiyā kevalaṃ vā parehi kataṃ puññaṃ ‘‘sādhu, suṭṭhū’’ti anumodanavasena abbhanumodanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Attano paguṇadhammaṃ apaccāsīsanto hitajjhāsayena paresaṃ deseti – idaṃ desanāmayaṃ puññakiriyavatthu nāma. Yaṃ pana eko ‘‘evaṃ maṃ dhammakathikoti jānissantī’’ti icchāya ṭhatvā lābhasakkārasilokasannissito dhammaṃ deseti, taṃ na mahapphalaṃ hoti. ‘‘Addhā ayaṃ attahitaparahitānaṃ paṭipajjanūpāyo’’ti yonisomanasikārapurecārikahitapharaṇena muducittena dhammaṃ suṇāti, idaṃ savanamayaṃ puññakiriyavatthu hoti. Yaṃ paneko ‘‘iti maṃ saddhoti jānissantī’’ti suṇāti, taṃ na mahapphalaṃ hoti. Diṭṭhiyā ujugamanaṃ diṭṭhijugataṃ, ‘‘atthi dinna’’ntiādinayappavattassa sammādassanassa etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Idañhi pubbabhāge vā pacchābhāge vā ñāṇavippayuttampi ujukaraṇakāle ñāṇasampayuttameva hoti. Apare panāhu ‘‘vijānanapajānanavasena dassanaṃ diṭṭhi kusalañca viññāṇaṃ kammassakatāñāṇādi ca sammādassana’’nti . Tattha kusalena viññāṇena ñāṇassa anuppādepi attanā katapuññānussaraṇavaṇṇārahavaṇṇanādīnaṃ saṅgaho, kammassakatāñāṇena kammapathasammādiṭṭhiyā . Itaraṃ pana diṭṭhijugataṃ sabbesaṃ niyamalakkhaṇaṃ. Yañhi kiñci puññaṃ karontassa diṭṭhiyā ujubhāveneva taṃ mahapphalaṃ hoti.
然而,这七种福行事,实际上已被前面所说的施所成等三种福行事所摄。其中,恭敬与服务摄于戒所成,回向与随喜摄于施所成,说法与闻法摄于修所成,而见正直则贯通三者。因此世尊说:显示巴利原文
Imesaṃ pana sattannaṃ puññakiriyavatthūnaṃ purimehi tīhi dānamayādīhi puññakiriyavatthūhi saṅgaho. Tattha hi apacāyanaveyyāvaccāni sīlamaye, pattianuppadānaabbhanumodanāni dānamaye, dhammadesanāsavanāni bhāvanāmaye, diṭṭhijugataṃ tīsupi. Tenāha bhagavā –
比丘们,有三种福行事。哪三种?布施所成福行事……(中略)……修所成福行事。显示巴利原文
‘‘Tīṇimāni, bhikkhave, puññakiriyavatthūni. Katamāni tīṇi? Dānamayaṃ…pe… bhāvanāmayaṃ puññakiriyavatthū’’ti (a. ni. 8.36).
于此,依欲界八种善思,三种福行事皆能生起。正如诵习熟悉的法时,有人未能善巧观察到其中的连接处便顺势滑过,同样,在专心修习熟悉的止观时,间或也有不与智相应的心生起而作意。然而,所有这些,若依广大善思而言,唯是修所成福行事,而非其余二者。(其偈颂义已如前释。)显示巴利原文
Ettha ca aṭṭhannaṃ kāmāvacarakusalacetanānaṃ vasena tiṇṇampi puññakiriyavatthūnaṃ pavatti hoti. Yathā hi paguṇaṃ dhammaṃ parivattentassa ekacce anusandhiṃ asallakkhentasseva gacchanti, evaṃ paguṇaṃ samathavipassanābhāvanaṃ anuyuñjantassa antarantarā ñāṇavippayuttacittenāpi manasikāro pavattati. Sabbaṃ taṃ pana mahaggatakusalacetanānaṃ vasena bhāvanāmayameva puññakiriyavatthu hoti, na itarāni. Gāthāya attho heṭṭhā vuttoyeva.
2. 眼经注释(Cakkhusuttavaṇṇanā)显示巴利原文
2. Cakkhusuttavaṇṇanā
61 「眼(cakkhūni)」:因能观照,故名为眼,其意义是如同显示平坦与不平坦之处那样生起作用。或者,以品尝之义而称为眼。什么是品尝?即享受味道。正如世人说“品尝蜂蜜、品尝菜肴”,这些眼在领受所缘之味时,犹如享受一般,因此以品尝之义而称为眼。然而,这些眼略分为二种:智眼与肉眼。其中,肉眼于前已述;智眼在此则被分别为天眼和慧眼二种而说。显示巴利原文
61. Dutiye cakkhūnīti cakkhantīti cakkhūni, samavisamaṃ ācikkhantāni viya pavattantīti attho. Atha vā cakkhanaṭṭhena cakkhūni. Kimidaṃ cakkhanaṃ nāma? Assādanaṃ, tathā hi vadanti ‘‘madhuṃ cakkhati byañjanaṃ cakkhatī’’ti imāni ca ārammaṇarasaṃ anubhavantāni assādentāni viya hontīti cakkhanaṭṭhena cakkhūni. Tāni pana saṅkhepato dve cakkhūni – ñāṇacakkhu, maṃsacakkhu cāti. Tesu maṃsacakkhu heṭṭhā vuttameva. Ñāṇacakkhu dibbacakkhu, paññācakkhūti idha dvidhā katvā vuttaṃ.
其中「天眼(dibbacakkhu)」:因与天相似,故称为天。诸天由善业所生之净根眼,不为胆汁、痰、血等所障碍,因远离随烦恼而能摄取远处之境,此是天的净色眼。而此由精进修习力所生之智眼,亦复如是,因其类似天,故称为天;依天住而得,且自身安住于天住,以掌握光明故,具大光辉;又因能照见穿墙等色而有大行境,故亦得此名。这一切应依声论而了知。以见的含义,行眼的作用,如同眼一般,故亦是眼;既是天,又是眼,所以称为天眼。显示巴利原文
Tattha dibbacakkhūti dibbasadisattā dibbaṃ. Devatānañhi sucaritakammanibbattaṃ pittasemharuhirādīhi apalibuddhaṃ upakkilesavimuttatāya dūrepi ārammaṇaggahaṇasamatthaṃ dibbaṃ pasādacakkhu hoti. Idañcāpi vīriyabhāvanābalanibbattaṃ ñāṇacakkhu tādisamevāti dibbasadisattā dibbaṃ, dibbavihāravasena paṭiladdhattā attano ca dibbavihārasannissitattā ālokapariggahena mahājutikattā. Tirokuṭṭādigatarūpadassanena mahāgatikattāpi dibbaṃ. Taṃ sabbaṃ saddasatthānusārena veditabbaṃ. Dassanaṭṭhena cakkhukiccakaraṇena cakkhumivātipi cakkhu, dibbañca taṃ cakkhu cāti dibbacakkhu.
「慧(paññā)」:因能了知,故称为慧。了知什么?以‘这是苦’等方式,了知四圣谛。正如所说:显示巴利原文
Pajānātīti paññā. Kiṃ pajānāti? Cattāri ariyasaccāni ‘‘idaṃ dukkha’’ntiādinā. Vuttañhetaṃ –
“贤友,因能了知,故说为慧。了知什么呢?‘这是苦’等。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Pajānātīti kho, āvuso, tasmā paññāti vuccati. Kiñca pajānāti? Idaṃ dukkha’’ntiādi (ma. ni. 1.449).
然而在注书中说:“以了知之性故称为慧。如何令了知?令了知‘无常’,令了知‘苦’,令了知‘无我’。”再者,这慧从特相等而言:以通达诸法如实自性为特相,或如善射手所放之箭无失误地贯通目标那样,以无失误通达为特相;以照亮所缘为作用,犹如灯;以无迷乱为现起,如林中善导者。在此,它特别指称为漏尽智的慧,以彻见四圣谛之义而称为慧眼。关于此,曾有言:“眼生起,智生起,慧生起,明生起,光生起。”显示巴利原文
Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘paññāpanavasena paññā. Kinti paññāpeti? Aniccanti paññāpeti, dukkhanti paññāpeti, anattāti paññāpetī’’ti vuttaṃ. Sā panāyaṃ lakkhaṇādito yathāsabhāvapaṭivedhalakkhaṇā, akkhalitapaṭivedhalakkhaṇā vā kusalissāsakhittausupaṭivedho viya, visayobhāsanarasā padīpo viya, asammohapaccupaṭṭhānā araññagatasudesako viya. Visesato panettha āsavakkhayañāṇasaṅkhātā paññā catusaccadassanaṭṭhena paññācakkhūti adhippetā. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘cakkhuṃ udapādi, ñāṇaṃ udapādi, paññā udapādi, vijjā udapādi, āloko udapādī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.1081; mahāva. 15).
在这些眼中,肉眼是有限的,天眼是广大的,慧眼则是无量的。肉眼是色,其余二者非色。肉眼与天眼属于世间、有漏、以色为所缘;慧眼则为出世间、无漏、以四圣谛为所缘。肉眼是无记,天眼或为善或无记,慧眼亦复如是。肉眼属欲界,天眼属色界,慧眼是出世间。这些差别等应当了知。显示巴利原文
Etesu ca maṃsacakkhu parittaṃ, dibbacakkhu mahaggataṃ, itaraṃ appamāṇaṃ. Maṃsacakkhu rūpaṃ, itarāni arūpāni. Maṃsacakkhu dibbacakkhu ca lokiyāni sāsavāni rūpavisayāni, itaraṃ lokuttaraṃ anāsavaṃ catusaccavisayaṃ. Maṃsacakkhu abyākataṃ, dibbacakkhu siyā kusalaṃ siyā abyākataṃ, tathā paññācakkhu. Maṃsacakkhu kāmāvacaraṃ, dibbacakkhu rūpāvacaraṃ, itaraṃ lokuttaranti evamādi vibhāgā veditabbā.
于偈颂中,“无上”乃指慧眼。因慧眼即漏尽智,故为无上。“人中最上者说”:意为于众人中最为殊胜第一的正自觉者所宣说。“生起”指肉眼的现行。“道”是方法,为引发天眼之因。实则天眼仅于具肉眼者中生起,因为须增广遍处光明方得生起天眼智;倘若未于遍处曼陀罗上取得禅相,彼智即不生起。“由于”:当如此时。“智”即漏尽智。因此他说“慧眼是无上的”。“由得此眼”:由圣者之慧眼生起、修习已,而从一切轮回之苦中解脱,究竟出离。显示巴利原文
Gāthāsu anuttaranti paññācakkhuṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tañhi āsavakkhayañāṇabhāvato anuttaraṃ. Akkhāsi purisuttamoti purisānaṃ uttamo aggo sammāsambuddho desesi. Uppādoti maṃsacakkhussa pavatti. Maggoti upāyo, dibbacakkhussa kāraṇaṃ. Pakaticakkhumato eva hi dibbacakkhu uppajjati, yasmā kasiṇālokaṃ vaḍḍhetvā dibbacakkhuñāṇassa uppādanaṃ, so ca kasiṇamaṇḍale uggahanimittena vinā natthīti. Yatoti yadā. Ñāṇanti āsavakkhayañāṇaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘paññācakkhu anuttara’’nti. Yassa cakkhussa paṭilābhāti yassa ariyassa paññācakkhussa uppattiyā bhāvanāya sabbasmā vaṭṭadukkhato pamuccati parimuccatīti.
3. 《根经》注释(Indriyasuttavaṇṇanā)显示巴利原文
3. Indriyasuttavaṇṇanā
62 在第三经中,「indriyāni(诸根)」:以「增上」(adhipateyya)之义,名为根。凡在俱生法中犹如主宰者而存在、且被那些俱生法所随顺的,即称为根。又,「inda(主宰)」指世尊——法是自在者,具足最上之心自在。由于这位名为「印达」的世尊最初所见、最初所证,也为他人所见、教导、安立,并透过行境、修习与惯行而见,故称之为「根」(indriyāni)。或谓「inda」乃成为证悟道增上缘的福德业,此业的相(liṅga)即是根。
「anaññātaññassāmītindriyaṃ(未知当知根)」:这是针对如是行道者——在无始轮回中,对那未知、未证的不死界,即四圣谛法,我将了知——依前行分而生起的根。它是入流道智慧(sotāpattimaggapaññā)的同义语。
「aññindriyaṃ(已知根)」即了知(ājānana)根。其词义为:ājānāti(了知)指不逾越初道智慧所见之量而了知,故称「aññā」(已知)。正如初显示巴利原文
62. Tatiye indriyānīti adhipateyyaṭṭhena indriyāni. Yāni hi sahajātadhammesu issarā viya hutvā tehi anuvattitabbāni, tāni indriyāni nāma. Apica indo bhagavā dhammissaro paramena cittissariyena samannāgato. Tena indena sabbapaṭhamaṃ diṭṭhattā adhigatattā paresañca diṭṭhattā desitattā vihitattā gocarabhāvanāsevanāhi diṭṭhattā ca indriyāni. Indaṃ vā maggādhigamassa upanissayabhūtaṃ puññakammaṃ, tassa liṅgānītipi indriyāni. Anaññātaññassāmītindriyanti ‘‘anamatagge saṃsāre anaññātaṃ anadhigataṃ amatapadaṃ catusaccadhammameva vā jānissāmī’’ti paṭipannassa iminā pubbabhāgena uppannaṃ indriyaṃ, sotāpattimaggapaññāyetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Aññindriyanti ājānanaindriyaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ vacanattho – ājānāti paṭhamamaggañāṇena diṭṭhamariyādaṃ anatikkamitvāva jānātīti aññā. Yatheva hi paṭhamamaggapaññā dukkhādīsu pariññābhisamayādivasena pavattati, tatheva ayampi pavattatīti aññā ca sā yathāvuttenaṭṭhena indriyaṃ cāti aññindriyaṃ. Ājānanaṭṭheneva aññassa vā ariyapuggalassa indriyanti aññindriyaṃ, sotāpattiphalato paṭṭhāya chasu ṭhānesu ñāṇassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Aññātāvindriyanti aññātāvino catūsu saccesu niṭṭhitañāṇakiccassa khīṇāsavassa uppajjanato indriyaṭṭhasambhavato ca aññātāvindriyaṃ. Ettha ca paṭhamapacchimāni paṭhamamaggacatutthaphalavasena ekaṭṭhānikāni, itaraṃ itaramaggaphalavasena chaṭṭhānikanti veditabbaṃ.
在偈颂中,「sikkhamānassāti(正在学者)」:指正在修学增上戒学等、正在修习的人。
「ujumaggānusārino(随直道行者)」:「ujuṃ maggo(直道)」即圣道,因其远离二边。由于随念此直道,故名「随直道行者」,意思是次第生起圣道的人。
「khayasmiṃ(于尽中)」:由于断尽一切无余烦恼,故在称为「尽」的最上道中,智慧首先生起。此后,「aññā(已知)」无间:从这最上道智无间,生起阿拉汉果。
或者另一种解释:「随直道行者」是指远离沉滞、掉举、住著、勤策等过失,止观双运修习,随念、随行此前行道的人。在种姓智无间,因断除见一处之烦恼,于「尽」——即入流道中,智慧首先生起,此即未知当知根。此后,「已知」无间:从这第一智无间起,直至最上道,已知根生起。显示巴利原文
Gāthāsu sikkhamānassāti adhisīlasikkhādayo sikkhamānassa bhāventassa. Ujumaggānusārinoti ujumaggo vuccati ariyamaggo, antadvayavivajjitattā tassa anussaraṇato ujumaggānusārino, paṭipāṭiyā magge uppādentassāti attho. Khayasminti anavasesakilesānaṃ khepanato khayasaṅkhāte aggamagge ñāṇaṃ paṭhamaṃ pureyeva uppajjati. Tato aññā anantarāti tato maggañāṇato anantarā arahattaṃ uppajjati. Atha vā ujumaggānusārinoti līnuddhaccapatiṭṭhānāyūhanādike vajjetvā samathavipassanaṃ yuganaddhaṃ katvā bhāvanāvasena pavattaṃ pubbabhāgamaggaṃ anussarantassa anugacchantassa paṭipajjantassa gotrabhuñāṇānantaraṃ diṭṭhekaṭṭhānaṃ kilesānaṃ khepanato khayasmiṃ sotāpattimagge paṭhamaṃ ñāṇaṃ anaññātaññassāmītindriyaṃ uppajjati. Tato aññā anantarāti tato paṭhamañāṇato anantarā anantarato paṭṭhāya yāva aggamaggā aññā aññindriyaṃ uppajjati.
「Tato aññā vimuttassāti(从此已知解脱者)」:即从彼已知根之后,于阿拉汉道智无间,由具知根(aññātāvindriya)依阿拉汉果的慧解脱(paññāvimutti)而得解脱者。
「Ñāṇaṃ ve hoti tādinoti(于如是者确有智)」:指从阿拉汉果生起之后,在随后的时刻,对于可意、不可意等已得「如是相」的漏尽者,生起省察智。此智如何生起?谓:「我解脱是不动的。」并显示不动的原因:「以有结灭尽故。」显示巴利原文
Tatoaññā vimuttassāti tato aññā aññindriyato pacchā arahattamaggañāṇānantarā arahattaphalena paññāvimuttiyā aññātāvindriyena vimuttassa. Ñāṇaṃ ve hoti tādinoti arahattaphaluppattito uttarakāle iṭṭhāniṭṭhādīsu tādilakkhaṇappattassa khīṇāsavassa paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ uppajjati. Kathaṃ uppajjatīti āha ‘‘akuppā me vimuttī’’ti. Tassa akuppabhāvassa kāraṇaṃ dasseti ‘‘bhavasaṃyojanakkhayā’’ti.
如今,为了称叹这样的漏尽者,他宣说了第三首偈颂:“他确实是具足根者(sa ve indriyasampanno)”。其中,“具足根者(indriyasampanno)”:即如前所述,具足三种出世间根;或者,亦指具足清净、已获轻安的信等诸根而圆满具备,且因眼等根极为寂静、不再攀缘对境,而能成就“具足根”。是故,称为“寂静者(santo)”:意指因一切烦恼的热恼都已止息,所以寂静。“乐于寂静处(santipade rato)”:即喜乐、倾心于涅槃。此处,“具足根”彰显道已修习,诸蕴已遍知;“寂静”彰显烦恼已断除;“乐于寂静处”则彰显灭已作证。其余解释,与之前相同。显示巴利原文
Idāni tādisaṃ khīṇāsavaṃ thomento ‘‘sa ve indriyasampanno’’ti tatiyaṃ gāthamāha. Tattha indriyasampannoti yathāvuttehi tīhi lokuttarindriyehi samannāgato, suddhehipi vā paṭippassaddhiladdhehi saddhādīhi indriyehi samannāgato paripuṇṇo, tato eva cakkhādīhi suṭṭhu vūpasantehi nibbisevanehi indriyehi samannāgato. Tenāha ‘‘santo’’ti, sabbakilesapariḷāhavūpasamena upasantoti attho. Santipade ratoti nibbāne abhirato adhimutto. Ettha ca ‘‘indriyasampanno’’ti etena bhāvitamaggatā, pariññātakkhandhatā cassa dassitā. ‘‘Santo’’ti etena pahīnakilesatā, ‘‘santipade rato’’ti etena sacchikatanirodhatāti. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
4. 《长时经》注释(Addhāsuttavaṇṇanā)显示巴利原文
4. Addhāsuttavaṇṇanā
63 在第四经中,“addhā”指的是时间。关于“过去时”等,有两种解说方式:经教解说与阿毗达摩解说。其中,依经教解说,结生之前称为过去时,死亡之后称为未来时;死亡与结生这两个刹那,以及紧接着的无间刹那,称为现在时。依阿毗达摩解说,诸法经历了生、住、灭三刹那后灭去的,为过去时;尚未达到此三刹那的,为未来时;正具足此三刹那的,为现在时。显示巴利原文
63. Catutthe addhāti kālā. Atīto addhātiādīsu dve pariyāyā – suttantapariyāyo, abhidhammapariyāyo ca. Tattha suttantapariyāyena paṭisandhito pubbe atīto addhā nāma, cutito pacchā anāgato addhā nāma, saha cutipaṭisandhīhi tadanantaraṃ paccuppanno addhā nāma. Abhidhammapariyāyena uppādo, ṭhiti, bhaṅgoti ime tayo khaṇe patvā niruddhadhammā atīto addhā nāma, tayopi khaṇe asampattā anāgato addhā nāma, khaṇattayasamaṅgino paccuppanno addhā nāma.
又有另一种方法:此处过去等分别,应当了知可依时、相续、时节、刹那四种角度来划分。其中,依时的分别已如前述。依相续来分:属于同类、由同一时节所生起,或由同一食所生起的色法,即便它们在前后相续中生起,也都属于现在;在此之前,由不同类时节或食所生起的色法,是过去;在此之后的,则是未来。由心生起的色法,在同一个心路过程、同一个速行或同一个等至中生起的,称为现在;在此之前的是过去,在此之后的是未来。由业所生的色法,其各个相续本身并无过去、未来等的分别;不过,它们会资助时节生、食生和心生的色法,因此可依这些被资助的色法来了解其过去等性质。依时节来分:在某一须臾、上午、下午、夜间、白昼等时节当中,依相续而转起的色法,于相应的时节内即是现在;在此之前的是过去,在此之后的是未来。以上是就色法所作的区分。对于名法,则依刹那来分:凡包含在生、住、灭这三刹那范围内的,便是现在;在此之前的是过去,在此之后的是未来。又或者,因与缘的作用皆已过去者,为过去;因的作用已完成、而缘的作用尚未完成者,为现在;因的作用尚未完成,或虽已完成而缘的作用尚未完成者,为未来。显示巴利原文
Aparo nayo – ayañhi atītādivibhāgo addhāsantatisamayakhaṇavasena catudhā veditabbo. Tesu addhāvibhāgo vutto. Santativasena sabhāgā ekautusamuṭṭhānā, ekāhārasamuṭṭhānā ca pubbāpariyavasena vattamānāpi paccuppannā. Tato pubbe visabhāgautuāhārasamuṭṭhānā atītā pacchā anāgatā. Cittajā ekavīthiekajavanaekasamāpattisamuṭṭhānā paccuppannā nāma, tato pubbe atītā, pacchā anāgatā. Kammasamuṭṭhānānaṃ pāṭiyekkaṃ santativasena atītādibhedo natthi, tesaṃyeva pana utuāhāracittasamuṭṭhānānaṃ upatthambhakavasena tassa atītādibhāvo veditabbo. Samayavasena ekamuhuttapubbaṇhasāyanharattidivādīsu samayesu santānavasena pavattamānā taṃtaṃsamaye paccuppannā nāma, tato pubbe atītā, pacchā anāgatā. Ayaṃ tāva rūpadhammesu nayo. Arūpadhammesu pana khaṇavasena uppādādikkhaṇattayapariyāpannā paccuppannā, tato pubbe atītā, pacchā anāgatā. Apica atikkantahetupaccayakiccā atītā, niṭṭhitahetukiccā aniṭṭhitapaccayakiccā paccuppannā, ubhayakiccaṃ asampattā anāgatā. Attano vā kiccakkhaṇe paccuppannā, tato pubbe atītā, pacchā anāgatā. Ettha ca khaṇādikathāva nippariyāyā, sesā pariyāyā. Ayañhi atītādibhedo nāma dhammānaṃ hoti, na kālassa. Atītādibhede pana dhamme upādāya paramatthato avijjamānopi kālo idha teneva vohārena atītotiādinā vuttoti veditabbo.
在偈颂中,于「akkheyyasaññino」(有可说想者)一词里,被宣说、被谈论、被施设的对象,称为「akkheyya」(可说),也就是论事(kathāvatthu),从义理上来说,即是色等五蕴。这曾这样说过:显示巴利原文
Gāthāsu akkheyyasaññinoti ettha akkhāyati, kathīyati, paññāpīyatīti akkheyyaṃ, kathāvatthu, atthato rūpādayo pañcakkhandhā. Vuttañhetaṃ –
「或是围绕过去时之事而谈论,或是围绕未来时……乃至围绕现在时之事而谈论。」(《长部》3.305)显示巴利原文
‘‘Atītaṃ vā addhānaṃ ārabbha kathaṃ katheyya, anāgataṃ vā…pe… paccuppannaṃ vā addhānaṃ ārabbha kathaṃ katheyyā’’ti (dī. ni. 3.305).
比丘们,凡过去的、已灭、已变易的色,对它而言,‘曾是’是它的名目,‘曾是’是它的指示,‘曾是’是它的施设;它既无‘有’的名目,也无‘将有’的名目。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yaṃ, bhikkhave , rūpaṃ atītaṃ niruddhaṃ vipariṇataṃ, ‘ahosī’ti tassa saṅkhā, ‘ahosī’ti tassa samaññā, ‘ahosī’ti tassa paññatti; na tassa saṅkhā atthīti, na tassa saṅkhā bhavissatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.62) –
依此所说的《词道经》,也可阐明此处之义。即:于称为‘可说’的五蕴——也就是论事所依——生起‘我’‘我所’‘天’‘人’‘女’‘男’等想者,名为‘有可说想者’。意思是于五取蕴上生起众生、补特伽罗等想。于此‘可说’(五蕴)上,因渴爱与见之执取而安住;或以贪等八种方式安住:染著者依贪而安住,瞋怒者依瞋而安住,愚痴者依痴而安住,执取邪见者依见而安住,强力者依随眠而安住,被结缚者依慢而安住,陷入不可意者依疑而安住,散乱者依掉举而安住。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ vuttena niruttipathasuttenapi ettha attho dīpetabbo. Evaṃ kathāvatthubhāvena akkheyyasaṅkhāte khandhapañcake ahanti ca mamanti ca devoti ca manussoti ca itthīti ca purisoti ca ādinā pavattasaññāvasena akkheyyasaññino, pañcasu upādānakkhandhesu sattapuggalādisaññinoti attho. Akkheyyasmiṃ taṇhādiṭṭhiggāhavasena patiṭṭhitā, rāgādivasena vā aṭṭhahākārehi patiṭṭhitā. Ratto hi rāgavasena patiṭṭhito hoti, duṭṭho dosavasena, mūḷho mohavasena, parāmaṭṭho diṭṭhivasena, thāmagato anusayavasena, vinibaddho mānavasena, aniṭṭhaṅgato vicikicchāvasena, vikkhepagato uddhaccavasena patiṭṭhito hotīti.
「不遍知可说」:对于三地法中的那个‘可说’,未以三种遍知遍知,由于不遍知它故。「趣入死魔之轭」:即趣入死亡之轭,与死亡相结合,而非脱离系缚。显示巴利原文
Akkheyyaṃ apariññāyāti taṃ akkheyyaṃ tebhūmakadhamme tīhi pariññāhi aparijānitvā tassa aparijānanahetu. Yogamāyanti maccunoti maraṇassa yogaṃ tena saṃyogaṃ upagacchanti, na visaṃyoganti attho.
或者,此处的「轭」(yoga)是指方便。藉由这种方便所施设、铺张开来的,便是如同魔军阵地般的无义之网与烦恼之网,他们正沉陷于其中。正如所说:显示巴利原文
Atha vā yoganti upāyaṃ, tena yojitaṃ pasāritaṃ mārasenaṭṭhāniyaṃ anatthajālaṃ kilesajālañca upagacchantīti vuttaṃ hoti. Tathā hi vuttaṃ –
“我们确实未曾与那统率大军的死神作过任何约定。”(《中部·第三·272》;《本生·第二·22·121》;《导论·103》)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Na hi no saṅgaraṃ tena, mahāsenena maccunā’’ti. (ma. ni. 3.272; jā. 2.22.121; netti. 103);
至此开示了流转,现在为了显示还灭,而说「遍知可说」等句。在此,「ca」字表示简别,藉此显明透过遍知“可说的”所应得的、后文将说的殊胜之处。「遍知」:以与观相应的道智,决断而了知“这是苦”;或者,通过断除与苦相关的烦恼而超越苦,使三种遍知的作用悉得圆满。‘不执有说者’:由于一切“执取”已断,诸漏尽者不执有说者,意为不承认有任何“作者”之类的自我自性。‘以心触证解脱,无上寂静迹’:因从一切行法中解脱,故称“解脱”;由平息一切烦恼热恼而得住“寂静迹”之名的涅槃法,当他以心触证、达到、证得时,便不执有说者。或者,「遍知」这一句,是在说苦谛的遍知现观及集谛的断除现观;而「以心触证解脱,无上寂静迹」这一句,则是在说道谛与灭谛的修习现观及作证现观。意思是:以彻底断除故,从一切烦恼中解脱,此即是圣道,名为解脱。而且这圣道,是以道心而被触证、被修习的;正是依于此道,他触证、作证了无上的寂静之迹——涅槃。显示巴利原文
Ettāvatā vaṭṭaṃ dassetvā idāni vivaṭṭaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘akkheyyañca pariññāyā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ca-saddo byatireke, tena akkheyyaparijānanena laddhabbaṃ vakkhamānameva visesaṃ joteti. Pariññāyāti vipassanāsahitāya maggapaññāya dukkhanti paricchijja jānitvā, tappaṭibaddhakilesappahānena vā taṃ samatikkamitvā tissannampi pariññānaṃ kiccaṃ matthakaṃ pāpetvā. Akkhātāraṃ na maññatīti sabbaso maññanānaṃ pahīnattā khīṇāsavo akkhātāraṃ na maññati, kārakādisabhāvaṃ kiñci attānaṃ na paccetīti attho. Phuṭṭhovimokkho manasā, santipadamanuttaranti yasmā sabbasaṅkhatavimuttattā ‘‘vimokkho’’ti sabbakilesasantāpavūpasamanaṭṭhānatāya ‘‘santipada’’nti laddhanāmo nibbānadhammo phuṭṭho phusito patto, tasmā akkhātāraṃ na maññatīti. Atha vā ‘‘pariññāyā’’ti padena dukkhasaccassa pariññābhisamayaṃ samudayasaccassa pahānābhisamayañca vatvā idāni ‘‘phuṭṭho vimokkho manasā, santipadamanuttara’’nti iminā magganirodhānaṃ bhāvanāsacchikiriyābhisamayaṃ vadati. Tassattho – samucchedavasena sabbakilesehi vimuccatīti vimokkho, ariyamaggo. So panassa maggacittena phuṭṭho phusito bhāvito, teneva anuttaraṃ santipadaṃ nibbānaṃ phuṭṭhaṃ phusitaṃ sacchikatanti.
「具足可说」:在种种灾患逼迫的世间中,对于可说之相,由于已断除颠倒,故从这些灾患中超然解脱,并具足了由遍知“可说”所成就的功德。「审虑而依止」:由于智慧达到广博,对于衣服等资具,他总在衡量、省察之后才去依止受用;再者,因他是已了知诸法者,对于进入境界的任何所缘,皆以六支舍的态度,审虑而依止。「立于法」:安住于无学法,或即安住于涅槃法。「通达了知者」:因已到达所应了知的四谛彼岸,故称为通达了知者。具足如此功德的阿拉汉,于“有”等一切存在中,未来不再有任何后有,因此不落入“人”、“天”等称谓,唯成为不可施设;开示便以此无取般涅槃作为结束。显示巴利原文
Akkheyyasampannoti akkheyyanimittaṃ vividhāhi vipattīhi upaddute loke pahīnavipallāsatāya tato suparimutto akkheyyapariññābhinibbattāhi sampattīhi sampanno samannāgato. Saṅkhāya sevīti paññāvepullappattiyā cīvarādipaccaye saṅkhāya parituletvāva sevanasīlo, saṅkhātadhammattā ca āpāthagataṃ sabbampi visayaṃ chaḷaṅgupekkhāvasena saṅkhāya sevanasīlo. Dhammaṭṭhoti asekkhadhammesu nibbānadhamme eva vā ṭhito. Vedagūti veditabbassa catusaccassa pāraṅgatattā vedagū. Evaṃguṇo arahā bhavādīsu katthaci āyatiṃ punabbhavābhāvato manussadevāti saṅkhyaṃ na upeti, apaññattikabhāvameva gacchatīti anupādāparinibbānena desanaṃ niṭṭhāpesi.
第五 恶行经注释显示巴利原文
5. Duccaritasuttavaṇṇanā
64 “恶行”(duccarita),指邪恶的行为或邪行。以身而行的恶行,或由身所发起的恶行,称为身恶行;对其余的语恶行、意恶行,也应如此理解。这些恶行,可依“施设”来解说,也可依“业道”来解说。其中,依施设来说:违犯在身门所制定的学处,是身恶行;违犯在语门所制定的学处,是语恶行;违犯在身语二门所制定的,是意恶行。这是施设的说法。依业道来说:杀生等三种思,若在身门或语门生起,即是身恶行;同样地,妄语等四种思,是语恶行;贪欲、嗔恚、邪见——这三种与思相应的法,是意恶行。这是业道的说法。显示巴利原文
64. Pañcame duṭṭhu caritāni, duṭṭhāni vā caritāni duccaritāni. Kāyena duccaritaṃ, kāyato vā pavattaṃ duccaritaṃ kāyaduccaritaṃ. Sesesupi eseva nayo . Imāni ca duccaritāni paññattiyā vā kathetabbāni kammapathehi vā. Tattha paññattiyā tāva kāyadvāre paññattasikkhāpadassa vītikkamo kāyaduccaritaṃ, vacīdvāre paññattasikkhāpadassa vītikkamo vacīduccaritaṃ, ubhayattha paññattassa vītikkamo manoduccaritanti ayaṃ paññattikathā. Pāṇātipātādayo pana tisso cetanā kāyadvārepi, vacīdvārepi, uppannā kāyaduccaritaṃ, tathā catasso musāvādādicetanā vacīduccaritaṃ, abhijjhā, byāpādo, micchādiṭṭhīti tayo cetanāsampayuttadhammā manoduccaritanti ayaṃ kammapathakathā.
在偈颂中,唯将证得业道的恶法说为身恶行等,因此为了含摄此之外的恶法,而说“以及其余与过患相应之法”。这里的“与过患相应”(dosasañhita),意即与贪等烦恼相应。其余的文义容易理解。显示巴利原文
Gāthāyaṃ kammapathappattoyeva pāpadhammo kāyaduccaritādibhāvena vuttoti tadaññaṃ pāpadhammaṃ saṅgaṇhituṃ ‘‘yañcaññaṃ dosasañhita’’nti vuttaṃ. Tattha dosasañhitanti rāgādikilesasaṃhitaṃ. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva.
6. 善行经注释显示巴利原文
6. Sucaritasuttavaṇṇanā
65 第六经中,「suṭṭhu caritāni, sundarāni vā caritāni」意为:善行或美好的行,故称‘善行’。以身而行的善行,或由身所发起的善行,即‘身善行’;语善行与意善行,亦依此类推。于此也有两种解说:一依‘施设’,二依‘业道’。依施设说:不违犯身门所制学处,为身善行;不违犯语门所制学处,为语善行;不违犯身、语二门所制学处,为意善行。依业道说:远离杀生等不善行者,所起三种思与三种离,为身善行;远离妄语等不善行者,所起四种思与四种离,为语善行;无贪、无瞋、正见——此三种与思相应之法,为意善行。其余,如前所说。显示巴利原文
65. Chaṭṭhe suṭṭhu caritāni, sundarāni vā caritāni sucaritāni. Kāyena sucaritaṃ, kāyato vā pavattaṃ sucaritaṃ kāyasucaritaṃ. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Idhāpi pana paññattivasena, kammapathavasena cāti duvidhā kathā. Tattha kāyadvāre paññattasikkhāpadassa avītikkamo kāyasucaritaṃ, vacīdvāre paññattasikkhāpadassa avītikkamo vacīsucaritaṃ, ubhayattha paññattassa avītikkamo manosucaritanti ayaṃ paññattikathā. Pāṇātipātādīhi pana viramantassa uppannā tisso cetanāpi viratiyopi kāyasucaritaṃ, musāvādādīhi viramantassa catasso cetanāpi viratiyopi vacīsucaritaṃ, anabhijjhā, abyāpādo, sammādiṭṭhīti tayo cetanāsampayuttadhammā manosucaritanti ayaṃ kammapathakathā. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
7. 清净经注释显示巴利原文
7. Soceyyasuttavaṇṇanā
66 第七经中,「soceyyānī」指清净的状态。「身清净」即身善行;「语清净」与「意清净」亦即语善行和意善行。正如《增支部》经中所说:“其中,何等为身清净?即远离杀生……”等。显示巴利原文
66. Sattame soceyyānīti sucibhāvā. Kāyasoceyyanti kāyasucaritaṃ, vacīmanosoceyyānipi vacīmanosucaritāneva. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘tattha katamaṃ kāyasoceyyaṃ? Pāṇātipātā veramaṇī’’tiādi (a. ni. 3.121-122).
偈颂中,因以‘断’的方式完全舍断一切身恶行,故说‘以身清净者’,即身清净之人。而‘具足清净者’,则指因烦恼止息而具足极为清净的清净成就。其余,如前所说。显示巴利原文
Gāthāyaṃ samucchedavasena pahīnasabbakāyaduccaritattā kāyena sucīti kāyasuci. Soceyyasampannanti paṭippassaddhakilesattā suparisuddhāya soceyyasampattiyā upetaṃ. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
第八部:《牟尼性经》的注释显示巴利原文
8. Moneyyasuttavaṇṇanā
67 第八部中,“牟尼性”(moneyyāni)一词:所谓“牟尼”(muni),指了知此世与他世、自利与利他的人,包括善凡夫、七种有学以及阿拉汉。然而在此处,它专指阿拉汉。因为是牟尼的状态(Munino bhāvā),故称为“牟尼性”,也就是阿拉汉的身、语、意正行。显示巴利原文
67. Aṭṭhame moneyyānīti ettha idhalokaparalokaṃ attahitaparahitañca munātīti muni, kalyāṇaputhujjanena saddhiṃ satta sekkhā arahā ca. Idha pana arahāva adhippeto. Munino bhāvāti moneyyāni, arahato kāyavacīmanosamācārā.
或者说,能导向牟尼状态的修行实践法,即称为“牟尼性”。其详细解释如下:显示巴利原文
Atha vā munibhāvakarā moneyyapaṭipadādhammā moneyyāni. Tesamayaṃ vitthāro –
其中,什么是“身牟尼性”?舍断三种身恶行,是身牟尼性;三种身善行,是身牟尼性;以身为所缘的智慧,是身牟尼性;对身的遍知,是身牟尼性;与遍知俱行的道,是身牟尼性;舍断对身体的欲贪,是身牟尼性;由身行息灭而证入的第四禅那等至,是身牟尼性。显示巴利原文
‘‘Tattha katamaṃ kāyamoneyyaṃ? Tividhakāyaduccaritassa pahānaṃ kāyamoneyyaṃ, tividhaṃ kāyasucaritaṃ kāyamoneyyaṃ, kāyārammaṇe ñāṇaṃ kāyamoneyyaṃ, kāyapariññā kāyamoneyyaṃ, pariññāsahagato maggo kāyamoneyyaṃ, kāyasmiṃ chandarāgappahānaṃ kāyamoneyyaṃ, kāyasaṅkhāranirodhā catutthajjhānasamāpatti kāyamoneyyaṃ.
其中,什么是‘语牟尼性’?舍断四种语恶行为语牟尼性,四种语善行亦为语牟尼性;以语为所缘的智慧为语牟尼性,对语的遍知为语牟尼性,与遍知俱起的道为语牟尼性,舍断对语言的欲贪为语牟尼性,由语行灭尽而入的第二禅那等至为语牟尼性。显示巴利原文
‘‘Tattha katamaṃ vacīmoneyyaṃ? Catubbidhavacīduccaritassa pahānaṃ vacīmoneyyaṃ, catubbidhaṃ vacīsucaritaṃ, vācārammaṇe ñāṇaṃ, vācāpariññā, pariññāsahagato maggo, vācāya chandarāgappahānaṃ, vacīsaṅkhāranirodhā dutiyajjhānasamāpatti vacīmoneyyaṃ.
其中,什么是‘意牟尼性’?舍断三种意恶行为意牟尼性,三种意善行为意牟尼性;以意为所缘的智慧为意牟尼性,对意的遍知为意牟尼性,与遍知俱起的道为意牟尼性,舍断对心意的欲贪为意牟尼性,由心行灭尽而入的想受灭等至为意牟尼性。显示巴利原文
‘‘Tattha katamaṃ manomoneyyaṃ? Tividhamanoduccaritassa pahānaṃ manomoneyyaṃ, tividhaṃ manosucaritaṃ, manārammaṇe ñāṇaṃ, manopariññā, pariññāsahagato maggo, manasmiṃ chandarāgappahānaṃ, cittasaṅkhāranirodhā saññāvedayitanirodhasamāpatti manomoneyya’’nti (mahāni. 14; cūḷani. mettagūmāṇavapucchāniddesa 21).
‘已洗净诸恶’:以最上道之水,彻底涤除了罪恶的垢染。显示巴利原文
Ninhātapāpakanti aggamaggajalena suṭṭhu vikkhālitapāpamalaṃ.
第九部 初欲经注释显示巴利原文
9. Paṭhamarāgasuttavaṇṇanā
68 第九部中,“对任何某人”是不定之说,故指任何一个人,无论在家或出家。“贪未断”:以染着为义的贪,未从根断除,未被圣道令证得未证得的法性。嗔与痴同理。其中,能引堕恶趣的贪嗔痴由初道断除,粗显的欲贪与嗔由第二道断除,其残余由第三道断除,有贪与残余的痴由第四道断除。当它们如此被断除时,与之相应的一切烦恼也同时断除。是故,这些贪等若在任何比丘、比丘尼、优婆塞或优婆夷中未以道断除,他“即被魔束缚”,谓被烦恼魔所缚。从被烦恼魔束缚时起,他便也被业行魔等所缚。“已戴上魔网”:对此未断烦恼者,因未断烦恼故,那名爲魔网的烦恼已被戴上,已装入其心相续之中,意即自己捆缚了自己。或者,魔网可能已戴在他身上。就善法分而言,“已解除”:指魔网已被解开、释放、移除。其余应依相反之义了知。显示巴利原文
68. Navame yassa kassacīti aniyamitavacanaṃ, tasmā yassa kassaci puggalassa gahaṭṭhassa vā pabbajitassa vā. Rāgo appahīnoti rañjanaṭṭhena rāgo samucchedavasena na pahīno, maggena anuppattidhammataṃ na āpādito. Dosamohesupi eseva nayo. Tattha apāyagamanīyā rāgadosamohā paṭhamamaggena, oḷārikā kāmarāgadosā dutiyamaggena, teyeva anavasesā tatiyamaggena, bhavarāgo avasiṭṭhamoho ca catutthamaggena pahīyanti. Evametesu pahīyantesu tadekaṭṭhato sabbepi kilesā pahīyanteva. Evamete rāgādayo yassa kassaci bhikkhussa vā bhikkhuniyā vā upāsakassa vā upāsikāya vā maggena appahīnā. Baddho mārassāti kilesamārena baddhoti vuccati. Yadaggena ca kilesamārena baddho, tadaggena abhisaṅkhāramārādīhipi baddhoyeva hoti. Paṭimukkassa mārapāsoti paṭimukko assa anena appahīnakilesena puggalena tāyeva appahīnakilesatāya mārapāsasaṅkhāto kileso attano cittasantāne paṭimukko pavesito, tena sayaṃ bandhāpitoti attho. Atha vā paṭimukko assa bhaveyya mārapāso. Sukkapakkhe omukkassāti avamukko mocito apanīto assa. Sesaṃ vuttavipariyāyena veditabbaṃ.
这里的偈颂仅从善法分而说。其简要含义为:某位圣者,其贪、嗔、无明已被最上道灭尽,由于修习身、戒、心、慧,在诸已修习的阿拉汉中,他是其中一位内住者、成为梵者,或成为最殊胜者——已证得阿拉汉果。正如其他漏尽者,是具足过去的依止成就而至此位;也正如他们依循不落两端、与戒蕴、定蕴、慧蕴相结合的中道,到达并证得涅槃;或者说,他们如实通达诸蕴等的真实特相,无颠倒地正确了知苦等真实法,对于色等对象,仅以所见等的方式而观照;再者,他们舍离了八种非圣者的言语,只以圣者的言语方式而说,身随语而行,语随身而行。这位圣者也是如此,故称“如来”;因觉悟四圣谛,称“佛陀”;超越了人的怨恨、烦恼怨及自我谴责等畏惧,故称“超越怨怖”。由于断除了一切烦恼与诸行等,阿拉汉、佛陀等圣者被称为“断尽一切者”——他们这样说,这样称扬。显示巴利原文
Idha gāthā sukkapakkhavaseneva āgatā. Tatrāyaṃ saṅkhepattho – yassa ariyapuggalassa rāgadosāvijjā virājitā aggamaggena nirodhitā, taṃ bhāvitakāyasīlacittapaññatāya bhāvitattesu arahantesu aññataraṃ abbhantaraṃ ekaṃ brahmabhūtaṃ brahmaṃ vā seṭṭhaṃ arahattaphalaṃ pattaṃ. Yathā aññe khīṇāsavā pubbūpanissayasampattisamannāgatā hutvā āgatā, yathā ca te antadvayarahitāya sīlasamādhipaññākkhandhasahagatāya majjhimāya paṭipadāya nibbānaṃ gatā adhigatā. Yathā vā te khandhādīnaṃ tathalakkhaṇaṃ yāthāvato paṭivijjhiṃsu, yathā ca te tathadhamme dukkhādayo aviparītato abbhaññiṃsu, rūpādike ca visaye yathā te diṭṭhamattādivaseneva passiṃsu, yathā vā pana te aṭṭha anariyavohāre vajjetvā ariyavohāravaseneva pavattavācā, vācānurūpañca pavattakāyā, kāyānurūpañca pavattavācā, tathā ayampi ariyapuggaloti tathāgataṃ, catusaccabuddhatāya buddhaṃ, puggalaveraṃ kilesaveraṃ attānuvādādibhayañca atikkantanti verabhayātītaṃ. Sabbesaṃ kilesābhisaṅkhārādīnaṃ pahīnattā sabbappahāyinaṃ buddhādayo ariyā āhu kathenti kittentīti.
第十经 第二贪经注释显示巴利原文
10. Dutiyarāgasuttavaṇṇanā
69 69. 第十部中,「已渡」即已渡过,未渡即「未渡」。「海」:指轮回海,或眼处等海。此两者亦因难以填满而如海,故为海。或者,以涌起之义为海,即因烦恼之雨,令有情相续生起烦恼之陷落处,此为义。「有波浪」:指具有愤怒与忧恼之波浪。正如所说:「『波浪畏』,比丘,这是愤怒与忧恼的同义词。」(《如是语》109;《中部》2.162)「有漩涡」:指与五种欲功德漩涡共存的漩涡。正如所说:「『漩涡畏』,比丘,这是五种欲功德的同义词。」(《如是语》109;《中部》2.164;《增支部》4.122)「有海怪、罗刹」:指与那些如凶恶鳄鱼、海怪、鱼鳖、罗刹般、对进入自己范围的有情造成伤害的凡夫人共存。正如所说:「『有海怪、罗刹』,比丘,这是女人的同义词。」(《如是语》109)「已渡」:指以道慧之船,渡过了如上所说之海。「已渡」:即已渡过。「到彼岸者」:指到达了彼海之彼岸、对岸,即寂灭。「立于陆地」:即由此超越了轮回大瀑流与欲等大瀑流,立于陆地、对岸、涅槃之中,这位排除了罪恶的婆罗门被称为「立于陆地」。显示巴利原文
69. Dasame atarīti tiṇṇo, na tiṇṇo atiṇṇo. Samuddanti saṃsārasamuddaṃ, cakkhāyatanādisamuddaṃ vā. Tadubhayampi duppūraṇaṭṭhena samuddo viyāti samuddaṃ. Atha vā samuddanaṭṭhena samuddaṃ, kilesavassanena sattasantānassa kilesasadanatoti attho. Savīcinti kodhūpāyāsavīcīhi savīciṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘vīcibhayanti kho, bhikkhu, kodhūpāyāsassetaṃ adhivacana’’nti (itivu. 109; ma. ni. 2.162). Sāvaṭṭanti pañcakāmaguṇāvaṭṭehi saha āvaṭṭaṃ. Vuttampi cetaṃ ‘‘āvaṭṭabhayanti kho, bhikkhu, pañcannetaṃ kāmaguṇānaṃ adhivacana’’nti (itivu. 109; ma. ni. 2.164; a. ni. 4.122). Sagahaṃ sarakkhasanti attano gocaragatānaṃ anatthajananato caṇḍamakaramacchakacchaparakkhasasadisehi visabhāgapuggalehi sahitaṃ. Tathā cāha ‘‘sagahaṃ sarakkhasanti kho, bhikkhu, mātugāmassetaṃ adhivacana’’nti (itivu. 109). Atarīti maggapaññānāvāya yathāvuttaṃ samuddaṃ uttari. Tiṇṇoti nittiṇṇo. Pāraṅgatoti tassa samuddassa pāraṃ paratīraṃ nirodhaṃ upagato. Thale tiṭṭhatīti tato eva saṃsāramahoghaṃ kāmādimahoghañca atikkamitvā thale paratīre nibbāne bāhitapāpabrāhmaṇo tiṭṭhatīti vuccati.
此处偈颂亦唯依善法分而说。其中,“波浪之畏”即如前所述的波浪之畏——因应由此畏惧,故彼为波浪之畏。“难渡”:极难越过。“已渡越”:已超越。显示巴利原文
Idhāpi gāthā sukkapakkhavaseneva āgatā. Tattha ūmibhayanti yathāvuttaūmibhayaṃ, bhāyitabbaṃ etasmāti taṃ ūmi bhayaṃ. Duttaranti duratikkamaṃ. Accatārīti atikkami.
“超越结者”:由于超越了贪等五种结,并将其断除,故称超越结者。“彼已到尽头,不成为量”:如是成就的阿拉汉,因贪等作为衡量标准的诸法已彻底到尽头,故为已到尽头者;由此,更因戒、定、慧等法蕴的圆满,无人能以“他有如此之戒、如此之定、如此之慧”来衡量他,故不成为量。或者,已达无余涅槃界之义的阿拉汉,因无人能以“他投生于此处”、“他有如此之名姓”来衡量他,故不成为量,不落入任何衡量。由此,他迷乱了死神,我们说死神找不到他的踪迹。如此,说法直至无余涅槃界而圆满。应知此品中:第一、第五、第六经讲说轮回;第二、第七、第八经讲说还灭;其余诸经则兼说轮回与还灭二者。显示巴利原文
Saṅgātigoti rāgādīnaṃ pañcannaṃ saṅgānaṃ atikkantattā pahīnattā saṅgātigo. Atthaṅgato so na pamāṇametīti so evaṃbhūto arahā rāgādīnaṃ pamāṇakaradhammānaṃ accantameva atthaṃ gatattā atthaṅgato, tato eva sīlādidhammakkhandhapāripūriyā ca ‘‘ediso sīlena samādhinā paññāyā’’ti kenaci pamiṇituṃ asakkuṇeyyo pamāṇaṃ na eti, atha vā anupādisesanibbānasaṅkhātaṃ atthaṃ gato so arahā ‘‘imāya nāma gatiyā ṭhito, ediso ca nāmagottenā’’ti pamiṇituṃ asakkuṇeyyatāya pamāṇaṃ na eti na upagacchati. Tato eva amohayi maccurājaṃ, tena anubandhituṃ asakkuṇeyyoti vadāmīti anupādisesanibbānadhātuyāva desanaṃ niṭṭhāpesi. Iti imasmiṃ vagge paṭhamapañcamachaṭṭhesu vaṭṭaṃ kathitaṃ, dutiyasattamaaṭṭhamesu vivaṭṭaṃ, sesesu vaṭṭavivaṭṭaṃ kathitanti veditabbaṃ.
3. 第三品显示巴利原文
3. Tatiyavaggo
第一经 邪见者经注释显示巴利原文
1. Micchādiṭṭhikasuttavaṇṇanā
70 在第三品第一经中,「被我所见」(diṭṭhā mayā)意为:被我所见,即我以遍知眼与天眼——以此二眼所见,是现量了知的。由此遮止了依传闻等,而此义稍后即于经文中说明。「具足身恶行」指以身恶行而具足。「诽谤圣者」指对佛陀等圣者,乃至在家入流者,以毁坏其功德、捏造不实之事而诽谤、辱骂、指责之人。「邪见者」指持有颠倒见解之人。「邪见业受持者」指因邪见而受持种种业,并于以邪见为根本的身业等方面,也促使他人受持之人。在此,虽已通过语恶行与意恶行将诽谤圣者及邪见包含在内,然经文复作宣说,是为显示其极重之罪过。因为诽谤圣者具有极为重大的罪过,犹如无间业一般。正如所说:显示巴利原文
70. Tatiyavaggassa paṭhame diṭṭhā mayāti mayā diṭṭhā, mama samantacakkhunā dibbacakkhunā cāti dvīhipi cakkhūhi diṭṭhā paccakkhato viditā. Tena anussavādiṃ paṭikkhipati, ayañca attho idāneva pāḷiyaṃ āgamissati. Kāyaduccaritena samannāgatāti kāyaduccaritena samaṅgībhūtā. Ariyānaṃ upavādakāti buddhādīnaṃ ariyānaṃ antamaso gihisotāpannānampi guṇaparidhaṃsanena abhūtabbhakkhānena upavādakā akkosakā garahakā. Micchādiṭṭhikāti viparītadassanā. Micchādiṭṭhikammasamādānāti micchādassanahetu samādinnanānāvidhakammā ye ca, micchādiṭṭhimūlakesu kāyakammādīsu aññepi samādapenti. Ettha ca vacīmanoduccaritaggahaṇeneva ariyūpavādamicchādiṭṭhīsu gahitāsu punavacanaṃ mahāsāvajjabhāvadassanatthaṃ nesaṃ. Mahāsāvajjo hi ariyūpavādo ānantariyasadiso. Yathāha –
「舍利弗,譬如一位戒具足、定具足、慧具足的比丘,可能于现法即证得阿拉汉。然而,舍利弗,我说,有如此成就之人,若不舍弃那种言语,不舍弃那种心,不舍弃那种见,便如被搬运之物品一般,弃置于地狱之中。」显示巴利原文
‘‘Seyyathāpi, sāriputta, bhikkhu sīlasampanno, samādhisampanno, paññāsampanno, diṭṭheva dhamme aññaṃ ārādheyya; evaṃsampadamidaṃ, sāriputta, vadāmi taṃ vācaṃ appahāya, taṃ cittaṃ appahāya, taṃ diṭṭhiṃ appaṭinissajjitvā yathābhataṃ nikkhitto evaṃ niraye’’ti (ma. ni. 1.149).
再者,无有比邪见过患更大者。正如所说:显示巴利原文
Micchādiṭṭhito ca mahāsāvajjataraṃ nāma aññaṃ natthi. Yathāha –
诸比丘,我不见有任何一法,其罪过如邪见这般深重。诸比丘,邪见是罪过中之最。(增支部1.310)显示巴利原文
‘‘Nāhaṃ, bhikkhave, aññaṃ ekadhammampi samanupassāmi, yaṃ evaṃ mahāsāvajjataraṃ yathayidaṃ, bhikkhave, micchādiṭṭhi. Micchādiṭṭhiparamāni, bhikkhave, vajjānī’’ti (a. ni. 1.310).
而「taṃ kho pana」等语句,是为了更明确地显示前面所说的道理是自身可亲证的,因而如此开始。这也容易理解。显示巴利原文
Taṃkho panātiādi yathāvuttassa atthassa attapaccakkhabhāvaṃ daḷhataraṃ katvā dassetuṃ āraddhaṃ. Tampi suviññeyyameva.
偈颂中,「邪志心安置」:指依贪欲等将心不如理地安住。「说邪语」:指以妄语等说邪语。「造作邪业」:指以杀生等造作身业。或者,「邪志心安置」:指以邪见将心颠倒安住。其余两句也是如此。
现在为了说明他这样行恶行的原因,接着说「少闻」:意思是缺乏能利益自己与他人的闻法。「作非福」:因此,由于对圣法不善巧,便成为造恶者、有罪之人。「在此生命短暂」:指在此人世间,寿命极为短促。正如经文所说:‘活得长久的人,也不过活百岁或多一点’(长部2.93;相应部1.145),‘人的寿命短促’(相应部1.145;大义释10)。因此,多闻的智者,应迅速修集福业,成为生天者或立足涅槃者。然而,少闻而作非福的人,在身坏命终后,因愚痴而生于地狱。显示巴利原文
Gāthāsu micchā manaṃ paṇidhāyāti abhijjhādīnaṃ vasena cittaṃ ayoniso ṭhapetvā. Micchāvācañca bhāsiyāti micchā musāvādādivasena vācaṃ bhāsitvā. Micchā kammāni katvānāti pāṇātipātādivasena kāyakammāni katvā. Atha vā micchā manaṃ paṇidhāyāti micchādiṭṭhivasena cittaṃ viparītaṃ ṭhapetvā. Sesapadadvayepi eseva nayo. Idānissa tathā duccaritacaraṇe kāraṇaṃ dasseti appassutoti, attano paresañca hitāvahena sutena virahitoti attho. Apuññakaroti tato eva ariyadhammassa akovidatāya kibbisakārī pāpadhammo. Appasmiṃ idha jīviteti idha manussaloke jīvite atiparitte. Tathā cāha ‘‘yo ciraṃ jīvati, so vassasataṃ appaṃ vā bhiyyo’’ti (dī. ni. 2.93; saṃ. ni. 1.145), ‘‘appamāyu manussāna’’nti (saṃ. ni. 1.145; mahāni. 10) ca. Tasmā bahussuto sappañño sīghaṃ puññāni katvā saggūpago nibbānapatiṭṭho vā hoti. Yo pana appassuto apuññakaro, kāyassa bhedā duppañño nirayaṃ so upapajjatīti.
第二、正见者经注释显示巴利原文
2. Sammādiṭṭhikasuttavaṇṇanā
71 第二经中的义理,应依与第一经所说相反的方式来了知。显示巴利原文
71. Dutiye paṭhamasutte vuttavipariyāyena attho veditabbo.
3. 出离经的注释显示巴利原文
3. Nissaraṇiyasuttavaṇṇanā
72 第三经中,「出离相关的」(nissaraṇiyā)即与出离相应。「界」(dhātuyā)指七种空的自性。「欲」(kāmānaṃ)指烦恼欲与事欲两类。或者说,「欲」即烦恼欲。因为从烦恼欲出离了,也就从事欲出离,并无别异。此义已说——显示巴利原文
72. Tatiye nissaraṇiyāti nissaraṇapaṭisaṃyuttā. Dhātuyoti sattasuññasabhāvā. Kāmānanti kilesakāmānañceva vatthukāmānañca. Atha vā kāmānanti kilesakāmānaṃ. Kilesakāmato hi nissaraṇā vatthukāmehipi nissaraṇaṃyeva hoti, na aññathā. Vuttañhetaṃ –
Na te kāmā yāni citrāni loke——世间种种可爱之物,并非所谓之欲;
人的欲(kāma),即是内心的贪著意图(saṅkapparāga);
「Tiṭṭhanti citrāni tatheva loke」:世间的种种美妙事物本身依然如故地存在,
「Athettha dhīrā vinayanti chanda’nti」:而在这点上,有智慧的人会调伏对它们的贪欲(chanda)。」
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Na te kāmā yāni citrāni loke, Saṅkapparāgo purisassa kāmo; Tiṭṭhanti citrāni tatheva loke, Athettha dhīrā vinayanti chanda’’nti. (a. ni. 6.63);
“出离”(nissaraṇa)指离去、脱离。“出离”(nekkhamma)则指初禅,尤其应视之为以不净为所缘。若有人以此禅那为观照基础,对诸行作思择,证得第三道,以不来道现证涅槃,则其心便究竟彻底地从欲中出离;这应理解为从欲中最殊胜的出离。“诸色”(rūpānaṃ)指色法,连同所缘,依善、果报、唯作之别,涵盖一切色界法。“无色”(āruppa)指无色界禅那。有人将“诸欲”(kāmānaṃ)解释为一切欲界法,将“出离”(nekkhamma)解释为五种色界禅那;此说不见于注疏,亦不合理。“已生”(bhūta)指已经产生的。“有为”(saṅkhata)指由诸缘和合共作而成的。“缘生”(paṭiccasamuppanna)指从因缘而生的。以此三词,即能无余地穷尽三界一切法。“灭”(nirodha)指涅槃。此处,第一个界指对欲的遍知,第二个界指对色的遍知,第三个界指对一切有为的遍知,即超越一切有。显示巴利原文
Nissaraṇanti apagamo. Nekkhammanti paṭhamajjhānaṃ, visesato taṃ asubhārammaṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yo pana taṃ jhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā saṅkhāre sammasitvā tatiyamaggaṃ patvā anāgāmimaggena nibbānaṃ sacchikaroti, tassa cittaṃ accantameva kāmehi nissaṭanti idaṃ ukkaṭṭhato kāmānaṃ nissaraṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Rūpānanti rūpadhammānaṃ, visesena saddhiṃ ārammaṇehi kusalavipākakiriyābhedato sabbesaṃ rūpāvacaradhammānaṃ. Āruppanti arūpāvacarajjhānaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘kāmāna’’nti padassa ‘‘sabbesaṃ kāmāvacaradhammāna’’nti atthaṃ vadanti. ‘‘Nekkhamma’’nti ca ‘‘pañca rūpāvacarajjhānānī’’ti. Taṃ aṭṭhakathāsu natthi, na yujjati ca. Bhūtanti jātaṃ. Saṅkhatanti samecca sambhuyya paccayehi kataṃ. Paṭiccasamuppannanti kāraṇato nibbattaṃ. Tīhipi padehi tebhūmake dhamme anavasesato pariyādiyati. Nirodhoti nibbānaṃ. Ettha ca paṭhamāya dhātuyā kāmapariññā vuttā, dutiyāya rūpapariññā, tatiyāya sabbasaṅkhatapariññā sabbabhavasamatikkamo vutto.
在偈颂中,“了知欲的出离”,意思是了知“这是欲的出离”——“像这样从欲中出离”。“超越”意为以此为超越的方法或途径,即了知作为超越之途径的无色界。“一切行寂止”指一切行于此平息、寂止,即涅槃,他接触、证得涅槃。其余与前文所述方法相同。显示巴利原文
Gāthāsu kāmanissaraṇaṃ ñatvāti ‘‘idaṃ kāmanissaraṇaṃ – evañca kāmato nissaraṇa’’nti jānitvā. Atikkamati etenāti atikkamo, atikkamanūpāyo, taṃ atikkamaṃ āruppaṃ ñatvā. Sabbe saṅkhārā samanti vūpasamanti etthāti sabbasaṅkhārasamatho, nibbānaṃ, taṃ phusaṃ phusanto. Sesaṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayameva.
4. 更寂静经注疏显示巴利原文
4. Santatarasuttavaṇṇanā
73 第四经中,“色”指色界法。“更寂静”意为极其寂静。色界法因镇伏烦恼、舍弃寻等粗重支分,且为定地,故称寂静;无色界定则因支分寂静与所缘寂静,较他们更为寂静,故称“更寂静”。“灭”指涅槃。即使与第四无色界定相比,果等至亦因仅存诸行残存的微细性、止息了烦恼尘劳并以涅槃为所缘而更加寂静,更何况是一切行完全寂止的涅槃呢?因此说“比无色界定,灭更寂静”。显示巴利原文
73. Catutthe rūpehīti rūpāvacaradhammehi. Santatarāti atisayena santā. Rūpāvacaradhammā hi kilesavikkhambhanato vitakkādioḷārikaṅgappahānato samādhibhūmibhāvato ca santā nāma, āruppā pana tehipi aṅgasantatāya ceva ārammaṇasantatāya ca atisayena santavuttikā, tena santatarāti vuttā. Nirodhoti nibbānaṃ. Saṅkhārāvasesasukhumabhāvappattitopi hi catutthāruppato phalasamāpattiyova santatarā kilesadarathapaṭipassaddhito nibbānārammaṇato ca, kimaṅgaṃ pana sabbasaṅkhārasamatho nibbānaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘āruppehi nirodho santataro’’ti.
在偈颂中,“赴色者”指前往色有的众生。因为此处的“色”即是色有,正如“修习通往色界再生之道”等表述一般。“住于无色者”指住于无色界者。“不知灭、还复受生之人”——以此显示了相较于色界、无色界之法,灭是更为寂静的实相。“不住于无色者”指不因对无色的贪染而执著于无色有中的人,意为能够遍知。“若人于灭而解脱”中的“ye”仅是虚词。其余部分的解释方式与前相同。显示巴利原文
Gāthāsu rūpūpagāti rūpabhavūpagā. Rūpabhavo hi idha rūpanti vutto, ‘‘rūpūpapattiyā maggaṃ bhāvetī’’tiādīsu viya. Arūpaṭṭhāyinoti arūpāvacarā. Nirodhaṃ appajānantā, āgantāro punabbhavanti etena rūpārūpāvacaradhammehi nirodhassa santabhāvameva dasseti. Arūpesu asaṇṭhitāti arūparāgena arūpabhavesu appatiṭṭhahantā, tepi parijānantāti attho. Nirodhe ye vimuccantīti ettha yeti nipātamattaṃ. Sesaṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayameva.
第五经 子经注释显示巴利原文
5. Puttasuttavaṇṇanā
74 74. 第五经中,“子”指亲生之子,亦可包含养子等。“存在”即指正住于世间、现有者——也就是于此世间可得见者。因其实际有故称“存在”,因其昭然有故称“存在”。“超生子”指凭自身功德而生,超越父母,意即功德胜于父母之子。“随生子”指功德与父母相顺而生,意即功德与父母同伦之子。“劣生子”指功德低于父母而生,意即功德不及父母之子。为分别说明那些令子胜于父母、与父母同等或不及父母的种种功德,乃以欲问之心发问:“诸比丘,云何是超生子?”等等,并从“诸比丘,此处有子……”等语展开详释。显示巴利原文
74. Pañcame puttāti atrajā orasaputtā, dinnakādayopi vā. Santoti bhavantā saṃvijjamānā lokasminti imasmiṃ loke upalabbhamānā. Atthibhāvena santo, pākaṭabhāvena vijjamānā. Atijātoti attano guṇehi mātāpitaro atikkamitvā jāto, tehi adhikaguṇoti attho. Anujātoti guṇehi mātāpitūnaṃ anurūpo hutvā jāto, tehi samānaguṇoti attho. Avajātoti guṇehi mātāpitūnaṃ adhamo hutvā jāto, tehi hīnaguṇoti attho. Yehi pana guṇehi yutto mātāpitūnaṃ adhiko samo hīnoti ca adhippeto, te vibhajitvā dassetuṃ ‘‘kathañca, bhikkhave, putto atijāto hotī’’ti kathetukamyatāya pucchaṃ katvā ‘‘idha, bhikkhave, puttassā’’tiādinā niddeso āraddho.
其中,在“未皈依佛”等句中,“佛陀”是指:由通达以无碍智为相的无上解脱所培育的蕴相续;或是依于觉了诸谛、成就正觉而被施设为殊胜有情的那个补特伽罗——这便是佛陀。如所说:显示巴利原文
Tattha na buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ gatātiādīsu buddhoti sabbadhammesu appaṭihatañāṇanimittānuttaravimokkhādhigamaparibhāvitaṃ khandhasantānaṃ, sabbaññutaññāṇapadaṭṭhānaṃ vā saccābhisambodhiṃ upādāya paññattiko sattātisayo buddho. Yathāha –
「佛陀」——即彼世尊、自生者、无师者,于往昔未曾听闻之法中,自己证悟了诸谛,并于此中获得一切知智,亦于诸力得自在。(《小部·彼岸道赞颂释义》97;《无碍解道》1.162)显示巴利原文
‘‘Buddhoti yo so bhagavā sayambhū anācariyako pubbe ananussutesu dhammesu sāmaṃ saccāni abhisambujjhi, tattha ca sabbaññutaṃ patto, balesu ca vasībhāva’’nti (cūḷani. pārāyanatthutigāthāniddesa 97; paṭi. ma. 1.161) –
以上是从意义上对「佛陀」所作的阐明。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ tāva atthato buddhavibhāvanā.
从字面来看,由于彻底灭尽了烦恼之眠及其余习,故为已觉者、已醒者,因此称为「佛陀」;又或因觉性充分绽放,故为已觉者、明觉者,因此称为「佛陀」;是觉了真理的人,故为「佛陀」;是令他人觉悟的人,故为「佛陀」——应通过如是等方式了知。正如所说:显示巴利原文
Byañjanato pana savāsanāya kilesaniddāya accantavigamena buddhavā paṭibuddhavāti buddho, buddhiyā vā vikasitabhāvena buddhavā vibuddhavāti buddho, bujjhitāti buddho, bodhetāti buddhoti evamādinā nayena veditabbo. Yathāha –
觉悟诸谛,故为佛陀;觉悟众生,故为佛陀;以一切知故,为佛陀;以见一切故,为佛陀;不待他教故,为佛陀;觉性显发故,为佛陀;以‘诸漏尽者’之义,名为佛陀;以‘断尽烦恼’之义,名为佛陀;一向离贪故,为佛陀;一向离嗔故,为佛陀;一向离痴故,为佛陀;一向无垢故,为佛陀;已入一乘道故,为佛陀;独自证得无上正觉故,为佛陀;摧破无觉、获得觉慧故,为佛陀。这个‘佛陀’之名,既非母亲所起,亦非父亲所起,非兄弟姊妹所起,非亲友大臣所起,非骨肉亲眷所起,非沙门婆罗门所起,也非诸天所起;而是诸佛世尊在菩提树下,证得一切知智的当下,亲自证悟的究竟解脱之施设,这就是‘佛陀’。(《小部·彼岸道赞颂释义》97;《无碍解道》1.162)显示巴利原文
‘‘Bujjhitā saccānīti buddho, bodhetā pajāyāti buddho, sabbaññutāya buddho, sabbadassāvitāya buddho, anaññaneyyatāya buddho, visavitāya buddho, khīṇāsavasaṅkhātena buddho, nirupakkilesasaṅkhātena buddho, ekantavītarāgoti buddho, ekantavītadosoti buddho, ekantavītamohoti buddho, ekantanikkilesoti buddho, ekāyanamaggaṃ gatoti buddho, eko anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambuddhoti buddho, abuddhivihatattā buddhipaṭilābhāti buddho, buddhoti cetaṃ nāmaṃ na mātarā kataṃ, na pitarā kataṃ, na bhātarā kataṃ, na bhaginiyā kataṃ, na mittāmaccehi kataṃ, na ñātisālohitehi kataṃ, na samaṇabrāhmaṇehi kataṃ, na devatāhi kataṃ, atha kho vimokkhantikametaṃ buddhānaṃ bhagavantānaṃ bodhiyā mūle saha sabbaññutaññāṇassa paṭilābhā sacchikā paññatti, yadidaṃ buddho’’ti (cūḷani. pārāyanatthutigāthāniddesa 97; paṭi. ma. 1.162).
‘皈依’意为破坏:破坏、灭除、摧毁一切灾祸、一切恶趣之苦、一切轮回之苦,因此说‘破坏故为皈依’。‘已皈依’是指:怀着‘佛陀世尊是我们的皈依、归处、庇护、依怙,是祸害的除灭者、利益的施与者’这样的深心,去投靠、亲近、侍奉、承事佛陀世尊;或者,以‘我们如是了知、如是觉悟’的方式前往、接近,便称为皈依佛陀。与此相反,则为不皈依佛陀。显示巴利原文
Hiṃsatīti saraṇaṃ, sabbaṃ anatthaṃ apāyadukkhaṃ sabbaṃ saṃsāradukkhaṃ hiṃsati vināseti viddhaṃsetīti attho. Saraṇaṃ gatāti ‘‘buddho bhagavā amhākaṃ saraṇaṃ gati parāyaṇaṃ paṭisaraṇaṃ aghassa hantā hitassa vidhātā’’ti iminā adhippāyena buddhaṃ bhagavantaṃ gacchāma bhajāma sevāma payirupāsāma. Evaṃ vā jānāma bujjhāmāti evaṃ gatā upagatā buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ gatā. Tappaṭikkhepena na buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ gatā.
‘皈依法’的意思是:对于已证得圣道、现证寂灭、依教奉行的人,法能使其不堕四恶趣而安住、持守,因此称为‘法’。就义理而言,这‘法’即指圣道与涅槃。正如所说:显示巴利原文
Dhammaṃ saraṇaṃ gatāti adhigatamagge sacchikatanirodhe yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipajjamāne catūsu apāyesu apatamāne katvā dhāretīti dhammo. So atthato ariyamaggo ceva nibbānañca. Vuttañhetaṃ –
诸比丘,于一切有为法中,圣八支道被称为最上者。(广说见《增支部》4.34)显示巴利原文
‘‘Yāvatā, bhikkhave, dhammā saṅkhatā, ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo tesaṃ aggamakkhāyatī’’ti vitthāro (a. ni. 4.34).
不但如此,不仅是圣道与涅槃,连同圣果的教理也是如此。在《伞年轻人天宫》中这样说过:显示巴利原文
Na kevalañca ariyamagganibbānāni eva, apica kho ariyaphalehi saddhiṃ pariyattidhammo ca. Vuttañhetaṃ chattamāṇavakavimāne –
离贪、不动、无忧,
此法是无为、不违逆的;
此甘美、娴熟、善分别的,
你应皈依此法。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Rāgavirāgamanejamasokaṃ, Dhammamasaṅkhatamappaṭikūlaṃ; Madhuramimaṃ paguṇaṃ suvibhattaṃ, Dhammamimaṃ saraṇatthamupehī’’ti. (vi. va. 887);
其中,“离贪”说的是道;“不动、无忧”说的是果;“无为法”说的是涅槃;“不违逆、甘甜、娴熟、善加分别”则是以三藏所开显的一切法蕴。依上述方式,以此法为皈依而趣向者,即是“皈依法”;反之,则不皈依法。显示巴利原文
Tattha hi rāgavirāgoti maggo kathito, anejamasokanti phalaṃ, dhammasaṅkhatanti nibbānaṃ, appaṭikūlaṃ madhuramimaṃ paguṇaṃ suvibhattanti piṭakattayena vibhattā sabbadhammakkhandhā kathitā. Taṃ dhammaṃ vuttanayena saraṇanti gatā dhammaṃ saraṇaṃ gatā. Tappaṭikkhepena na dhammaṃ saraṇaṃ gatā.
因见与戒的聚合而和合,故称“僧伽”。就义理而言,即八种圣人的集合。正如同一《天宫事》中所说:显示巴利原文
Diṭṭhisīlasaṅghātena saṃhatoti saṅgho. So atthato aṭṭhaariyapuggalasamūho. Vuttañhetaṃ tasmiṃ eva vimāne –
“于四种清净的士夫双、八种见法者中,所作布施称为大果;你应为此而亲近、皈依此僧伽。”
所说的“以彼僧伽为皈依”而亲近者,即是皈依僧伽;与此相违者,即是不皈依僧伽。
在此,为了能善巧地行持皈依,应当了知这些内容:什么是皈依、皈依的行为、谁是皈依者、皈依的种类、果报、杂染、失坏以及清净。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yattha ca dinna mahapphalamāhu, Catūsu sucīsu purisayugesu; Aṭṭha ca puggala dhammadasā te,
其中,先就词义而言:“皈依”有“杀灭”的意思。因为皈依者正是通过这样的皈依行为,来杀灭、摧毁怖畏、恐惧、苦、恶趣与烦恼。这是对三宝的称呼。或者也可以说,佛陀因为引导有益之行、遮止无益之事,从而杀灭了众生的怖畏,故称为“皈依”;法因为能将人从“有”的沙漠旷野中救度出来,并给予安稳的依止,故称为“皈依”;僧伽因为能令微小的因获得广大的果报,故称为“皈依”。因此,依此义理,三宝即是皈依。由这种净信与最极尊重,以三宝为所归处而摧毁烦恼的心念活动,就是“皈依的行为”。具备这种心的有情,就是“皈依者”,他正是以刚刚所说的那种心,这样想:“这三宝是我的皈依处,是我所归投依靠的。”而前去亲近。应当这样来理解“皈依、皈依的行为、谁是皈依者”这三项内容。显示巴利原文
Saṅghamimaṃ saraṇatthamupehī’’ti. (vi. va. 888);
就种类而言,「皈依」有两种:世间皈依与出世间皈依。其中,出世间皈依是已见谛者于证道刹那,断除皈依的染污,以涅槃为所缘,并在作用上成就了对三宝全体的皈依;世间皈依则是凡夫通过镇伏皈依的染污,以佛陀等的功德为所缘而成就。归根结底,此皈依即是于佛陀等皈依境生起信心,以及由此信心所生的正见;在十种福业事中,这被称为「见正直业」。显示巴利原文
Taṃ saṅghaṃ vuttanayena saraṇanti gatā saṅghaṃ saraṇaṃ gatā. Tappaṭikkhepena na saṅghaṃ saraṇaṃ gatāti.
「皈依」依四种方式成就:献身、以此为皈依处、作弟子及礼拜。其中,「献身」是指:‘从今日起,我将自身献给佛陀、献给法、献给僧伽’,如此在佛等面前舍弃自我。「以此为皈依处」是指:‘从今日起,我是皈依佛者、皈依法者、皈依僧伽者,请您忆持我’,如此确立以此为皈依处的状态。「作弟子」是指:‘从今日起,我是佛陀的弟子、法的弟子、僧伽的弟子,请您忆持我’,如此进入弟子的身份。「礼拜」是指:‘从今日起,我只对佛等三种皈依境行问讯、起迎、合掌之礼及适当的行为,请您忆持我’,如此向佛等作最上恭敬。确实,实行这四种行相中的任何一种,皈依即已受持。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca saraṇagamanakosallatthaṃ saraṇaṃ saraṇagamanaṃ, yo ca saraṇaṃ gacchati saraṇagamanappabhedo, phalaṃ, saṃkileso, bhedo, vodānanti ayaṃ vidhi veditabbo.
此处,先从词义来说:「皈依」意为「杀戮」。因为皈依者正是通过这一皈依的行为,来杀戮、摧毁怖畏、恐惧、苦、恶趣与烦恼。这是对三宝的称呼。或者也可说,佛陀因于有益之事上运为、于无益之事上遮止,从而杀戮了众生之怖畏,故称「皈依」;法因能将人从「有」的荒漠旷野中救度出来,给予安稳依止,故称「皈依」;僧伽因能令微小之因获得广大果报,故称「皈依」。因此,依此道理,三宝即是皈依。由这种净信与至极尊重而摧伏烦恼、以三宝为依归处的心念活动,便是「皈依的行为」。具足此心的有情,便是「皈依者」,他正是以此前所说的心,作如是念:‘此三宝是我的皈依处,是我所归投依靠的。’而前往亲近。应当如此理解「皈依、皈依的行为、谁是皈依者」这三项内容。显示巴利原文
Tattha padatthato tāva hiṃsatīti saraṇaṃ, saraṇagatānaṃ teneva saraṇagamanena bhayaṃ santāsaṃ dukkhaṃ duggatiṃ parikilesaṃ hanati vināsetīti attho, ratanattayassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Atha vā hite pavattanena ahitā nivattanena ca sattānaṃ bhayaṃ hiṃsatīti buddho saraṇaṃ, bhavakantārato uttāraṇena assāsadānena ca dhammo, appakānampi kārānaṃ vipulaphalapaṭilābhakaraṇena saṅgho. Tasmā imināpi pariyāyena ratanattayaṃ saraṇaṃ. Tappasādataggarutāhi vihatakileso tapparāyaṇatākārappavatto cittuppādo saraṇagamanaṃ. Taṃsamaṅgisatto saraṇaṃ gacchati, vuttappakārena cittuppādena ‘‘etāni me tīṇi ratanāni saraṇaṃ, etāni parāyaṇa’’nti evaṃ upetīti attho. Evaṃ tāva saraṇaṃ saraṇagamanaṃ, yo ca saraṇaṃ gacchatīti idaṃ tayaṃ veditabbaṃ.
从类别上分为两种:世间皈依与出世间皈依。其中,出世间皈依是见谛者在道刹那,通过断除皈依的随烦恼,以涅槃为所缘,从作用上于整个三宝圆满成就;世间皈依则是凡夫,通过镇伏皈依的随烦恼,以佛陀功德等为所缘而成就。从义理上说,它就是对佛陀等对象生起信心,并以信心为根本的正见,在十种福行事中被称为「见正直业」。显示巴利原文
Pabhedato pana duvidhaṃ saraṇagamanaṃ – lokiyaṃ, lokuttarañca. Tattha lokuttaraṃ diṭṭhasaccānaṃ maggakkhaṇe saraṇagamanupakkilesasamucchedena ārammaṇato nibbānārammaṇaṃ hutvā kiccato sakalepi ratanattaye ijjhati, lokiyaṃ puthujjanānaṃ saraṇagamanupakkilesavikkhambhanena ārammaṇato buddhādiguṇārammaṇaṃ hutvā ijjhati. Taṃ atthato buddhādīsu vatthūsu saddhāpaṭilābho , saddhāmūlikā ca sammādiṭṭhi dasasu puññakiriyavatthūsu diṭṭhijukammanti vuccati.
此皈依以四种方式生起:献身、以此处为皈依处、成为弟子、合掌礼敬。其中,『献身』是指:『从今日起,我将自身献给佛陀、献给法、献给僧伽』,如此在佛等面前舍弃自身。『以此处为皈依处』是指:『从今日起,我为皈依佛者、皈依法者、皈依僧伽者,请尊者鉴知』,如此确立以此为皈依处的状态。『成为弟子』是指:『从今日起,我为佛陀弟子、为法弟子、为僧伽弟子,请尊者鉴知』,如此进入弟子的身份。『合掌礼敬』是指:『从今日起,我仅对佛、法、僧三宝行问讯、起迎、合掌之礼及应作之事,请尊者鉴知』,如此受持对佛陀等的最上恭敬。确实,实行这四种行相中的任何一种,皈依即得受持。显示巴利原文
Tayidaṃ catudhā pavattati – attasanniyyātanena, tapparāyaṇatāya, sissabhāvūpagamanena, paṇipātenāti. Tattha attasanniyyātanaṃ nāma ‘‘ajja ādiṃ katvā ahaṃ attānaṃ buddhassa niyyātemi, dhammassa, saṅghassā’’ti evaṃ buddhādīnaṃ attapariccajanaṃ. Tapparāyaṇaṃ nāma ‘‘ajja ādiṃ katvā ahaṃ buddhaparāyaṇo, dhammaparāyaṇo, saṅghaparāyaṇo iti maṃ dhārehī’’ti evaṃ tappaṭisaraṇabhāvo tapparāyaṇatā. Sissabhāvūpagamanaṃ nāma ‘‘ajja ādiṃ katvā ahaṃ buddhassa antevāsiko, dhammassa, saṅghassa iti maṃ dhāretū’’ti evaṃ sissabhāvassa upagamanaṃ. Paṇipāto nāma ‘‘ajja ādiṃ katvā ahaṃ abhivādanapaccuṭṭhānaañjalikammasāmīcikammaṃ buddhādīnaṃ eva tiṇṇaṃ vatthūnaṃ karomi iti maṃ dhāretū’’ti evaṃ buddhādīsu paramanipaccakāro. Imesañhi catunnaṃ ākārānaṃ aññataraṃ karontena gahitaṃ eva hoti saraṇagamanaṃ.
此外,『我将自身献给世尊,献给法,献给僧伽;我献出生命,我的自身与生命都已献出,尽形寿我皈依佛陀。佛陀是我的皈依、我的救护、我的庇护。』如此也应知为『献身』。而『成为弟子』,应如大迦叶长老的皈依那样看待:『我若得见导师,便是见世尊;我若得见善逝,便是见世尊;我若得见正自觉者,便是见世尊。』显示巴利原文
Apica ‘‘bhagavato attānaṃ pariccajāmi, dhammassa, saṅghassa attānaṃ pariccajāmi, jīvitaṃ pariccajāmi, pariccatto eva me attā jīvitañca, jīvitapariyantikaṃ buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchāmi, buddho me saraṇaṃ tāṇaṃ leṇa’’nti evampi attasanniyyātanaṃ veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Satthārañca vatāhaṃ passeyyaṃ, bhagavantameva passeyyaṃ; sugatañca vatāhaṃ passeyyaṃ, bhagavantameva passeyyaṃ; sammāsambuddhañca vatāhaṃ passeyyaṃ; bhagavantameva passeyya’’nti (saṃ. ni. 2.154) evaṃ mahākassapattherassa saraṇagamanaṃ viya sissabhāvūpagamanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
我将游行,从此村到彼村,从此城到彼城;
礼敬正自觉者,以及法的善法性。”(相应部1.246;经集194)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘So ahaṃ vicarissāmi, gāmā gāmaṃ purā puraṃ; Namassamāno sambuddhaṃ, dhammassa ca sudhammata’’nti. (saṃ. ni. 1.246; su. ni. 194) –
因此,应当了知,如同旷野夜叉等的皈依那样,那便是‘以彼为归宿’。至于‘那时,梵摩婆罗门从座起身,将上衣搭于一肩,以头面顶礼世尊的双足,用口亲吻世尊的双足,用双手揉抚,并自报姓名:“我是梵摩婆罗门,乔达摩尊者!我是梵摩婆罗门,乔达摩尊者!”’(《中部》2.394)应当了知,这便是礼敬的方式。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ āḷavakādīnaṃ saraṇagamanaṃ viya tapparāyaṇatā veditabbā. ‘‘Atha kho, brahmāyu, brāhmaṇo uṭṭhāyāsanā ekaṃsaṃ uttarāsaṅgaṃ karitvā bhagavato pādesu sirasā nipatitvā bhagavato pādāni mukhena ca paricumbati, pāṇīhi ca parisambāhati, nāmañca sāveti ‘brahmāyu ahaṃ, bho gotama, brāhmaṇo, brahmāyu ahaṃ, bho gotama, brāhmaṇo’’’ti (ma. ni. 2.394) evaṃ paṇipāto daṭṭhabbo.
这种礼敬,依其对象可分为四种:出于亲属、出于恐惧、出于老师、出于应供者。其中,唯有出于对应供者的礼敬才构成皈依,其余三种则不构成。因为皈依是以最殊胜者为境而领受的,也只会因舍弃对此最胜者的信而坏失。因此,若人作意:‘世间一切众生中,此者最尊、最上应供’,以此想而行礼敬,便领受了皈依;若以亲属想、恐惧想或老师想行礼敬,则不领受皈依。对于已如是领受皈依的近事男或近事女,即使向外道中的出家人礼敬,心想‘这是我的亲属’,他的皈依也不会坏失;更何况是向未出家的人礼敬,就更不会坏失了。同样地,出于恐惧而礼敬国王——因为国王受国人尊崇,若不礼敬,他可能做出不利之事——这也不会坏失皈依。同样地,即使向任何教导某种技艺的外道礼敬,心想‘这是我的老师’,皈依也不会坏失。应当这样理解皈依的种种差别。显示巴利原文
So panesa ñātibhayācariyadakkhiṇeyyavasena catubbidho hoti. Tattha dakkhiṇeyyapaṇipātena saraṇagamanaṃ hoti, na itarehi. Seṭṭhavaseneva hi saraṇaṃ gayhati, seṭṭhavasena bhijjati. Tasmā yo ‘‘ayameva loke sabbasattuttamo aggadakkhiṇeyyo’’ti vandati, teneva saraṇaṃ gahitaṃ hoti, na ñātibhayācariyasaññāya vandantena. Evaṃ gahitasaraṇassa upāsakassa vā upāsikāya vā aññatitthiyesu pabbajitampi ‘‘ñātako me aya’’nti vandato saraṇaṃ na bhijjati, pageva apabbajitaṃ. Tathā rājānaṃ bhayena vandato. So hi raṭṭhapūjitattā avandiyamāno anatthampi kareyyāti. Tathā yaṃkiñci sippaṃ sikkhāpakaṃ titthiyampi ‘‘ācariyo me aya’’nti vandatopi na bhijjati. Evaṃ saraṇagamanassa pabhedo veditabbo.
此处,出世间皈依的异熟果是四种沙门果,一切苦的灭尽则是它的利益果。正如偈颂所说:显示巴利原文
Ettha ca lokuttarassa saraṇagamanassa cattāri sāmaññaphalāni vipākaphalaṃ, sabbadukkhakkhayo ānisaṃsaphalaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ –
凡是皈依佛、法、僧,以正慧观见四圣谛的人,
他以正慧照见四圣谛:
即苦、苦的集起、苦的超越;
以及那导向苦的止息的圣八支道。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yo ca buddhañca dhammañca, saṅghañca saraṇaṃ gato; Cattāri ariyasaccāni, sammappaññāya passati. ‘‘Dukkhaṃ dukkhasamuppādaṃ, dukkhassa ca atikkamaṃ; Ariyaṃ caṭṭhaṅgikaṃ maggaṃ, dukkhūpasamagāminaṃ. ‘‘Etaṃ kho saraṇaṃ khemaṃ, etaṃ saraṇamuttamaṃ; Etaṃ saraṇamāgamma, sabbadukkhā pamuccatī’’ti. (dha. pa. 190-192);
再者,不执取为恒常等,亦应知是它的利益果报。正如所说:显示巴利原文
Apica niccato anupagamanādīnipi etassa ānisaṃsaphalaṃ veditabbaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ –
比丘们,这是不可能的,绝无此道理:一位具足见的人,不会执取任何行法为常、执取为乐,不会执取任何法为我,不会夺取母亲的生命,不会夺取父亲的生命,不会夺取阿拉汉的生命,不会以嗔恨心使如来出血,不会分裂僧团,也不会推举其他导师。这种情形不存在。显示巴利原文
‘‘Aṭṭhānametaṃ, bhikkhave, anavakāso, yaṃ diṭṭhisampanno puggalo kañci saṅkhāraṃ niccato upagaccheyya, sukhato upagaccheyya, kañci dhammaṃ attato upagaccheyya, mātaraṃ jīvitā voropeyya, pitaraṃ jīvitā voropeyya, arahantaṃ jīvitā voropeyya, duṭṭhacitto tathāgatassa lohitaṃ uppādeyya, saṅghaṃ bhindeyya, aññaṃ satthāraṃ uddiseyya netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjatī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.127-128; a. ni. 1.268-276; vibha. 809).
至于世间的皈依,其所获得的果报便是生命的圆满与财富的圆满。正如经中所说:显示巴利原文
Lokiyassa pana saraṇagamanassa bhavasampadāpi bhogasampadāpi phalameva. Vuttañhetaṃ –
那些已皈依佛陀的人,
他们不会往赴恶趣之处;
舍弃人身之后,
他们将遍满天众。」
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Ye keci buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ gatāse, Na te gamissanti apāyabhūmiṃ; Pahāya mānusaṃ dehaṃ, Devakāyaṃ paripūressantī’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 1.37);
此外也曾提到:显示巴利原文
Aparampi vuttaṃ –
那时,帝释天率领八万天神一同来到尊者大目犍连处……尊者大目犍连对立于一旁的帝释天这样说道:“帝释天,皈依佛陀,实为殊胜。帝释天,正因皈依佛陀,此间一类众生在身坏命终之后,往生善趣、天界。那些天人在十方面超过其他天神:天寿、天容、天乐、天名、天威、天色、天声、天香、天味、天触……皈依法……皈依僧……天触。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Atha kho sakko devānamindo asītiyā devatāsahassehi saddhiṃ yenāyasmā mahāmoggallāno tenupasaṅkami…pe… ekamantaṃ ṭhitaṃ kho sakkaṃ devānamindaṃ āyasmā mahāmoggallāno etadavoca – ‘sādhu kho, devānaminda, buddhaṃ saraṇagamanaṃ hoti. Buddhaṃ saraṇagamanahetu kho, devānaminda, evamidhekacce sattā kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā sugatiṃ saggaṃ lokaṃ upapajjanti. Te aññe deve dasahi ṭhānehi adhigaṇhanti – dibbena āyunā, dibbena vaṇṇena, dibbena sukhena, dibbena yasena, dibbena ādhipateyyena, dibbehi rūpehi, dibbehi saddehi, dibbehi gandhehi, dibbehi rasehi, dibbehi phoṭṭhabbehi…pe… dhammaṃ, saṅghaṃ…pe… phoṭṭhabbehī’’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.341).
也应依据《韦拉马经》等(《增支部》9.20)来了知皈依果报的差别。如此,应知皈依之果报。显示巴利原文
Velāmasuttādivasenapi (a. ni. 9.20) saraṇagamanassa phalaviseso veditabbo. Evaṃ saraṇagamanassa phalaṃ veditabbaṃ.
这其中,世间的皈依会因对三宝的无知、疑惑、邪智等而受到染污,因此没有大光明,影响也不广大。而出世间的皈依则没有染污。世间的皈依又有两种差别:有过失的与无过失的。其中,有过失的那种,是由于将自己托付给其他导师等而产生的,会带来不可意的果报。无过失的那种,是在寿尽之时,因为没有异熟,所以没有果报。出世间的皈依则完全没有这些差别。因为在其他生命存在中,圣弟子也不会去认取其他导师。应如此了知皈依的染污与差别。显示巴利原文
Lokiyasaraṇagamanañcettha tīsu vatthūsu aññāṇasaṃsayamicchāñāṇādīhi saṃkilissati, na mahājutikaṃ hoti na mahāvipphāraṃ. Lokuttarassa pana saṃkileso natthi. Lokiyassa ca saraṇagamanassa duvidho bhedo – sāvajjo, anavajjo ca. Tattha sāvajjo aññasatthārādīsu attasanniyyātanādīhi hoti, so aniṭṭhaphalo. Anavajjo kālakiriyāya, so avipākattā aphalo. Lokuttarassa pana nevatthi bhedo. Bhavantarepi hi ariyasāvako aññaṃ satthāraṃ na uddisatīti evaṃ saraṇagamanassa saṃkileso ca bhedo ca veditabbo.
清净也只是就世间的皈依而言的:因为有染污,所以能从那种染污中获得清净。而出世间的皈依则是恒常清净的。显示巴利原文
Vodānampi ca lokiyasseva yassa hi saṃkileso, tasseva tato vodānena bhavitabbaṃ. Lokuttaraṃ pana niccavodānamevāti.
「杀生」:其中,「有情」指本性自然坠落的存在。对这样的有情,「断堕」是指在它存续的途中加以中断,即不让它缓慢死去,而令其迅速死亡。又或者,「断堕」是通过刀杖等强力压制而令其死亡,故名为「杀」。这里所说的「有情」,在概念上是指诸蕴的相续,也就是通常所说的“众生”;在究竟意义上,则是指色命根和非色命根。因为当色命根被破坏时,其余的非色命根也会由于与之关联而毁灭。对于那个有情,若于其中持有情想,并由身门或语门发起以切断其命根为目标的加行之思,此杀害思即是杀生。为何如此?因为在此思所推动的过程中,作为命根所依的那些大种,由于加行而引生后续大种;这些后续大种不再像之前那样生起,唯生起不相似的大种,因此能发动如此加行之思即是杀生。因为受到加行影响的大种,不如先前的大种那样明净,故而不能作为同类大种之因。显示巴利原文
Pāṇātipātāti ettha pāṇassa saraseneva patanasabhāvassa antarā eva atipātanaṃ atipāto, saṇikaṃ patituṃ adatvā sīghaṃ pātananti attho. Atikkamma vā satthādīhi abhibhavitvā pātanaṃ atipāto, pāṇaghātoti vuttaṃ hoti. Pāṇoti cettha khandhasantāno, yo sattoti voharīyati, paramatthato rūpārūpajīvitindriyaṃ. Rūpajīvitindriye hi vikopite itarampi taṃsambandhatāya vinassatīti. Tasmiṃ pana pāṇe pāṇasaññino jīvitindriyupacchedakaupakkamasamuṭṭhāpikā kāyavacīdvārānaṃ aññataradvārappavattā vadhakacetanā pāṇātipāto. Yāya hi cetanāya pavattamānassa jīvitindriyassa nissayabhūtesu upakkamakaraṇahetukamahābhūtapaccayā uppajjanakamahābhūtā purimasadisā na uppajjanti, visadisā eva uppajjanti, sā tādisappayogasamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā pāṇātipāto. Laddhūpakkamāni hi bhūtāni purimabhūtāni viya na visadānīti samānajātiyānaṃ kāraṇāni na hontīti. ‘‘Kāyavacīdvārānaṃ aññataradvārappavattā’’ti idaṃ manodvāre pavattāya vadhakacetanāya pāṇātipātatāsambhavadassanaṃ. Kulumbasuttepi hi ‘‘idhekacco samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā iddhimā ceto vasippatto aññissā kucchigataṃ gabbhaṃ pāpakena manasā anupekkhitā hotī’’ti vijjāmayiddhi adhippetā. Sā ca vacīdvāraṃ muñcitvā na sakkā nibbattetunti vacīdvāravaseneva nippajjati. Ye pana ‘‘bhāvanāmayiddhi tattha adhippetā’’ti vadanti, tesaṃ vādo kusalattikavedanattikavitakkattikabhūmantarehi virujjhati.
这种杀生,若是对无功德的有情,譬如畜生道等,所杀的是微小有情,罪过便轻;若所杀的是体形大的有情,罪过则重。何以故?因为加行有大小轻重之别。即便加行相同,由于所缘境重大等因缘,罪过也会更重。对于有功德的有情,如人类等,若所杀有情功德微少,罪过便轻;若功德广大,罪过则重。然而,在身体大小与功德程度相当时,则依烦恼与加行的轻柔而罪过轻,依烦恼与加行的猛烈而罪过重。显示巴利原文
Svāyaṃ pāṇātipāto guṇarahitesu tiracchānagatādīsu khuddake pāṇe appasāvajjo, mahāsarīre mahāsāvajjo. Kasmā? Payogamahantatāya. Payogasamattepi vatthumahantatādīhi mahāsāvajjo, guṇavantesu manussādīsu appaguṇe pāṇe appasāvajjo, mahāguṇe mahāsāvajjo . Sarīraguṇānaṃ pana samabhāve sati kilesānaṃ upakkamānañca mudutāya appasāvajjo, tibbatāya mahāsāvajjo.
于此,由加行重大、所缘境重大等而导致的罪过重,应当了知,那是从这些条件(缘)所生起的思本身具有强力状态来理解的。当所意图的加行被迅速完成而达成其作用,且速行心多次生起、获得惯行之时,此决意思的加行即具重大性。纵然有时对小有情与大有情的加行相同,但在杀害大所缘境时,所生起的思更为猛烈,故所缘境之重大也成为思强而有力的原因。如此,这两种情况皆是以思的强有力而成为大罪的原因。同样地,在所杀有情具大功德时,如同于彼处会生起强有力的利益思一般,基于福田的殊胜成就,损害思也会强烈而猛烈地生起,所以在那情形中,当知其大罪性。是故,即使加行与所缘境等不重大,然依功德重大等条件,凭借思的强有力性,也应了知有大罪性。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca payogavatthumahantatādīhi mahāsāvajjatā tehi paccayehi uppajjamānāya cetanāya balavabhāvato veditabbā. Yathādhippetassa payogassa sahasā nipphādanavasena sakiccasādhikāya bahukkhattuṃ pavattajavanehi laddhāsevanāya ca sanniṭṭhāpakacetanāya payogassa mahantabhāvo. Satipi kadāci khuddake ceva mahante ca pāṇe payogassa samabhāve mahantaṃ hanantassa cetanā tibbatarā uppajjatīti vatthumahantatāpi cetanāya balavabhāvassa kāraṇaṃ. Iti ubhayampetaṃ cetanābalavabhāveneva mahāsāvajjatāya hetu hoti. Tathā hantabbassa mahāguṇabhāve tattha pavattaupakāracetanā viya khettavisesanipphattiyā apakāracetanāpi balavatī tibbatarā uppajjatīti tassa mahāsāvajjatā daṭṭhabbā. Tasmā payogavatthuādipaccayānaṃ amahattepi guṇamahantatādipaccayehi cetanāya balavabhāvavaseneva mahāsāvajjatā veditabbā.
杀生具足五缘:有情、有情想、杀心、加行、由此而死。具足这五缘的,即构成杀生;若缺任何一缘,则非杀生。此中,有情想与杀心亦属前行分,加行则由杀生之思所发动。杀生的方法有六种:亲手、令使、弃掷、安设、明咒、神通。其中,亲手所作,名为亲手。依敕令而作,名为令使。以箭、矛等投掷而行,名为弃掷。挖掘陷阱等而安设,名为安设。如阿闼婆尼咒术等,以诵咒而行加行,名为明咒。依仗牙齿所啮等由业异熟所成的神通力而为之者,名为神通所成的方法。显示巴利原文
Tassa pāṇo, pāṇasaññitā, vadhakacittaṃ, upakkamo, tena maraṇanti pañca sambhārā. Pañcasambhārayutto pāṇātipātoti pañcasambhārāvinimutto daṭṭhabbo. Tesu pāṇasaññitāvadhakacittāni pubbabhāgiyānipi honti, upakkamo vadhakacetanāsamuṭṭhāpito. Tassa cha payogā – sāhatthiko, āṇattiko, nissaggiyo, thāvaro, vijjāmayo, iddhimayoti. Tesu sahatthena nibbatto sāhatthiko. Paresaṃ āṇāpanavasena pavatto āṇattiko. Ususattiādīnaṃ nissajjanavasena pavatto nissaggiyo. Opātakhaṇanādivasena pavatto thāvaro. Āthabbaṇikādīnaṃ viya mantaparijappanapayogo vijjāmayo. Dāṭhākoṭṭanādīnaṃ viya kammavipākajiddhimayo.
有人问:在刹那即灭的诸行中,谁是杀者?谁是被杀者?若说心与心所法的相续是杀者或被杀者,因它不是色法,不能被切割、破坏,也不可能被伤害;若说色法的相续是杀者或被杀者,它没有思心所,如同朽木,不能以切割等方式构成杀生,就如对着一具死尸,并不成杀生一样。再者,依所说,杀生的加行——如打击等,应是对过去的诸行、未来的诸行,或现在的诸行而发动。可是,过去与未来的诸行根本不存在,无有自性;现在的诸行是刹那性的,自性即灭、正趣消亡,因此加行似乎毫无用处。又,若消亡是无因的,则打击等加行便不能成为死因;而诸行又无主动力,那么加行究竟属于谁?从刹那性来看,与杀意同时生起的心念当下即灭,根本无法持续到加行完成之时,那么杀生的业缚又系缚在谁身上呢?显示巴利原文
Etthāha – khaṇe khaṇe nirujjhanasabhāvesu saṅkhāresu, ko hantā, ko vā haññati? Yadi cittacetasikasantāno, so arūpitāya na chedanabhedanādivasena vikopanasamattho, nāpi vikopanīyo, atha rūpasantāno, so acetanatāya kaṭṭhakaliṅgarūpamoti na tattha chedanādinā pāṇātipāto labbhati, yathā matasarīre. Payogopi pāṇātipātassa yathāvutto paharaṇappahārādiko atītesu saṅkhāresu bhaveyya anāgatesu paccuppannesu vā. Tattha na tāva atītesu anāgatesu ca sambhavati tesaṃ avijjamānasabhāvattā, paccuppannesu ca saṅkhārānaṃ khaṇikattā saraseneva nirujjhanasabhāvatāya vināsābhimukhesu nippayojano payogo siyā, vināsassa ca kāraṇarahitattā na paharaṇappahārādippayogahetukaṃ maraṇaṃ, nirīhattā ca saṅkhārānaṃ kassa so payogo, khaṇikabhāvena vadhādhippāyasamakālameva bhijjanakassa yāva kiriyāpariyosānakālamanavaṭṭhānato kassa vā pāṇātipāto kammabandhoti?
答曰:具足如前所述杀思、被称为‘众生’的诸行之聚,即是杀者。由他所发动的杀加行为缘,失去暖、识、命根,成为‘死’这一假名的所依——那个若不施加杀加行便本应如先前一样继续转起的色法与无色法之聚,即是被杀者;或者说,心与心所法的相续本身即为被杀者。纵然这些不在杀加行的直接触碰范围内,但在五蕴有中,由宣说色相续的过失,通过对四大种所造色施以加行,令命根截断,该相续便随之断灭。因此,杀生并非不可能,亦非无因,加行也并非无用。正因对现在的诸行施以加行,原本接着应当生起的诸行之聚便不再生起;而且,这里并非将刹那诸行的刹那灭视为‘死亡’,相续的死如前所述是有因的,所以死亡并非无因。再者,诸行虽无主动力,但依缘生起后,仅以其存在,便能决定产生各自相应的果,它们只是制造因缘,正如说‘灯能照亮’一般,于是假立‘杀者’之名。而且,并非只执取与杀意同时存在的那一心与心所聚为杀生,而是执取依相续而转起者,因此杀生的业缚确实成立,如同灯等依相续而转起的道理。显示巴利原文
Vuccate – yathāvuttavadhakacetanāsamaṅgī saṅkhārānaṃ puñjo sattasaṅkhāto hantā. Tena pavattitavadhappayoganimittaṃ apagatusmāviññāṇajīvitindriyo matoti vohārassa vatthubhūto yathāvuttavadhappayogākaraṇe pubbe viya uddhaṃ pavattanāraho rūpārūpadhammapuñjo haññati, cittacetasikasantāno eva vā. Vadhappayogāvisayabhāvepi tassa pañcavokārabhave rūpasantānādhīnavuttitāya bhūtarūpesu katappayogavasena jīvitindriyavicchedena sopi vicchijjatīti na pāṇātipātassa asambhavo, nāpi ahetuko, na ca payogo nippayojano. Paccuppannesu saṅkhāresu katappayogavasena tadanantaraṃ uppajjanārahassa saṅkhārakalāpassa tathā anuppattito khaṇikānañca saṅkhārānaṃ khaṇikamaraṇassa idha maraṇabhāvena anadhippetattā santatimaraṇassa ca yathāvuttanayena sahetukabhāvato na ahetukaṃ maraṇaṃ, nirīhakesupi saṅkhāresu yathāpaccayaṃ uppajjitvā atthibhāvamatteneva attano attano anurūpaphaluppādananiyatāni kāraṇāniyeva karontīti vuccati, yathā padīpo pakāsetīti, tatheva ghātakavohāro. Na ca kevalassa vadhādhippāyasahabhuno cittacetasikakalāpassa pāṇātipāto icchito, santānavasena vattamānasseva pana icchitoti attheva pāṇātipātena kammabandho. Santānavasena vattamānānañca padīpādīnaṃ atthakiriyāsiddhi dissatīti. Ayañca vicāraṇā adinnādānādīsupi yathāsambhavaṃ vibhāvetabbā. Tasmā pāṇātipātā. Na paṭiviratāti appaṭiviratā.
不与取,即取走未给予之物,亦即夺取他人财物、偷盗、窃贼。其中,‘未给与’指他人所持有之物,对于此物,他人若随己意取用,则无惩罚、不受谴责。对那样的他人持有物,生起‘这是他人之物’的想法,并发动能取得该物品的方便,此偷盗思即是不与取。对于低劣的他人所有物,罪过轻;对于殊胜的,罪过重。何以故?因物品殊胜故。同样,对于微小的他人所有物,罪过轻;对于大件的,罪过重。何以故?因物品重大及加行重大故。当事物相当时,对功德较胜者的所有物,罪过重;对功德较劣者的所有物,则相对罪过轻。当事物与功德皆相当时,若烦恼与加行轻微,罪过轻;若猛烈,则罪过重。显示巴利原文
Adinnassa ādānaṃ adinnādānaṃ, parassa haraṇaṃ theyyaṃ corikāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tattha adinnanti parapariggahitaṃ, yattha paro yathākāmakāritaṃ āpajjanto adaṇḍāraho anupavajjo ca hoti. Tasmiṃ parapariggahite parapariggahitasaññino tadādāyakaupakkamasamuṭṭhāpikā theyyacetanā adinnādānaṃ. Taṃ hīne parasantake appasāvajjaṃ, paṇīte mahāsāvajjaṃ. Kasmā? Vatthupaṇītatāya. Tathā khuddake parasantake appasāvajjaṃ, mahante mahāsāvajjaṃ. Kasmā? Vatthumahantatāya payogamahantatāya ca. Vatthusamatte pana sati guṇādhikānaṃ santake vatthusmiṃ mahāsāvajjaṃ, taṃtaṃguṇādhikaṃ upādāya tato tato hīnaguṇassa santake vatthusmiṃ appasāvajjaṃ. Vatthuguṇānaṃ pana samabhāve sati kilesānaṃ payogassa ca mudubhāve appasāvajjaṃ, tibbabhāve mahāsāvajjaṃ.
“不与取”具五支:他人所有物、作他人所有想、盗心、加行、由此取去。有六种方法,即亲手等。这些方法依情境,随“偷盗取”、“强夺取”、“谋划取”、“隐蔽取”、“欺诳取”等取的方式而转起。其中,藉咒语驱使而取他人财物者,称为咒术所成的方法;不依咒语,而依神通威力所起之身语加行取得他人财物者,应知为神通所成的方法。显示巴利原文
Tassa pañca sambhārā – parapariggahitaṃ, parapariggahitasaññitā, theyyacittaṃ, upakkamo, tena haraṇanti. Cha payogā sāhatthikādayova. Te ca kho yathānurūpaṃ theyyāvahāro, pasayhāvahāro, parikappāvahāro, paṭicchannāvahāro, kusāvahāroti imesaṃ avahārānaṃ vasena pavattā. Ettha ca mantaparijappanena parasantakaharaṇaṃ vijjāmayo payogo. Vinā mantena tādisena iddhānubhāvasiddhena kāyavacīpayogena parasantakassa ākaḍḍhanaṃ iddhimayo payogoti veditabbo.
“于欲”指于淫欲之行中。“邪行”即一向被呵责的卑劣行。就特征而言,以非正法欲为意图,从身门转起、违越不应行处之思,即是欲邪行。其中,不应行处是指:对男子而言,有母护女等十种、财买妇等十种,共二十种女人;对女子而言,除王护、罚护两种,以及财买妇等十种,计十二种女人之外的其他男子。此邪行若于无戒德等功德者行于不应行处,罪小;若于具足戒德等功德者,罪大。即使对象无功德,若以强力侵犯而行邪行,罪亦大;若双方意愿相同,罪则小。即使意愿相同,烦恼与加行轻微者罪小,猛利者罪大。它具有四种构成支:不应行对象、于彼起行欲之心、行欲的加行、以及以道入道的领受。其中,出于己意而作者,具三支;被强力所迫者,亦具三支;如此合观虽为四支,然事之成就唯依三支。加行唯有一种,即亲手。显示巴利原文
Kāmesūti methunasamācāresu. Micchācāroti ekantanindito lāmakācāro. Lakkhaṇato pana asaddhammādhippāyena kāyadvārappavattā agamanīyaṭṭhānavītikkamacetanā kāmesu micchācāro. Tattha agamanīyaṭṭhānaṃ nāma purisānaṃ tāva māturakkhitādayo dasa, dhanakkītādayo dasāti vīsati itthiyo, itthīsu pana dvinnaṃ sārakkhasaparidaṇḍānaṃ, dasannañca dhanakkītādīnanti dvādasannaṃ itthīnaṃ aññapurisā. Svāyaṃ micchācāro sīlādiguṇarahite agamanīyaṭṭhāne appasāvajjo, sīlādiguṇasampanne mahāsāvajjo. Guṇarahitepi ca abhibhavitvā micchā carantassa mahāsāvajjo, ubhinnaṃ samānacchandatāya appasāvajjo. Samānacchandabhāvepi kilesānaṃ upakkamānañca mudutāya appasāvajjo, tibbatāya mahāsāvajjo. Tassa cattāro sambhārā – agamanīyavatthu, tasmiṃ sevanacittaṃ, sevanapayogo, maggenamaggappaṭipattiadhivāsananti. Tattha attano ruciyā pavattitassa tayo, balakkārena pavattitassa tayoti anavasesaggahaṇena cattāro daṭṭhabbā, atthasiddhi pana tīheva. Eko payogo sāhatthikova.
“妄语”者,以欺诳为先、损毁他人利益之身语加行;或依欺骗意图所起,能令他人误解之身语加行的思,即是妄语。又另一义释:“妄”谓不实之事,“语”谓说为真实、如实,令他人了知。是故,对不实之事,欲令他人信以为真而发起如此告知的加行之思,是为妄语。显示巴利原文
Musāti visaṃvādanapurekkhārassa atthabhañjako kāyavacīpayogo, visaṃvādanādhippāyena panassa paravisaṃvādakakāyavacīpayogasamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā musāvādo. Aparo nayo musāti abhūtaṃ vatthu, vādoti tassa bhūtato tacchato viññāpanaṃ. Tasmā atathaṃ vatthuṃ tathato paraṃ viññāpetukāmassa tathāviññāpanapayogasamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā musāvādo.
所破坏的利益若微小,则罪过轻;若重大,则罪过重。再者,在家者因吝啬己物,不愿给予而说“没有”等,由此生起的妄语是轻罪;作为证人,以歪曲利益的方式而说,则是重罪。出家人得到少许油或酥油后,以嬉笑之心说“今天村里油流得像河一样”,像这样以夸张方式说出的妄语是轻罪;若以“未见言见”等方式而说,则是重罪。同样,被妄语所损之人,其功德少则罪过轻,功德大则罪过重。并且,依据烦恼的轻微或猛烈,也相应有轻罪与重罪的区别。显示巴利原文
So yamatthaṃ bhañjati, tassa appatāya appasāvajjo, mahantatāya mahāsāvajjo. Apica gahaṭṭhānaṃ attano santakaṃ adātukāmatāya natthīti ādinayappavatto appasāvajjo, sakkhinā hutvā atthabhañjanavasena vutto mahāsāvajjo. Pabbajitānaṃ appakampi telaṃ vā sappiṃ vā labhitvā hasādhippāyena ‘‘ajja gāme telaṃ nadī maññe sandatī’’ti pūraṇakathānayena pavatto appasāvajjo, adiṭṭhaṃyeva pana ‘‘diṭṭha’’ntiādinā nayena vadantānaṃ mahāsāvajjo. Tathā yassa atthaṃ bhañjati, tassa appaguṇatāya appasāvajjo, mahāguṇatāya mahāsāvajjo. Kilesānaṃ mudutibbatāvasena ca appasāvajjamahāsāvajjatā labbhateva.
它具足四支:不实之事、欺诳心、相应的加行、以及对方领会其义。因为即使以欺诳的意图付诸行动,若对方未能领会其义,欺诳便不成就,所以对方领会其义亦为一支。然而,有些人说:“说虚妄语、欺诳心、对方领会其义,这三者即是支分。”但是,如果对方根钝,经过思考后始明其义,由于决定的思心所已先生起,故在引发行动的思心所刹那,妄语业便已结成。显示巴利原文
Tassa cattāro sambhārā – atathaṃ vatthu, visaṃvādanacittaṃ, tajjo vāyāmo, parassa tadatthavijānananti. Visaṃvādanādhippāyena hi payoge katepi parena tasmiṃ atthe aviññāte visaṃvādanassa asijjhanato parassa tadatthavijānanampi eko sambhāro veditabbo. Keci pana ‘‘abhūtavacanaṃ, visaṃvādanacittaṃ, parassa tadatthavijānananti tayo sambhārā’’ti vadanti. Sace pana paro dandhatāya vicāretvā tamatthaṃ jānāti, sanniṭṭhāpakacetanāya pavattattā kiriyāsamuṭṭhāpakacetanākkhaṇeyeva musāvādakammunā bajjhati.
“酒”有五种酒:谷酒、饼酒、米酒、酵母酒、混合材酒。“迷罗耶”有五种发酵饮:花酒、果酒、蜜酒、糖酒、混合材酒。这两类都因为能令人迷醉,所以称为“酒类”。以某种思心所而饮用它的,由于它是放逸的原因,所以是“放逸处”。从相上说,从以上所说的名为酒类的种子开始,以迷醉为条件,由身门生起的放逸思心所,就是“饮酒放逸处”。它有四个构成条件:确认是酒类、想喝的心念、相应的努力、吞咽下去。因为一定是以不善心来喝,所以绝对是有罪的。圣弟子即使不知道那是酒,也不会让它进入嘴里,何况是知道的。喝半合左右的量是轻罪,喝大约半斗的量是重罪,比那更多的量是重罪;如果喝到能让身体摇晃,进而去做屠杀村庄等恶事,就是重罪。就恶业来说,杀生若杀漏尽者,是重罪;不与取若偷漏尽者的物品,是重罪;邪行若侵犯漏尽的比丘尼,是重罪;妄语若以妄语造成僧团分裂,是重罪;饮酒若喝到能让身体摇晃,进而做屠杀村庄等事,是重罪。在所有这些当中,以妄语造成僧团分裂的罪最重,因为造了此业,会在地狱中受苦整整一劫。显示巴利原文
Surāti piṭṭhasurā, pūvasurā, odanasurā, kiṇṇapakkhittā, sambhārasaṃyuttāti pañca surā. Merayanti pupphāsavo, phalāsavo, madhvāsavo, guḷāsavo sambhārasaṃyuttoti pañca āsavā. Tadubhayampi madanīyaṭṭhena majjaṃ. Yāya cetanāya taṃ pivati, sā pamādakāraṇattā pamādaṭṭhānaṃ. Lakkhaṇato pana yathāvuttassa surāmerayasaṅkhātassa majjassa bījato paṭṭhāya madavasena kāyadvārappavattā pamādacetanā surāmerayamajjapamādaṭṭhānaṃ. Tassa majjabhāvo, pātukamyatācittaṃ, tajjo vāyāmo, ajjhoharaṇanti cattāro sambhārā. Akusalacitteneva cassa pātabbato ekantena sāvajjabhāvo . Ariyasāvakānaṃ pana vatthuṃ ajānantānampi mukhaṃ na pavisati, pageva jānantānaṃ. Aḍḍhapasatamattassa pānaṃ appasāvajjaṃ, addhāḷhakamattassa pānaṃ tato mahantaṃ mahāsāvajjaṃ, kāyasañcālanasamatthaṃ bahuṃ pivitvā gāmaghātakādikammaṃ karontassa mahāsāvajjameva. Pāpakammañhi pāṇātipātaṃ patvā khīṇāsave mahāsāvajjaṃ, adinnādānaṃ patvā khīṇāsavassa santake mahāsāvajjaṃ, micchācāraṃ patvā khīṇāsavāya bhikkhuniyā vītikkame, musāvādaṃ patvā musāvādena saṅghabhede, surāpānaṃ patvā kāyasañcālanasamatthaṃ bahuṃ pivitvā gāmaghātakādikammaṃ mahāsāvajjaṃ. Sabbehipi cetehi musāvādena saṅghabhedova mahāsāvajjo. Tañhi katvā kappaṃ niraye paccati.
于此,对这些学处,应从自性、所缘、受、根、业、果六种角度予以抉择。就自性说,杀生等一切皆是思心所的自性。就所缘说:杀生以命根为所缘,故为行所缘;不与取或以有情为所缘,或以行为所缘;欲邪行以触为所缘,故为行所缘,也有说以有情为所缘的;妄语或以有情为所缘,或以行为所缘;饮酒以行为所缘。就受说:杀生是苦受;不与取有三受;欲邪行和饮酒各有乐受与舍受两种,但以决定心而言,此二者并非舍受;妄语有三受。就根说:杀生依嗔与痴,为二根;不与取与妄语,或依嗔与痴,或依贪与痴;欲邪行与饮酒依贪与痴,为二根。就业说:此中妄语是语业,其余四种俱为身业。就果说:一切都以堕恶趣为果,即便生于善趣,也会有短寿等多种不可爱果报。应如此了知这些学处自性等抉择。显示巴利原文
Idāni etesu sabhāvato, ārammaṇato, vedanato, mūlato, kammato, phalatoti chahi ākārehi vinicchayo veditabbo. Tattha sabhāvato pāṇātipātādayo sabbepi cetanāsabhāvāva. Ārammaṇato pāṇātipāto jīvitindriyārammaṇato saṅkhārārammaṇo, adinnādānaṃ sattārammaṇaṃ vā saṅkhārārammaṇaṃ vā, micchācāro phoṭṭhabbavasena saṅkhārārammaṇo, sattārammaṇoti eke. Musāvādo sattārammaṇo vā saṅkhārārammaṇo vā, surāpānaṃ saṅkhārārammaṇaṃ. Vedanato pāṇātipāto dukkhavedano, adinnādānaṃ tivedanaṃ, micchācāro sukhamajjhattavasena dvivedano, tathā surāpānaṃ. Sanniṭṭhāpakacittena pana ubhayampi majjhattavedanaṃ na hoti. Musāvādo tivedano. Mūlato pāṇātipāto dosamohavasena dvimūlako, adinnādānaṃ musāvādo ca dosamohavasena vā lobhamohavasena vā, micchācāro surāpānañca lobhamohavasena dvimūlaṃ. Kammato musāvādoyevettha vacīkammaṃ, sesaṃ catubbidhampi kāyakammameva. Phalato sabbepi apāyūpapattiphalā ceva sugatiyampi appāyukatādinānāvidhaaniṭṭhaphalā cāti evamettha sabhāvādito vinicchayo veditabbo.
“未远离者”:因未具足受戒远离与自然远离,故称未远离。“恶戒者”:由此乃至连五戒都不具,故是无戒者。“恶法者”:即卑劣法者、下劣行者。“远离杀生者”:由受持学处而远离杀生,安住于远离。对其余学处,亦当同理了知。显示巴利原文
Appaṭiviratāti samādānaviratiyā sampattaviratiyā ca abhāvena na paṭiviratā. Dussīlāti tato eva pañcasīlamattassāpi abhāvena nissīlā. Pāpadhammāti lāmakadhammā, hīnācārā. Pāṇātipātā paṭiviratoti sikkhāpadasamādānena pāṇātipātato virato, ārakā ṭhito. Esa nayo sesesupi.
在此,对离杀生等学处,亦应从自性、所缘、受、根、业、受持、毁坏、果报等方面了知抉择。其中,就自性说,五学处既有属思心所者,也有属离心所者,然此处教导是依离心所而言的。当远离杀生时,所谓“那时对杀生的回避、远离”,如此所说与善心相应之离,就分类说有三种:自然远离、受戒远离、断除远离。其中,未受持学处的人,思择自己的种姓、年龄、博学等,心想“做这等事对我们不合适”,于现前事不犯,这样生起的离,称为自然远离。已受持学处的人,于受持时及受持后,即使舍弃生命也不违犯事相,这样生起的离,称为受戒远离。而与圣道相应之离,称为断除远离;此离生起之后,圣者们连“我将杀生”这样的心念都不会生起。在此三种中,这里所指的即是受戒远离。显示巴利原文
Idhāpi pāṇātipātāveramaṇiādīnaṃ sabhāvato ārammaṇato , vedanato, mūlato, kammato, samādānato, bhedato, phalato ca viññātabbo vinicchayo. Tattha sabhāvato pañcapi cetanāyopi honti viratiyopi, virativasena pana desanā āgatā. Yā pāṇātipātā viramantassa ‘‘yā tasmiṃ samaye pāṇātipātā ārati viratī’’ti evaṃ vuttā kusalacittasampayuttā virati. Sā pabhedato tividhā – sampattavirati, samādānavirati, samucchedaviratīti. Tattha asamādinnasikkhāpadānaṃ attano jātivayabāhusaccādīni paccavekkhitvā ‘‘ayuttametaṃ amhākaṃ kātu’’nti sampattavatthuṃ avītikkamantānaṃ uppajjamānā virati sampattavirati nāma. Samādinnasikkhāpadānaṃ sikkhāpadasamādāne taduttari ca attano jīvitampi pariccajitvā vatthuṃ avītikkamantānaṃ uppajjamānā virati samādānavirati nāma. Ariyamaggasampayuttā pana virati samucchedavirati nāma, yassā uppattito paṭṭhāya ariyapuggalānaṃ ‘‘pāṇaṃ ghātessāmā’’ti cittampi na uppajjati. Tāsu samādānavirati idhādhippetā.
从所缘来说:杀生等各自的所缘,也就是这些离的所缘。所谓离,正是在可违犯处而不违犯。然而,犹如以涅槃为所缘的圣道能断除烦恼一般,这些善法也是以命根等为所缘,从而断除杀生等恶戒。从受来说:这一切皆是乐受。显示巴利原文
Ārammaṇato pāṇātipātādīnaṃ ārammaṇāneva etesaṃ ārammaṇāni. Vītikkamitabbatoyeva hi virati nāma hoti. Yathā pana nibbānārammaṇo ariyamaggo kilese pajahati, evaṃ jīvitindriyādiārammaṇāyeva ete kusaladhammā pāṇātipātādīni dussīlyāni pajahanti. Vedanato sabbāpi sukhavedanāva.
从根来说:若以与智相应的心而远离,则依无贪、无嗔、无痴而有三根;若以与智不相应的心而远离,则依无贪、无嗔而有二根。从业来说:离妄语属于语业,其余则属于身业。从受持来说:若无法在一位尊长处得戒,可由自己单独受持,或将五戒合在一起整体受持,或一条一条分别受持,如此都成为已受持。从毁坏来说:在家者若违犯某一条戒,仅那一戒毁坏,其余并不毁坏。为何如此?因为在家者的戒并非恒常固定,他们能守护哪一条,便守护那一条。而出家者若违犯一条戒,所有戒都毁坏。显示巴利原文
Mūlato ñāṇasampayuttacittena viramantassa alobhaadosaamohavasena timūlā honti, ñāṇavippayuttacittena viramantassa alobhaadosavasena dvimūlā. Kammato musāvādā veramaṇi vacīkammaṃ , sesā kāyakammaṃ. Samādānato aññassa garuṭṭhāniyassa santike taṃ alabhantena sayameva vā pañca sīlāni ekajjhaṃ pāṭiyekkaṃ vā samādiyantena samādinnāni honti. Bhedato gahaṭṭhānaṃ yaṃ yaṃ vītikkantaṃ, taṃ tadeva bhijjati, itaraṃ na bhijjati. Kasmā? Gahaṭṭhā hi anibaddhasīlā honti, yaṃ yaṃ sakkonti, taṃ tadeva rakkhanti. Pabbajitānaṃ pana ekasmiṃ vītikkante sabbāni bhijjantīti.
从果报来说:此处,离杀生能获得如下果报——肢节圆满,身材高矮适度,行动迅捷,双足安立稳固,形体优美,身体柔软,洁净,勇健,大力,言辞流畅明了,为众生喜爱悦意,随众而聚,无所畏惧,难以被制伏,不因他人加害而死,拥有广大眷属,肤色金色,相貌端正,少病,无忧愁,不与自己喜爱悦意者分离,长寿等果报。显示巴利原文
Phalatoti pāṇātipātā veramaṇiyā cettha aṅgapaccaṅgasampannatā, ārohapariṇāhasampatti, javanasampatti, suppatiṭṭhitapādatā, cārutā, mudutā, sucitā, sūratā, mahabbalatā, vissaṭṭhavacanatā, sattānaṃ piyamanāpatā, abhijjaparisatā, acchambhitā, duppadhaṃsiyatā, parūpakkamena amaraṇatā, mahāparivāratā, suvaṇṇatā, susaṇṭhānatā, appābādhatā, asokatā, piyamanāpehi avippayogo, dīghāyukatāti evamādīni phalāni.
离不与取的果报有:大财富、无尽的财富、稳固的财富,所希求的财富迅速获得,国王等无力分享的财富,殊胜的财富,在所到之处皆居首位,不知匮乏,安乐住等。显示巴利原文
Adinnādānā veramaṇiyā mahādhanadhaññatā, anantabhogatā, thirabhogatā, icchitānaṃ bhogānaṃ khippaṃ paṭilābho, rājādīhi asādhāraṇabhogatā, uḷārabhogatā, tattha tattha jeṭṭhakabhāvo, natthibhāvassa ajānanatā, sukhavihāritāti evamādīni.
离非梵行的果报有:无有怨敌,为一切众生所喜爱、所悦意,获得饮食、衣服等,安眠安稳,醒寤安稳,解脱恶趣的怖畏,不可能成为女性与黄门,无有嗔恚,说真实语,不羞怯,易满足,诸根圆满,相好圆满,无有顾虑,不躁动,安乐而住,无所畏惧,不与所爱分离等。然而,由于离邪淫的果报也全部被包含在其中,所以(此处归于离非梵行)。显示巴利原文
Abrahmacariyā veramaṇiyā vigatapaccatthikatā, sabbasattānaṃ piyamanāpatā, annapānavatthacchādanādīnaṃ lābhitā, sukhasupanatā, sukhapaṭibujjhanatā, apāyabhayavimokkho, itthibhāvanapuṃsakabhāvānaṃ abhabbatā, akkodhanatā, saccakāritā, amaṅkutā, ārādhanasukhatā, paripuṇṇindriyatā, paripuṇṇalakkhaṇatā, nirāsaṅkatā, appossukkatā, sukhavihāritā, akutobhayatā, piyavippayogābhāvoti evamādīni. Yasmā pana micchācārāveramaṇiyā phalānipi ettheva antogadhāni, tasmā (abrahmacariyā veramaṇiyā).
离妄语的果报有:诸根清净,言语流利甜美,牙齿齐整洁白,不过胖、不过瘦、不过矮、不过高,触感舒适,口中散发青莲花香,拥有顺从的眷属,言语可信,舌如莲瓣薄软红润,不退缩,不掉举等。显示巴利原文
Musāvādā veramaṇiyā vippasannindriyatā, vissaṭṭhamadhurabhāṇitā, samasitasuddhadantatā, nātithūlatā, nātikisatā, nātirassatā, nātidīghatā, sukhasamphassatā, uppalagandhamukhatā, sussūsakaparisatā, ādeyyavacanatā, kamaladalasadisamudulohitatanujivhatā, alīnatā, anuddhatatāti evamādīni.
离饮酒放逸处学处的果报有:于过去、未来、现在应办之事,皆不放逸,具足智慧,常令正念现前;对应办之事,能应机起辩才;不懒惰、不愚钝、不狂乱、不畏惧、不粗暴、不嫉妒、不悭吝;说真实语,不说离间语、粗恶语、杂秽语;知恩感恩,具足施舍、持戒与正直,不瞋恚,具足惭与愧,成就正见,伟大、贤明,善巧抉择义与不义等。同样地,对于离杀生等学处,亦应从自性等各方面予以分别抉择。显示巴利原文
Surāmerayamajjapamādaṭṭhānā veramaṇiyā atītānāgatapaccuppannesu kiccakaraṇīyesu appamādatā, ñāṇavantatā, sadā upaṭṭhitassatitā, uppannesu kiccakaraṇīyesu ṭhānuppattikapaṭibhānavantatā , analasatā, ajaḷatā, anummattatā, acchambhitā, asārambhitā, anissukitā, amaccharitā, saccavāditā, apisuṇaapharusaasamphappalāpavāditā, kataññutā , kataveditā, cāgavantatā, sīlavantatā, ujukatā, akkodhanatā, hirottappasampannatā , ujudiṭṭhitā, mahantatā, paṇḍitatā, atthānatthakusalatāti evamādīni phalāni. Evamettha pāṇātipātāveramaṇiādīnampi sabhāvādito vinicchayo veditabbo.
“具戒者”指依前述五戒而持戒者。“善法”即妙善之法,意为由皈依所显的正见成就而具足智慧。若儿子在父母无信、破戒时,自身亦复如是,当知即是“恶生子”。因此处以不信等为恶生之相,而这些相确实存在于此人身上。然而,所谓“超生子”等,则是相对于父母来说的。显示巴利原文
Sīlavāti yathāvuttapañcasīlavasena sīlavā. Kalyāṇadhammoti sundaradhammo, saraṇagamanaparidīpitāya diṭṭhisampattiyā sampannapaññoti attho. Yo pana putto mātāpitūsu assaddhesu dussīlesu ca sayampi tādiso, sopi avajātoyevāti veditabbo. Assaddhiyādayo hi idha avajātabhāvassa lakkhaṇaṃ vuttā, te ca tasmiṃ saṃvijjanti. Mātāpitaro pana upādāya puttassa atijātādibhāvo vuccatīti.
“族姓破坏者”(kulagandhana):指断绝族姓者、毁灭族姓者。此处“gandha”一词意为“切断”,正如“青莲香之敌”(《律藏·波罗夷》65)等处的用法。也有人读作“kuladhaṃsana”,义同。显示巴利原文
Yo hoti kulagandhanoti kulacchedako kulavināsako. Chedanattho hi idha gandhasaddo, ‘‘uppalagandhapaccatthikā’’tiādīsu (pārā. 65) viya. Keci pana ‘‘kuladhaṃsano’’ti paṭhanti, so evattho.
「这些确实就是世间诸子」:这超生子等三种儿子,才是有情世间真正称为“子”的,并非除此之外另有所谓的“子”。在这些儿子当中,那些成为近事男的人,由于皈依成就而成为近事男,又因业所有智而善巧于业,他们是智者、具慧者,圆满具足五戒或十戒。「知言者」:他们了知乞求者的言语,仅见其面容便满足他们的意愿,故称知言者;或者听闻乞求者说“请施”后,心想:“这些人过去因不布施,才落得如此处境,而我不可如此”,通过分享而了知他们的所求,故称知言者;又或者他们明了智者关于业所有等的开示之语,故称知言者。也有读作“padaññū”,意为以施舍与戒为足。正因如此,他们去除了悭吝的垢秽,故为「离悭者」。「如出密云」:如同乌云,或如同从厚密云层中脱出的月亮,在近事男等众中,在刹帝利等众中,辉耀照耀,也就是闪耀的意思。显示巴利原文
Ete kho puttā lokasminti ete atijātādayo tayo puttā eva imasmiṃ sattaloke puttā nāma, na ito vinimuttā atthi. Imesu pana ye bhavanti upāsakā ye saraṇagamanasampattiyā upāsakā bhavanti kammassakatāñāṇena kammassa kovidā, te ca paṇḍitā paññavanto, pañcasīladasasīlena sampannā paripuṇṇā. Yācakānaṃ vacanaṃ jānanti, tesaṃ mukhākāradassaneneva adhippāyapūraṇatoti vadaññū, tesaṃ vā ‘‘dehī’’ti vacanaṃ sutvā ‘‘ime pubbe dānaṃ adatvā evaṃbhūtā, mayā pana evaṃ na bhavitabba’’nti tesaṃ pariccāgena tadatthaṃ jānantīti vadaññū, paṇḍitānaṃ vā kammassakatādidīpakaṃ vacanaṃ jānantīti vadaññū. ‘‘Padaññū’’ti ca paṭhanti, padāniyā pariccāgasīlāti attho. Tato eva vigatamaccheramalattā vītamaccharā. Abbhaghanāti abbhasaṅkhātā ghanā, ghanameghapaṭalā vā mutto candoviya, upāsakādiparisāsu khattiyādiparisāsu ca virocare virocanti, sobhantīti attho.
第六 无雨者经的注释显示巴利原文
6. Avuṭṭhikasuttavaṇṇanā
75 七十五. 第六经中,「无雨者」:如同不降雨的云。有些云形成百层、千层的云层,升腾而起,雷鸣、电闪、轰鸣,却一滴雨也未下便消散了;以此譬喻,显示有一种人正是如此,故称「无雨者」。「局部降雨者」:如同只在一处降雨的云。所谓“如同局部降雨者”,即“只在一处降雨的人”。有些云只在一处,对安住那里的人,如同有的被淋湿、有的未被淋湿那样,只降下少许雨;以此譬喻,显示有一种人正是如此,故称「局部降雨者」。「遍一切处降雨者」:如同在大地、山岳、海洋等一切世间普降甘霖的云。有些云遍布轮围世界之内,无有例外地普降雨水;经中以这滋润四大洲的大雨云,作为某一类人的譬喻,故说为「遍一切处降雨者」。显示巴利原文
75. Chaṭṭhe avuṭṭhikasamoti avuṭṭhikameghasamo. Ekacco hi megho satapaṭalasahassapaṭalo hutvā uṭṭhahitvā thananto gajjanto vijjotanto ekaṃ udakabindumpi apātetvā vigacchati, tathūpamo ekacco puggaloti dassento āha ‘‘avuṭṭhikasamo’’ti. Padesavassīti ekadesavassimeghasamo. Padesavassī viyāti hi padesavassī. Ekacco ekasmiṃyeva ṭhāne ṭhitesu manussesu yathā ekacce tementi, ekacce na tementi, evaṃ mandaṃ vassati, tathūpamaṃ ekaccaṃ puggalaṃ dasseti ‘‘padesavassī’’ti. Sabbatthābhivassīti sabbasmiṃ pathavīpabbatasamuddādike jagatippadese abhivassimeghasamo. Ekacco hi sakalacakkavāḷagabbhaṃ pattharitvā sabbatthakameva abhivassati, taṃ cātuddīpikamahāmeghaṃ ekaccassa puggalassa upamaṃ katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘sabbatthābhivassī’’ti.
「Sabbesānanti」意为“对一切人”,此即其读法。「不是施与者」:指此人无布施的习惯,因固执悭吝,不对任何人施舍任何东西,这是其含义。现在,为了分别显示布施的福田与所施物,接着说“沙门婆罗门”等。其中,「沙门」指已寂灭恶行的沙门,以及仅具出家相的沙门;「婆罗门」指已驱除恶行的婆罗门,以及仅凭种姓的婆罗门,此处“沙门婆罗门”即指这两类人。「可怜者」指贫穷困苦之人。「旅人」指赶路者,即缺乏旅费或资具之人。「游方乞者」指这样一类人:他们到处行走,以“请怀着欢喜心、净信心,布施你们喜爱、悦意、应时、无过失之物,如此布施者将生善趣、生梵天界”等语,劝人布施并称赞布施功德。「乞食者」指那些仅乞求“请施一把、请施一捧、请施一钵”等少量物品者。这里,举出“沙门婆罗门”显示功德田与恩德田,举出“可怜者”等显示悲田。显示巴利原文
Sabbesānanti sabbesaṃ, ayameva vā pāṭho. Na dātā hotīti adānasīlo hoti, thaddhamaccharitāya na kassaci kiñci detīti attho. Idāni dānassa khettaṃ deyyadhammañca vibhāgena dassetuṃ ‘‘samaṇabrāhmaṇā’’tiādimāha. Tattha samitapāpasamaṇā ceva pabbajjamattasamaṇā ca bāhitapāpabrāhmaṇā ceva jātimattabrāhmaṇā ca idha ‘‘samaṇabrāhmaṇā’’ti adhippetā. Kapaṇā nāma duggatā daliddamanussā. Addhikā nāma pathāvino paribbayavihīnā. Vanibbakā nāma ye ‘‘iṭṭhaṃ detha kantaṃ manāpaṃ kālena anavajjaṃ udaggacittā pasannacittā, evaṃ dentā gacchatha sugatiṃ, gacchatha brahmaloka’’ntiādinā nayena dāne niyojentā dānassa vaṇṇaṃ thomentā vicaranti. Yācakā nāma ye kevalaṃ ‘‘muṭṭhimattaṃ detha, pasatamattaṃ detha, sarāvamattaṃ dethā’’ti appakampi yācamānā vicaranti. Tattha samaṇabrāhmaṇaggahaṇena guṇakhettaṃ upakārikhettañca dasseti, kapaṇādiggahaṇena karuṇākhettaṃ. Annanti yaṃkiñci khādanīyaṃ bhojanīyaṃ. Pānanti ambapānādipānakaṃ. Vatthanti nivāsanapārupanādiacchādanaṃ. Yānanti rathavayhādi antamaso upāhanaṃ upādāya gamanasādhanaṃ. Mālāti ganthitāganthitabhedaṃ sabbaṃ pupphaṃ. Gandhanti yaṃkiñci gandhajātaṃ pisitaṃ apisitaṃ gandhūpakaraṇañca. Vilepananti chavirāgakaraṇaṃ. Seyyāti mañcapīṭhādi ceva pāvārakojavādi ca sayitabbavatthu. Seyyaggahaṇena cettha āsanampi gahitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Āvasathanti vātātapādiparissayavinodanaṃ patissayaṃ. Padīpeyyanti dīpakapallikādipadīpūpakaraṇaṃ.
“像这样,比丘们”这句的意思是:虽然存在着应施的财物,但对受施者全然不作任何施舍的人,便犹如不下雨的云一般。这是说:比丘们,正如那云聚起百层、千层的云层,升腾之后一滴雨未下便消散而去;同样地,有人积聚了丰厚广大的财富,住在家里,却连一勺饭、一勺粥都不曾布施给任何人就去世了,无力自主地落入死神的掌控,此人便称为“无雨者”。以此类推,其余几句也应当这样理解。在这三种人中,第一种应受彻底的呵责,第二种值得称赞,第三种更加值得称赞。或者可以理解为:第一种是最下劣者,第二种是中等者,第三种是最上者。显示巴利原文
Evaṃkho, bhikkhaveti vijjamānepi deyyadhamme paṭiggāhakānaṃ evaṃ dātabbavatthuṃ sabbena sabbaṃ adento puggalo avassikameghasadiso hoti. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – bhikkhave, yathā so megho satapaṭalasahassapaṭalo hutvā uṭṭhahitvā na kiñci vassi vigacchati, evameva yo uḷāraṃ vipulañca bhogaṃ saṃharitvā gehaṃ āvasanto kassaci kaṭacchumattaṃ bhikkhaṃ vā uḷuṅkamattaṃ yāguṃ vā adatvā vigacchati, vivaso maccuvasaṃ gacchati, so avuṭṭhikasamo nāma hotīti. Iminā nayena sesesupi nigamanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Imesu ca tīsu puggalesu paṭhamo ekaṃseneva garahitabbo, dutiyo pasaṃsanīyo, tatiyo, pasaṃsanīyataro. Paṭhamo vā ekanteneva sabbanihīno, dutiyo majjhimo, tatiyo uttamoti veditabbo.
在偈颂中,“samaṇe”是受格的复数形式,其余诸词也是如此。“Laddhānā”意为得到之后,即:向应受供养的沙门发出邀请之后,被问起时却不愿分享。“食物、饮料以及啖食”指的是食物、饮料或其他可食用的东西,他对此不予分享。这里的简要意思是:若有人遇到了因有需要而前来、堪受布施的人,却连用食物等稍作分享都做不到,他怎么可能给出其他的布施呢?对于这种固执吝啬、人中下劣的卑鄙之人,智者们称他为“无雨者”,他们这样说道。显示巴利原文
Gāthāsu samaṇeti upayogavasena bahuvacanaṃ tathā sesesupi. Laddhānāti labhitvā, samaṇe dakkhiṇeyye pavāretvā puṭṭho na saṃvibhajati. Annaṃ pānañca bhojananti annaṃ vā pānaṃ vā aññaṃ vā bhuñjitabbayuttakaṃ bhojanaṃ, taṃ na saṃvibhajati. Ayañhettha saṅkhepattho – yo atthikabhāvena upagate sampaṭiggāhake labhitvā annādinā saṃvibhāgamattampi na karoti, kiṃ so aññaṃ dānaṃ dassati, taṃ evarūpaṃ thaddhamacchariyaṃ purisādhamaṃ nihīnapuggalaṃ paṇḍitā avuṭṭhikasamoti āhu kathayantīti.
“有些他不施予”意思是:即使有大量应施的财物,对于某一些众生,他或因嗔怒,或因贪着应施的财物,而不施予他们。“有些他却分与”意思是:他只施予另外的某些人。“有智者”是指具足智慧、贤明的人。显示巴利原文
Ekaccānaṃna dadātīti vijjamānepi mahati dātabbadhamme ekesaṃ sattānaṃ tesu kodhavasena vā, deyyadhamme lobhavasena vā na dadāti. Ekaccānaṃ pavecchatīti ekesaṃyeva pana dadāti. Medhāvinoti paññavanto paṇḍitā janā.
"善言易乞者":对于前来乞求的人,他能让人布施,说出"布施食物吧,布施饮料吧"等言语。由于容易乞得食物,他说出的便是这样易令人得食的言语,因此称为"善言易乞者"。另有版本读作"subhikkhavassī"(丰足降雨者)。如同世间食物丰足时,那遍洒甘霖的大云便称为丰足降雨者;同样地,此人通过广大布施,遍施于一切处,故也是丰足的降雨者。"心喜而散施":他满怀欢喜、兴致勃勃地亲手行布施,如同将应施之物散布在受施者的福田上一般;口中亦说着"布施吧,布施吧"。显示巴利原文
Subhikkhavācoti yo upagatānaṃ yācakānaṃ ‘‘annaṃ detha, pānaṃ dethā’’tiādinā taṃ taṃ dāpeti, so sulabhabhikkhatāya subhikkhā vācā etassāti subhikkhavāco. ‘‘Subhikkhavassī’’tipi paṭhanti. Yathā loko subhikkho hoti, evaṃ sabbatthābhivassitamahāmegho subhikkhavassī nāma hoti. Evamayampi mahādānehi sabbatthābhivassī subhikkhavassīti. Āmodamāno pakiretīti tuṭṭhahaṭṭhamānaso sahatthena dānaṃ dento paṭiggāhakakhette deyyadhammaṃ pakirento viya hoti, vācāyapi ‘‘detha dethā’’ti bhāsati.
现在,为了显示他如丰足降雨般的情状,而说出了"犹如云"等偈颂。此处,其简要的意义是:犹如大云初时以低沉之声作响,继而雷鸣,令一切河流与山涧都回荡着同一轰鸣,随后便降下雨水,水流遍满一切高处与低地,滋润、充满,使之汇合成同一股洪流。同样地,在此世间,有某位殊胜之人,他对一切众生皆怀平等心,正如那片大云理应普降甘霖一般。他恰似那片大云:以自身的努力、精进和干劲,依于正法、以合理的方式积聚了财富;对于由此所得的饮食等应施之物,他亦毫不懈怠,如法、应时、随顺对方意愿地,令那些前来、堪受供养的游方乞者得到满足与饱足。显示巴利原文
Idāni naṃ subhikkhavassitabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yathāpi megho’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ saṅkhepattho – yathā mahāmegho paṭhamaṃ mandanigghosena thanayitvā puna sakalanadīkandarāni ekaninnādaṃ karonto gajjayitvā pavassati, sabbatthakameva vārinā udakena thalaṃ ninnañca abhisandanto pūreti ekoghaṃ karoti, evameva idha imasmiṃ sattaloke ekacco uḷārapuggalo sabbasamatāya so mahāmegho viya vassitabbattā tādiso yathā dhanaṃ uṭṭhānādhigataṃ attano uṭṭhānavīriyābhinibbattaṃ hoti, evaṃ analaso hutvā tañca dhammena ñāyena saṃharitvā tannibbattena annena pānena aññena ca deyyadhammena patte sampatte vanibbake sammā sammadeva desakālānurūpañceva icchānurūpañca tappeti sampavāretīti.
第七、《希求乐者经》的注释。显示巴利原文
7. Sukhapatthanāsuttavaṇṇanā
76 第七句中,"诸乐"指乐生起的因缘。"正在希求"意为正在期望、正在渴望。"戒"指在家戒与出家戒。其意旨为:在家者当守护在家戒,出家者当守护四遍净戒。"应守护"指受戒之后,不违犯、正确地守护。"愿赞誉来到我这里",即怀着"愿我的善声誉远播"这样的期望,有智慧的人应守护戒。因为,具戒的在家人于集会中,会生起这样的善声誉:"某家之子具戒、有善法、有信、有净信、是施主、作福者"等;具戒的出家人,则会生起这样的善声誉:"某位比丘具戒、威仪具足、柔和、共住安乐、具恭敬、具尊重"等。曾有如是之说。显示巴利原文
76. Sattame sukhānīti sukhanimittāni. Patthayamānoti icchamāno ākaṅkhamāno. Sīlanti gahaṭṭhasīlaṃ pabbajitasīlañca. Gahaṭṭho ce gahaṭṭhasīlaṃ, pabbajito ce catupārisuddhisīlanti adhippāyo. Rakkheyyāti samādiyitvā avītikkamanto sammadeva gopeyya. Pasaṃsā me āgacchatūti ‘‘mama kalyāṇo kittisaddo āgacchatū’’ti icchanto paṇḍito sappañño sīlaṃ rakkheyya. Sīlavato hi gahaṭṭhassa tāva ‘‘asuko asukakulassa putto sīlavā kalyāṇadhammo saddho pasanno dāyako kārako’’tiādinā parisamajjhe kalyāṇo kittisaddo abbhuggacchati, pabbajitassa ‘‘asuko nāma bhikkhu sīlavā vattasampanno sorato sukhasaṃvāso sagāravo sappatisso’’tiādinā…pe… abbhuggacchatīti. Vuttañhetaṃ –
再者,居士们,具戒成就之人,善名称誉会远扬流传。(增支部5.213;优陀那76;大品285)显示巴利原文
‘‘Puna caparaṃ, gahapatayo, sīlavato sīlasampannassa kalyāṇo kittisaddo abbhuggacchatī’’ti (a. ni. 5.213; udā. 76; mahāva. 285).
诸比丘,若比丘期盼:‘愿我于同梵行者中,为人所爱、令人欢喜、受人敬重、为众所崇敬’,他便当于诸戒之中圆满修习。(中部1.65)等。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ākaṅkheyya ce, bhikkhave, bhikkhu – ‘sabrahmacārīnaṃ piyo cassaṃ manāpo, garu ca bhāvanīyo cā’ti, sīlesvevassa paripūrakārī’’tiādi (ma. ni. 1.65).
“愿我财富生起”这一句中:对于具戒、具善法的在家人,他无论以何种技艺谋生——或耕作、或经商、或奉事王廷——因能适时、如法且极为不放逸,他未生的财富便得以生起,已生的财富得以增长。对于持戒具足、安住不放逸、具念且戒行成就的出家人,因戒行成就与少欲等功德,生起信心的人们供养种种殊胜的资具,由此他未生的财富得以生起,已生的财富变得坚固。正如所说:显示巴利原文
Bhogā me uppajjantūti ettha gahaṭṭhassa tāva sīlavato kalyāṇadhammassa yena yena sippaṭṭhānena jīvikaṃ kappeti – yadi kasiyā, yadi vaṇijjāya, yadi rājaporisena, taṃ taṃ yathākālaṃ yathāvidhiñca ativiya appamattabhāvato athassa anuppannā ceva bhogā uppajjanti, uppannā ca bhogā phātiṃ gamissanti. Pabbajitassa pana sīlācārasampannassa appamādavihārissa sato sīlasampannassa sīlasampadāya appicchatādiguṇesu ca pasannā manussā uḷāruḷāre paccaye abhiharanti, evamassa anuppannā ceva bhogā uppajjanti, uppannā ca thirā honti. Tathā hi vuttaṃ –
“再者,居士们,具戒、戒行成就之人,以不放逸为因,能获得广大的财富蕴。”(增支部5.213;优陀那76;大品285)显示巴利原文
‘‘Puna caparaṃ, gahapatayo, sīlavā sīlasampanno appamādādhikaraṇaṃ mahantaṃ bhogakkhandhaṃ adhigacchatī’’ti (a. ni. 5.213; udā. 76; mahāva. 285).
诸比丘,若比丘如此期望:‘愿我获得袈裟、团食、坐卧具及病缘医药资具’,他便应在戒律上圆满成就。”(《中部》1.65)等。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ākaṅkheyya ce, bhikkhave, bhikkhu – ‘lābhī assa cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānapaccayabhesajjaparikkhārāna’nti, sīlesvevassa paripūrakārī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.65) ca –
其余内容如前所述。显示巴利原文
Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
偈颂中,“patthayāno”即“期望”之义。“三种乐”即三类快乐。“获得财富”指得到金钱,也就是财富的生起。在此特别应当了知:赞誉是心之乐,财富是身之乐,另一种是转生之乐;同样,第一者是现法乐,第三者是来世乐,第二者兼顾两世之乐。显示巴利原文
Gāthāsu patthayānoti patthayanto. Tayo sukheti tīṇi sukhāni. Vittalābhanti dhanalābhaṃ, bhoguppattinti attho. Visesato cettha pasaṃsāya cetasikasukhaṃ, bhogehi kāyikasukhaṃ, itarena upapattisukhaṃ; tathā paṭhamena diṭṭhadhammasukhaṃ, tatiyena samparāyasukhaṃ, dutiyena ubhayasukhaṃ gahitanti veditabbaṃ.
现在,为显示称叹等的特殊原因——如同戒的称叹之因那样,即避开恶友、亲近善友,并连带说明其过患与利益,而说“不作……”等。其中,“应被怀疑”(saṅkiyo),指在恶行上应被怀疑:“此人必定已作或将作恶,因为他如此与恶人交往。”“他的”(assa),指此亲近恶人者所遭受的非难,或此人的不名誉,即使不实,也会因亲近恶人而增长、扩大、蔓延。或者,“他的”是处格意义,指“在那个补特伽罗身上”。他确实成为那样的人:无论亲近承事怎样的恶友或善友,那人便如土性随水而变那样,成为那样,具有恶法或善法。何以故?因为共住即是如此;共住、交往,如同水晶沾染色彩,能抓取以人为基础的品性,因此不应与恶补特伽罗共住,这是要旨。显示巴利原文
Idāni pasaṃsādikāraṇassa sīlassa viya pasaṃsādīnampi visesakāraṇaṃ pāpamittaparivajjanaṃ kalyāṇamittasevanañca ādīnavānisaṃsehi saddhiṃ dassento ‘‘akaronto’’tiādimāha. Tattha saṅkiyoti pāpasmiṃ parisaṅkitabbo ‘‘addhā iminā pāpaṃ kataṃ vā karissati vā, tathā hesa pāpapurisehi saddhiṃ sañcaratī’’ti. Assāti imassa pāpajanasevino puggalassa upari, assa vā puggalassa avaṇṇo abhūtopi pāpajanasevitāya ruhati virūḷhiṃ vepullaṃ āpajjati pattharati. Assāti vā bhummatthe sāmivacanaṃ, tasmiṃ puggaleti attho. Sa ve tādisako hotīti yo yādisaṃ pāpamittaṃ vā kalyāṇamittaṃ vā bhajati upasevati ca, so puggalo bhūmibhāgavasena udakaṃ viya tādisova hoti, pāpadhammo kalyāṇadhammo vā hoti. Kasmā? Sahavāso hi tādiso; yasmā sahavāso saṃsaggo uparāgo viya phalikamaṇīsu purisaupanissayabhūtaṃ puggalākāraṃ gāhāpeti, tasmā pāpapuggalena saha vāso na kātabboti adhippāyo.
“正在亲近……”(Sevamāno sevamānanti):恶补特伽罗时常亲近一位本性清净的补特伽罗,或为那位清净补特伽罗所亲近。“接触……”(Samphuṭṭho samphusanti):即那恶补特伽罗通过与该本性清净者共住交往而受其接触,自身也同样如此接触。譬如毒箭与箭囊:恰如一支涂有毒液的箭,能染污箭囊中与之接触的其他无毒的箭;同样,因为畏惧被恶所染污,具慧者(dhīro)——即具有坚定智慧的智者,不应有恶友伴。显示巴利原文
Sevamāno sevamānanti paraṃ pakatisuddhaṃ puggalaṃ kālena kālaṃ attānaṃ sevamānaṃ sevamāno bhajamāno pāpapuggalo, tena vā seviyamāno. Samphuṭṭho samphusanti tena pakatisuddhena puggalena sahavāsena saṃsaggena samphuṭṭho pāpapuggalo sayampi, tathā taṃ phusanto. Saro diddho kalāpaṃ vāti yathā nāma saro visena diddho litto sarakalāpagato sarasamūhasaṅkhātaṃ sarakalāpaṃ attanā phuṭṭhaṃ alittampi upalimpati, evaṃ pāpena upalepabhayā dhīroti dhitisampannattā dhīro paṇḍitapuriso pāpasahāyo na bhaveyya.
“以吉祥草梢系臭鱼”:犹如有人用吉祥草梢捆扎腐烂发臭的鱼,那些吉祥草本不臭,却因与臭鱼相关联而变得恶臭。亲近愚人亦复如是:应当这样看待亲近愚人。“亲近智者”:正如原本不香的树叶,因与多伽罗香相关联而变得芳香;同样,亲近智者,能使本性无戒的人,通过受持戒等而散发出戒香。显示巴利原文
Pūtimacchaṃ kusaggenāti yathā kucchitabhāvena pūtibhūtaṃ macchaṃ kusatiṇaggena yo puriso upanayhati puṭabandhavasena bandhati, tassa te kusā apūtikāpi pūtimacchasambandhena pūti duggandhameva vāyanti. Evaṃ bālūpasevanāti evaṃsampadā bālajanūpasevanā daṭṭhabbā. Evaṃ dhīrūpasevanāti yathā asurabhinopi pattā tagarasambandhena surabhiṃ vāyanti, evaṃ paṇḍitūpasevanā pakatiyā asīlavato sīlasamādānādivasena sīlagandhavāyanassa kāraṇaṃ hoti.
「因此」:由于亲近恶友与亲近善友有如此过患与利益,如同以叶包裹臭物、以花束接触香物,与不善人、善人相交往也是如此。了知自身的成就:了知自己苦果与乐果的产生后,不应亲近不善的恶友,而应亲近善的、已寂静、已断除过失或被称赞的智者。确实,不善者引人堕入地狱,善者则令人达到善趣。世尊在第一首偈颂中开示了三种乐的因之后,接下来的五首偈颂结合避开其对立方,显示了称叹乐的生起;最后一首偈颂则结合三种乐的生因,显示了最终的安乐。显示巴利原文
Tasmāti yasmā akalyāṇamittasevanāya kalyāṇamittasevanāya ca ayaṃ ediso ādīnavo ānisaṃso ca, tasmā pattapuṭasseva palāsapuṭassa viya duggandhasugandhavatthusaṃsaggena asādhusādhujanasannissayena ca. Ñatvā sampākamattanoti attano dukkhudrayaṃ sukhudrayañca phalanipphattiṃ ñatvā jānitvā asante pāpamitte na upaseveyya, sante upasante vantadose pasatthe vā paṇḍite seveyya. Tathā hi asanto nirayaṃ nenti, santo pāpenti suggatinti. Iti bhagavā paṭhamagāthāya yathāvuttāni tīṇi sukhanimittāni dassetvā tato parāhi pañcahi gāthāhi paṭipakkhaparivajjanena saddhiṃ pasaṃsāsukhassa āgamanaṃ dassetvā osānagāthāya tiṇṇampi sukhānaṃ āgamanakāraṇena saddhiṃ osānasukhaṃ dasseti.
8. 《易坏经》注释显示巴利原文
8. Bhidurasuttavaṇṇanā
77 第八经中:「易坏」指容易坏灭。「身」指色身。正因它是肢体、头发等的集合,又是可厌、可憎之物的生起之处,故称为身。其词源解释是:“它们从此处生起”,所以称为“生处”。哪些东西生起?即可厌的头发等。因此,可厌之物的生处也叫做身。从义理上说,身是由四种相续(地、水、火、风)所构成的大种及所造色的聚合体。这就是说:比丘们,此四大所造之身是易坏的,具有坏灭的性质,每一刹那都在坏灭。「易坏的」是另一个读法,意思相同。「识」指三界(欲界、色界、无色界)的善心等。词释为:它能了知各种所缘,故称为识。那种有别于“想”(识别)和“慧”(了知)的、对所缘纯粹的了知功能,就是识。「具离贪法」指具有离贪的性质,也就是会坏灭的性质。「一切依处」指蕴依、烦恼依、行依、五欲依这四种依处。它们之所以被称为依处,是因为“苦依止在那里”。所有这些取蕴、烦恼、行、五欲等法,由于它们。显示巴利原文
77. Aṭṭhame bhidurāyanti bhiduro ayaṃ. Kāyoti rūpakāyo. So hi aṅgapaccaṅgānaṃ kesādīnañca samūhaṭṭhena, evaṃ kucchitānaṃ jegucchānaṃ āyo uppattidesotipi kāyo. Tatrāyaṃ vacanattho – āyanti etthāti āyo. Ke āyanti? Kucchitā kesādayo. Iti kucchitānaṃ āyotipi kāyo . Atthato pana catusantativasena pavattamānānaṃ bhūtupādāyadhammānaṃ puñjo. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – bhikkhave, ayaṃ catumahābhūtamayo rūpakāyo bhiduro bhedanasīlo bhedanasabhāvo khaṇe khaṇe viddhaṃsanasabhāvoti. ‘‘Bhindarāya’’ntipi pāṭho, so evattho. Viññāṇanti tebhūmakaṃ kusalādicittaṃ. Vacanattho pana – taṃ taṃ ārammaṇaṃ vijānātīti viññāṇaṃ. Yañhi sañjānanapajānanavidhuraṃ ārammaṇavijānanaṃ upaladdhi, taṃ viññāṇaṃ. Virāgadhammanti virajjanadhammaṃ, palujjanasabhāvanti attho. Sabbe upadhīti khandhūpadhi, kilesūpadhi, abhisaṅkhārūpadhi, pañcakāmaguṇūpadhīti ete ‘‘upadhīyati ettha dukkha’’nti upadhisaññitā sabbepi upādānakkhandhakilesābhisaṅkhārapañcakāmaguṇadhammā hutvā abhāvaṭṭhena aniccā, udayabbayappaṭipīḷanaṭṭhena dukkhā, jarāya maraṇena cāti dvidhā vipariṇāmetabbasabhāvatāya pakativijahanaṭṭhena vipariṇāmadhammā. Evamettha aniccadassanasukhatāya rūpadhamme viññāṇañca visuṃ gahetvā puna upadhivibhāgena sabbepi tebhūmakadhamme ekajjhaṃ gahetvā aniccadukkhānupassanāmukhena tathābujjhanakānaṃ puggalānaṃ ajjhāsayena sammasanacāro.kathito. Kāmañcettha lakkhaṇadvayameva pāḷiyaṃ āgataṃ, ‘‘yaṃ dukkhaṃ, tadanattā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.15) pana vacanato dukkhalakkhaṇeneva anattalakkhaṇampi dassitamevāti veditabbaṃ.
于偈颂中,「于诸依处见怖畏」是指:以怖畏现起智在依处上见到怖畏,亦即见到它们确实可怖畏。此处显示的是强力的观智。怖畏现起智若加以详细分析,则可进一步称为过患随观与厌离随观。「超越生死」:如此普遍观察者,将观智与圣道相应结合,通过道的相续证得阿拉汉果,便称为超越生死者。如何超越?「抵达最上寂静」:证得了最上、无上的寂静,即一切行完全止息的涅槃。而成为这样的人,「已修习者」等待时刻:由于修习四圣道而成就修证,获得已修身、已修戒、已修心、已修慧的称号,成为已修习者。他不贪喜死亡,也不贪喜活着,只是等待自己五蕴般涅槃的时刻,对任何地方都没有渴求。因此说:显示巴利原文
Gāthāyaṃ upadhīsu bhayaṃ disvāti upadhīsu bhayatupaṭṭhānañāṇavasena bhayaṃ disvā, tesaṃ bhāyitabbataṃ passitvā. Iminā balavavipassanaṃ dasseti. Bhayatupaṭṭhānañāṇameva hi vibhajitvā visesavasena ādīnavānupassanā nibbidānupassanāti ca vuccati. Jātimaraṇamaccagāti evaṃ sammasanto vipassanāñāṇaṃ maggena ghaṭetvā maggaparamparāya arahattaṃ patto jātimaraṇaṃ atīto nāma hoti. Kathaṃ? Sampatvāparamaṃ santinti paramaṃ uttamaṃ anuttaraṃ santiṃ sabbasaṅkhārūpasamaṃ nibbānaṃ adhigantvā. Evaṃbhūto ca kālaṃ kaṅkhati bhāvitattoti catunnaṃ ariyamaggānaṃ vasena bhāvanābhisamayanipphattiyā bhāvitakāyasīlacittapaññattā bhāvitatto maraṇaṃ jīvitañca anabhinandanto kevalaṃ attano khandhaparinibbānakālaṃ kaṅkhati udikkhati, na tassa katthaci patthanā hotīti. Tenāha –
我不欢喜死,也不欢喜生;我等待时刻,如同无求的仆人。
正如《长老偈》第606偈所说:“我等待时刻,如同无求的仆人。”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Nābhinandāmi maraṇaṃ, nābhinandāmi jīvitaṃ; Kālañca paṭikaṅkhāmi, nibbisaṃ bhatako yathā’’ti. (theragā. 606);
9. 《界相合经》注释显示巴利原文
9. Dhātusosaṃsandanasuttavaṇṇanā
78 在第九经中,「依界」(dhātuso)是指依界(dhātuto)而言。这里所说的「界」,是指意乐的界、意乐的本性,这也称为「意乐倾向」(adhimutti)。「相合」(saṃsandanti):指依于同分的界,随各自的界与各自的意乐而彼此附着,成为一体。「和合」(samenti):由于意乐相同,他们心意相投而聚合,互相亲近、交往,且处处表现出与自己的好乐、忍可和见解相符的行为。「劣意乐者」(hīnādhimuttikā):指对那些低劣的五欲等有意乐的人,称为劣意乐者,即意乐低劣的人。「善净意乐者」(kalyāṇādhimuttikā):指对那些善净的出离等有意乐的人,称为善净意乐者,即意乐殊胜的人。如果亲教师、依止师不持戒,而学童与同住比丘持戒,这些持戒者便不会去亲近亲教师、依止师,只会亲近与自己同类、相应的比丘。反之,如果亲教师、依止师持戒,而其他人不持戒,那些不持戒的人也不会去亲近亲教师、依止师,只会亲近与自己一样的劣意乐者。为了说明这种亲近不仅在现在如此,过去、未来也同样如此,所以说:「比丘……」显示巴利原文
78. Navame dhātusoti dhātuto. Dhātūti ca ajjhāsayadhātu ajjhāsayasabhāvo adhippeto, yo adhimuttītipi vuccati. Saṃsandantīti tāya dhātusabhāgatāya yathādhātu yathāajjhāsayaṃ allīyanti ekato honti. Samentīti tāya eva samānajjhāsayatāya ekacittā hutvā samāgacchanti aññamaññaṃ bhajanti upasaṅkamanti, attano rucibhāvakhantidiṭṭhiyo vā tattha tattha same karontā pavattanti. Hīnādhimuttikāti hīne kāmaguṇādike adhimutti etesanti hīnādhimuttikā, hīnajjhāsayā. Kalyāṇādhimuttikāti kalyāṇe nekkhammādike adhimutti etesanti kalyāṇādhimuttikā, paṇītajjhāsayā. Sace hi ācariyupajjhāyā na sīlavanto , antevāsikasaddhivihārikā ca sīlavanto, te ācariyupajjhāyepi na upasaṅkamanti, attano sadise sāruppabhikkhūyeva upasaṅkamanti. Sace pana ācariyupajjhāyā sīlavanto, itare na sīlavanto, tepi na ācariyupajjhāye upasaṅkamanti, attano sadise hīnādhimuttikeyeva upasaṅkamanti. Evaṃ upasaṅkamanaṃ pana na kevalaṃ etarahi eva, atha kho atītānāgatepīti dassento ‘‘atītampi, bhikkhave’’tiādimāha. Saṅkhepato saṃkilesadhammesu abhiniviṭṭhā hīnādhimuttikā , vodānadhammesu abhiniviṭṭhā kalyāṇādhimuttikā.
那么,是什么使得无戒者只亲近无戒者、持戒者只亲近持戒者、劣慧者只亲近劣慧者、具慧者只亲近具慧者呢?是意乐界使之如此。据说,众多比丘在一个村庄托钵乞食。人们拿了许多食物,将钵装满,说:“请与相应的人一起享用吧。”便送他们离去。比丘们说:“贤友们,人们所做的正是与界相应的行为啊。”意乐界正是这样起决定作用的。应当借“与界相应”这件事来阐明以下含义:在灵鹫山,世尊卧病在床,舍利弗、目犍连等比丘为守护而四周伴住。世尊看见他们各自带着随行比丘经行,便对比丘们说:“比丘们,你们看见舍利弗与众多比丘一同经行吗?”“是的,世尊。”“比丘们,所有这些比丘都是大智慧者。”(《相应部·因缘篇》2.99)这些皆应详细展开解说。显示巴利原文
Idaṃ pana dussīlānaṃ dussīlasevanameva, sīlavantānaṃ sīlavantasevanameva, duppaññānaṃ duppaññasevanameva, paññavantānaṃ paññavantasevanameva ko niyāmetīti? Ajjhāsayadhātu niyāmeti. Sambahulā kira bhikkhū ekasmiṃ gāme bhikkhācāraṃ caranti. Te manussā bahuṃ bhattaṃ āharitvā pattāni pūretvā ‘‘yathāsabhāgaṃ paribhuñjathā’’ti vatvā uyyojesuṃ. Bhikkhū āhaṃsu ‘‘āvuso, manussā dhātusaṃyuttakamme payojentī’’ti. Evaṃ ajjhāsayadhātu niyāmetīti. Dhātusaṃyuttena ayamattho dīpetabbo – gijjhakūṭapabbatasmiñhi gilānaseyyāya nipanno bhagavā ārakkhatthāya parivāretvā vasantesu sāriputtamoggallānādīsu ekamekaṃ attano parisāya saddhiṃ caṅkamantaṃ oloketvā bhikkhū āmantesi ‘‘passatha no tumhe, bhikkhave, sāriputtaṃ sambahulehi bhikkhūhi saddhiṃ caṅkamantanti. Evaṃ, bhante. Sabbe kho ete, bhikkhave, bhikkhū mahāpaññā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.99) sabbaṃ vitthāretabbaṃ.
在偈颂中,“杂”(saṃsaggā):从染污的角度而言,指通过共住等方式的关联;或者指五种杂——见面的杂、听闻的杂、交谈的杂、受用的杂、身体接触的杂——中的任何一种杂。“林丛生”(vanatho jāto):烦恼生起,而未被圣道所断除。“以不杂而断除”(asaṃsaggena chijjati):通过回避杂染,先以身远离等作为前方便断除,再以究竟的不杂——即通过彻底舍断的远离——而断除、舍弃。至此,便简要地说明了劣意乐的生起与灭除。显示巴利原文
Gāthāsu saṃsaggāti saṃkilesato sahavāsādivasena samāyogato, atha vā dassanasaṃsaggo, savanasaṃsaggo, samullāpasaṃsaggo, sambhogasaṃsaggo, kāyasaṃsaggoti evaṃ pañcavidhe saṃsagge yato kutoci saṃsaggato. Vanatho jātoti kileso uppanno maggena asamūhato. Asaṃsaggena chijjatīti saṃsaggapaṭikkhepena kāyavivekādinā pubbabhāge chijjitvā puna accantāsaṃsaggena samucchedavivekena chijjati pahīyati. Ettāvatā saṅkhepato hīnādhimuttiyā samudayo atthaṅgamo ca dassito hoti.
然而,由于那些杂染与烦恼因懈怠而生起、增长,并非因精进努力而生起,因此应当远离劣意乐者、懈怠之人,亲近善净意乐者、精进努力之人,通过不杂染来断除由杂染所生的烦恼丛林。为了详细开显此义,先说明亲近懈怠者的过患,于是说了“小木……”等偈颂。显示巴利原文
Yasmā pana te saṃsaggā te ca kilesā kosajjavasena uppajjanti ceva vaḍḍhanti ca, na vīriyārambhavasena, tasmā hīnādhimuttike kusītapuggale vajjetvā kalyāṇādhimuttike āraddhavīriye sevantena asaṃsaggena saṃsaggajo vanatho chinditabboti yathāvuttamatthaṃ vitthārato dassento kusītasevanāya tāva ādīnavaṃ pakāsetuṃ ‘‘parittaṃ dāru’’ntiādimāha.
此处,「小木」指小木筏。「如在大海中沉没」:犹如乘坐小筏想横渡大海,未到彼岸便在大海中央沉没,堕入水中成为鱼鳖的食物。同样,「依止懈怠者,活命清净的人也会沉没」:依止于那个缺乏精进、为烦恼所支配的懈怠者,与他结交的人,即使原本活命清净、戒行清净,也会因卑劣的结交而生起欲寻思等烦恼,被烦恼吞噬,不能到达彼岸,沉没于轮回的大海。「因此」,由于与懈怠者结交有这样的过患,所以说「由于依止他,因耽著懒惰而卑劣地沉没,故称为懈怠者」。他是懈怠者,即劣精进者、无精进者,这样的恶知识应当完全远离。此外,应当只亲近那些由身远离等、彼分远离等而独处,通过远离烦恼而成为圣者,清净无染,已确立趣向的。显示巴利原文
Tattha parittaṃ dārunti khuddakaṃ kaṭṭhamayaṃ kullaṃ. Yathā sīde mahaṇṇaveti yathā khuddakaṃ kullaṃ āruhitvā mahāsamuddaṃ taritukāmo tīraṃ appatvā samuddamajjheyeva sīdeyya, patitvā macchakacchapabhakkho bhaveyya. Evaṃ kusītaṃ āgamma, sādhujīvīpi sīdatīti evameva kusītaṃ vīriyārambharahitaṃ kilesavasikaṃ puggalaṃ nissāya tena katasaṃsaggo sādhujīvīpi parisuddhājīvo parisuddhasīlopi samāno hīnasaṃsaggato uppannehi kāmavitakkādīhi khajjamāno pāraṃ gantuṃ asamattho saṃsāraṇṇaveyeva sīdati. Tasmāti yasmā evaṃ anatthāvaho kusītasaṃsaggo, tasmā taṃ āgamma ālasiyānuyogena kucchitaṃ sīdatīti kusītaṃ. Tato eva hīnavīriyaṃ nibbīriyaṃ akalyāṇamittaṃ parivajjeyya. Ekanteneva pana kāyavivekādīnañceva tadaṅgavivekādīnañca vasena pavivittehi, tato eva kilesehi ārakattā ariyehi parisuddhehi nibbānaṃ paṭipesitattabhāvato pahitattehi ārammaṇalakkhaṇūpanijjhānānaṃ vasena jhāyanato jhāyīhi sabbakālaṃ paggahitavīriyatāya āraddhavīriyehi paṇḍitehi sappaññehiyeva saha āvaseyya saṃvaseyyāti.
10. 退没经注释显示巴利原文
10. Parihānasuttavaṇṇanā
79 在第十经中,「导向退没」意为不增长,是证悟道果的障碍。然而,对于已证得的道果,并没有退没这回事。「三种法」:在以法为依止的教说中,为了详细分析所开示的法,转而以补特伽罗为依止的教说来解说,世尊说:「比丘们,于此,有学比丘……」等语。显示巴利原文
79. Dasame parihānāya saṃvattantīti avuddhiyā bhavanti, maggādhigamassa paripanthāya honti. Adhigatassa pana maggassa parihāni nāma natthi. ‘‘Tayo dhammā’’ti dhammādhiṭṭhānavasena uddiṭṭhadhamme puggalādhiṭṭhānāya desanāya vibhajanto ‘‘idha, bhikkhave, sekho bhikkhū’’tiādimāha.
此处,「业园者」指:因从事工作的场所被称为「园」,此人以此为园,故得名业园者。「业乐者」指乐于这些工作的人。「投身于业园状态者」指已投入并安住于这种以业为乐、与业园相应状态的人。这里的「业」是指那些应当做的工作,即:袈裟的裁剪缝制、袈裟的制作、支撑杖、钵袋、肩带、腰带、风箱、托架、足垫、扫帚等资具的制作,以及精舍中破损、毁坏处的修补。确实有一类人,整天只做这类事情。这是针对那样的人说的。然而,若有人仅在制作这些资具的时候做这些事,在教授的时候领受教授,在诵习的时候诵习,在做塔庙、庭院等义务时做塔庙庭院等义务,在作意的时候,于一切处业处或护持业处作意,则此人不称为业园者。对于他而言:显示巴利原文
Tattha kammaṃ āramitabbato ārāmo etassāti kammārāmo. Kamme ratoti kammarato. Kammārāmataṃ kammābhiratiṃ anuyutto payuttoti kammārāmatamanuyutto. Tattha kammaṃ nāma itikattabbaṃ kammaṃ, seyyathidaṃ – cīvaravicāraṇaṃ, cīvarakaraṇaṃ, upatthambhanaṃ, pattatthavikaṃ, aṃsabandhanaṃ, kāyabandhanaṃ, dhamakaraṇaṃ, ādhārakaṃ, pādakathalikaṃ, sammajjanīti evamādīnaṃ upakaraṇānaṃ karaṇaṃ, yañca vihāre khaṇḍaphullādipaṭisaṅkharaṇaṃ . Ekacco hi etāni karonto sakaladivasaṃ etāneva karoti. Taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ. Yo pana etesaṃ karaṇavelāyameva etāni karoti, uddesavelāyaṃ uddesaṃ gaṇhāti, sajjhāyavelāyaṃ sajjhāyati, cetiyaṅgaṇavattādikaraṇavelāyaṃ cetiyaṅgaṇavattādīni karoti, manasikāravelāyaṃ manasikāraṃ karoti sabbatthakakammaṭṭhāne vā pārihāriyakammaṭṭhāne vā, na so kammārāmo nāma. Tassa taṃ –
凡是同梵行者需要处理的各种高低事务,他都能干、毫不懈怠,并具备如理的审察与智慧,足以胜任、善加安排。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yāni kho pana tāni sabrahmacārīnaṃ uccāvacāni kiṃkaraṇīyāni, tattha dakkho hoti analaso, tatrupāyāya vīmaṃsāya samannāgato, alaṃ kātuṃ alaṃ saṃvidhātu’’nti (dī. ni. 3.345; a. ni. 10.18) –
由这些经文开端,显示他所做的正是世尊所开许之事。显示巴利原文
Ādinā satthārā anuññātakaraṇameva hoti.
所谓“谈话之乐者”(bhassārāmo),是指有人以世尊所禁止的王论等无益言论,日夜虚度,于谈话无有节制,故称谈话之乐者。然而,若有人无论昼夜,皆宣说法义、解答疑问,此人则少语,于谈话实有节制。何以故?因为他遵循了“诸比丘,汝等聚集时,应作二事:法谈或圣默然”(《中部》1.273)这一规则。显示巴利原文
Bhassārāmoti yo bhagavatā paṭikkhittarājakathādivasena rattindivaṃ vītināmeti, ayaṃ bhasse pariyantakārī na hotīti bhassārāmo nāma. Yo pana rattimpi divāpi dhammaṃ katheti, pañhaṃ vissajjeti, ayaṃ appabhasso bhasse pariyantakārīyeva. Kasmā? ‘‘Sannipatitānaṃ vo, bhikkhave, dvayaṃ karaṇīyaṃ – dhammī vā kathā, ariyo vā tuṇhībhāvo’’ti (ma. ni. 1.273) vuttavidhiṃyeva paṭipannoti.
“睡眠之乐者”指:有人尽情饱食,令腹满胀之后,便沉溺于卧床之乐、触受之乐与睡眠之乐;又或者在行走、坐下乃至站立时,被昏沉睡眠所制伏而陷入沉睡,此人即名为睡眠之乐者。然而,若有人因身体病苦,心沉入有分,则此人不属睡眠之乐者。正因如此,世尊说:显示巴利原文
Niddārāmoti yo yāvadatthaṃ udarāvadehakaṃ bhuñjitvā seyyasukhaṃ, passasukhaṃ, middhasukhaṃ anuyuñjati, yo ca gacchantopi nisinnopi ṭhitopi thinamiddhābhibhūto niddāyati, ayaṃ niddārāmo nāma. Yassa pana karajakāyagelaññena cittaṃ bhavaṅgaṃ otarati, nāyaṃ niddārāmo, tenevāha –
“阿耆毗舍那,我确实忆念:夏季最后一个月,于午后乞食归来,将僧伽梨衣折叠四层铺好后,右胁而卧,具念正知,安住于睡眠。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Abhijānāmi kho panāhaṃ, aggivessana, gimhānaṃ pacchime māse pacchābhattaṃ piṇḍapātappaṭikkanto catugguṇaṃ saṅghāṭiṃ paññāpetvā dakkhiṇena passena sato sampajāno niddaṃ okkamitā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.387).
在此,即使是“凡夫善士”,亦当知其为“有学”。因此,应当了知:这些(不善品质),对他的一切殊胜证得,以及对其余更高者的向上殊胜证得,皆会导致退失。至于白分(善法部分)的义理阐明,当以所说黑分(不善部分)的相反方式来了知。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca puthujjanakalyāṇakopi sekhotveva veditabbo. Tasmā tassa sabbassapi visesādhigamassa itaresaṃ upari visesādhigamassa ca parihānāya vattantīti veditabbaṃ. Sukkapakkhassa vuttavipariyāyena atthavibhāvanā veditabbā.
在偈颂中,「掉举者」指:因具有散乱心相的掉举而躁动不宁、未得寂静。「少事者」指:即使是对于已允许的、如前所述的事务,也只在合适的时间、恰当的时机才做,由此成为少事者。「少睡眠者」指:通过“白昼以经行、宴坐……”等所说的警寤精勤,而成为远离睡眠者。「不掉举者」指:对于由乐于谈论所生起的心散乱,通过不乐于谈论并回避它,从而不掉举、心得寂静,也就是「得定者」的意思。其余的解释,因与前述道理相同,故容易理解。如此,在这一品中,第一、第二、第五、第六、第七、第八、第九各经阐述了流转之理;其余诸经则阐述了流转与还灭之理。显示巴利原文
Gāthāsu uddhatoti cittavikkhepakarena uddhaccena uddhato avūpasanto. Appakiccassāti anuññātassapi vuttappakārassa kiccassa yuttappayuttakāleyeva karaṇato appakicco assa bhaveyya. Appamiddhoti ‘‘divasaṃ caṅkamena nisajjāyā’’tiādinā vuttajāgariyānuyogena niddārahito assa. Anuddhatoti bhassārāmatāya uppajjanakacittavikkhepassa abhassārāmo hutvā parivajjanena na uddhato vūpasantacitto, samāhitoti attho. Sesaṃ pubbe vuttanayattā suviññeyyameva. Iti imasmiṃ vagge paṭhamadutiyapañcamachaṭṭhasattamaaṭṭhamanavamesu suttesu vaṭṭaṃ kathitaṃ, itaresu vaṭṭavivaṭṭaṃ.
第四品显示巴利原文
4. Catutthavaggo
《寻经》解释显示巴利原文
1. Vitakkasuttavaṇṇanā
80 在第四品的第一经中,「不善寻」是指从不善巧中所生起的寻,也就是邪寻,这是它的含义。「与不被他轻视相应」:这里“不被他轻视”是指不被他人看不起、不被人轻蔑、不被人贬低的状态,即生起“啊,但愿别人不轻视我”这样的欲望行径。与这种“不被他轻视”的状态相应、相关联,或者缘于此状态而生起的寻,便称为「与不被他轻视相应的寻」。因此,这实际上是站在那种渴望受到尊敬的欲望行径中所生起的寻的别名。「与利养、恭敬、名声相应」:是指以衣服等利养、恭敬以及称扬名声为所缘而与之相应。「与慈悯他人相应」:是指以那种外表看似慈悯、实质却属于家居情爱的方式而与之相应。关于这一点,曾这样说过:显示巴利原文
80. Catutthavaggassa paṭhame akusalavitakkāti akosallasambhūtā vitakkā, micchāvitakkāti attho. Anavaññattipaṭisaṃyuttoti ettha anavaññattīti anavaññā parehi attano ahīḷitatā aparibhūtatā, ‘‘aho vata maṃ pare na avajāneyyu’’nti evaṃ pavatto icchācāro, tāya anavaññattiyā paṭisaṃyutto saṃsaṭṭho, taṃ vā ārabbha pavatto anavaññattipaṭisaṃyutto vitakko. Tasmā ‘‘kathaṃ nu kho maṃ pare gahaṭṭhā ceva pabbajitā ca na orakato daheyyu’’nti sambhāvanakamyatāya icchācāre, ṭhatvā pavattitavitakkassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Lābhasakkārasilokapaṭisaṃyuttoti cīvarādilābhena ceva sakkārena ca kittisaddena ca ārammaṇakaraṇavasena paṭisaṃyutto. Parānuddayatāpaṭisaṃyuttoti paresu anuddayatāpatirūpakena gehasitapemena paṭisaṃyutto. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ –
他与国王、国王的大臣、婆罗门、居士、外道及外道弟子们交往共住,同喜同悲:他人快乐时自己便快乐,他人痛苦时自己便痛苦,一遇应办之事,便亲自投身其中。显示巴利原文
‘‘Saṃsaṭṭho viharati rājūhi rājamahāmattehi brāhmaṇehi gahapatikehi titthiyehi titthiyasāvakehi sahanandī sahasokī, sukhitesu sukhito, dukkhitesu dukkhito, uppannesu kiccakaraṇīyesu attanāva yogaṃ āpajjatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.3; 4.241; vibha. 888).
在偈颂中,与‘不受轻视’相应之人,称为‘不受轻视相应者’。尊重利养恭敬而不尊重法,故称‘利养恭敬尊重者’。于苦乐之中,如同家中同伴一般共处,故称‘同伴’,即犹如朋友般的侍者。基于对那些人(侍者)的世俗情爱,而惯于与他们同喜,称为‘与同伴同喜’,这显示了与悲悯他人相应的寻。所谓‘远离结的灭尽’,是指被这三种寻所征服之人,便会远离结的灭尽,即远离阿拉汉果,对他来说,阿拉汉果是难以获得的。这便是其含义。显示巴利原文
Gāthāsu anavaññattiyā paṭisaṃyutto puggalo anavaññattisaṃyutto. Lābhasakkāre gāravo etassa, na dhammeti lābhasakkāragāravo. Sukhadukkhesu amā saha bhavāti amaccā, sahāyasadisā upaṭṭhākā. Tehi gehasitapemavasena saha nandanasīlo sahanandī amaccehi, iminā parānuddayatāpaṭisaṃyuttaṃ vitakkaṃ dasseti. Ārā saṃyojanakkhayāti imehi tīhi vitakkehi abhibhūto puggalo saṃyojanakkhayato arahattato dūre, tassa taṃ dullabhanti attho.
‘子女与牲畜’:指子女和牲畜。这里,以‘子女’一词兼含妻子等;以‘牲畜’一词兼含马、水牛、田地、宅地等。‘婚事’:指安排婚礼,以此一词也包含迎娶。‘蓄积’:指资具,即积蓄各种资具的意思。另有一种读法是‘亲密’,指朋友的亲密。‘于一切处已舍弃’是衔接词。‘那样的比丘’:意指如前所述,舍弃一切戏论之后,依导师所教导的正确行道而应被看见之人。他在轮回中观察到了怖畏,因此称为‘比丘’,他有能力证得最上的正觉——阿拉汉果。显示巴利原文
Puttapasunti putte ca pasavo ca. Puttasaddena cettha dārādayo; pasusaddena assamahiṃsakhettavatthādayo ca saṅgahitā. Vivāheti vivāhakārāpane. Iminā āvāhopi saṅgahito. Saṃharānīti pariggahāni, parikkhārasaṅgahānīti attho. ‘‘Santhavānī’’ti ca paṭhanti, mittasanthavānīti attho. Sabbattha hitvāti sambandho. Bhabbo so tādiso bhikkhūti so yathāvuttaṃ sabbaṃ papañcaṃ pariccajitvā yathā satthārā vuttāya sammāpaṭipattiyā, tathā passitabbato tādiso saṃsāre bhayaṃ ikkhatīti bhikkhu uttamaṃ sambodhiṃ arahattaṃ pattuṃ arahati.
恭敬经的注释显示巴利原文
2. Sakkārasuttavaṇṇanā
81 第二经中,「由于恭敬」指以恭敬为原因;或者说「由于恭敬」就是以恭敬为因、以恭敬为起因。应知于此世间,有些人依止恭敬,成为恶欲者、被欲所败坏的人,安住于欲行,心想「我要获取恭敬」,于是从事种种不正当、不适宜的邪命,从此处死后便投生恶趣;另一些人得到相应的恭敬后,以此为因,生起慢、骄、悭吝等放逸,从此处死后也投生恶趣。针对这两种情况,世尊才说:「被恭敬所征服,心被遍取。」此处「被征服」即被压伏、被镇住的意思。「心被遍取」指善心被耗尽,由于欲行以及慢、骄等,将善心消耗殆尽。或者,也可将「心被遍取」理解为心被从四周完全抓住,意思是,如前所述,由于这些不善,善心全然没有机会生起,心相续被从方方面面整个攫取。再者,「由于不恭敬」是指以他人对自己造作的轻蔑、侮辱等不恭敬为原因,或是以此不恭敬为因所引生的慢等心理。最后,「由于恭敬与不恭敬二者」,是指被某些人给予恭敬,同时又遭另一些人给予不恭敬。就是针对这两种情况而说。显示巴利原文
81. Dutiye sakkārenāti sakkārena hetubhūtena, atha vā sakkārenāti sakkārahetunā, sakkārahetukena vā. Sakkārañhi nissāya idhekacce puggalā pāpicchā icchāpakatā icchācāre ṭhatvā ‘‘sakkāraṃ nibbattessāmā’’ti anekavihitaṃ anesanaṃ appatirūpaṃ āpajjitvā ito cutā apāyesu nibbattanti, apare yathāsakkāraṃ labhitvā tannimittaṃ mānamadamacchariyādivasena pamādaṃ āpajjitvā ito cutā apāyesu nibbattanti. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘sakkārena abhibhūtā pariyādinnacittā’’ti. Tattha abhibhūtāti ajjhotthaṭā. Pariyādinnacittāti khepitacittā, icchācārena mānamadādinā ca khayaṃ pāpitakusalacittā. Atha vā pariyādinnacittāti parito ādinnacittā, vuttappakārena akusalakoṭṭhāsena yathā kusalacittassa uppattivāro na hoti, evaṃ samantato gahitacittasantānāti attho. Asakkārenāti hīḷetvā paribhavitvā parehi attani pavattitena asakkārena hetunā, asakkārahetukena vā mānādinā. Sakkārena ca asakkārena cāti kehici pavattitena sakkārena kehici pavattitena asakkārena ca. Ye hi kehici paṭhamaṃ sakkatā hutvā tehiyeva asārabhāvaṃ ñatvā pacchā asakkatā honti, tādise sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘sakkārena ca asakkārena cā’’ti.
其中,被恭敬所征服的人,应以提婆达多等为例说明。对此,也有这样的说法:显示巴利原文
Ettha sakkārena abhibhūtā devadattādayo nidassetabbā. Vuttampi cetaṃ –
「果实确实能毁坏芭蕉,果实能毁坏竹与苇;」
恭敬能毁恶人,犹如胎儿毁母骡。”(《相应部》1.183;《增支部》4.68;《小部》335)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Phalaṃ ve kadaliṃ hanti, phalaṃ veḷuṃ phalaṃ naḷaṃ; Sakkāro kāpurisaṃ hanti, gabbho assatariṃ yathā’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 1.183; a. ni. 4.68; cūḷava. 335);
诸如丹达基王、迦陵伽王、中部王等,便是被施加于善人的不恭敬所摧伏的事例,应以此说明。对此,也有这样的说法:显示巴利原文
Sādhūnaṃ upari katena asakkārena abhibhūtā daṇḍakīrājakāliṅgarājamajjharājādayo nidassetabbā. Vuttampi cetaṃ –
因为丹达基将瘦弱的婆蹉苦行者抛散杀害,
他与族人、国土一同被连根斩断;
在名为“炽燃”的地狱中,他遭受煎熬,
火星纷纷散落在他的身上。
若人欺诳自律的出家者,
诽谤那些宣说正法、清净无过的沙门;
他便如椰子,为群犬拖拽撕毁。
中者触怒心意,在那享有盛誉的象群之间;
与眷属一同被灭尽,那时便成为中林。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Kisañhi vacchaṃ avakiriya daṇḍakī, Ucchinnamūlo sajano saraṭṭho; Kukkuḷanāme nirayamhi paccati, Tassa phuliṅgāni patanti kāye. ‘‘Yo saññate pabbajite avañcayi, Dhammaṃ bhaṇante samaṇe adūsake; Taṃ nāḷikeraṃ sunakhā parattha, Saṅgamma khādanti viphandamānaṃ’’. (jā. 2.17.70-71); ‘‘Upahacca manaṃ majjho, mātaṅgasmiṃ yasassine; Sapārisajjo ucchinno, majjhāraññaṃ tadā ahū’’ti. (jā. 2.19.96);
由于恭敬与不恭敬而被折服的外道,例如耆那教徒等,应当被指出。显示巴利原文
Sakkārena ca asakkārena ca abhibhūtā aññatitthiyā nāṭaputtādayo nidassetabbā.
在偈颂中,「两者」指的是恭敬与不恭敬两方面。「定不动摇」即不动摇,以心一境性而安住。是谁的定不动摇呢?因此说到「不放逸住者」。由于那些导致放逸的法——如贪等——已被彻底断除,因此称为不放逸住者的阿拉汉,其定不会动摇,因为他不会因世间法而动摇。「微细见观者」:为了证得果等至的意义,以微细的见与慧频频观察,故称为微细见观者。「取灭尽乐者」:即以四取的灭尽为究竟的阿拉汉果,为他所应乐于,故称为取灭尽乐者。其余的解释如前所述。显示巴利原文
Gāthāsu ubhayanti ubhayena sakkārena ca asakkārena ca. Samādhi na vikampatīti na calati, ekaggabhāvena tiṭṭhati. Kassa pana na calatīti āha ‘‘appamādavihārino’’ti. Yo pamādakaradhammānaṃ rāgādīnaṃ suṭṭhu pahīnattā appamādavihārī arahā, tassa. So hi lokadhammehi na vikampati. Sukhumadiṭṭhivipassakanti phalasamāpattiatthaṃ sukhumāya diṭṭhiyā paññāya abhiṇhaṃ pavattavipassanattā sukhumadiṭṭhivipassakaṃ. Upādānakkhayārāmanti catunnaṃ upādānānaṃ khayaṃ pariyosānabhūtaṃ arahattaphalaṃ āramitabbaṃ etassāti upādānakkhayārāmaṃ. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
第三 天声经注释显示巴利原文
3. Devasaddasuttavaṇṇanā
82 在第三经中,「于诸天中」,是指除了无色界天和无想天之外的其他再生天。「天声」指诸天因喜悦而发出的声响。「发出」是说通过相互的对话、谈论而发出来。「依时而」的意思是依据时间、依据时机。这就是说:那些天安住在某个时间,等待那个时刻到来时就会看见他,由此而到达那样的时机。「也有读作‘依各各时’的,意思是‘依于彼彼时’。」所谓「在那个时候」,是指当对于欲乐和居家,像“欲如骨锁”等以及“居家是逼迫”等所说的那样,善见了其中的过患,并且对于其对立的出离,善见了其中的功德的时候。因为这时他的心必定倾向于出家。「圣弟子」:指圣者佛陀世尊的弟子,或者是想要证得弟子身份的人,或者是必将成为的圣弟子。这里是指就最后生的声闻菩萨而说的。「剃除须发」:就是剃掉头发和胡须。「披着袈裟衣」:由于是用黄褐色染成,所以称为袈裟,是修梵行者所适合的衣服,把它穿好、披好。「从家出,向往非家的出家而思」:就是从家、从屋舍走出去,想要出家为非家,这样出家之思、计划,也就是出家的意思。在这里,因为在家庭里有帮助的耕田、经商等事业,称为在家事,而出家并没有这些,所以应当明白出家就是无家。显示巴利原文
82. Tatiye devesūti ṭhapetvā arūpāvacaradeve ceva asaññadeve ca tadaññesu upapattidevesu. Devasaddāti devānaṃ pītisamudāhārasaddā. Niccharantīti aññamaññaṃ ālāpasallāpavasena pavattanti. Samayā samayaṃ upādāyāti samayato samayaṃ paṭicca. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yasmiṃ kāle ṭhitā te devā taṃ kālaṃ āgamma naṃ passissanti, tato taṃ samayaṃ sampattaṃ āgammāti. ‘‘Samayaṃ samayaṃ upādāyā’’ti ca keci paṭhanti, tesaṃ taṃ taṃ samayaṃ paṭiccāti attho. Yasmiṃ samayeti yadā ‘‘aṭṭhikaṅkalūpamā kāmā’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.234; pāci. 417), ‘‘sambādho gharāvāso’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.191; saṃ. ni. 2.154) ca kāmesu gharāvāse ca ādīnavā, tappaṭipakkhato nekkhamme ānisaṃsā ca sudiṭṭhā honti, tasmiṃ samaye. Tadā hissa ekantena pabbajjāya cittaṃ namati. Ariyasāvakoti ariyassa buddhassa bhagavato sāvako, sāvakabhāvaṃ upagantukāmo, ariyasāvako vā avassaṃbhāvī . Antimabhavikaṃ sāvakabodhisattaṃ sandhāya ayamārambho. Kesamassuṃ ohāretvāti kese ca massuñca ohāretvā apanetvā. Kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvāti kasāyena rattatāya kāsāyāni brahmacariyaṃ carantānaṃ anucchavikāni vatthāni nivāsetvā ceva pārupitvā ca. Agārasmā anagāriyaṃ pabbajjāya cetetīti agārasmā gharā nikkhamitvā anagāriyaṃ pabbajjaṃ pabbajeyyanti pabbajjāya ceteti pakappeti, pabbajatīti attho. Ettha ca yasmā agārassa hitaṃ kasivaṇijjādikammaṃ agāriyanti vuccati, tañca pabbajjāya natthi, tasmā pabbajjā anagāriyanti ñātabbā.
「魔」指烦恼魔。「为战斗而思」意为为了交战而发动心,武装自己以征服魔。然而,对于如此修行的人,即使是天子魔也会前来制造障碍,因此在这里,「魔」也应理解为天子魔,因为天子魔也要破坏他的愿望。再者,自从出家之日,或者从剃发之时起,当这位修行者受持清净的戒律,并在止观上精勤用功时,便会相应地以彼分断和镇伏断来削弱烦恼魔——此时并未正面交战,因为没有面对面的厮杀。因此说「与魔之间为战斗而思」。显示巴利原文
Mārenāti kilesamārena. Saṅgāmāya cetetīti yujjhanatthāya cittaṃ uppādeti, māraṃ abhivijetuṃ sannayhati. Yasmā pana evarūpassa paṭipajjanakapuggalassa devaputtamāropi antarāyāya upakkamati, tasmā tassapi vasena mārenāti ettha devaputtamārenātipi attho veditabbo. Tassāpi ayaṃ icchāvighātaṃ karissatevāti. Yasmā pana pabbajitadivasato paṭṭhāya khuraggato vā paṭṭhāya sīlāni samādiyanto parisodhento samathavipassanāsu kammaṃ karonto yathārahaṃ tadaṅgappahānavikkhambhanappahānānaṃ vasena kilesamāraṃ paripāteti nāma, na yujjhati nāma sampahārassa abhāvato, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘mārena saddhiṃ saṅgāmāya cetetī’’ti.
「七」是按类别而言有七种;但若细分,则有三十七种。如何分呢?即四念处、四正勤、四神足、五根、五力、七觉支、八圣道。如此细分虽有三十七种,但依念处等类别摄之,便仅为七类,故说为「七」。「菩提分」:以觉悟之义名为「菩提」的圣者所拥有的部分,或属于道智的部分,即是菩提分,也就是菩提的一部分、菩提的分支之意。也有读作「bodhipakkhikānaṃ」的,意为具有菩提分的人,或致力于菩提分的人。「致力于修习者」:即精勤于观、致力于圣道修习的人。因为在观的刹那,念处等只是假名菩提分;只有在圣道的刹那,它们才是究竟的菩提分。显示巴利原文
Sattannanti koṭṭhāsato sattannaṃ, pabhedato pana te sattatiṃsa honti. Kathaṃ? Cattāro satipaṭṭhānā, cattāro sammappadhānā, cattāro iddhipādā, pañcindriyāni, pañca balāni, satta bojjhaṅgā , ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggoti. Evaṃ pabhedato sattatiṃsavidhāpi satipaṭṭhānādikoṭṭhāsato satteva hontīti vuttaṃ ‘‘sattanna’’nti. Bodhipakkhiyānanti bujjhanaṭṭhena bodhīti laddhanāmassa ariyapuggalassa maggañāṇasseva vā pakkhe bhavānaṃ bodhipakkhiyānaṃ , bodhikoṭṭhāsiyānanti attho. ‘‘Bodhipakkhikāna’’ntipi pāṭho, bodhipakkhavantānaṃ, bodhipakkhe vā niyuttānanti attho. Bhāvanānuyogamanuyuttoti vipassanaṃ ussukkāpetvā ariyamaggabhāvanānuyogamanuyutto. Vipassanākkhaṇe hi satipaṭṭhānādayo pariyāyena bodhipakkhiyā nāma, maggakkhaṇeyeva pana te nippariyāyena bodhipakkhiyā nāma honti.
「诸漏尽」即欲漏等一切漏的灭尽。因为当诸漏灭尽时,一切烦恼也就随之灭尽。由此,这里所说的是阿拉汉道。「无漏」即远离诸漏。「心解脱、慧解脱」中,此处以「心」一词指阿拉汉果的定,以「慧」一词指与此定相应的慧。其中,应知由于定从贪染中解脱,故称为心解脱;由于慧从无明中解脱,故称为慧解脱。此义正是世尊所说——显示巴利原文
Āsavānaṃ khayāti kāmāsavādīnaṃ sabbesaṃ āsavānaṃ khayā. Āsavesu hi khīṇesu sabbe kilesā khīṇāyeva honti. Tena arahattamaggo vutto hoti. Anāsavanti āsavavirahitaṃ. Cetovimuttiṃ paññāvimuttinti ettha cetovacanena arahattaphalasamādhi, paññāvacanena taṃsampayuttā ca paññā vuttā. Tattha samādhi rāgato vimuttattā cetovimutti, paññā avijjāya vimuttattā paññāvimuttīti veditabbā. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā –
比丘们,若他有定,那便是他的定根;若他有慧,那便是他的慧根。比丘们,如是,由离贪染而有心解脱,由离无明而有慧解脱。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yo hissa, bhikkhave, samādhi, tadassa samādhindriyaṃ. Yā hissa, bhikkhave, paññā, tadassa paññindriyaṃ. Iti kho, bhikkhave, rāgavirāgā cetovimutti, avijjāvirāgā paññāvimuttī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.516).
再者,当知:止之果为心解脱,观之果为慧解脱。“于现法”即于此自身相续中。“自己证知、作证已”即由自己以殊胜之慧亲自现证,不依他人而了知。“具足而住”即达到、成就后而住。“他胜彼会遇之顶而住”:战胜魔罗,因已征服而得胜利,于彼名为“会遇”之圣道顶——即阿拉汉果等至自在处,征服而安住,入于等至而住,此为其义。再者,当知这些“天”之称谓,于已见谛之天众中通称,特指净居天众。显示巴利原文
Apicettha samathaphalaṃ cetovimutti, vipassanāphalaṃ paññāvimuttīti veditabbā. Diṭṭheva dhammeti imasmiṃyeva attabhāve. Sayaṃ abhiññā sacchikatvāti attanāyeva abhivisiṭṭhāya paññāya paccakkhaṃ katvā aparappaccayena ñatvā. Upasampajja viharatīti pāpuṇitvā sampādetvā viharati. Tameva saṅgāmasīsaṃ abhivijiya ajjhāvasatīti māraṃ abhivijinitvā vijitavijayattā tena katasaṅgāmasaṅkhātassa ariyamaggassa sīsabhūtaṃ arahattaphalasamāpattiissariyaṭṭhānaṃ, abhibhavanto āvasati, samāpajjati icceva attho. Ime ca devasaddā diṭṭhasaccesu devesu pavattanti, visesato suddhāvāsadevesūti veditabbaṃ.
偈颂中:“大”者,因戒等功德广大而称大。“离畏惧”者,因能生畏惧之烦恼已断,远离畏惧,无有怯弱。“人中贤骏”者,犹如马中良骏,于人之中为贤骏、最上人。“已胜难胜之军”:战胜、征服了大多数人所难胜的烦恼军队。亦有读作“ajjayī”,意为“已胜”。“已胜死魔军,以无碍解脱”:无碍——因遍满三界、又可分为一千五百等而广大,亦因不能被他人障碍、遮止而称无碍。以解脱即圣道,战胜死魔——魔罗之军。你战胜了那难胜之军。向你,人中贤骏,致敬——此是关联。显示巴利原文
Gāthāsu mahantanti sīlādiguṇamahattena mahantaṃ. Vītasāradanti sārajjakarānaṃ kilesānaṃ abhāvena vigatasārajjaṃ apagatamaṅkubhāvaṃ. Purisājaññāti assādīsu assājānīyādayo viya purisesu ājānīyabhūtā uttamapurisā. Dujjayamajjhabhūti pacurajanehi jetuṃ asakkuṇeyyaṃ kilesavāhiniṃ abhibhavi ajjhotthari. ‘‘Ajjayī’’tipi paṭhanti, ajinīti attho. Jetvāna maccunosenaṃ, vimokkhena anāvaranti lokattayābhibyāpanato diyaḍḍhasahassādivibhāgato ca vipulattā aññehi āvarituṃ paṭisedhetuṃ asakkuṇeyyattā ca anāvaraṃ, maccuno mārassa senaṃ vimokkhena ariyamaggena jetvā yo tvaṃ dujjayaṃ ajayi, tassa namo, te purisājaññāti sambandho.
“如是”(iti)即依前文所说方式;“hi”仅为语气词。“诸天敬礼如是得心、证阿拉汉的漏尽者”——这是以结语的方式,重申前义。或解为:“如是”即是以此因由。什么因由呢?即因战胜魔军而心得成就。以此因由,诸天恭敬他,这便是这里的意义。现在,为从果相上说明此因,而说:“因诸天不见彼有何,由此趣入死王掌控。”此句之义为:即使诸天多方寻觅,也丝毫不见这位人中的贤骏有任何缘由,会走向死亡、落入死亡的控制。因此,清净的诸天众敬礼他。显示巴利原文
Itīti vuttappakārena. Hi-iti nipātamattaṃ. Etaṃ pattamānasaṃ adhigatārahattaṃ khīṇāsavaṃ devatānamassantīti vuttamevatthaṃ nigamanavasena dasseti. Atha vā itīti iminā kāraṇena. Kiṃ pana etaṃ kāraṇaṃ? Namucisenāvijayena pattamānasattaṃ. Iminā kāraṇena taṃ devatā namassantīti attho. Idāni taṃ kāraṇaṃ phalato dassetuṃ ‘‘tañhi tassa na passanti, yena maccuvasaṃ vaje’’ti vuttaṃ. Tassattho – yasmā tassa purisājaññassa paṇidhāya gavesantāpi devā aṇumattampi taṃ kāraṇaṃ na passanti, yena so maccuno maraṇassa vasaṃ vaje upagaccheyya. Tasmā taṃ visuddhidevā namassantīti.
4. 五前行相经注释显示巴利原文
4. Pañcapubbanimittasuttavaṇṇanā
83 83. 第四经中:“何时”(yadā)指在某个时候。“天”(devo)指再生天。因为天有三种:世间天、再生天、清净天。其中,世间天指国王、刹帝利等;再生天指自四大王天以上的诸天;清净天指诸漏尽者。然而此处所指,是欲界天,故说“天指再生天”。“从天身”(devakāyā),是指从天众当中,或从天的居处,即从天界。此处“身”(kāya)字是表示群体、处所的词。“当死之法”(cavanadhammo),即是死法,指因寿尽或福尽而面临死亡。显示巴利原文
83. Catutthe yadāti yasmiṃ kāle. Devoti upapattidevo. Tayo hi devā – sammutidevā, upapattidevā, visuddhidevāti. Tesu sammutidevā nāma rājāno khattiyā. Upapattidevā nāma cātumahārājikato paṭṭhāya taduparidevā. Visuddhidevā nāma khīṇāsavā. Idha pana kāmāvacaradevo adhippeto. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘devoti upapattidevo’’ti. Devakāyāti devasamūhato, devaṭṭhānato vā, devalokatoti attho. Samūhanivāsavācako hi ayaṃ kāyasaddo. Cavanadhammoti maraṇadhammo, āyukkhayena vā puññakkhayena vā upaṭṭhitamaraṇoti attho.
“五种前兆显现”:对于这位死期将至的天子,五种死之前兆生起,或变得清晰可见。“华鬘枯萎”:他所佩戴的花鬘,犹如正午时分被置于烈日下一般,枯萎失色,光彩顿失。显示巴利原文
Pañcassapubbanimittāni pātubhavantīti assa upaṭṭhitamaraṇassa devaputtassa pañca maraṇassa pubbanimittāni uppajjanti, pakāsāni vā honti. Mālā milāyantīti tena piḷandhitamālā majjhanhikasamaye ātape khittā viya milātā vihatasobhā honti.
“衣服变脏”:他所穿着、披覆的衣服原本如同秋季晴空中初升的太阳般辉煌灿烂,色彩缤纷;然而顷刻之间,便如同被扔进泥中踩踏过一般,光彩尽失,变得污浊不堪。显示巴利原文
Vatthāni kilissantīti saradasamaye vigatavalāhake ākāse abbhussakkamānabālasūriyasadisappabhāni nānāvirāgavaṇṇāni tena nivatthapārutavatthāni taṃ khaṇaṃyeva kaddame khipitvā madditāni viya vihatappabhāni malināni honti.
“从腋下流出汗滴”:犹如纯净无瑕的宝石,又如巧匠精心铸造的金像,他的身体原本没有汗垢污秽;此刻,汗水却从两腋不断流下。不仅两腋,全身处处都沁出汗珠,使得身体犹如披覆了一张珍珠璎珞。显示巴利原文
Kacchehi sedā muccantīti suparisuddhajātimaṇi viya susikkhitasippācariyaracitasuvaṇṇapaṭimā viya ca pubbe sedamalajallikārahitasarīrassa tasmiṃ khaṇe ubhohi kacchehi sedadhārā sandanti paggharanti. Na kevalañca kacchehiyeva, sakalasarīratopi panassa sedajalakaṇṇikā muccatiyeva, yena āmuttamuttājālagavacchito viya tassa kāyo hoti.
“身体现起不美之色”:他先前从结生开始,身体便随其威德自然放光,遍照一由旬、二由旬,乃至十二由旬的范围,熠熠生辉,没有斑白、皱纹等相,亦不为寒热所恼害,犹如十六岁的天女,或如二十岁的天子。然而就在那一刻,黯然无光、威德隐没的衰败之相便侵入并停驻在他身上。显示巴利原文
Kāye dubbaṇṇiyaṃ okkamatīti pubbe paṭisandhito paṭṭhāya yathānubhāvaṃ ekayojanaṃ dviyojanaṃ yāva dvādasayojanamattampi padesaṃ ābhāya pharitvā vijjotamāno kāyo hoti khaṇḍiccapāliccādivirahito, na sītaṃ na uṇhaṃ upaghātakaṃ, devadhītā soḷasavassuddesikā viya hoti, devaputto vīsativassuddesiko viya, taṃ khaṇaṃyeva nippabhe nitteje kāye virūpabhāvo anupavisati saṇṭhāti.
“在自己的天座上不喜乐”:在与天女众一同游乐嬉戏的天座上,他不再感到喜乐,内心了无滋味。据说,以人间的时间计算,他将在七日后死去,于是这些前兆便显现出来。因为这些相的生起,他陷入极度的忧恼,心想:“我将要与这般成就永别了。”由此身内便生起大苦热,汗从全身各处流下。这位长久以来未尝过苦的天子,不堪承受那种苦;有的便四处奔走,哭喊着“我在燃烧!我在燃烧!”,悲叹不已,一切所触都索然无味,忧恼悲泣;有的则提起正念,身语不露异样,但同样无法忍受与所爱别离之苦,内心不安地游走。显示巴利原文
Sake devo devāsane nābhiramatīti attano accharāgaṇehi saddhiṃ kīḷanaparicaraṇakadibbāsane na ramati, na cittassādaṃ labhati. Tassa kira manussagaṇanāya sattahi divasehi maraṇaṃ bhavissatīti imāni pubbanimittāni pātubhavanti. So tesaṃ uppattiyā ‘‘evarūpāya nāma sampattiyā vinā bhavissāmī’’ti balavasokābhibhūto hoti. Tenassa kāye mahāpariḷāho uppajjati, tena sabbato gattehi sedā muccanti. Cirataraṃ kālaṃ aparicitadukkho taṃ adhivāsetuṃ asakkonto ekacco ‘‘dayhāmi dayhāmī’’ti kandanto paridevanto katthaci assādaṃ alabhanto vijappanto vilapanto tahiṃ tahiṃ āhiṇḍati. Ekacco satiṃ upaṭṭhapetvā kāyavācāhi vikāraṃ akarontopi piyavippayogadukkhaṃ asahanto vihaññamāno vicarati.
然而,这些前兆,就如同在人世间,唯有大福德者——如国王、大臣等——才会显现陨星坠落、地动、月蚀等相,并非人人得见;同样,这些相也只显现于有大威力的天神身上。当这些相生起时,有些天神知道:“这就是死的前兆。”但并非所有天神都知道。其中,那些凭借微薄善业得生的天神,便恐惧地想:“现在,谁能知道我将投生何处?”而那些大福德者则想:“我曾广行布施,守护戒律,积聚了众多福德,死后必定有善趣可往。”因此他不恐惧、不动摇。当这些前兆显现之后,天女们便领他进入欢喜园;在一切天界都有欢喜园。显示巴利原文
Imāni pana pubbanimittāni yathā loke mahāpuññānaṃ rājarājamahāmattādīnaṃyeva ukkāpātabhūmicālacandaggāhādīni nimittāni paññāyanti, na sabbesaṃ; evameva mahesakkhadevānaṃyeva paññāyati. Uppannāni ca tāni ‘‘imāni maraṇassa pubbanimittāni nāmā’’ti keci devā jānanti, na sabbe. Tattha yo mandena kusalakammena nibbatto, so ‘‘idāni ko jānāti, ‘kuhiṃ nibbattissāmī’’’ti bhāyati. Yo pana mahāpuñño, so ‘‘bahuṃ mayā dānaṃ dinnaṃ, sīlaṃ rakkhitaṃ, puññaṃ upacitaṃ, ito cutassa me sugatiyeva pāṭikaṅkhā’’ti na bhāyati na vikampati. Evaṃ upaṭṭhitapubbanimittaṃ pana taṃ gahetvā devatā nandanavanaṃ pavesenti sabbadevalokesu nandanavanaṃ atthiyeva.
“以三语随喜”:即用以下将说的三句话来随喜,使他生起欣喜与愉悦,予以安慰;或是用祝福的方式,作出合乎当时情景的欣喜表示。也有人说“随喜”一词在此是指“教诫”。“从此处”指从那天界离去;“尊姐”是称呼语。“善趣”意指善好的趣处,是就人界而言的。“去”是指以结生的方式前往投生。显示巴利原文
Tīhi vācāhi anumodentīti idāni vuccamānehi tīhi vacanehi anumodenti, modaṃ pamodaṃ uppādenti, assāsenti, abhivadanavasena vā taṃkhaṇānurūpaṃ pamodaṃ karonti. Keci pana ‘‘anumodentī’’ti padassa ‘‘ovadantī’’ti vadanti. Itoti devalokato. Bhoti ālapanaṃ. Sugatinti sundaragatiṃ, manussalokaṃ sandhāya vadanti. Gacchāti paṭisandhiggahaṇavasena upehi.
如是语时:当那些天神对那位天子说“尊驾,请从此处往善趣去吧”等应当说的言辞时,世尊即如此开示。彼时,会中坐着一位不知名姓、不为人知而善于连缀法义的比丘,他心想:“世尊不善趣等词皆是总说,义犹未显。我今当令此义更为明了。”于是便问:“尊者,这究竟是什么呢?”等等。因有获得信等功德的差别之缘,且人身乃是成为天众投生之因,诸天以人身最为殊胜,是故世尊说:“比丘,人身即是诸天所说的往生善趣。”显示巴利原文
Evaṃ vutteti evaṃ tadā tehi devehi tassa ‘‘ito bho sugatiṃ gacchā’’tiādinā vattabbavacane bhagavatā vutte aññataro nāmagottena apākaṭo tassaṃ parisāyaṃ nisinno anusandhikusalo eko bhikkhu ‘‘ete sugatiādayo bhagavatā avisesato vuttā avibhūtā, handa te vibhūtatare kārāpessāmī’’ti etaṃ ‘‘kiṃnu kho, bhante’’tiādivacanaṃ avoca. Saddhādiguṇavisesapaṭilābhakāraṇato devūpapattihetuto ca manussattaṃ devānaṃ abhisammatanti āha ‘‘manussattaṃ kho bhikkhu devānaṃ sugatigamanasaṅkhāta’’nti.
“称为往善趣”的意思是:正确地宣说、称扬、赞叹为“往善趣”。其中,“得人身者”的“得”字是动作的指称,指的是获得的动作,意思就是获得信等。“得人身”指生于人中,或达到人的状态。由于生在天界者多难有听闻如来法音的机会,而人则不然,故说“得人身”。在如来所开示的“法与律”中,即是在世尊所教导、包含三学的教法中。“法”者,因不离法故;“律”者,因能随顺众生根性调伏应调伏者故,是以名为“法与律”。或因具足亲依止而不离法,能调伏尘垢微薄之众生故,名为“法与律”。或因纯粹以法调伏,不施杖罚等方便故,名为“法与律”。或因法与律相应故,名为“法与律”。或为成就法(即道果涅槃)而调伏故,名为“法与律”。或因此调伏,乃从大悲、一切知智等法而生起故,名为“法与律”。或因世尊自身即是法、是法性之身、为法之主人,其调伏非仅凭逻辑推度之调伏故,名为“法与律”。或为在法(即道果)这个应当成就的领域而生起调伏故,名为“法与律”。在此法与律之中。显示巴利原文
Sugatigamanasaṅkhātanti ‘‘sugatigamana’’nti sammā kathitaṃ, vaṇṇitaṃ thomitanti attho. Yaṃ manussabhūtoti ettha yanti kiriyāparāmasanaṃ, tena paṭilabhatīti ettha paṭilabhanakiriyā āmasīyati, yo saddhāpaṭilābhoti attho. Manussabhūtoti manussesu uppanno, manussabhāvaṃ vā patto. Yasmā devaloke uppannānaṃ tathāgatassa dhammadesanā yebhuyyena dullabhā savanāya, na tathā manussānaṃ, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘manussabhūto’’ti. Tathāgatappavedite dhammavinayeti tathāgatena bhagavatā desite sikkhattayasaṅgahe sāsane. Tañhi dhammato anapetattā dhammo ca, āsayānurūpaṃ vineyyānaṃ vinayanato vinayo cāti dhammavinayo, upanissayasampattiyā vā dhammato anapetattā dhammaṃ apparajakkhajātikaṃ vinetīti dhammavinayo. Dhammeneva vā vinayo, na daṇḍasatthehīti dhammavinayo, dhammayutto vā vinayoti dhammavinayo, dhammāya vā saha maggaphalanibbānāya vinayoti dhammavinayo, mahākaruṇāsabbaññutaññāṇādidhammato vā pavatto vinayoti dhammavinayo. Dhammo vā bhagavā dhammabhūto dhammakāyo dhammassāmī, tassa dhammassa vinayo, na takkiyānanti dhammavinayo, dhamme vā maggaphale nipphādetabbavisayabhūte vā pavatto vinayoti dhammavinayoti vuccati. Tasmiṃ dhammavinaye.
“得信”是指由“世尊善说法”等因缘而生起信心。在此法与律之中,具信者依教奉行,便能成就现法利益、来世利益及究竟义。“称为善得利”的意思是:譬如金银、田地、房宅等利得,能令众生得受用之乐,除饥渴等苦,止息资财乏少,成为获得珍珠等宝之因,引生世间相续;如是由世出世间之信,各随其分,亦能带来世出世间的果报安乐,令以信为先导而修行者消除生老等苦,止息功德之乏少,成为获得念觉支等宝之因,引生世间相续。正如这样所说。显示巴利原文
Saddhaṃpaṭilabhatīti ‘‘svākkhāto bhagavatā dhammo’’tiādinā saddhaṃ uppādeti. Saddho hi imasmiṃ dhammavinaye yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipajjamāno diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikaparamatthe ārādhessati. Suladdhalābhasaṅkhātanti ettha yathā hiraññasuvaṇṇakhettavatthādilābho sattānaṃ upabhogasukhaṃ āvahati, khuppipāsādidukkhaṃ paṭibāhati, dhanadāliddiyaṃ vūpasameti, muttādiratanapaṭilābhahetu hoti, lokasantatiñca āvahati; evaṃ lokiyalokuttarā saddhāpi yathāsambhavaṃ lokiyalokuttaraṃ vipākasukhamāvahati, saddhādhurena paṭipannānaṃ jātijarādidukkhaṃ paṭibāhati, guṇadāliddiyaṃ vūpasameti, satisambojjhaṅgādiratanapaṭilābhahetu hoti, lokasantatiñca āvahati. Vuttañhetaṃ –
具足信心,戒行圆满,拥有声誉,财富具足;
无论行至何处,就在那里受到尊敬。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Saddho sīlena sampanno, yaso bhogasamappito; Yaṃ yaṃ padesaṃ bhajati, tattha tattheva pūjito’’ti. (dha. pa. 303);
应当如此理解:获得信便是“善得利益”。再者,这种信的获得随身不离、不共于他,乃一切成就之因,亦为获得世间金银等财富之因。确实,依信而行布施等福德,能获得种种上妙财富资具,并以之成就自他的真舍利益。然而,对于无信者,那些财富资具却会带来损害,在此世如此,未来世也是如此。由此亦可知信为“善得利益”。正如:显示巴利原文
Evaṃ saddhāpaṭilābhassa suladdhalābhatā veditabbā. Yasmā panāyaṃ saddhāpaṭilābho anugāmiko anaññasādhāraṇo sabbasampattihetu, lokiyassa ca hiraññasuvaṇṇādidhanalābhassa kāraṇaṃ. Saddhoyeva hi dānādīni puññāni katvā uḷāruḷāravittūpakaraṇāni adhigacchati, tehi ca attano paresañca atthameva sampādeti. Assaddhassa pana tāni anatthāvahāni honti, idha ceva samparāye cāti, evampi saddhāya suladdhalābhatā veditabbā. Tathā hi –
信是旅途的资粮。显示巴利原文
‘‘Saddhā bandhati pātheyyaṃ’’. (Saṃ. ni. 1.79).
“信是人的伴侣。”(相应部 1.36, 59)显示巴利原文
‘‘Saddhā dutiyā purisassa hotī’’ti ca. (Saṃ. ni. 1.36, 59).
在此世间,信是男子最上的财富。显示巴利原文
‘‘Saddhīdha vittaṃ purisassa seṭṭha’’nti ca. (Saṃ. ni. 1.73; su. ni. 184).
「信」如同大龙象之手。(增支部 6.43;长老偈 694)显示巴利原文
‘‘Saddhāhattho mahānāgo’’ti ca. (A. ni. 6.43; theragā. 694).
「信」是种子,苦行是雨。(相应部 1.197;经集 77)显示巴利原文
‘‘Saddhā bījaṃ tapo vuṭṭhī’’ti ca. (Saṃ. ni. 1.197; su. ni. 77).
诸比丘,圣弟子是信的寻求者。显示巴利原文
‘‘Saddhesiko, bhikkhave, ariyasāvako’’ti (a. ni. 7.67) ca.
“藉由信,渡越瀑流。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Saddhāya tarati ogha’’nti ca. (Saṃ. ni. 1.246) –
于众多处所,以种种理由,信备受赞叹。显示巴利原文
Anekesu ṭhānesu anekehi kāraṇehi saddhā saṃvaṇṇitā.
今为开显那种信——正是依此信,于教法中于诸善法得称善安住、入于决定——而说“sā kho panassā”等。其中,“assā”指此比丘之信。“niviṭṭhā”谓已深入安立,已渗入心相续。“mūlajātā”谓根已生起。然则,何者为信之根本?即于可信处,令净信生起之作意方法。又,亲近善士、听闻正法、如理作意、法随法行,此四入流支当知为信之根。“patiṭṭhitā”谓由证得圣道,不为任何所动,而得安住,故说“坚固,不可夺”。“daḷhā”指坚实。“asaṃhāriyā”指不能被任何所收缩、减少或除去。如是,彼诸天众正是冀望他证得入流道而作此语,因为他们愿圣者得享各自天界之欲乐。故言:“来,天,再来!”显示巴利原文
Idāni yāya saddhāya sāsane kusaladhammesu suppatiṭṭhito nāma hoti niyāmokkantiyā, taṃ saddhaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘sā kho panassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha assāti imassa bhaveyyāti attho. Niviṭṭhāti abhiniviṭṭhā cittasantānaṃ anupaviṭṭhā. Mūlajātāti jātamūlā. Kiṃ pana saddhāya mūlaṃ nāma? Saddheyyavatthusmiṃ okappanahetubhūto upāyamanasikāro. Apica sappurisasevanā saddhammassavanaṃ yonisomanasikāro dhammānudhammappaṭipattīti cattāri sotāpattiyaṅgāni mūlāni veditabbāni. Patiṭṭhitāti ariyamaggādhigamena kenaci akampanīyabhāvena avaṭṭhitā. Tenevāha ‘‘daḷhā asaṃhāriyā’’ti. Daḷhāti thirā. Asaṃhāriyāti kenaci saṃharituṃ vā hāpetuṃ vā apanetuṃ vā asakkuṇeyyā. Iti te devā tassa sotāpattimaggasamadhigamaṃ āsīsantā evaṃ vadanti. Attano devaloke kāmasukhūpabhogārahameva hi ariyapuggalaṃ te icchanti. Tenāha ‘‘ehi, deva, punappuna’’nti.
在偈颂中,功德灭尽的死亡也因命根断绝而发生,故说“因寿尽而死”。“Anumodatanti”指随喜,即(诸天)正在随喜。“Manussānaṃ sahabyatanti”指与人类为伴,是与人类共处的状态。“Saha byetī”意为共处者,称为同伴,即共同活动者,其状态名为同伴性。“Niviṭṭhassā”意为若安住其中。“Yāvajīvanti”指尽形寿,即直至生命延续的尽头,义为直到般涅槃。显示巴利原文
Gāthāsu puññakkhayamaraṇampi jīvitindriyupacchedeneva hotīti āha ‘‘cavati āyusaṅkhayā’’ti. Anumodatanti anumodantānaṃ. Manussānaṃ sahabyatanti manussehi sahabhāvaṃ. Saha byetīti sahabyo, sahapavattanako, tassa bhāvo sahabyatā. Niviṭṭhassāti niviṭṭhā bhaveyya. Yāvajīvanti yāva jīvitappavattiyā, yāva parinibbānāti attho.
“Appamāṇanti”指无量,即通过恭敬、众多、殊胜、多次地行作,而成为无可计量。“Nirūpadhinti”指无依,即远离烦恼之依,极为清净、无垢。然而,由于那些天人不喜好广大善业——因为那会超越欲界——他们只喜好欲界的功德,所以在此处应如此理解其义:“从此天界死后,转生人间,到达懂事之龄后,舍弃一切身恶行等恶行,累积一切身善行等殊胜、广大的善行,并依靠圣道生起信心吧。”然而,因为诸天为不远离往生自己的天界,也希望获得出世间法中的初道或第二道,因此依据他们的意愿,也应如此理解“无量”与“无依”的含义:通过切断能造成计量的、与邪见相应的粗显欲贪等烦恼,而成为无量;或者,由于舍断了会在第七有生起的蕴依、能产生彼蕴依的造作之依,以及各道所应断的烦恼之依,从此不再生起,故而是与名为涅槃的无依相应,称为无依。显示巴利原文
Appamāṇanti sakkaccaṃ bahuṃ uḷāraṃ bahukkhattuñca karaṇavasena pamāṇarahitaṃ. Nirūpadhinti kilesūpadhirahitaṃ, suvisuddhaṃ nimmalanti attho. Yasmā pana te devā mahaggatakusalaṃ na icchanti kāmalokasamatikkamanato, kāmāvacarapuññameva icchanti, tasmā evamettha attho veditabbo – ‘‘ito devalokato cuto manussesu uppajjitvā viññutaṃ patto kāyaduccaritādiṃ sabbaṃ duccaritaṃ pahāya kāyasucaritādiṃ sabbaṃ sucaritaṃ uḷāraṃ vipulaṃ upacinitvā ariyamaggena āgatasaddho bhavāhī’’ti. Yasmā pana lokuttaresu paṭhamamaggaṃ dutiyamaggampi vā icchanti attano devalokūpapattiyā anativattanato, tasmā tesampi vasena ‘‘appamāṇaṃ nirūpadhi’’ntipadānaṃ attho veditabbo – pamāṇakarānaṃ diṭṭhekaṭṭhaoḷārikakāmarāgādikilesānaṃ upacchedena appamāṇaṃ, sattamabhavato vā uppajjanārahassa khandhūpadhissa taṃnibbattakaabhisaṅkhārūpadhissa taṃtaṃmaggavajjhakilesūpadhissa ca pahānena tesaṃ anibbattanato nirupadhisaṅkhātanibbānasannissitattā ca nirupadhīti.
如此说明了能彻底关闭恶趣之门的业之后,接着为说明能带来善趣成就的业,而说“tato opadhikaṃ”等。其中的“有依”(opadhika),是指以“依”为异熟,即能产生有身成就与财物成就的业。因为“依”(upadhi)即指有身。正如所说:“某些少量的恶业之受持,因被有身成就所阻碍,而不会感果。”(《分别论》810)诸欲功德也称为依。正如所说:“世人因诸依而有忧愁。”(《相应部》1.12;《经集》34)在此,词义如下:苦与乐依存于此,故称为“依”,也就是有身与诸欲功德。以“依”为因,或者说应得此“依”的,就称为“有依”,也就是功德。这种功德应当广大而殊胜地造作。如何造作?通过布施。因为布施比起其他方式更易行持,所以这样说。再者,说“通过布施”,其实也包含了无畏施,并非仅指财物的布施;也应理解为包含了持戒。然而,由于那些天人一心只愿阿修罗众减少、天众增满,因此诸天在指明方法时,以“也安置其他凡人生于正法、梵行中”这句话,来劝导众生修习法施。“当知时”(yadā vidū):指当……显示巴利原文
Evaṃ accantameva apāyadvārapidhāyakaṃ kammaṃ dassetvā idāni saggasampattinibbattakakammaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tato opadhika’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha opadhikanti upadhivepakkaṃ attabhāvasampattiyā ceva bhogasampattiyā ca nibbattakanti attho. Upadhīti hi attabhāvo vuccati. Yathāha ‘‘santekaccāni pāpakāni kammasamādānāni upadhisampattipaṭibāhitāni na vipaccantī’’ti (vibha. 810). Kāmaguṇāpi. Yathāha ‘‘upadhīhi narassa socanā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.12; su. ni. 34). Tatrāyaṃ vacanattho – upadhīyati ettha sukhadukkhanti upadhi, attabhāvo kāmaguṇā ca. Upadhikaraṇaṃ sīlaṃ etassa, upadhiṃ vā arahatīti opadhikaṃ, puññaṃ, taṃ bahuṃ uḷāraṃ katvā. Kathaṃ? Dānena. Dānañhi itarehi sukaranti evaṃ vuttaṃ. Dānenāti vā padena abhayadānampi vuttaṃ, na āmisadānamevāti sīlassāpi saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Yasmā pana te devā asurakāyahāniṃ ekanteneva devakāyapāripūriñca icchanti, tasmā tassa upāyaṃ dassentā ‘‘aññepi macce saddhamme, brahmacariye nivesayā’’ti dhammadāne niyojenti. Yadā vidūti yasmiṃ kāle devā devaṃ cavantaṃ vidū vijāneyyuṃ, tadā imāya yathāvuttāya anukampāya dukkhāpanayanakamyatāya ‘‘deva, ime devakāye punappunaṃ uppajjanavasena ehi āgacchāhī’’ti ca anumodentīti.
5. 为多人利益经的注释显示巴利原文
5. Bahujanahitasuttavaṇṇanā
84 第五经中,「世间」一词:有三种世间——众生世间、行世间、器世间。其中,众生世间是依相续流转的、与根相系的色法、无色法及色无色法的聚合;器世间即地、山等种种差别;行世间则是前二者中的诸蕴。此处所指,是众生世间。因此,「世间」意指众生世间。其中并非天界,不是梵天界,而是人界。在人界中,也不是别的轮围世界,正是此轮围世界。其中亦非一切处所,而是如下所界定的中央之地:‘东方有名为迦阇伽罗的城镇,其外为大萨罗树,自此之外为边地,以内为中央;东南方有名为萨罗婆提的河流,自此之外为边地,以内为中央;南方有名为塞达甘尼迦的城镇,自此之外为边地,以内为中央;西方有名为图那的婆罗门村,自此之外为边地,以内为中央;北方有名为优尸罗达阇的山,自此之外为边地,以内为中央’(《大品》259)。这片土地,长度三百由旬,宽度二百五十由旬,周围九百由旬,如来出现于此。不仅是如来,独觉佛、上首弟子、八十位大长老、佛母、佛父、转轮王,以及其他成为核心的婆罗门、居士,也都唯现于此地。显示巴利原文
84. Pañcame loketi ettha tayo lokā – sattaloko, saṅkhāraloko, okāsalokoti. Tesu indriyabaddhānaṃ rūpadhammānaṃ arūpadhammānaṃ rūpārūpadhammānañca santānavasena vattamānānaṃ samūho sattaloko, pathavīpabbatādibhedo okāsaloko, ubhayepi khandhā saṅkhāraloko. Tesu sattaloko idha adhippeto. Tasmā loketi sattaloke. Tatthāpi na devaloke, na brahmaloke, manussaloke. Manussalokepi na aññasmiṃ cakkavāḷe, imasmiṃyeva cakkavāḷe. Tatrāpi na sabbaṭṭhānesu, ‘‘puratthimāya disāya gajaṅgalaṃ nāma nigamo, tassa aparena mahāsālā, tato paraṃ paccantimā janapadā, orato majjhe; puratthimadakkhiṇāya disāya sallavatī nāma nadī, tato paraṃ paccantimā janapadā, orato majjhe; dakkhiṇāya disāya setakaṇṇikaṃ nāma nigamo, tato paraṃ paccantimā janapadā , orato majjhe; pacchimāya disāya thūṇaṃ nāma brāhmaṇagāmo, tato paraṃ paccantimā janapadā, orato majjhe; uttarāya disāya usiraddhajo nāma pabbato, tato paraṃ paccantimā janapadā, orato majjhe’’ti (mahāva. 259) evaṃ paricchinne āyāmato tiyojanasate vitthārato aḍḍhateyyayojanasate parikkhepato navayojanasate majjhimadese uppajjati tathāgato. Na kevalañca tathāgatova paccekabuddhā aggasāvakā asītimahātherā buddhamātā buddhapitā cakkavattirājā aññe ca sārappattā brāhmaṇagahapatikā ettheva uppajjanti. Idha pana tathāgatavāreyeva sabbatthakavasena ayaṃ nayo labbhati, itaresu ekadesavasena.
「Uppajjamānā uppajjantī」这两个词均为未完成的动词形式,应如是理解:那些‘出现’者,是为利益多数人而出现,并非由于其他原因。此处,这种词性特征不容被他种词性特征所否定。显示巴利原文
Uppajjamānāuppajjantīti idaṃ pana ubhayampi vippakatavacanameva, uppajjantā bahujanahitatthāya uppajjanti, na aññena kāraṇenāti evamettha attho veditabbo. Evarūpañhettha saddalakkhaṇaṃ na sakkā aññena saddalakkhaṇena paṭibāhituṃ.
再者,应知「正在生起者」、「名为出生」、「名为已出生」三种区别。如,如来发大愿时,寻求成佛之法时,圆满诸波罗蜜时,行五大舍时,行亲族利益行时,将世间利益行与佛陀利益行修至究竟时,圆满波罗蜜后住于兜率天宫时,从彼处下降而在最后有中结生时,住于俗家时,出家时,精进大修行时,乃至智慧成熟,登上菩提座,摧破魔军,于初夜忆念宿住,于中夜清净天眼,于后夜将智慧投入缘起,以种种方式观照一切行,证得入流道,乃至现证不来果——在此整个过程中,他都名为「正在生起者」。在阿拉汉道的刹那,名为「出生」。在阿拉汉果的刹那,名为「已出生」。因为诸佛不像声闻弟子那样,需次第生起神变智等,而是以阿拉汉道同时成就一切佛陀功德聚。因此,佛陀由于已作一切应作,于阿拉汉果刹那,得名「已出生」。此处正是就阿拉汉果刹那而说「出现」,其义为‘成为已出生’。显示巴利原文
Apica uppajjamāno nāma uppajjati nāma uppanno nāmāti ayaṃ pabhedo veditabbo. Tathāgato hi mahābhinīhāraṃ karonto, buddhakare dhamme pariyesanto, pāramiyo pūrento, pañca mahāpariccāge pariccajanto, ñātatthacariyaṃ caranto, lokatthacariyaṃ, buddhatthacariyaṃ koṭiṃ pāpento, pāramiyo pūretvā tusitabhavane tiṭṭhanto, tato otaritvā carimabhave paṭisandhiṃ gaṇhanto, agāramajjhe vasanto, abhinikkhamanto, mahāpadhānaṃ padahanto, paripakkañāṇo bodhimaṇḍaṃ āruyha mārabalaṃ vidhamento paṭhamayāme pubbenivāsaṃ anussaranto, majjhimayāme dibbacakkhuṃ visodhento, pacchimayāme paṭiccasamuppāde ñāṇaṃ otāretvā anekākāraṃ sabbasaṅkhāre sammasitvā sotāpattimaggaṃ paṭivijjhanto yāva anāgāmiphalaṃ sacchikarontopi uppajjamāno eva nāma, arahattamaggakkhaṇe uppajjati nāma, arahattaphalakkhaṇe pana uppanno nāma. Buddhānañhi sāvakānaṃ viya na paṭipāṭiyā iddhividhañāṇādīnaṃ uppādanakiccaṃ atthi, saheva pana arahattamaggena sakalopi buddhaguṇarāsi āgatova nāma hoti. Tasmā te nibbattasabbakiccattā arahattaphalakkhaṇe uppannā nāma honti. Idha arahattaphalakkhaṇaṃ sandhāya ‘‘uppajjatī’’ti vutto. Uppanno hotīti ayañhettha attho.
即便是漏尽声闻,当他在积累作为声闻菩提之因的功德资粮时,在从事前方便、前行持与去而复返的正行时,在进入最后有结生时;渐次成年、通达事理后,见到轮回的过患,发起出家的意愿,令出家达到圆满,圆满戒等修习,受持头陀支,依法而住,精勤不眠,生起种种智慧,确立观智,直至证得较低的道——在这整个过程中,也都名为「正在生起者」。在阿拉汉道的刹那,名为「出生」。在阿拉汉果的刹那,则名为「已出生」。至于有学圣者,从往昔的前世亲依止开始,一直到种姓智之间,都名为「正在生起者」。在初道的刹那,名为「出生」。从初果的刹那开始,名为「已出生」。至此,已说明了‘诸比丘,这三种人,在世间出现时,就在世间出现’这句话的含义。显示巴利原文
Sāvakopi khīṇāsavo sāvakabodhiyā hetubhūte puññasambhāre sambharanto pubbayogaṃ pubbacariyaṃ gatapaccāgatavattaṃ pūrento carimabhave nibbattanto anukkamena viññutaṃ patvā saṃsāre ādīnavaṃ disvā pabbajjāya cetayamāno pabbajjaṃ matthakaṃ pāpetvā sīlādīni paripūrento dhutadhamme samādāya vattamāno jāgariyaṃ anuyuñjanto ñāṇāni nibbattento vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā heṭṭhimamagge adhigacchantopi uppajjamāno eva nāma, arahattamaggakkhaṇe uppajjati nāma, arahattaphalakkhaṇe pana uppanno nāma. Sekkho pana pubbūpanissayato paṭṭhāya yāva gotrabhuñāṇā uppajjamāno nāma, paṭhamamaggakkhaṇe uppajjati nāma, paṭhamaphalakkhaṇato paṭṭhāya uppanno nāma. Ettāvatā ‘‘tayome, bhikkhave, puggalā loke uppajjamānā uppajjantī’’ti padānaṃ attho vutto hoti.
现在,在“为了多数人的利益”等句中:“为了多数人的利益”(bahujanahitāya)是指为了大众的利益。“为了多数人的安乐”(bahujanasukhāya)是指为了大众的安乐。“出于对世间的慈悯”(lokānukampāya)是指缘于对众生世间的慈悯。对哪一个众生世间呢?对那些听闻如来的说法后通达法、饮用不死甘露的众生。世尊开演《转法轮经》时,以阿若憍陈如为首的十八俱胝梵天通达了法。像这样,一直到调伏游方者须跋陀罗为止,通达法的众生数目无法计算。在《大集会经》的说法、《吉祥经》、《小教诫罗睺罗经》、《平等心说法》——在这四个地方,获得现观的众生,其数量无法划定。这就是对此无量众生世间生起慈悯的原因。至于作为阿拉汉的弟子和有学弟子,他们出于对世间的慈悯而出现,应当通过由法将等、法库执掌者等所宣说的法而得以通达的众生,以及后来由大玛欣德长老等所宣说的法而通达真理的众生,乃至今天以及未来依靠教法而立足于天界与解脱道中的众生,来解释这一含义。显示巴利原文
Idāni bahujanahitāyātiādīsu bahujanahitāyāti mahājanassa hitatthāya. Bahujanasukhāyāti mahājanassa sukhatthāya. Lokānukampāyāti sattalokassa anukampaṃ paṭicca. Katarasattalokassāti ? Yo tathāgatassa dhammadesanaṃ sutvā dhammaṃ paṭivijjhati, amatapānaṃ pivati, tassa. Bhagavato hi dhammacakkappavattanasuttantadesanāya aññātakoṇḍaññappamukhā aṭṭhārasa brahmakoṭiyo dhammaṃ paṭivijjhiṃsu. Evaṃ yāva subhaddaparibbājakavinayanā dhammaṃ paṭividdhasattānaṃ gaṇanā natthi, mahāsamayasuttantadesanāyaṃ maṅgalasuttaṃ, cūḷarāhulovādaṃ, samacittadesanāyanti imesu catūsu ṭhānesu abhisamayaṃ pattasattānaṃ paricchedo natthi. Evametassa aparimāṇassa sattalokassa anukampāya. Sāvakassa pana arahato sekkhassa ca lokānukampāya uppatti dhammasenāpatiādīhi dhammabhaṇḍāgārikādīhi ca desitadesanāya paṭivedhappattasattānaṃ vasena, aparabhāge ca mahāmahindattherādīhi desitadesanāya paṭividdhasaccānaṃ vasena, yāvajjatanā ito paraṃ anāgate ca sāsanaṃ nissāya saggamokkhamaggesu patiṭṭhahantānaṃ vasenapi ayamattho vibhāvetabbo.
再者,“为了多数人的利益”(bahujanahitāya)是指为了大众的利益,即通过教导他们成就智慧,来教导现法利益和来世利益。“为了多数人的安乐”(bahujanasukhāya)是指为了大众的安乐,即通过成就舍,而授予他们资具的安乐。“出于对世间的慈悯”(lokānukampāya)是指为了慈悯世间,即通过成就慈与悲,像父母保护、守护子女一样地保护、守护世间。“为了人天的利益、福祉、安乐”(atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānaṃ):这里以‘人天’作为代表,特指那些有能力、可被教化的众生。在第一番说明中,显示了如来为了让他们获得涅槃道与果而出世。而在第二、第三番,则应关联阿拉汉与有学来解释。其中,“为了利益”(atthāya)这个词,用来说明‘为了究竟的利益,也就是涅槃’。“为了福祉”(hitāya),用来说明‘为了那能够达到涅槃的道’;因为除了能证得涅槃的道之外,再也没有更高的福祉了。“为了安乐”(sukhāya),用来说明‘为了体验果定的安乐’。显示巴利原文
Apica bahujanahitāyāti bahujanassa hitatthāya, nesaṃ paññāsampattiyā diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikahitūpadesakoti. Bahujanasukhāyāti bahujanassa sukhatthāya, cāgasampattiyā upakaraṇasukhasampadāyakoti. Lokānukampāyāti lokassa anukampanatthāya, mettākaruṇāsampattiyā mātāpitaro viya lokassa rakkhitā gopitāti. Atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānanti idha devamanussaggahaṇena bhabbapuggale veneyyasatte eva gahetvā tesaṃ nibbānamaggaphalādhigamāya tathāgatassa uppatti dassitā paṭhamavāre, dutiyatatiyavāresu pana arahato sekkhassa ca vasena yojetabbaṃ. Tattha atthāyāti iminā paramatthāya, nibbānāyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Hitāyāti taṃsampāpakamaggatthāyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Nibbānasampāpakamaggato hi uttariṃ hitaṃ nāma natthi. Sukhāyāti phalasamāpattisukhatthāyāti vuttaṃ hoti, tato uttari sukhābhāvato. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ samādhi paccuppannasukho ceva āyatiñca sukhavipāko’’ti (dī. ni. 3.355; a. ni. 5.27; vibha. 804).
“如来”等词的含义,前文已作解说。在“明行足”等词中:所谓“明”,三种明是依《怖骇经》(《中部》1.34 等)中所说的方法;六种明是依六神通;八种明则如《阿摩昼经》所说。所谓“行”,即是以戒律防护等十五种德行。完全具足、成就了这些不与凡夫共的功德,故称“明行足”。因善妙地前往、已至殊胜处、正确行于道、与正确地宣说,故称“善逝”。以一切方式了知世间,故称“世间解”。没有更超越于他的人,故称“无上士”。能引导调伏那些应被调伏、可受教化的众生,故称“调御丈夫”。能随顺时机,以现法利益、来世利益与究竟利益作教导,故称“天人师”。于一切应知之法,以一切方式,依自觉之智而觉悟,故称“佛陀”。此处仅为简要释义,详细释义当从《清净道论》去了知。显示巴利原文
Tathāgatotiādīnaṃ padānaṃ attho heṭṭhā vutto. Vijjācaraṇasampannotiādīsu tissopi vijjā bhayabherave (ma. ni. 1.34 ādayo) āgatanayena, chapi vijjā chaḷabhiññāvasena, aṭṭhapi vijjā ambaṭṭhasutte āgatāti vijjāhi, sīlasaṃvarādīhi, pannarasahi caraṇadhammehi ca, anaññasādhāraṇehi sampanno samannāgatoti vijjācaraṇasampanno. Sobhanagamanattā, sundaraṃ ṭhānaṃ gatattā, sammā gatattā, sammā gadattā ca sugato. Sabbathā viditalokattā lokavidū. Natthi etassa uttaroti anuttaro. Purisadamme purisaveneyye sāreti vinetīti purisadammasārathi. Diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikaparamatthehi yathārahaṃ anusāsatīti satthā. Sabbassāpi neyyassa sabbappakārena sayambhuñāṇena buddhattā buddhoti ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana visuddhimaggato (visuddhi. 1.132-133) gahetabbo.
他宣说法……乃至……后善:彼世尊出于对众生的悲悯,即使舍弃了无上的远离之乐也要宣说法。而且,不论他说法是略是广,都展现出初善、中善、后善的样貌。这是如何体现的呢?即使仅一首偈颂,因为法性全然美好,其第一句为初善,第二、三句为中善,最后一句为后善。一部主题连贯的经,其序分为初善,结语为后善,中间的内容为中善。一部由多个连贯主题组成的经,其第一个连贯主题为初善,最后一个连贯主题为后善,其余连贯主题为中善。又或者,佛陀的一切教法中:以作为自性之义的戒为初善;以止、观、道、果为中善;以涅槃为后善。或以戒与定为初善;以观与道为中善;以果与涅槃为后善。或以佛陀的极善觉悟为初善;以法的极善法性为中善;以僧团的极善行道为后善。或从闻法后如实证得的角度而言,正等觉菩提为初善,辟支菩提为中善,声闻菩提为后善。再者,听闻此法时,因能镇伏五盖,仅凭听闻便能带来善好,故为初善;修行此法时,因能带来止与观的安乐,仅凭修行便能带来安乐,故为中善;当修行者依此而行,落实修行之果,证得如如不动的状态时显示巴利原文
So dhammaṃ deseti ādi…pe… pariyosānakalyāṇanti so bhagavā sattesu kāruññaṃ paṭicca hitvāpi anuttaraṃ vivekasukhaṃ dhammaṃ deseti. Tañca kho appaṃ vā bahuṃ vā desento ādikalyāṇādippakārameva deseti. Kathaṃ? Ekagāthāpi hi samantabhaddakattā dhammassa paṭhamapādena ādikalyāṇā, dutiyatatiyehi majjhekalyāṇā, pacchimena pariyosānakalyāṇā. Ekānusandhikaṃ suttaṃ nidānena ādikalyāṇaṃ, nigamanena pariyosānakalyāṇaṃ, sesena majjhekalyāṇaṃ. Nānānusandhikaṃ suttaṃ paṭhamena anusandhinā ādikalyāṇaṃ, pacchimena pariyosānakalyāṇaṃ, sesehi majjhekalyāṇaṃ. Sakalopi vā sāsanadhammo attano atthabhūtena sīlena ādikalyāṇo, samathavipassanāmaggaphalehi majjhekalyāṇo, nibbānena pariyosānakalyāṇo. Sīlasamādhīhi vā ādikalyāṇo, vipassanāmaggehi majjhekalyāṇo, phalanibbānehi pariyosānakalyāṇo. Buddhasubuddhatāya vā ādikalyāṇo, dhammasudhammatāya majjhekalyāṇo, saṅghasuppaṭipattiyā pariyosānakalyāṇo. Taṃ sutvā tathattāya paṭipannena adhigantabbāya abhisambodhiyā vā ādikalyāṇo, paccekabodhiyā majjhekalyāṇo, sāvakabodhiyā pariyosānakalyāṇo. Suyyamāno cesa nīvaraṇavikkhambhanato savanenapi kalyāṇameva āvahatīti ādikalyāṇo, paṭipajjiyamāno samathavipassanāsukhāvahanato paṭipattiyāpi sukhameva āvahatīti majjhekalyāṇo, tathāpaṭipanno ca paṭipattiphale niṭṭhite tādibhāvāvahanato paṭipattiphalenapi kalyāṇameva āvahatīti pariyosānakalyāṇo. Nāthappabhavattā ca pabhavasuddhiyā ādikalyāṇo, atthasuddhiyā majjhekalyāṇo, kiccasuddhiyā pariyosānakalyāṇo. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘so dhammaṃ deseti ādi…pe… pariyosānakalyāṇa’’nti.
当世尊开示教法之梵行与道之梵行,以种种理趣阐明时,他所宣说的法,随其相应:凭借义理的圆满,故“有义”;凭借文句的圆满,故“有文”。因具足宣示、明示、开显、分别、显明等,将义理与词句妥善结合,故为“有义”;因具足字母、词语、文句、语法、语源、解说等一切圆满成就,故为“有文”。又因义理甚深与通达之甚深,故为“有义”;因法性甚深与说法之甚深,故为“有文”。或因为是义无碍解和辩无碍解的范畴,故为“有义”;因为是法无碍解和词无碍解的范畴,故为“有文”。因为智者能解,令审察之人得生净信,故为“有义”;因为值得信受,令普通人生起净信,故为“有文”。因意趣甚深,故为“有义”;因词句明显,故为“有文”。因无需增添,于整体上全然圆满,故为“完全圆满”;因无需删减,毫无瑕疵,故为“完全清净”。再者,从修行体证上表述清楚,故为“有义”;从教理学习上表述清楚,故为“有文”。因戒、定、慧、解脱、解脱知见等五法蕴的圆满而成为圆满;因远离随眠烦恼、为度脱生死而运显示巴利原文
Yaṃ pana bhagavā dhammaṃ desento sāsanabrahmacariyaṃ maggabrahmacariyañca pakāseti, nānānayehi dīpeti, taṃ yathānurūpaṃ atthasampattiyā sātthaṃ, byañjanasampattiyā sabyañjanaṃ. Saṅkāsana, pakāsana, vivaraṇa, vibhajana, uttānīkaraṇa paññattiatthapadasamāyogato sātthaṃ, akkharapadabyañjanākāraniruttiniddesasampattiyā sabyañjanaṃ, atthagambhīratāpaṭivedhagambhīratāhi vā sātthaṃ, dhammagambhīratādesanāgambhīratāhi sabyañjanaṃ. Atthapaṭibhānapaṭisambhidāvisayato vā sātthaṃ, dhammaniruttipaṭisambhidāvisayato sabyañjanaṃ. Paṇḍitavedanīyato parikkhakajanappasādakanti sātthaṃ, saddheyyato lokiyajanappasādakanti sabyañjanaṃ. Gambhīrādhippāyato sātthaṃ, uttānapadato sabyañjanaṃ. Upanetabbassa abhāvato sakalaparipuṇṇabhāvena kevalaparipuṇṇaṃ, apanetabbassa abhāvato niddosabhāvena parisuddhaṃ, apica paṭipattiyā adhigamabyattito sātthaṃ, pariyattiyā āgamabyattito sabyañjanaṃ, sīlādipañcadhammakkhandhapāripūriyā paripuṇṇaṃ, nirupakkilesato nittharaṇatthāya pavattito lokāmisanirapekkhato ca parisuddhaṃ, sikkhattayapariggahitattā brahmabhūtehi seṭṭhehi caritabbato tesaṃ cariyabhāvato ca brahmacariyaṃ. Tasmā ‘‘sātthaṃ sabyañjanaṃ…pe… pakāsetī’’ti vuccati. Paṭhamoti gaṇanānupubbato sabbalokuttamabhāvato ca paṭhamo puggalo.
“那位天人师的声闻弟子”:指那位具足前述功德的天人师——正自觉者的弟子,是在听闻他说法时产生的、如同法将一般的弟子,而非像富兰那等外道那样仅凭口头自封的所谓弟子。“行道者”:即由名为“行道”的圣道而出生于圣者家族,故称行道者,意指尚未完成修行、正在修习的人。“多闻”:对于经、应颂等教法,他曾广泛听闻,故称多闻。“戒行具足”:他既具足巴帝摩卡律仪等戒,又具备阿兰若住等头陀行的功德,圆满成就、完全具备,故称戒行具足。由此,世尊表明:“所谓怜悯世间,就是出于利益众生的意乐而说法,而这正是为了利益这三类人而说。”其余文句都很容易理解。显示巴利原文
Tasseva satthu sāvakoti tasseva yathāvuttaguṇassa satthu sammāsambuddhassa dhammadesanāya savanante jāto dhammasenāpatisadiso sāvako, na pūraṇādi viya paṭiññāmattena satthu sāvako. Pāṭipadoti paṭipadāsaṅkhātena ariyamaggena ariyāya jātiyā jāto bhavoti pāṭipado, aniṭṭhitapaṭipattikicco paṭipajjamānoti attho. Suttageyyādi pariyattidhammo bahuṃ suto etenāti bahussuto. Pātimokkhasaṃvarādisīlena ceva āraññikaṅgādidhutaṅgavatehi ca upapanno sampanno samannāgatoti sīlavatūpapanno. Iti bhagavā ‘‘lokānukampā nāma hitajjhāsayena dhammadesanā, sā ca imesu eva tīsu puggalesu paṭibaddhā’’ti dasseti. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva.
在偈颂中,“彼之后裔”:指通过追随那位天人师的修行与教法,而成为他的后继者、从他而生的人。因为驱散了无明之黑暗,以名为“法光”的光明照亮了自己及他人的相续,故称“造光者”。“宣说教法”:即演说四圣谛之法。“正在开启”:即推开。“不死涅槃之门”:不死即涅槃,其门即是圣道。“从诸轭中”:指从欲轭等种种束缚中解脱。“由那位大商主”:即由那位能引导应受教化的商队、度脱生死旷野的商主——世尊所指引。“沿着善说的道路前进”:指顺着那位如实善说者所圆满宣示的圣道,遵从并实践他的教导。“就在此处”:即在此生此现有的有身上。其余皆显而易见。显示巴利原文
Gāthāsu tassanvayoti tasseva satthu paṭipattiyā dhammadesanāya ca anugamanena tassanvayo anujāto. Avijjandhakāraṃ vidhamitvā saparasantānesu dhammālokasaṅkhātāya pabhāya karaṇato pabhaṅkarā. Dhammamudīrayantāti catusaccadhammaṃ kathentā. Apāpurantīti ugghāṭenti. Amatassa nibbānassa. Dvāraṃ ariyamaggaṃ. Yogāti kāmayogādito. Satthavāhenāti veneyyasatthavāhanato bhavakantāranittharaṇato satthavāho, bhagavā, tena satthavāhena. Sudesitaṃ maggamanukkamantīti tena sammā desitaṃ ariyamaggaṃ tassa desanānusārena anugacchanti paṭipajjanti. Idhevāti imasmiṃyeva attabhāve. Sesaṃ uttānameva.
第六经:不净随观经注释显示巴利原文
6. Asubhānupassīsuttavaṇṇanā
85 第六经中:“不净随观者”——即安住于不净随观的人,他们通过三十二身分的方式,以及将取自膨胀相等尸体上的不净相,汇集于此身的方式,成为不净随观者,安住于观察此身中的不净、不净之相。“入出息念”:即对入出息所建立的念,是缘取入出息而现起的念,也就是执持吸气与呼气的念。正如《无碍解道》所说:“āna是入息,并非出息;pāna是出息,并非入息”等。显示巴利原文
85. Chaṭṭhe asubhānupassīti asubhaṃ anupassantā dvattiṃsākāravasena ceva uddhumātakādīsu gahitanimittassa upasaṃharaṇavasena ca kāyasmiṃ asubhaṃ asubhākāraṃ anupassakā hutvā viharatha. Ānāpānassatīti ānāpāne sati, taṃ ārabbha pavattā sati, assāsapassāsapariggāhikā satīti attho. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘ānanti assāso, no passāso. Pānanti passāso, no assāso’’tiādi (paṭi. ma. 1.160).
“Vo”意为“你们的”。“内”,此处指所缘的内在。“面前”即正对面前、朝向面前。“善安立”即妥善地安立。这句话整体是说:愿你们的入出息念,能在业处面前善加安立。或者,对“面前”的另一种解释为摄持与出离。如《无碍解道》中说:“pari 为摄持义,mukha 为出离义,sati 为念义,故称面前念。”应知这里所展示的,正是那具备四念处、细分为十六种行相的入出息念业处的修习方法。显示巴利原文
Voti tumhākaṃ. Ajjhattanti idha gocarajjhattaṃ adhippetaṃ. Parimukhanti abhimukhaṃ. Sūpaṭṭhitāti suṭṭhu upaṭṭhitā. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ānāpānassati ca tumhākaṃ kammaṭṭhānābhimukhaṃ suṭṭhu upaṭṭhitā hotūti. Atha vā parimukhanti pariggahitaniyyānaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ paṭisambhidāyaṃ – ‘‘parīti pariggahaṭṭho, mukhanti niyyānaṭṭho , satīti upaṭṭhānaṭṭho, tena vuccati parimukhaṃ sati’’nti (paṭi. ma. 1.164). Iminā catusatipaṭṭhānasoḷasappabhedā ānāpānassatikammaṭṭhānabhāvanā dassitāti daṭṭhabbā.
如此,以简要的方式为贪行者和寻行者开示了依不净作意与身随观的奢摩他业处及观业处之后,现在为了单独显示观业处本身,而说:“你们应于一切行上,安住于无常随观。”其中,应当了知四组概念:无常、无常相、无常随观、无常随观者。五蕴,由于是存在之后又归于无,由于具有生灭的性质,由于是暂时性的,并且由于否定了恒常性,故称为“无常”。那种存在之后又归于无的行相,称为“无常相”。缘于此无常相而生起的观智,即为“无常随观”。以“无常”如此观照者,即是“无常随观者”。在这里应当详述的十一种不净论,修习它能证得初禅;以十六事为基础的入出息念论,修习它则能证得第四禅;以及观论——这些在《清净道论》中已从各个方面完整地阐述过了,故应依照那里所说的道理来理解。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ saṅkhepeneva rāgacaritavitakkacaritānaṃ sappāyaṃ paṭikūlamanasikārakāyānupassanāvasena samathakammaṭṭhānaṃ vipassanākammaṭṭhānañca upadisitvā idāni suddhavipassanākammaṭṭhānameva dassento ‘‘sabbasaṅkhāresu aniccānupassino viharathā’’ti āha. Tattha aniccaṃ, aniccalakkhaṇaṃ, aniccānupassanā, aniccānupassīti idaṃ catukkaṃ veditabbaṃ. Hutvā, abhāvato, udayabbayayogato, tāvakālikato, niccapaṭikkhepato ca khandhapañcakaṃ aniccaṃ nāma. Tassa yo hutvā abhāvākāro, taṃ aniccalakkhaṇaṃ nāma. Taṃ ārabbha pavattā vipassanā aniccānupassanā. Taṃ aniccanti vipassako aniccānupassī. Ettha ca ekādasavidhā asubhakathā paṭhamajjhānaṃ pāpetvā, soḷasavatthukā ca ānāpānakathā catutthajjhānaṃ pāpetvā, vipassanākathā ca vitthārato vattabbā, sā pana sabbākārato visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 2.737-740) kathitāti tattha vuttanayeneva veditabbā.
现在,为了显示依不净随观等修行所应成就的殊胜果报,而说“于不净随观者”等。其中,“于净界”指净相,即清净的状态。“欲贪随眠”指能缘取净所缘而生起的欲贪随眠。那些不净随观者,缘取头发等或膨胀尸等,取得不净相,于彼证得初禅;以该初禅为近行定,进而建立观业处而修习后,此欲贪随眠便依所证得的不还道而被断除,也就是被彻底根除。此道理亦曾被说过:“应修习不净,以断除欲贪。”所谓“外部的”,指存在于外、能带来无益者,故说是外部、外在的。“寻思之依止”指诸如欲寻思等邪寻思。若未被断除,这些邪寻思便如随眠般潜伏于心,遇缘即生,故称寻思之依止。在这里应知,欲寻思已由“欲贪”一词所包含,因此此处是就其余的那些寻思来说的。“属于恼害部分的”意思是它们属于苦的组成部分,或是会导致愿望遭受挫折的。“他们不再有”意思是那些寻思已被断除。诸如瞋恚寻、害寻、亲属寻、地方寻、不死寻、与不轻视相应之寻、与利养恭敬名声相应之寻等。显示巴利原文
Idāni asubhānupassanādīhi nipphādetabbaṃ phalavisesaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘asubhānupassīna’’ntiādimāha. Tattha subhāya dhātuyāti subhabhāve, subhanimitteti attho. Rāgānusayoti subhārammaṇe uppajjanāraho kāmarāgānusayo. So kesādīsu uddhumātakādīsu vā asubhānupassīnaṃ asubhanimittaṃ gahetvā tattha paṭhamajjhānaṃ nibbattetvā taṃ pādakaṃ katvā vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā adhigatena anāgāmimaggena pahīyati, sabbaso samucchindīyatīti attho. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘asubhā bhāvetabbā kāmarāgassa pahānāyā’’ti (a. ni. 9.3; udā. 31). Bāhirāti bahiddhāvatthukattā anatthāvahattā ca bāhirā bahibhūtā. Vitakkāsayāti kāmasaṅkappādimicchāvitakkā. Te hi appahīnā āsayānugatā sati paccayasamavāye uppajjanato vitakkāsayāti vuttā. Kāmavitakko cettha kāmarāgaggahaṇena gahito evāti tadavasesā vitakkā eva vuttāti veditabbā. Vighātapakkhikāti dukkhabhāgiyā, icchāvighātanibbattanakā vā. Te na hontīti te pahīyanti. Byāpādavitakko, vihiṃsāvitakko, ñātivitakko, janapadavitakko, amarāvitakko, anavaññattipaṭisaṃyutto vitakko, lābhasakkārasilokapaṭisaṃyutto vitakko, parānuddayatāpaṭisaṃyutto vitakkoti aṭṭha, kāmavitakkena saddhiṃ navavidhā mahāvitakkā ānāpānassatisamādhinā tannissitāya ca vipassanāya pubbabhāge vikkhambhitā. Taṃ pādakaṃ katvā adhigatena ariyamaggena yathārahaṃ anavasesato pahīyanti. Vuttampi cetaṃ ‘‘ānāpānassati bhāvetabbā vitakkupacchedāyā’’ti (a. ni. 9.3; udā. 31).
“凡无明,即彼断除”的意思是:这种无明,能遮蔽诸谛的真实性,带来一切无益,为整个轮回之苦的根本。当安住于无常随观而修习时,这种无明便会被彻底断除。据说,这是世尊针对从无常行相中出起的干观者——即漏尽的阿拉汉——而说的。其简要义理是:对于那些在欲界、色界、无色界三界的一切行法中,从无常等角度确立观照、精进修习观业处的人,当正观“无常”的观智不断生起,且出起导向的观智与圣道连接时,阿拉汉道便会次第生起。对这些安住于无常随观者而言,无明便被无余地断除,阿拉汉道的智慧即告生起。“安住于无常随观者”此语,是因为无常相在他们那里极为显著;或者说,无常相是把握其余二相(苦、无我)的方便,故如此称说,并非指他们只随观无常一相而已。此义也曾被说过:“凡是无常的,即是苦;凡是苦的,即是无我。”又有经文说:“梅希亚,对已生起无常想的人,无我想便能安立;具足无我想者,便能彻底断除我慢。”显示巴利原文
Yā avijjā, sā pahīyatīti yā saccasabhāvapaṭicchādinī sabbānatthakārī sakalassa vaṭṭadukkhassa mūlabhūtā avijjā, sā aniccānupassīnaṃ viharataṃ samucchijjati. Idaṃ kira bhagavatā aniccākārato vuṭṭhitassa sukkhavipassakakhīṇāsavassa vasena vuttaṃ. Tassāyaṃ saṅkhepattho – tebhūmakesu sabbasaṅkhāresu aniccādito sammasanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā vipassantānaṃ yadā aniccanti pavattamānā vuṭṭhānagāminīvipassanā maggena ghaṭīyati, anukkamena arahattamaggo uppajjati, tesaṃ aniccānupassīnaṃ viharataṃ avijjā anavasesato pahīyati, arahattamaggavijjā uppajjatīti. Aniccānupassīnaṃ viharatanti idaṃ aniccalakkhaṇassa tesaṃ pākaṭabhāvato itarassa lakkhaṇadvayassa gahaṇe upāyabhāvato vā vuttaṃ, na pana ekasseva lakkhaṇassa anupassitabbato. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘yadaniccaṃ taṃ dukkhaṃ, yaṃ dukkhaṃ tadanattā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.15). Aparampi vuttaṃ ‘‘aniccasaññino hi, meghiya, anattasaññā saṇṭhāti, anattasaññī asmimānasamugghātaṃ pāpuṇātī’’ti.
在那些偈颂中,“于入出息,念念持念”的意思是:对入出息似相,刹刹那那保持着觉知,即已安立了正念。“观察”是指以漏尽智眼,观察着诸行寂灭的涅槃。“一切时中精勤者”是指:无有间断、永无终止地,恒时于不净随观等业处精进,并善用恰当的努力;由此,凡是如此精勤者,或以正性决定而确立者,便在那诸行寂灭的涅槃中,以阿拉汉果的解脱而得解脱。其余的内容,正如前面已解释过的那样。显示巴利原文
Gāthāsu ānāpāne paṭissatoti ānāpānanimittasmiṃ paṭi paṭi sato, upaṭṭhitassatīti attho. Passanti āsavakkhayañāṇacakkhunā saṅkhārūpasamaṃ nibbānaṃ passanto. Ātāpī sabbadāti antarāvosānaṃ anāpajjitvā asubhānupassanādīsu satataṃ ātāpī yuttappayutto, tato eva yato vāyamamāno, niyato vā sammattaniyāmena tattha sabbasaṅkhārasamathe nibbāne arahattaphalavimuttiyā vimuccati. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
第七 法随法行经注释显示巴利原文
7. Dhammānudhammapaṭipannasuttavaṇṇanā
86 在第七经中,“法随法行者”:这里的“法”指九种出世间法。与此法相应的“随法”,即戒清净等作为前行部分的修道支分。为了证悟而正在修习此“法随法”的人,称为“法随法行者”。“此成为随法”的意思是:这成为相称、恰当的体性。“可记说”的意思是:可用来讲说。此处的“者”(yo)表示行为主体。全句意为:凭借某种随法而修习此法随法,当他被称作“法随法行者”时,即是正确地被称说,不会因此而被智者们呵责。或者,“者”是动作的指示,由此显示:“所谓法随法行者,就是这位比丘:他唯说法,唯思惟法,当两者皆无时,便安住于观舍。如此之‘者’(yo),正是恰当的因、契合的理由,正适合此称说。”“正说法者唯应说法”的意思是:正在开示的人,只应讲说如十论事那样的法,不应讲说与之相违的多欲等非法。这其实已如前说。显示巴利原文
86. Sattame dhammānudhammapaṭipannassāti ettha dhammo nāma navavidho lokuttaradhammo, tassa dhammassa anudhammo sīlavisuddhiādi pubbabhāgapaṭipadādhammo, taṃ dhammānudhammaṃ paṭipannassa adhigantuṃ paṭipajjamānassa. Ayamanudhammo hotīti ayaṃ anucchavikasabhāvo patirūpasabhāvo hoti. Veyyākaraṇāyāti kathanāya. Dhammānudhammapaṭipannoyanti yanti karaṇatthe paccattavacanaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yena anudhammena taṃ dhammānudhammaṃ paṭipannoti byākaramāno sammadeva byākaronto nāma siyā, na tatonidānaṃ viññūhi garahitabbo siyāti. Yanti vā kiriyāparāmasanaṃ, tenetaṃ dasseti ‘‘yadidaṃ dhammasseva bhāsanaṃ, dhammavitakkasseva ca vitakkanaṃ tadubhayābhāve ñāṇupekkhāya, ayaṃ dhammānudhammapaṭipannassa bhikkhuno tathārūpo ayanti kathanāyānurūpahetu anucchavikakāraṇaṃ. Bhāsamāno dhammaṃyeva bhāseyyāti kathento ce dasakathāvatthudhammaṃyeva katheyya, na tappaṭipakkhamahicchatādiadhammaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ –
凡是能削减烦恼、令心开解、一向导向厌离、离欲、灭尽、寂静、证智、正觉、涅槃的谈论,即是:少欲论、知足论、远离论、不交际论、发勤精进论、戒论、定论、慧论、解脱论、解脱智见论。对于这样的谈论,他容易获得,不难获得,毫不辛苦地获得。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yāyaṃ kathā abhisallekhikā cetovivaraṇasappāyā ekantanibbidāya virāgāya nirodhāya upasamāya abhiññāya sambodhāya nibbānāya saṃvattati. Seyyathidaṃ – appicchakathā, santuṭṭhikathā, pavivekakathā, asaṃsaggakathā, vīriyārambhakathā, sīlakathā, samādhikathā, paññākathā, vimuttikathā, vimuttiñāṇadassanakathā , evarūpāya kathāya nikāmalābhī hoti akicchalābhī akasiralābhī’’ti (a. ni. 9.3; udā. 31).
事实上,唯有获得这种能削减烦恼的谈论的人,才会宣说那样的法。借此便显示了善知识的成就。显示巴利原文
Abhisallekhikāya kathāya lābhī eva hi taṃ bhāseyya. Etena kalyāṇamittasampadā dassitā.
“法寻思”是说:当一个人思维那不离于法的出离寻等,并想着“我要圆满戒等修持”时,他上上的精进便会持续增长。然而,这种寻思应当这样理解:在避开对戒等无益的法,并培养增长有益法的方式下,它从退步分中脱出,不停留在仅能保持不退的住步分,进而被导入殊胜分与抉择分,如此种种差别而转起。“不思维非法寻”:不应思维欲寻等。“或者,所谓此两者”:这里说的两者,即是为了利益他人而说法,以及为了利益自己而思惟法。如果舍离这两者,“不实行、不作”,便是将这两者都搁置一边。此时,“成为舍者”的意思是:在修行中对于那种方式也不怎么用心,唯随顺增长止观而安住;或者在止的修习上成为舍者后,专精于观而安住。即使策励了观,在观中也依行舍智而成为舍者;只要观智尚未与圣道衔接,他就让心保持锐利、勇健、明净地运作,像这样具念、正知而安住。显示巴利原文
Dhammavitakkanti nekkhammavitakkādiṃ dhammato anapetaṃ vitakkayato ‘‘sīlādipaṭipadaṃ paripūressāmī’’ti uparūpari ussāho abhivaḍḍhissati. So pana vitakko sīlādīnaṃ anupakāradhamme vajjetvā upakāradhamme anubrūhanavasena hānabhāgiyabhāvaṃ apanetvā ṭhitibhāgiyabhāvepi aṭṭhatvā visesabhāgiyataṃ nibbedhabhāgiyatañca pāpanavasena pavattiyā anekappabhedo veditabbo. No adhammavitakkanti kāmavitakkaṃ no vitakkeyyāti attho. Tadubhayaṃ vā panāti yadetaṃ paresaṃ anuggahaṇatthaṃ dhammabhāsanaṃ attano anuggahaṇatthaṃ dhammavitakkanañca vuttaṃ. Atha vā pana taṃ ubhayaṃ abhinivajjetvā appaṭipajjitvā akatvā. Upekkhakoti tathāpaṭipattiyaṃ udāsīno samathavipassanābhāvanameva anubrūhanto vihareyya, samathapaṭipattiyaṃ upekkhako hutvā vipassanāyameva kammaṃ karonto vihareyya. Vipassanampi ussukkāpetvā tatthapi saṅkhārupekkhāñāṇavasena upekkhako yāva vipassanāñāṇaṃ maggena ghaṭīyati, tāva yathā taṃ tikkhaṃ sūraṃ pasannaṃ hutvā vahati, tathā vihareyya sato sampajānoti.
在偈颂中,止与观由于是应修习的对象,因此成为他心中的苑林,所以他被称为“法苑者”;他于彼法中得喜悦,故称“法喜者”;由于反复思惟彼法,他被称为“随念法者”,意思即转向彼法、作意彼法。“随念”是指:依于一再修习之力,随念那法本身。或者,也可以这样理解:安住于解脱处,借为他人开示之力,以戒等法作为应修习的苑林,所以他是“法苑者”;同样,于那些戒等法中欢喜、极生欢喜,所以他是“法喜者”;探究着那些戒等法的去向,不给欲寻等留有任何余地,只随念出离等思惟之法,所以他是“随念法者”。或者,将说法与思惟法两者都视为粗重而舍去,唯依一再修习之力随念止观之法,以增上随修的方式令其转起。“于此正法”:指于三十七菩提分法和九种出世间法上无有退失,不久便能证得,这就是此句的义理。显示巴利原文
Gāthāsu samathavipassanādhammo āramitabbaṭṭhena ārāmo etassāti dhammārāmo. Tasmiṃyeva dhamme ratoti dhammarato. Tasseva dhammassa punappunaṃ vicintanato dhammaṃ anuvicintayaṃ taṃ dhammaṃ āvajjento, manasi karontoti attho. Anussaranti tameva dhammaṃ uparūparibhāvanāvasena anussaranto. Atha vā vimuttāyatanasīse ṭhatvā paresaṃ desanāvasena sīlādidhammo āramitabbaṭṭhena ārāmo etassāti dhammārāmo. Tatheva tasmiṃ dhamme rato abhiratoti dhammarato. Tesaṃyeva sīlādidhammānaṃ gatiyo samanvesanto kāmavitakkādīnaṃ okāsaṃ adatvā nekkhammasaṅkappādidhammaṃyeva anuvicintanato dhammaṃ anuvicintayaṃ. Tadubhayaṃ vā pana oḷārikato dahanto ajjhupekkhitvā samathavipassanādhammameva uparūpari bhāvanāvasena anussaranto anubrūhanavasena pavattento. Saddhammāti sattatiṃsappabhedā bodhipakkhiyadhammā navavidhalokuttaradhammā ca na parihāyati, na cirasseva taṃ adhigacchatīti attho.
现在,为了显示这位比丘随念的方法,经中宣说了“或行”等语。其中:“或行”指为托钵乞食而行走,或为经行而行走;“或站”即站立;“或坐”即端坐;“或卧”即卧息。如此遍及行、住、坐、卧四种威仪。“于内,调伏其心”意为:在前述的禅修业处所缘这一内境之中,借由止息贪等烦恼、断除它们的方式,调伏自己的心。“他证得寂静”即:他体证了最上的寂静——涅槃本身。显示巴利原文
Idāni tassa anussaraṇavidhiṃ dassento ‘‘caraṃ vā’’tiādimāha. Tattha caraṃ vāti bhikkhācāravasena caṅkamanavasena ca caranto vā. Yadi vā tiṭṭhanti tiṭṭhanto vā nisinno vā, uda vā sayanti sayanto vā. Evaṃ catūsupi iriyāpathesu. Ajjhattaṃ samayaṃ cittanti yathāvutte kammaṭṭhānasaṅkhāte gocarajjhatte attano cittaṃ rāgādikilesānaṃ vūpasamanavasena pajahanavasena samayaṃ samento. Santimevādhigacchatīti accantasantiṃ nibbānameva pāpuṇātīti.
8. 闇冥经注释显示巴利原文
8. Andhakaraṇasuttavaṇṇanā
87 在第八部分中,“不善寻”即从不善所生的寻。“闇冥”等词的解释:在谁的心中生起此寻,它便障碍如实见而令他成为盲目,故称“闇冥”;不令生起智慧之眼,故称“无眼者”;产生无知,故称“令无知者”。“令慧灭”:即业自作慧、禅那慧、观慧这三种慧,它令它们不转起而使之灭,故称“令慧灭”。由于给予不可意的果报,属于名为苦的恼害一方,故称“属恼害者”。不导向烦恼的涅槃,故称“非涅槃导引者”。显示巴利原文
87. Aṭṭhame akusalavitakkāti akosallasambhūtā vitakkā. Andhakaraṇātiādīsu yassa sayaṃ uppajjanti, taṃ yathābhūtadassananivāraṇena andhaṃ karontīti andhakaraṇā. Na paññācakkhuṃ karontīti acakkhukaraṇā. Aññāṇaṃ karontīti aññāṇakaraṇā. Paññānirodhikāti kammassakatāpaññā, jhānapaññā, vipassanāpaññāti imā tisso paññā appavattikaraṇena nirodhentīti paññānirodhikā. Aniṭṭhaphaladāyakattā dukkhasaṅkhātassa vighātassa pakkhe vattantīti vighātapakkhikā. Kilesanibbānaṃ na saṃvattayantīti anibbānasaṃvattanikā.
“欲寻”,即与欲相应的寻。它伴随着烦恼欲,于所依之欲中生起。“嗔寻”,即与嗔恚相应的寻。“害寻”,即与伤害相应的寻。后两种寻,既可于有情生起,也可于诸行中生起。具体而言:当人寻思可爱、可意的有情或诸行时,欲寻便会生起。对于不可爱、不可意的有情或诸行,若心生愤怒而审视之,乃至生起欲毁灭对方之心,于此过程中生起的,便是嗔寻。害寻则不会于诸行中生起,因为无情的诸行并没有所谓应被伤害的道理;唯有当内心生起这样的念头——“愿这些有情被杀害、被绑缚、被灭绝、被毁灭,乃至不复存在”时,害寻才会于有情生起。显示巴利原文
Kāmavitakkoti kāmapaṭisaṃyutto vitakko. So hi kilesakāmasahito hutvā vatthukāmesu pavattati. Byāpādapaṭisaṃyutto vitakko byāpādavitakko. Vihiṃsāpaṭisaṃyutto vitakko vihiṃsāvitakko. Ime dve ca sattesupi saṅkhāresupi uppajjanti. Kāmavitakko hi piyamanāpe satte vā saṅkhāre vā vitakkentassa uppajjati, byāpādavitakko appiye amanāpe satte vā saṅkhāre vā kujjhitvā olokanakālato paṭṭhāya yāva nāsanā uppajjati, vihiṃsāvitakko saṅkhāresu na uppajjati, saṅkhārā dukkhāpetabbā nāma natthi, ‘‘ime sattā haññantu vā bajjhantu vā ucchijjantu vā vinassantu vā mā vā ahesu’’nti cintanakāle pana sattesu uppajjati.
上述这些,其实也就是欲思惟等。因为从义理上讲,欲寻等与欲思惟等并无差别。而与它们相应的想等,便称为欲想等。至于欲界等,则如圣典中所说:显示巴利原文
Imeyeva pana kāmasaṅkappādayo. Atthato hi kāmavitakkādīnaṃ kāmasaṅkappādīnañca nānākaraṇaṃ natthi, taṃsampayuttā pana saññādayo kāmasaññādayo. Kāmadhātuādīnaṃ pana yasmā pāḷiyaṃ –
“与欲相应的思择、寻……乃至邪思惟,这称为欲界。一切不善法,皆是欲界。与嗔恚相应的思择、寻……乃至邪思惟,这称为嗔界。于十种愤恨事中,内心所生的愤恨、嗔恚……乃至心的不悦,这称为嗔界。与害相应的思择、寻、邪思惟,这称为害界。在此,若有人以手、土块、棍杖、刀械、绳索,或无论何种方式去伤害有情,这便是害界。”——(引自《分别论》182, 910)显示巴利原文
‘‘Kāmapaṭisaṃyutto takko vitakko…pe… micchāsaṅkappo, ayaṃ vuccati kāmadhātu, sabbepi akusalā dhammā kāmadhātu. Byāpādapaṭisaṃyutto takko vitakko…pe… micchāsaṅkappo, ayaṃ vuccati byāpādadhātu. Dasasu āghātavatthūsu cittassa āghāto paṭighāto…pe… anattamanatā cittassa, ayaṃ vuccati byāpādadhātu. Vihiṃsāpaṭisaṃyutto takko vitakko micchāsaṅkappo , ayaṃ vuccati vihiṃsādhātu. Idhekacco pāṇinā vā leḍḍunā vā daṇḍena vā satthena vā rajjuyā vā aññataraññatarena satte viheṭheti, ayaṃ vihiṃsādhātū’’ti (vibha. 182, 910) –
依于这样的经教为依据,故于界论中而有差别。显示巴利原文
Āgatattā viseso labbhati.
在此,有两种解说:总摄说与不杂说。当总取欲界时,其余二界实则亦被一并涵盖。而后再从中分出,指明“这是嗔界,这是害界”,这便称为总摄说。不杂说,则是世尊在解说欲界时,将属嗔界的内容置于嗔界之处,将属害界的内容置于害界之处,再将余下的部分称为“欲界”。显示巴利原文
Tattha dve kathā sabbasaṅgāhikā ca asambhinnā ca. Tattha kāmadhātuyā gahitāya itarā dvepi gahitā nāma honti. Tato pana nīharitvā ayaṃ byāpādadhātu, ayaṃ vihiṃsādhātūti dassetīti ayaṃ sabbasaṅgāhikā nāma. Kāmadhātuṃ kathento pana bhagavā byāpādadhātuṃ byāpādadhātuṭṭhāne , vihiṃsādhātuṃ vihiṃsādhātuṭṭhāne ṭhapetvāva avasesaṃ kāmadhātu nāmāti kathesīti ayaṃ asambhinnakathā nāma.
于白分(善分)中,应依与前述相反之理而解了。与出离相应的寻,称出离寻。此寻在不净观之前行分属欲界;于证得不净禅那时属色界;以彼禅那为基而生起道果之际,则属出世间。与无嗔相应的寻,称无嗔寻。此寻在慈心观之前行分属欲界;于证得慈心禅那时属色界;以彼禅那为基而生起道果之际,属出世间。与无害相应的寻,称无害寻。此寻在悲心观之前行分属欲界;于证得悲心禅那时属色界;以彼禅那为基而生起道果之际,属出世间。再者,当无贪为首时,其余二者(无嗔、无害)即随之转起;当慈为首时,其余二者(无贪、无害)亦随之转起;当悲为首时,其余二者(无贪、无嗔)亦随之转起。显示巴利原文
Sukkapakkhe vuttavipariyāyena attho veditabbo. Nekkhammapaṭisaṃyutto vitakko nekkhammavitakko. So asubhapubbabhāge kāmāvacaro hoti, asubhajjhāne rūpāvacaro, taṃ jhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā uppannamaggaphalakāle lokuttaro. Abyāpādapaṭisaṃyutto vitakko abyāpādavitakko. So mettāpubbabhāge kāmāvacaro hoti, mettājhāne rūpāvacaro, taṃ jhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā uppannamaggaphalakāle lokuttaro. Avihiṃsāpaṭisaṃyutto vitakko avihiṃsāvitakko. So karuṇāpubbabhāge kāmāvacaro, karuṇājjhāne rūpāvacaro, taṃ jhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā uppannamaggaphalakāle lokuttaro. Yadā pana alobho sīsaṃ hoti, tadā itare dve tadanvāyikā honti. Yadā mettā sīsaṃ hoti, tadā itare dve tadanvāyikā honti. Yadā karuṇā sīsaṃ hoti, tadā itare dve tadanvāyikā honti.
而这些正是出离思惟等。从义理上说,出离寻等与出离思惟等本无差别;与它们相应的想等,则称为出离想等。至于出离界等,因为圣典中这样说道——显示巴利原文
Imeyeva pana nekkhammasaṅkappādayo. Atthato hi nekkhammavitakkādīnaṃ nekkhammasaṅkappādīnañca nānākaraṇaṃ natthi, taṃsampayuttā pana saññādayo nekkhammasaññādayo. Nekkhammadhātuādīnaṃ pana yasmā pāḷiyaṃ –
“与出离相应的思择、寻、思惟,此称为出离界;一切善法也都是出离界。与无嗔相应的思择、寻、思惟,此称为无嗔界;对众生的慈爱、慈愍、慈心解脱,此称为无嗔界。与无害相应的思择、寻、思惟,此称为无害界;对众生的悲悯、悲愍、悲心解脱,此称为无害界。”——(引自《分别论》182)显示巴利原文
‘‘Nekkhammapaṭisaṃyutto takko vitakko saṅkappo, ayaṃ vuccati nekkhammadhātu, sabbepi kusalā dhammā nekkhammadhātu. Abyāpādapaṭisaṃyutto takko vitakko saṅkappo, ayaṃ vuccati abyāpādadhātu. Yā sattesu metti mettāyanā mettācetovimutti , ayaṃ vuccati abyāpādadhātu. Avihiṃsāpaṭisaṃyutto takko vitakko saṅkappo – ayaṃ vuccati avihiṃsādhātu. Yā sattesu karuṇā karuṇāyanā karuṇācetovimutti – ayaṃ vuccati avihiṃsādhātū’’ti. (Vibha. 182) –
因这段经文的引用,便显出了差别。同样,此处的“总摄说”与“不杂说”两种解说,也应按前文所述之理来理解。其余部分则甚易明了。显示巴利原文
Āgatattā viseso labbhati. Idhāpi sabbasaṅgāhikā, asambhinnāti dve kathā vuttanayeneva veditabbā. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva.
在偈颂中,“vitakkayeti”意谓应当寻(vitakkeyya)。“nirākareti”意谓应当从自己的相续中去除、驱散,亦即应当断除。偈颂说:“save vitakkāni vicāritāni, sameti vuṭṭhīva rajaṃ samūhataṃ”。如同热季最后一个月,大地上被扬起、从四周升起的尘土,被非时大雨降下的雨水顿时平息;同样地,那位修行者使那些寻——即邪寻,以及那些伺——即与这些寻相应的伺——止息、消融、断除。当他达到此状态,便以寻止息之心——由于一切邪寻皆已止息,故名“寻止息”,即以圣道心——于当下现前之法中,证得寂静处,即涅槃。显示巴利原文
Gāthāsu vitakkayeti vitakkeyya. Nirākareti attano santānato nīhareyya vinodeyya, pajaheyyāti attho. Save vitakkāni vicāritāni, sameti vuṭṭhīva rajaṃ samūhatanti yathā nāma gimhānaṃ pacchime māse pathaviyaṃ samūhataṃ samantato uṭṭhitaṃ rajaṃ mahato akālameghassa vassato vuṭṭhi ṭhānaso vūpasameti, evameva so yogāvacaro vitakkāni micchāvitakke ca vicāritāni taṃsampayuttavicāre ca sameti vūpasameti samucchindati. Tathābhūto ca vitakkūpasamena cetasā sabbesaṃ micchāvitakkānaṃ upasamanato vitakkūpasamena ariyamaggacittena. Idheva diṭṭheva dhamme, santipadaṃ nibbānaṃ, samajjhagā samadhigato hotīti.
9. 《内心垢秽经》注疏(Antarāmalasuttavaṇṇanā)显示巴利原文
9. Antarāmalasuttavaṇṇanā
88 88. 第九经中的“antarāmalā”(内心垢秽):其中“antarā”一词——显示巴利原文
88. Navame antarāmalāti ettha antarāsaddo –
于河岸、聚会处(sabhāsu)、街道上;
众人聚集一处,议论着我与他——这中间究竟是什么?
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Nadītīresu saṇṭhāne, sabhāsu rathiyāsu ca; Janā saṅgamma mantenti, mañca tañca kimantara’’nti. –
在《相应部》1.228等经文中,它指‘原因’。在‘尊者,有位女子在闪电的间隙中洗钵……’等经文中(《中部》2.149),则作‘时刻’解。在‘而且这温泉是从两个大地狱的间隙中流出来的’等(《波罗夷》231)中,作‘空隙’解。显示巴利原文
Ādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.228) kāraṇe āgato. ‘‘Addasā maṃ, bhante, aññatarā itthī vijjantarikāya bhājanaṃ dhovantī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.149) khaṇe. ‘‘Apicāyaṃ tapodā dvinnaṃ mahānirayānaṃ antarikāya āgacchatī’’tiādīsu (pārā. 231) vivare.
着黄衣,持黄幢,以黄色饰品庄严者;
以优美的黄色下衣相衬,你仿佛佩戴着饰物般光彩照人。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Pītavatthe pītadhaje, pītālaṅkārabhūsite; Pītantarāhi vaggūhi, apiḷandhāva sobhasī’’ti. –
在《分别论注》658等句中,是指「上衣」。在「若人内心无忿怒」等(《自说经》20)句中,是指「心」。此处也应当理解为心。因此,存在于内心中的,便称为「内部的」。于某一相续中生起时,由于能令该相续变得染污,故称为「垢」。垢有两种:身垢与心垢。其中,身垢是汗垢等生于身体的,以及外来的附着尘垢,这些可以以水清除,并不属于烦恼法。而心垢则是贪等烦恼法,唯有依圣道方能断除。过去诸圣者曾这样说:显示巴利原文
Ādīsu (vi. va. 658) uttarisāṭake. ‘‘Yassantarato na santi kopā’’tiādīsu (udā. 20) citte. Idhāpi citte eva daṭṭhabbo. Tasmā antare citte bhavā antarā. Yasmiṃ santāne uppannā, tassa malinabhāvakaraṇato malā. Tattha malaṃ nāma duvidhaṃ – sarīramalaṃ, cittamalanti. Tesu sarīramalaṃ sedajallikādi sarīre nibbattaṃ, tattha laggaṃ āgantukarajañca, taṃ udakenapi nīharaṇīyaṃ, na tathā saṃkilesikaṃ. Cittamalaṃ pana rāgādisaṃkilesikaṃ, taṃ ariyamaggeheva nīharaṇīyaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ porāṇehi –
凭藉污秽的色身,凡夫便受染污;
凭清净的色,他们便清净——此非大仙所宣说。
凭污秽的心,凡夫便染污;
凭清净的心,他们便清净,此乃大仙所宣说。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Rūpena saṃkiliṭṭhena, saṃkilissanti māṇavā; Rūpe suddhe visujjhanti, anakkhātaṃ mahesinā. ‘‘Cittena saṃkiliṭṭhena, saṃkilissanti māṇavā; Citte suddhe visujjhanti, iti vuttaṃ mahesinā’’ti. (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.373; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.106);
因此,世尊说:“诸比丘,因心杂染,众生染污;因心清净,众生清净。”(《相应部》3.100)所以,为表明应当精勤于清净心垢,世尊于此也说:“诸比丘,有三种内部垢。”显示巴利原文
Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘cittasaṃkilesā, bhikkhave, sattā saṃkilissanti, cittavodānā visujjhantī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.100). Tasmā bhagavā idhāpi cittamalavisodhanāya paṭipajjitabbanti dassento ‘‘tayome, bhikkhave, antarāmalā’’ti āha.
正如贪等烦恼生起于众生心中,使心染污,产生种种杂染,故称“内部垢”;为说明它们犹如共同饮食、同卧一处、伺机加害的敌人与怨敌,唯在心中生起,便为众生带来种种无义之害,制造种种痛苦,世尊遂说“内部敌”等语。其中,因为是友之反面,故称“非友”(amittā);因为行怨敌之事,故称“怨敌”(sapattā);因为加害,故称“杀手”(vadhakā);因为是直接的反对者,故称“仇敌”(paccatthikā)。显示巴利原文
Yathā cete lobhādayo sattānaṃ citte uppajjitvā malinabhāvakarā nānappakārasaṃkilesavidhāyakāti antarāmalā, evaṃ ekato bhuñjitvā, ekato sayitvā, otāragavesī amittasattu viya citte eva uppajjitvā sattānaṃ nānāvidhaanatthāvahā, nānappakāradukkhanibbattakāti dassento ‘‘antarāamittā’’tiādimāha. Tattha mittapaṭipakkhato amittā, sapattakiccakaraṇato sapattā, hiṃsanato vadhakā, ujuvipaccanīkato paccatthikā.
于此,应从两个方面了知贪等与怨敌的相似性。譬如怀恨之人,一旦得乘其隙,便以刀砍下怨敌之首,或以计谋造作大无义之害。而此贪等烦恼,则通过砍断智慧之首及导致入胎,产生比之更为猛烈的无义之害。如何呢?当悦意境等现于眼门时,于种种情况下缘彼所缘而生起贪等,此人之智慧首便被砍断。耳门等其他诸门亦复如是。如此,从砍断智慧首之一面,可知贪等与怨敌相似。其次,这些贪等烦恼成为业因,将众生推入卵生等四生之中。以入胎为根本,即出现二十五种大怖畏及三十二种恶行,这些皆于圣典中有所记载。如是,从导致入胎之一面,亦可知其与怨敌相似。因此,贪等既与怨敌相似,又唯从心生起,故称“内部敌”等。不仅如此,怨敌所不能办者,贪等皆能为之;而怨敌之敌对状态亦由贪等所生,故应知彼即等同于怨敌之类。对此也曾说过:显示巴利原文
Tattha dvīhi ākārehi lobhādīnaṃ amittādibhāvo veditabbo. Verīpuggalo hi antaraṃ labhamāno attano verissa satthena vā sīsaṃ pāteti, upāyena vā mahantaṃ anatthaṃ uppādeti. Ime ca lobhādayo paññāsirapātanena yonisampaṭipādanena ca tādisaṃ tato balavataraṃ anatthaṃ nibbattenti. Kathaṃ? Cakkhudvārasmiñhi iṭṭhādīsu ārammaṇesu āpāthagatesu yathārahaṃ tāni ārabbha lobhādayo uppajjanti, ettāvatāssa paññāsiraṃ pātitaṃ nāma hoti. Sotadvārādīsupi eseva nayo. Evaṃ tāva paññāsirapātanato amittādisadisatā veditabbā. Lobhādayo pana kammanidānā hutvā aṇḍajādibhedā catasso yoniyo upanenti. Tassa yoniupagamanamūlakāni pañcavīsati mahābhayāni dvattiṃsa kammakaraṇāni ca āgatāneva honti. Evaṃ yonisampaṭipādanatopi nesaṃ amittādisadisatā veditabbā. Iti lobhādayo amittādisadisatāya cittasambhūtatāya ca ‘‘antarāamittā’’tiādinā vuttā. Apica amittehi kātuṃ asakkuṇeyyaṃ lobhādayo karonti, amittādibhāvo ca lobhādīhi jāyatīti tesaṃ amittādibhāvo veditabbo. Vuttañhetaṃ –
仇敌对仇敌,怨家对怨家,
「(他们)所能做的恶事,都不如邪向之心对这个人心所造的恶更重。」(《法句经》42;《优陀那》33)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Diso disaṃ yantaṃ kayirā, verī vā pana verinaṃ; Micchāpaṇihitaṃ cittaṃ, pāpiyo naṃ tato kare’’ti. (dha. pa. 42; udā. 33);
在偈颂中,因它能对自己和他人造成无义之害,故称“无义之生起者”。对此也曾说过:显示巴利原文
Gāthāsu attano paresañca anatthaṃ janetīti anatthajanano. Vuttañhetaṃ –
当贪者以身、语、意造作时,那是不善的;当贪者被贪欲征服、心被完全控制,而于他人以杀害、捆绑、损失、谴责或驱逐等不实之事令其受苦,或心想‘我有力,我欲达成目的’时,那也是不善的。如是,这众多由贪所生、以贪为因、以贪为集、以贪为缘的罪恶不善法,便生起了。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yadapi luddho abhisaṅkharoti kāyena vācāya manasā tadapi akusalaṃ; yadapi luddho lobhena abhibhūto pariyādinnacitto parassa asatā dukkhaṃ uppādeti vadhena vā bandhena vā jāniyā vā garahāya vā pabbājanāya vā balavamhi balattho iti, tadapi akusalaṃ, itissame lobhajā lobhanidānā lobhasamudayā lobhapaccayā aneke pāpakā akusalā dhammā sambhavantī’’ti (a. ni. 3.70).
此外,又曾说——显示巴利原文
Aparampi vuttaṃ –
婆罗门,人被贪欲所染着、被贪欲征服、心被完全控制时,便会思惟自害,亦思惟害他,亦思惟自他俱害,并感受内心的苦与忧。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ratto kho, brāhmaṇa, rāgena abhibhūto pariyādinnacitto attabyābādhāyapi ceteti, parabyābādhāyapi ceteti, ubhayabyābādhāyapi ceteti, cetasikampi dukkhaṃ domanassaṃ paṭisaṃvedetī’’tiādi (a. ni. 3.54).
“心之扰乱”(cittappakopana)指的是令心波动、混乱。因为贪欲在面对可贪着的事物而生起时,正是这样生起的:它搅动心、扰动心、令心变坏、使心变异,不让心以信等方式运作。“怖畏从内生起,而众人不觉知”:意思是,那种名为贪的、从内部、在自己心中生起的、能产生无利益并扰乱内心的怖畏,以及这种怖畏的因,凡愚之人不觉察、不了知。显示巴利原文
Cittappakopanoti cittasaṅkhobhano. Lobho hi lobhanīye vatthusmiṃ uppajjamāno cittaṃ khobhento pakopento vipariṇāmento vikāraṃ āpādento uppajjati, pasādādivasena pavattituṃ na deti. Bhayamantarato jātaṃ, taṃ jano nāvabujjhatīti taṃ lobhasaṅkhātaṃ antarato abbhantare attano citteyeva jātaṃ anatthajananacittappakopanādiṃ bhayaṃ bhayahetuṃ ayaṃ bālamahājano nāvabujjhati na jānātīti.
“贪者不了知义利”:贪婪的人,不能如实地了知包括自利、他利等不同种类的真舍利益。“不见法”:贪婪的人被贪欲征服、心被完全控制,便不能现见、不能了知十善业道法,更何况更高的超人法。经中也这样说:显示巴利原文
Luddho atthaṃ na jānātīti attatthaparatthādibhedaṃ atthaṃ hitaṃ luddhapuggalo yathābhūtaṃ na jānāti. Dhammaṃ na passatīti dasakusalakammapathadhammampi luddho lobhena abhibhūto pariyādinnacitto na passati paccakkhato na jānāti, pageva uttarimanussadhammaṃ. Vuttampi cetaṃ –
“婆罗门,被贪欲所染着、被贪欲征服、心被完全控制时,他便不能如实地了知自利,不能如实地了知他利,不能如实地了知自他两利。”等等(《增支部》3.55)。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ratto kho, brāhmaṇa, rāgena abhibhūto pariyādinnacitto attatthampi yathābhūtaṃ na pajānāti, paratthampi yathābhūtaṃ na pajānāti, ubhayatthampi yathābhūtaṃ na pajānātī’’tiādi (a. ni. 3.55).
“Andhatamaṃ”(盲目黑暗):指造成盲目状态的黑暗。“Yaṃ”(那个)在此处表处所,是以主格形式来表达处格之意,即“在……的时候”。也就是:当贪欲征服、压制一个人时,那时便是盲目黑暗。或者,“yaṃ”可表原因。如此,其义理联结为:因为生起的贪欲征服、压制了人,所以那时便是盲目黑暗——应如此联结理解,因为“ya”与“ta”二词有着固定的对应关系。又或者,“yaṃ”是在指涉前面提及的动作:在“贪欲征服”这句中,所宣说的“贪的征服与压制”,即是通向那造成盲目状态之黑暗的入口、是它的生起,这便是其意。再或者,其义理应如此看待:当贪欲征服、压制了哪个人,那个人那时便会有盲目黑暗,正因如此,所以说“贪者不了知义利,贪者不见法”。显示巴利原文
Andhatamanti andhabhāvakaraṃ tamaṃ. Yanti yattha. Bhummatthe hi etaṃ paccattavacanaṃ. Yasmiṃ kāle lobho sahate abhibhavati naraṃ, andhatamaṃ tadā hotīti. Yanti vā kāraṇavacanaṃ. Yasmā lobho uppajjamāno naraṃ sahate abhibhavati, tasmā andhatamaṃ tadā hotīti yojanā, ya-ta-saddānaṃ ekantasambandhabhāvato. Atha vā yanti kiriyāparāmasanaṃ, ‘‘lobho sahate’’ti ettha yadetaṃ lobhassa sahanaṃ abhibhavanaṃ vuttaṃ. Etaṃ andhabhāvakarassa tamassa gamanaṃ uppādoti attho. Atha vā yaṃ naraṃ lobho sahate abhibhavati, tassa andhatamaṃ tadā hoti, tato ca luddho atthaṃ na jānāti, luddho dhammaṃ na passatīti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo.
“而谁已断除了贪”:指的是某人在修行的预备阶段,根据情况以彼分断与镇伏断的方式,依止与观而断除贪欲。由于如此断除贪欲的缘故,即使可爱的、天界的色等所缘出现在他面前,他也不会生起贪着。凭借强大观智的威力,贪欲便从他那里被消除,因此说,这位圣者以圣道彻底断除了贪欲,将其永远舍弃。这像什么呢?就像“莲叶上的水珠”一般,即如同从莲叶上滚落的水滴。其余偈颂的义理,也应以这种方法来理解。显示巴利原文
Yo ca lobhaṃ pahantvānāti yo pubbabhāge tadaṅgavasena vikkhambhanavasena ca yathārahaṃ samathavipassanāhi lobhaṃ pajahitvā tathā pajahanahetu lobhaneyye dibbepi rūpādike upaṭṭhite na lubbhati, balavavipassanānubhāvena lobho pahīyate tamhāti tasmā ariyapuggalā ariyamaggena lobho pahīyati pajahīyati, accantameva pariccajīyati. Yathā kiṃ? Udabindūva pokkharāti paduminipaṇṇato udakabindu viya. Sesagāthānampi iminā nayena attho veditabbo.
对于嗔,也是同样的道理——显示巴利原文
Tathā dosassa –
当一个人心怀嗔恚,以身、语、意所造作的,即是不善;当一个人心怀嗔恚,被嗔恚征服、心被完全控制时,他以杀害、捆绑、剥夺财产、呵责或驱逐等方式,以不实之事给他人带来痛苦,并心想‘我有强力,要达成强力之事’,那也是不善。如此,这些由嗔而生、以嗔为根源、因嗔而集起、以嗔为缘的种种不善法便生起。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yadapi duṭṭho abhisaṅkharoti kāyena vācāya manasā tadapi akusalaṃ; yadapi duṭṭho dosena abhibhūto pariyādinnacitto parassa asatā dukkhaṃ uppādeti vadhena vā bandhena vā jāniyā vā garahāya vā pabbājanāya vā balavamhi balattho iti, tadapi akusalaṃ. Itissame dosajā dosanidānā dosasamudayā dosapaccayā aneke pāpakā akusalā dhammā sambhavantī’’ti (a. ni. 3.70).
经中说:“婆罗门,怀有嗔恚的人,被嗔恚征服、心被完全控制,就会想要伤害自己,也会想要伤害他人,也会想要同时伤害自他两者,并且内心感受到苦与忧。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Duṭṭho kho, brāhmaṇa, dosena abhibhūto pariyādinnacitto attabyābādhāyapi ceteti, parabyābādhāyapi ceteti, ubhayabyābādhāyapi ceteti cetasikampi dukkhaṃ domanassaṃ paṭisaṃvedetī’’ti (a. ni. 3.55).
经中说:“婆罗门,心怀嗔恚,被嗔恚征服、深深制伏,便不能如实了知自己的利益,不能如实了知他人的利益,也不能如实了知自他两者的利益。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Duṭṭho kho, brāhmaṇa, dosena abhibhūto pariyādinnacitto attatthampi yathābhūtaṃ na pajānāti , paratthampi yathābhūtaṃ na pajānāti, ubhayatthampi yathā bhūtaṃ na pajānātī’’ti (a. ni. 3.55) –
依这些经文可知,它能产生无益,也是损害利益之因。显示巴利原文
Ādisuttapadānusārena anatthajananatā atthahānihetutā ca veditabbā.
对于痴,也应当依据以下经句来了知:例如‘愚痴者以身、语、意所造作的……’、‘婆罗门,愚痴者被痴征服,心被完全掌控,便欲伤害自己……’、以及‘不如实了知自利……’等。显示巴利原文
Tathā mohassa ‘‘yadapi mūḷho abhisaṅkharoti kāyena vācāya manasā’’tiādinā (a. ni. 3.70), ‘‘mūḷho kho, brāhmaṇa, mohena abhibhūto pariyādinnacitto attabyābādhāyapi cetetī’’tiādinā(a. ni. 3.55), ‘‘attatthampi yathābhūtaṃ na pajānātī’’tiādinā (a. ni. 3.55) ca āgatasuttapadānusārena veditabbā.
‘如棕榈果从蒂脱落’:就像棕榈果因内在热量的产生而从果柄脱落,同样,由于第三道智的生起,嗔恚便从心中被舍断、被弃除。这就是它的含义。‘他破除一切无明’:那位圣者以第四道破除、击溃、断尽一切无明。‘如同日出破暗’:如同太阳升起时驱散黑暗一样。显示巴利原文
Tālapakkaṃvabandhanāti tālaphalaṃ viya usumuppādena vaṇṭato, tatiyamaggañāṇuppādena tassa cittato doso pahīyati, pariccajīyatīti attho. Mohaṃ vihanti so sabbanti so ariyapuggalo sabbaṃ anavasesaṃ mohaṃ catutthamaggena vihanti vidhamati samucchindati. Ādiccovudayaṃ tamanti ādicco viya udayaṃ uggacchanto tamaṃ andhakāraṃ.
第十:提婆达多经注释显示巴利原文
10. Devadattasuttavaṇṇanā
89 第十经中,‘诸比丘,被三种非正法所征服’这句话的缘起是什么呢?提婆达多堕入无间大地狱时,他的同党及外道诽谤说:‘沙门乔达摩诅咒了提婆达多,他才陷入地中。’听到这些话,对教法尚未生净信的人们便生起疑惑:‘也许真像他们所说的那样?’比丘们将此事禀告世尊。于是世尊说:‘诸比丘,如来不诅咒任何人,因此提婆达多并非由我诅咒,他是以自业堕入地狱的。’为了破除他们的错误执取,世尊便以此缘宣说了此经。显示巴利原文
89. Dasame tīhi, bhikkhave, asaddhammehi abhibhūtoti kā uppatti? Devadatte hi avīcimahānirayaṃ paviṭṭhe devadattapakkhiyā aññatitthiyā ca ‘‘samaṇena gotamena abhisapito devadatto pathaviṃ paviṭṭho’’ti abbhācikkhiṃsu. Taṃ sutvā sāsane anabhippasannā manussā ‘‘siyā nu kho etadevaṃ, yathā ime bhaṇantī’’ti āsaṅkaṃ uppādesuṃ. Taṃ pavattiṃ bhikkhū bhagavato ārocesuṃ. Atha bhagavā ‘‘na, bhikkhave, tathāgatā kassaci abhisapaṃ denti, tasmā na devadatto mayā abhisapito, attano kammeneva nirayaṃ paviṭṭho’’ti vatvā tesaṃ micchāgāhaṃ paṭisedhento imāya aṭṭhuppattiyā idaṃ suttaṃ abhāsi.
其中,“以非正法”(asaddhammehi):指非善人的法,或指不善的法。“无救”(atekiccho):由于连佛陀也无法使他回转、无间地狱的结生无可救治,故称无救,即不可医治的意思。所谓“恶欲”(pāpiccho),指怀有希求虚假功德表彰的邪恶欲望,即有此欲;“恶欲性”(pāpicchatā)是此状态,以恶欲性。他生起这样的欲望:“我要成佛,统领比丘僧团。”所谓“恶友”(pāpamitto),指果卡利迦等邪恶不善之人为其友;“恶友性”(pāpamittatā)是此状态,以恶友性。关于“更上应作”(uttarikaraṇīye):指以禅那与神通作为更高应完成之事,也就是应证得的道果。当他尚未证得这些时,他却没有去证得那应证得的。以“微小之量”(oramattakena):指微不足道的禅那与神通。以“殊胜证得”(visesādhigamena):指证得上人法。“中途”(antarā):在中间。“达到停止”(vosānam āpādi):意为所作未办,却自以为“我已所作皆”。显示巴利原文
Tattha asaddhammehīti asataṃ dhammehi, asantehi vā dhammehi. Atekicchoti buddhehipi anivattanīyattā avīcinibbattiyā tikicchābhāvato atekiccho, atikicchanīyoti attho. Asantaguṇasambhāvanādhippāyena pavattā pāpā icchā etassāti pāpiccho, tassa bhāvo pāpicchatā, tāya. ‘‘Ahaṃ buddho bhavissāmi, saṅghaṃ pariharissāmī’’ti tassa icchā uppannā. Kokālikādayo pāpā lāmakā mittā etassāti pāpamitto, tassa bhāvo pāpamittatā, tāya. Uttarikaraṇīyeti jhānābhiññāhi uttarikaraṇīye adhigantabbe maggaphale anadhigate sati eva, taṃ anadhigantvāti attho. Oramattakenāti appamattakena jhānābhiññāmattena. Visesādhigamenāti uttarimanussadhammādhigamena. Antarāti vemajjhe. Vosānaṃ āpādīti akatakiccova samāno ‘‘katakiccomhī’’ti maññamāno samaṇadhammato vigamaṃ āpajji. Iti bhagavā iminā suttena visesato puthujjanabhāve ādīnavaṃ pakāsesi bhāriyo puthujjanabhāvo, yatra hi nāma jhānābhiññāpariyosānā sampattiyo nibbattetvāpi anekānatthāvahaṃ nānāvidhaṃ dukkhahetuṃ asantaguṇasambhāvanaṃ asappurisasaṃsaggaṃ ālasiyānuyogañca avijahanto avīcimhi kappaṭṭhiyaṃ atekicchaṃ kibbisaṃ pasavissatīti.
在偈颂中,“莫”(mā)是禁止词。“决定”(jātu):以决定性的方式。“任何人”(koci):总括一切之说。“于世间”(lokasmiṃ):指众生世间。这是说:“愿在这众生世间中,任何一个人绝对不要成为恶欲者。”你们由此也应当了知恶欲者的趣向——即恶欲者们的趣向、成就如何,来世如何,你们借此因缘也应了知。世尊以提婆达多为例如此说。“被称为智者”(paṇḍitoti samaññāto):由于博学多闻而被认为是智者。“被认为是已修习心者”(bhāvitattoti sammato):由于禅那与神通而被视为已修习心者。确实,提婆达多先前曾被法将舍利弗长老称赞为:“有大神通的瞿低子,有大威力的瞿低子。”“他如火焰般以名声安立,以提婆达多之名而声望显著”(Jalaṃva yasasā aṭṭhā, devadattoti vissuto):他凭借自己的名声与眷属,如同火焰般照耀、辉耀而安立,以“提婆达多”之名如此闻名显著。另有异读作“我闻”(Me suttaṃ),意为“我所听闻”。显示巴利原文
Gāthāsu māti paṭisedhe nipāto. Jātūti ekaṃsena. Kocīti sabbasaṅgāhakavacanaṃ. Lokasminti sattaloke. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti ‘‘imasmiṃ sattaloke koci puggalo ekaṃsena pāpiccho mā hotū’’ti. Tadamināpi jānātha, pāpicchānaṃ yathā gatīti pāpicchānaṃ puggalānaṃ yathā gati yādisī nipphatti, yādiso abhisamparāyo, taṃ imināpi kāraṇena jānāthāti devadattaṃ nidassento evamāha. Paṇḍitoti samaññātoti pariyattibāhusaccena paṇḍitoti ñāto. Bhāvitattoti sammatoti jhānābhiññāhi bhāvitacittoti sambhāvito. Tathā hi so pubbe ‘‘mahiddhiko godhiputto, mahānubhāvo godhiputto’’ti dhammasenāpatināpi pasaṃsito ahosi. Jalaṃva yasasā aṭṭhā, devadattoti vissutoti attano kittiyā parivārena jalanto viya obhāsento viya ṭhito devadattoti evaṃ vissuto pākaṭo ahosi. ‘‘Me sutta’’ntipi pāṭho, mayā sutaṃ sutamattaṃ, katipāheneva atathābhūtattā tassa taṃ paṇḍiccādi savanamattamevāti attho.
「他追随等同者,冒犯如来」(So samānamanuciṇṇo, āsajja naṃ tathāgataṃ):这样状态的提婆达多,将自己与正自觉者视为等同而追随,心里想:“佛陀是释迦子,我也是释迦子;佛陀是沙门,我也是沙门;佛陀有神通,我也有神通;佛有天眼,我也有天眼;佛有天耳,我也有天耳;佛获得他心智,我也获得他心智;佛知道过去、未来、现在诸法,我也知道那些法。”他不自知分量,把自己与正自觉者同等看待,并怀着“现在我要成佛,统领比丘僧团”的慢害心,冒犯、触恼如来。另有异读“pamādamanujīno”(放逸随活),其意思是:依前面所说陷入放逸,依止放逸,因与世尊争胜的念头,连同禅那与神通一同随活而尽失,即退失穷乏。「堕入四门怖畏的无间地狱」(avīcinirayaṃ patto, catudvāraṃ bhayānakaṃ):由于那里的火焰连续不绝,或者生于其处的众生没有间隔,故得名「无间」;四方有四座大门,所以是四门;这是极为怖畏的大地狱,他以结生的方式堕入其中。诚然,有偈颂说:显示巴利原文
So samānamanuciṇṇo, āsajja naṃ tathāgatanti so evaṃbhūto devadatto ‘‘buddhopi sakyaputto, ahampi sakyaputto, buddhopi samaṇo, ahampi samaṇo, buddhopi iddhimā, ahampi iddhimā, buddhopi dibbacakkhuko, ahampi dibbacakkhuko, buddhopi dibbasotako, ahampi dibbasotako, buddhopi cetopariyañāṇalābhī, ahampi cetopariyañāṇalābhī, buddhopi atītānāgatapaccuppanne dhamme jānāti, ahampi te jānāmī’’ti attano pamāṇaṃ ajānitvā sammāsambuddhaṃ attanā samasamaṭṭhapanena samānaṃ āpajjanto ‘‘idānāhaṃ buddho bhavissāmi, bhikkhusaṅghaṃ pariharissāmī’’ti abhimārapayojanā tathāgataṃ āsajja āsādetvā viheṭhetvā. ‘‘Pamādamanujīno’’tipi paṭhanti. Tassattho ‘‘vuttanayena pamādaṃ āpajjanto pamādaṃ nissāya bhagavatā saddhiṃ yugaggāhacittuppādena saheva jhānābhiññāhi anujīno parihīno’’ti. Avīcinirayaṃ patto, catudvāraṃ bhayānakanti jālānaṃ tattha uppannasattānaṃ vā nirantaratāya ‘‘avīcī’’ti laddhanāmaṃ catūsu passesu catumahādvārayogena catudvāraṃ atibhayānakaṃ mahānirayaṃ paṭisandhiggahaṇavasena patto. Tathā hi vuttaṃ –
四角方正,四门对称,各部分划分得匀称合度;
四周以铁墙为界,顶部覆盖着铁板。
其地纯铁所成,炽焰燃烧,光焰交织;
「四周」:指从周围一百由旬开始,遍满一切处且恒常地住立。(《中部》3.250;《增支部》3.36;《小部·饿鬼事》693-694;《本生》2.19.86-87)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Catukkaṇṇo catudvāro, vibhatto bhāgaso mito; Ayopākārapariyanto, ayasā paṭikujjito. ‘‘Tassa ayomayā bhūmi, jalitā tejasā yutā; Samantā yojanasataṃ, pharitvā tiṭṭhati sabbadā’’ti. (ma. ni. 3.250; a. ni. 3.36; pe. va. 693-694; jā. 2.19.86-87);
「于无瞋者」:指心无瞋恨之人。「应憎恶」:指应去毁坏、破坏。「那同样的恶触及」:即那恶本身——下劣的恶果,会触及、追上并压倒那个对无瞋者心怀恶意的人。「可怖」:因广大甚深而仿佛令人恐惧,即广大甚深之义。「以过失」:指以过失谴责。「伤害」:指恼害、触犯。「过失于彼不增长」:指他人强加于如来的过失,既不能增长,也无法安住。犹如将毒瓶投入大海,大海不会因此产生任何变化,这便是其义。显示巴利原文
Aduṭṭhassāti aduṭṭhacittassa. Dubbheti dūseyya. Tameva pāpaṃ phusatīti tameva aduṭṭhadubbhiṃ pāpapuggalaṃ pāpaṃ nihīnaṃ pāpaphalaṃ phusati pāpuṇāti abhibhavati. Bhesmāti vipulabhāvena gambhīrabhāvena ca bhiṃsāpento viya, vipulagambhīroti attho. Vādenāti dosena. Vihiṃsatīti bādhati āsādeti. Vādo tamhi na rūhatīti tasmiṃ tathāgate parena āropiyamāno doso na ruhati, na tiṭṭhati, visakumbho viya samuddassa, na tassa vikāraṃ janetīti attho.
就这样,通过六首偈颂说明那些具足恶欲等不净法者堕入地狱,显示他们未从苦中解脱。现在,为了说明具足与此相反法者如何灭尽苦,世尊才说出这最后一首偈颂——「这样的朋友」。其意为:对于那些正行道、随顺于道、依道而正修习的人,由于具足少欲等功德,能到达整个轮回之苦的究竟灭尽。像这样的佛陀,或佛陀的声闻,智者——即有智慧的人,便应视之为朋友,与他建立友谊,亲近他、侍奉他。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ chahi gāthāhi pāpicchatādisamannāgatassa nirayūpagabhāvadassanena dukkhato aparimuttataṃ dassetvā idāni tappaṭipakkhadhammasamannāgatassa dukkhakkhayaṃ dassento ‘‘tādisaṃ mitta’’nti osānagāthamāha. Tassattho – yassa sammā paṭipannassa maggānugo paṭipattimaggaṃ anugato sammā paṭipanno appicchatādiguṇasamannāgamena sakalavaṭṭadukkhassa khayaṃ pariyosānaṃ pāpuṇeyya. Tādisaṃ buddhaṃ vā buddhasāvakaṃ vā paṇḍito sappañño, attano mittaṃ kubbetha tena mettikaṃ kareyya, tañca seveyya tameva payirupāseyyāti.
如是,于此品中,第六、第七经宣说还灭,其余诸经则宣说流转与还灭。显示巴利原文
Iti imasmiṃ vagge chaṭṭhasattamasuttesu vivaṭṭaṃ kathitaṃ, itaresu vaṭṭavivaṭṭaṃ kathitaṃ.
1. 最胜净信经注疏显示巴利原文
1. Aggappasādasuttavaṇṇanā
90 第五品第一经中,解释“最胜净信”(aggappasādā)一词:“最胜”(agga)这个词,可见于“开始”“顶端”“部分”“最胜”等义。如“从今日起,贤友守门人,我关闭尼干陀与尼干陀女之门”(《中部》2.70)、“从今日起,有生命以来,已皈依”(《长部》1.250;《波罗夷》15)等处,此“最胜”即用为“开始”义。又如“以指尖触另一指尖”(《论事》441)、“甘蔗顶、竹顶”等语,用为“顶端”义。又如“酸味的顶部,甘甜的顶部,苦味的顶部”(《相应部》5.374)、“诸比丘,我允许按精舍的区域或周边部分来分配”(《小品》318)等处,用为“部分”义。又如“此乃四种补特伽罗中最胜、最上、最高、最殊胜者”(《增支部》4.95)、“我为世间最胜者”(《长部》2.31;《中部》3.207)等经文,则用为“最胜”义。此处“最胜”一词,同样应视为“最胜”义。因此,所谓“最胜净信”,即指对最胜者所生起的净信,或是其本身即为最胜、最…显示巴利原文
90. Pañcamavaggassa paṭhame aggappasādāti ettha ayaṃ aggasaddo ādikoṭikoṭṭhāsaseṭṭhesu dissati. Tathā hesa ‘‘ajjatagge, samma dovārika, āvarāmi dvāraṃ nigaṇṭhānaṃ nigaṇṭhīnaṃ (ma. ni. 2.70). Ajjatagge pāṇupetaṃ saraṇaṃ gata’’nti (dī. ni. 1.250; pārā. 15) ca ādīsu ādimhi dissati. ‘‘Teneva aṅgulaggena taṃ aṅgulaggaṃ parāmaseyya (kathā. 441). Ucchaggaṃ veḷagga’’nti ca ādīsu koṭiyaṃ. ‘‘Ambilaggaṃ vā madhuraggaṃ vā tittakaggaṃ vā (saṃ. ni. 5.374). Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, vihāraggena vā pariveṇaggena vā bhājetu’’nti (cūḷava. 318) ca ādīsu koṭṭhāse. ‘‘Ayaṃ imesaṃ catunnaṃ puggalānaṃ aggo ca seṭṭho ca uttamo ca pavaro ca (a. ni. 4.95). Aggohamasmi lokassā’’ti ca ādīsu (dī. ni. 2.31; ma. ni. 3.207) seṭṭhe. Svāyamidhāpi seṭṭheyeva daṭṭhabbo. Tasmā aggesu seṭṭhesu pasādā, aggabhūtā seṭṭhabhūtā vā pasādā aggappasādāti attho.
于前文所述之义中,“最胜”一词即指佛陀等三宝。其中,世尊之所以称为最胜,是基于三种意义:无等之义、功德殊胜之义,以及无同等者之义。世尊由发起大愿、对十波罗蜜的探究等为始,以他们菩提资粮功德与佛陀功德,不同于一切众生,故从“无等”之义说为最胜。又,世尊具足的大悲等功德,较之其余众生的功德更为殊胜,故从“功德殊胜”之义说为最胜;亦因于一切众生中最为上首,故称最胜。再者,过去的正自觉者们虽亦不与一切众生相等,然此世尊于色身功德及法身功德上,与他们平等无异,故从“无同等者”之义说,亦是最胜。同样,以世尊出现极为难得,是不可思议之人,能利益安乐众多众生,且无第二人、无伴侣等,故于世间被称为最胜。如经云:显示巴利原文
Purimasmiñca atthe aggasaddena buddhādiratanattayaṃ vuccati. Tesu bhagavā tāva asadisaṭṭhena, guṇavisiṭṭhaṭṭhena, asamasamaṭṭhena ca aggo. So hi mahābhinīhāraṃ dasannaṃ pāramīnaṃ pavicayañca ādiṃ katvā tehi bodhisambhāraguṇehi ceva buddhaguṇehi ca sesajanehi asadisoti asadisaṭṭhena aggo. Ye cassa guṇā mahākaruṇādayo, te sesasattānaṃ guṇehi visiṭṭhāti guṇavisiṭṭhaṭṭhenapi sabbasattuttamatāya aggo. Ye pana purimakā sammāsambuddhā sabbasattehi asamā, tehi saddhiṃ ayameva rūpakāyaguṇehi ceva dhammakāyaguṇehi ca samoti asamasamaṭṭhenapi aggo. Tathā dullabhapātubhāvato acchariyamanussabhāvato bahujanahitasukhāvahato adutiyaasahāyādibhāvato ca bhagavā loke aggoti vuccati. Yathāha –
“诸比丘,世间有一人出现,甚为难得。哪一人?即是如来、阿拉汉、正自觉者。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Ekapuggalassa , bhikkhave, pātubhāvo dullabho lokasmiṃ, katamassa ekapuggalassa? Tathāgatassa arahato sammāsambuddhassa.
“诸比丘,有一人出现于世间时,是作为稀有之人而出现的。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Ekapuggalo , bhikkhave, loke uppajjamāno uppajjati acchariyamanusso.
比丘们,有一人出现于世时,是为利益众多人……乃至……作为正自觉者而出现。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ekapuggalo, bhikkhave, loke uppajjamāno uppajjati bahujana…pe… sammāsambuddho.
比丘们,有一人出现于世时,他是无第二、无伴侣、无可比、无比、无匹、无等、无等等,于两足者中最尊而出现。是哪一人呢?即如来、阿拉汉、正自觉者。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ekapuggalo, bhikkhave, loke uppajjamāno uppajjati, adutiyo asahāyo appaṭimo appaṭisamo appaṭibhāgo appaṭipuggalo asamo asamasamo dvipadānaṃ aggo. Katamo ekapuggalo? Tathāgato arahaṃ sammāsambuddho’’ti (a. ni. 1.170-172, 174).
法与僧,也因与其他法与僧不相类似、功德殊胜、出现难得等,而被称为最上。事实上,由于法具有善说性、僧具有善修行性等功德特胜,其他能与它们相等、相仿乃至下劣的法与僧尚不可得,何况更殊胜的呢?正是凭借自身殊胜的功德,它们方为最胜。同样,法与僧也具有难得出现、稀有、能利益安乐众多有情、无第二、无伴侣等特质。世尊的出现极为难得,法与僧亦复如是难得;稀有性等也是如此。因此,对于那最胜、最上、无上、殊胜、功德优越的对象所生起的净信,即称为「最胜净信」。显示巴利原文
Dhammasaṅghāpi aññadhammasaṅghehi asadisaṭṭhena visiṭṭhaguṇatāya dullabhapātubhāvādinā ca aggā. Tathā hi tesaṃ svākkhātatādisuppaṭipannatādiguṇavisesehi aññadhammasaṅghā sadisā appataranihīnā vā natthi, kuto seṭṭhā. Sayameva ca pana tehi visiṭṭhaguṇatāya seṭṭhā. Tathā dullabhuppādaacchariyabhāvabahujanahitasukhāvahā adutiyaasahāyādisabhāvā ca te. Yadaggena hi bhagavā dullabhapātubhāvo, tadaggena dhammasaṅghāpīti. Acchariyādibhāvepi eseva nayo. Evaṃ aggesu seṭṭhesu uttamesu pavaresu guṇavisiṭṭhesu pasādāti aggappasādā.
其次,依第二种含义:于前文所说的最胜者——佛陀等,生起而成为最胜的净信,名为“最胜净信”。而由圣道所证得的不坏净信,必然是已成就最胜的净信,故亦名“最胜净信”。正如经中所说:“诸比丘,于此,圣弟子于佛具足不坏净信……”(《相应部》5.1027)。又因能感得最胜的果报,故称为最胜净信。的确有言:“于最胜境生净信者,果报亦最胜。”显示巴利原文
Dutiyasmiṃ pana atthe yathāvuttesu aggesu buddhādīsu uppattiyā aggabhūtā pasādā aggappasādā. Ye pana ariyamaggena āgatā aveccappasādā, te ekanteneva aggabhūtā pasādāti aggappasādā. Yathāha ‘‘idha , bhikkhave, ariyasāvako buddhe aveccappasādena samannāgato hotī’’tiādi (saṃ. ni. 5.1027). Aggavipākattāpi cete aggappasādā. Vuttañhi ‘‘agge kho pana pasannānaṃ aggo vipāko’’ti.
“yāvatā”指凡所有。“sattā”指有情。“apadā”指无足者。“dvipadā”指两足者。其余两种足(四足、多足)亦同此理。vā一词是总集义,而非选择义。例如:“未生的欲漏或生起,已生的欲漏或增长”(《中部》1.17)中,此处即“未生的与已生的”之义。又如:“为已生众生的存续,或为求生者的资助”(《中部》1.402;《相应部》2.12),此处即“已生的和求生者的”之义。又如:“从火或从水或从离间”(《长部》2.152;《自说》76;《大品》286),此处即“从火、从水以及从离间”之义。同样地,在“无足者或……乃至……被称为最胜”中,也应以总集的方式理解为“无足者与两足者等”。故说:“vā一词是总集义,非选择义。”显示巴利原文
Yāvatāti yattakā. Sattāti pāṇino. Apadāti apādakā. Dvipadāti dvipādakā. Sesapadadvayepi eseva nayo. Vā-saddo samuccayattho, na vikappattho. Yathā ‘‘anuppanno vā kāmāsavo uppajjati, uppanno vā kāmāsavo pavaḍḍhatī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.17) ettha anuppanno ca uppanno cāti attho. Yathā ca ‘‘bhūtānaṃ vā sattānaṃ ṭhitiyā sambhavesīnaṃ vā anuggahāyā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.402; saṃ. ni. 2.12) ettha bhūtānañca sambhavesīnañcāti attho. Yathā ca ‘‘aggito vā udakato vā mithubhedato vā’’ti (dī. ni. 2.152; udā. 76; mahāva. 286) ettha aggito ca udakato ca mithubhedato cāti attho, evaṃ ‘‘apadā vā…pe… aggamakkhāyatī’’ti etthāpi apadā ca dvipadā cāti sampiṇḍanavasena attho daṭṭhabbo. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘vā-saddo samuccayattho, na vikappattho’’ti.
“rūpino”意为有色的。“na rūpino”意为无色的。“saññino”意为有想的。“na saññino”意为无想的。“nevasaññināsaññino”指属于有顶的众生。如此,则总括了九种有中的有情:即欲有、色有、无色有、一蕴有、四蕴有、五蕴有、想有、无想有、非想非非想有。其中,以“有色的”一语,开示了欲有、色有、五蕴有、一蕴有;以“无色的”一语,开示了无色有、四蕴有;而想有等,则直接以其自相开示。以“无足等”一语,开示了欲有、五蕴有及部分想有。显示巴利原文
Rūpinoti rūpavanto. Na rūpinoti arūpino. Saññinoti saññāvanto. Na saññinoti asaññino. Nevasaññināsaññino nāma bhavaggapariyāpannā. Ettāvatā ca kāmabhavo, rūpabhavo, arūpabhavo, ekavokārabhavo, catuvokārabhavo, pañcavokārabhavo, saññībhavo, asaññībhavo, nevasaññīnāsaññībhavoti navavidhepi bhave satte anavasesato pariyādiyitvā dassesi dhammarājā. Ettha hi rūpiggahaṇena kāmabhavo rūpabhavo pañcavokārabhavo ekavokārabhavo ca dassito, arūpiggahaṇena arūpabhavo catuvokārabhavo ca dassito. Saññībhavādayo pana sarūpeneva dassitā. Apadādiggahaṇena kāmabhavapañcavokārabhavasaññībhavānaṃ ekadeso dassitoti.
然而,为何此处不像《无第二经》那样,只说“两足者中最胜”,却兼取无足等呢?答言:《无第二经》是从更为殊胜的角度,唯取两足者。因为在此世间,所谓的最胜者,当其出现时,不会于无足、四足或多足的有情中出现,唯于两足者中出现。两足者又分两种:人类与天神。若于人类中出现,则成为能统御全世界的佛陀而出现;《增支部义注》中说:“能统御三千大千世界而出现。”若于天神中出现,则成为能统御一万世界的大梵天而出现,或成为佛陀的侍者、寺男。因此,在那部经中也是从较为殊胜的角度,说为“两足者中最胜”;而在此经中,则是为了毫无遗漏地遍摄一切有情,而作此说。因为,凡属有身的有情,无论是无足者……乃至非想非非想者,如来于他们中,即被称为最胜者。此处,“他们中”是表简别的属格,“m”为连音,“最胜者”是所说之词。显示巴利原文
Kasmā panettha yathā adutiyasutte ‘‘dvipadānaṃ aggo’’ti dvipadānaṃ gahaṇameva akatvā apadādiggahaṇaṃ katanti? Vuccate – adutiyasutte tāva seṭṭhataravasena dvipadaggahaṇameva kataṃ. Imasmiñhi loke seṭṭho nāma uppajjamāno apadacatuppadabahuppadesu na uppajjati, dvipadesuyeva uppajjati. Kataresu dvipadesu? Manussesu ceva devesu ca. Manussesu uppajjamāno sakalalokaṃ vase vattetuṃ samattho buddho hutvā uppajjati. Aṅguttaraṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘tisahassimahāsahassilokadhātuṃ vase vattetuṃ samattho’’ti (a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.174) vuttaṃ. Devesu uppajjamāno dasasahassilokadhātuṃ vase vattanako mahābrahmā hutvā uppajjati, so tassa kappiyakārako vā ārāmiko vā sampajjati. Iti tatopi seṭṭhataravasenesa ‘‘dvipadānaṃ aggo’’ti tattha vutto, idha pana anavasesapariyādānavasena evaṃ vuttaṃ. Yāvattakā hi sattā attabhāvapariyāpannā apadā vā…pe… nevasaññīnāsaññino vā, tathāgato tesaṃ aggamakkhāyatīti. Niddhāraṇe cetaṃ sāmivacanaṃ, makāro padasandhikaro. Aggo akkhāyatīti padavibhāgo.
“果报是最胜的”意思是:于最胜的正自觉者生起净信之人,其所生净信是最胜、最上、无上、至极的,因此,此净信的果报也是最胜、最上、无上、至极、广大殊胜、微妙殊胜的。而这净信有两种,分为世间与出世间。其中,世间净信者——显示巴利原文
Aggo vipāko hotīti agge sammāsambuddhe pasannānaṃ yo pasādo, so aggo seṭṭho uttamo koṭibhūto vā, tasmā tassa vipākopi aggo seṭṭho uttamo koṭibhūto uḷāratamo paṇītatamo hoti. So pana pasādo duvidho lokiyalokuttarabhedato. Tesu lokiyassa tāva –
凡皈依佛陀者,他们不堕恶趣之地;
舍弃人身之后,他们将成就天身。
称扬佛陀时,身中所生的喜悦;
那种喜悦确实殊胜,即便以整个赡部洲来交换也难比拟。
一百头象、一百匹马、一百辆骡车
十万名佩戴珠宝耳环的少女
都比不上忆念佛陀一步的十六分之一
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Ye keci buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ gatāse, na te gamissanti apāyabhūmiṃ; Pahāya mānusaṃ dehaṃ, devakāyaṃ paripūressanti. (dī. ni. 2.332; saṃ. ni. 1.37); ‘‘Buddhoti kittayantassa, kāye bhavati yā pīti; Varameva hi sā pīti, kasiṇenapi jambudīpassa. ‘‘Sataṃ hatthī sataṃ assā, sataṃ assatarī rathā; Sataṃ kaññāsahassāni, āmukkamaṇikuṇḍalā; Ekassa padavītihārassa, kalaṃ nāgghanti soḷasiṃ’’. (saṃ. ni. 1.242; cūḷava. 305);
帝释,皈依佛陀确是殊胜的。正因皈依佛陀,帝释,有些众生在身坏命终之后,会投生到善趣、天界。他们以十种方式超越其他诸天:天寿、天色、天乐、天誉、天威,以及天界的色、声、香、味、触。显示巴利原文
‘‘Sādhu kho, devānaminda, buddhaṃ saraṇagamanaṃ hoti, buddhaṃ saraṇagamanahetu kho, devānaminda, evamidhekacce sattā kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā sugatiṃ saggaṃ lokaṃ upapajjanti. Te aññe deve dasahi ṭhānehi adhigaṇhanti – dibbena āyunā, dibbena vaṇṇena, dibbena sukhena, dibbena yasena, dibbena ādhipateyyena, dibbehi rūpehi, dibbehi saddehi, dibbehi gandhehi, dibbehi rasehi, dibbehi phoṭṭhabbehī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.341) –
依据这些经句,应当了知信心与果报差别之间的关联。因此,应将这种信心看作既能消除恶趣之苦,也能在善趣生命中带来快乐果报的。而出世间的信心,则能带来沙门果,并能止息轮回之苦。而且,这一切信心,皆能辗转相续,最终止息轮回之苦。因为曾这样说过:显示巴利原文
Evamādīnaṃ suttapadānaṃ vasena pasādassa phalavisesayogo veditabbo. Tasmā so apāyadukkhavinivattanena saddhiṃ sampattibhavesu sukhavipākadāyakoti daṭṭhabbo. Lokuttaro pana sāmaññaphalavipākadāyako vaṭṭadukkhavinivattako ca. Sabbopi cāyaṃ pasādo paramparāya vaṭṭadukkhaṃ vinivattetiyeva. Vuttañhetaṃ –
诸比丘,每当圣弟子随念自己的信心时,在那个时刻,他的心便不被贪欲所缠缚,不被嗔恚所缠缚,不被愚痴所缠缚,那时,他的心是正直的。心正直者生起欢悦,欢悦者生起喜悦……乃至……他清楚地了知:‘不再有来生。’显示巴利原文
‘‘Yasmiṃ , bhikkhave, samaye ariyasāvako attano saddhaṃ anussarati, nevassa tasmiṃ samaye rāgapariyuṭṭhitaṃ cittaṃ hoti, na dosapariyuṭṭhitaṃ, na mohapariyuṭṭhitaṃ cittaṃ hoti, ujugatamevassa tasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ hoti. Ujugatacittassa pāmojjaṃ jāyati, pamuditassa pīti jāyati…pe… nāparaṃ itthattāyāti pajānātī’’ti (a. ni. 6.10; 26).
“法”:即自性法。
“有为”:由因缘聚合、共同造作而成,故称有为,也就是有缘之法。
不由任何因缘造作而成的,则是“无为”,即无缘的涅槃。为与“有为”相对,遂用复数形说“诸无为”。
“离贪于他们法中被说为最上”:在那些有为与无为法中,那称为离贪的无为法,以其自性微细柔软、更寂静、更殊胜、甚深等故,并能摧破骄慢等,因此被说为最上、最胜、最尊、最妙。
其中的“即此”是虚词,意为“这个”。
“摧破骄慢”等皆是涅槃的同义词。实际上,依靠涅槃,一切如骄慢、人慢等的慢都被摧破折伏;一切如欲贪、渴爱等的渴爱都被消尽;一切如欲爱窟宅等的窟宅都被断除;一切业轮、烦恼轮、果报轮都被截断;所有一百零八种渴爱全部耗尽;一切烦恼离染;一切苦灭尽,故称为“摧破骄慢……乃至……灭”。
再者,那种渴爱通过“有”而令“有”生起,又通过果报将业交织相属,故名为“缚”;而涅槃中没有此缚,或者说,对于证得涅槃的圣补特伽罗而言,此缚即无,因此称为“涅槃”。显示巴利原文
Dhammāti sabhāvadhammā. Saṅkhatāti samecca sambhuyya paccayehi katāti saṅkhatā, sappaccayadhammā. Hetūhi paccayehi ca na kehici katāti asaṅkhatā, appaccayanibbānaṃ. Saṅkhatānaṃ paṭiyogibhāvena ‘‘asaṅkhatā’’ti puthuvacanaṃ. Virāgo tesaṃ aggamakkhāyatīti tesaṃ saṅkhatāsaṅkhatadhammānaṃ yo virāgasaṅkhāto asaṅkhatadhammo, so sabhāveneva saṇhasukhumabhāvato santatarapaṇītatarabhāvato gambhīrādibhāvato madanimmadanādibhāvato ca aggaṃ seṭṭhaṃ uttamaṃ pavaranti vuccati. Yadidanti nipāto, yo ayanti attho. Madanimmadanotiādīni sabbāni nibbānavevacanāniyeva. Tathā hi taṃ āgamma mānamadapurisamadādiko sabbo mado nimmadīyati pamaddīyati, kāmapipāsādikā sabbā pipāsā vinīyati, kāmālayādikā sabbepi ālayā samugghātīyanti, sabbepi kammavaṭṭakilesavaṭṭavipākavaṭṭā upacchijjanti, aṭṭhasatabhedā sabbāpi taṇhā khīyati, sabbepi kilesā virajjanti, sabbaṃ dukkhaṃ nirujjhati, tasmā madanimmadano…pe… nirodhoti vuccati. Yā panesā taṇhā bhavena bhavaṃ, phalena kammaṃ vinati saṃsibbatīti katvā vānanti vuccati. Taṃ vānaṃ ettha natthi, etasmiṃ vā adhigate ariyapuggalassa na hotīti nibbānaṃ.
“最上之果”,此处义亦同前——显示巴利原文
Aggo vipāko hotīti etthāpi –
“凡以法为皈依者……(中略)……”(《长部》2.332;《相应部》1.37)
称叹“法”者,身上所生起的喜悦……(省略)……
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Ye keci dhammaṃ saraṇaṃ gatāse…pe…. (dī. ni. 2.332; saṃ. ni. 1.37); ‘‘Dhammoti kittayantassa, kāye bhavati yā pīti…pe….
“帝释!皈依‘法’实为善妙。帝释!因皈依‘法’之故,此中有一类人……(省略)……得以享受天界的触乐。”(相应部4.341)——显示巴利原文
‘‘Sādhu kho, devānaminda, dhammaṃ saraṇagamanaṃ hoti. Dhammaṃ saraṇagamanahetu kho, devānaminda, evamidhekacce…pe… dibbehi phoṭṭhabbehī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.341) –
依这些经文之句,当知对“法”的净信与殊胜果报间的关联。如是,此中虽由“无为法”本身确立了最上性,但为显示一切有为的出离,依于圣道亦可获得此义。对此,曾有言道:——显示巴利原文
Evamādīnaṃ suttapadānaṃ vasena dhamme pasādassa phalavisesayogo veditabbo. Evamettha asaṅkhatadhammavaseneva aggabhāvo āgato, sabbasaṅkhatanissaraṇadassanatthaṃ ariyamaggavasenapi ayamattho labbhateva. Vuttañhetaṃ –
比丘们!于一切有为法中,圣八支道被说为最上。”(增支部4.34)显示巴利原文
‘‘Yāvatā , bhikkhave, dhammā saṅkhatā, ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo tesaṃ aggamakkhāyatī’’ti (a. ni. 4.34).
八支道于诸道中,最殊胜。”(法句273)显示巴利原文
‘‘Maggānaṭṭhaṅgiko seṭṭho’’ti ca. (Dha. pa. 273).
“僧或众”:世间凡被称为人群、团体者,不论何种僧或众,皆属此类。“如来声闻僧”:由八位圣补特伽罗组成的团体,依于见与戒的共性而和合,称为如来声闻僧。“于他们中被说为最上”:以自身戒、定、慧、解脱等功德之殊胜,于诸僧众中,他被说为最上、最胜、最尊、最优。“即此”:即指这些。“四双人”:按双计之,初道者与初果者为第一双;乃至第四道者与第四果者为第四双;如此便有四双人。“八辈人补特伽罗”:若按人补特伽罗分别,则有初道者、初果者等,总计八辈。此处,“人”与“补特伽罗”实为同义词,仅为应受教化者而作此说。“这就是世尊的声闻僧团”:如上所述,按双计算即是四双人,分别计算即是八辈人补特伽罗,这便是世尊的声闻僧团。显示巴利原文
Saṅghā vā gaṇā vāti janasamūhasaṅkhātā yāvatā loke saṅghā vā gaṇā vā. Tathāgatasāvakasaṅghoti aṭṭhaariyapuggalasamūhasaṅkhāto diṭṭhisīlasāmaññena saṃhato tathāgatassa sāvakasaṅgho. Tesaṃ aggamakkhāyatīti attano sīlasamādhipaññāvimuttiādiguṇavisesena tesaṃ saṅghānaṃ aggo seṭṭho uttamo pavaroti vuccati. Yadidanti yāni imāni. Cattāri purisayugānīti yugaḷavasena paṭhamamaggaṭṭho paṭhamaphalaṭṭhoti idamekaṃ yugaḷaṃ, yāva catutthamaggaṭṭho catutthaphalaṭṭhoti idamekaṃ yugaḷanti evaṃ cattāri purisayugāni. Aṭṭha purisapuggalāti purisapuggalavasena eko paṭhamamaggaṭṭho eko paṭhamaphalaṭṭhoti iminā nayena aṭṭha purisapuggalā. Ettha ca purisoti vā puggaloti vā ekatthāni etāni padāni, veneyyavasena panevaṃ vuttaṃ. Esa bhagavato sāvakasaṅghoti yānimāni yugavasena cattāri purisayugāni, pāṭekkato aṭṭha purisapuggalā, esa bhagavato sāvakasaṅgho.
在「应请」等词中,「应献」的意思是带过来而应供养的,也就是从远方来,应该布施给持戒者。这是指四种资具。因为能产生大果报,所以值得接受这种应献的,就称为「应请」。或者另一种解释:从远方而来,一切财产也应该在这里献上,值得帝释等的邀请,所以称为「应邀请」。又,婆罗门们所谓的“应邀请之火”,他们认为供在这个火里会得到大果。如果那个火因为供养能得大果而称为应邀请,那么僧团才是真正的应邀请。因为供养僧团确实能得大果。正如所说——显示巴利原文
Āhuneyyotiādīsu ānetvā hunitabbanti āhunaṃ, dūratopi āgantvā sīlavantesu dātabbanti attho. Catunnaṃ paccayānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Mahapphalabhāvakaraṇato taṃ āhunaṃ paṭiggahetuṃ yuttoti āhuneyyo. Atha vā dūratopi āgantvā sabbaṃ sāpateyyampi ettha hunitabbaṃ, sakkādīnampi āhavanaṃ arahatīti vā āhavanīyo. Yo cāyaṃ brāhmaṇānaṃ āhavanīyo nāma aggi, yattha hutaṃ mahapphalanti tesaṃ laddhi, so ce hutassa mahapphalatāya āhavanīyo, saṅghova āhavanīyo. Saṅghe hutañhi mahapphalaṃ hoti. Yathāha –
假使有人在林中,百年间不断奉事圣火,
而另一人仅以须臾片刻,供养一位有修證者——
片刻的供养,便远胜于百年的火供祭祀。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yo ca vassasataṃ jantu, aggiṃ paricare vane; Ekañca bhāvitattānaṃ, muhuttamapi pūjaye; Sā eva pūjanā seyyo, yañce vassasataṃ huta’’nti. (dha. pa. 107);
此事在其他部派经典中,用词为“āhavanīyo”,此处则以“āhuneyyo”表示;二者义理相同,只在文辞上略有差异,故依此义理而作解释。显示巴利原文
Tayidaṃ nikāyantare ‘‘āhavanīyo’’ti padaṃ idha ‘‘āhuneyyo’’ti iminā padena atthato ekaṃ, byañjanato pana kiñcimattameva nānaṃ, tasmā evamatthavaṇṇanā katā.
关于“应客”(pāhuneyyo)一词:此处的“客”(pāhuna),是指为从远近各方远道而来、令人喜爱悦意的亲戚朋友,以恭敬心特地准备的客供。即便不谈后者,那样的客供也只应施予僧伽。事实上,在仅有一位佛陀出世的时期,这样的情形便已能见到,且从未中断。而此处的词义是:由于他“成就了能令人变得可爱、可意的一切法”,故而值得被施予客供,也值得领受客供,因此称为“应客”。在某些版本中,此词写作“pāhavanīyo”(应请),他们的观点是:因僧伽应受最先的礼敬,故应最先迎请僧伽,并在此对他们行供养,因此称“应请”;又或因僧伽值得以一切方式来献供,也称“应请”。而此处基于完全相同的义理,便称作“应客”(pāhuneyyo)。显示巴利原文
Pāhuneyyoti ettha pana pāhunaṃ vuccati disāvidisato āgatānaṃ piyamanāpānaṃ ñātimittānaṃ atthāya sakkārena paṭiyattaṃ āgantukadānaṃ, tampi ṭhapetvā te tathārūpe pāhunake saṅghasseva dātuṃ yuttaṃ. Tathā hesa ekabuddhantarepi dissati abbokiṇṇañca. Ayaṃ panettha padattho – ‘‘piyamanāpattakarehi dhammehi samannāgato’’ti evaṃ pāhunamassa dātuṃ yuttaṃ, pāhunañca paṭiggahetuṃ yuttoti pāhuneyyo. Yesaṃ pana pāhavanīyoti pāḷi, tesaṃ yasmā saṅgho pubbakāraṃ arahati, tasmā saṅgho sabbapaṭhamaṃ ānetvā ettha hunitabbanti pāhavanīyo, sabbappakārena vā āhavanaṃ arahatīti pāhavanīyo. Svāyamidha teneva atthena pāhuneyyoti vuccati.
“施物”,是指相信有他世而应当布施的供养。僧伽应受此施物,又或者,僧伽因该施物而成为获益者——通过成就大果报而使布施得以清净,故称“应施者”。一切世间众生将双手合掌置于头顶所行的合掌之礼,僧伽也值得承受,故称“应合掌者”。所谓“世间无上的福田”,是指一切世间中无可比拟的、能让福德生长之处。如同稻谷、大麦生长之处被称为“稻田”、“麦田”一样,僧伽正是包含天神在内的世间中,让福德生长之处。正因为依靠僧伽,世间种种利益安乐的福德果报才得以生长,所以僧伽是“世间无上的福田”。对此,经文中也说道:显示巴利原文
‘‘Dakkhiṇā’’ti paralokaṃ saddahitvā dātabbadānaṃ, taṃ dakkhiṇaṃ arahati dakkhiṇāya vā hito mahapphalabhāvakaraṇena visodhanatoti dakkhiṇeyyo. Ubho hatthe sirasi patiṭṭhapetvā sabbalokena kariyamānaṃ añjalikammaṃ arahatīti añjalikaraṇīyo. Anuttaraṃ puññakkhettaṃ lokassāti sabbalokassa asadisaṃ puññavirūhanaṭṭhānaṃ. Yathā hi rattasālīnaṃ vā yavānaṃ vā virūhanaṭṭhānaṃ ‘‘rattasālikkhettaṃ yavakkhetta’’nti vuccati, evaṃ saṅgho sadevakassa lokassa puññavirūhanaṭṭhānaṃ. Saṅghaṃ nissāya hi lokassa nānappakārahitasukhanibbattakāni puññāni virūhanti, tasmā saṅgho anuttaraṃ puññakkhettaṃ lokassa. Idhāpi –
凡是皈依僧伽、以僧伽为依怙者……(中略)
若人赞颂“僧伽”,身中所生的喜悦……(中略)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Ye keci saṅghaṃ saraṇaṃ gatāse…pe…. (dī. ni. 2.332; saṃ. ni. 1.37); ‘‘Saṅghoti kittayantassa, kāye bhavati yā pīti…pe…’’.
善哉,帝释,皈依僧是善的;帝释,因皈依僧……乃至……以天触等。——《相应部》4.341显示巴利原文
‘‘Sādhu kho, devānaminda, saṅghaṃ saraṇagamanaṃ hoti, saṅghaṃ saraṇagamanahetu kho devānaminda…pe… dibbehi phoṭṭhabbehī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.341) –
依这些经文的开头语句,可知对僧的净信能带来殊胜的果报关联,故应知其“最上性”与“最上果报性”。同样,获得无上成就、从第七有开始断除轮回之苦、证得无上乐等——通过这些殊胜大果的成办,应知其最上果报性。显示巴利原文
Ādīnaṃ suttapadānaṃ vasena saṅghe pasādassa phalavisesayogo, tenassa aggatā aggavipākatā ca veditabbā. Tathā anuttariyapaṭilābho sattamabhavādito paṭṭhāya vaṭṭadukkhasamucchedo anuttarasukhādhigamoti evamādiuḷāraphalanipphādanavasena aggavipākatā veditabbā.
在偈颂中,“最胜”(agga)是指于最胜的三宝,或由最胜的状态而净信的人。“最胜的法”(aggaṃ dhammaṃ)是指那些了知并证知三宝最胜本质的人——即佛陀的极善觉悟性、正法的极善法性、僧的极善行道性,这是不与他者共通的、最殊胜的本质;或者说,是指了知并证知如十力等所说的善说性、善行道性等功德本质的人。如此以共通的方式显示了最胜净信的所依之后,现在为了以不共的方式分别显示,而说“于最胜的佛”等句。在这里,“净信者”(pasannānaṃ)是指以不坏净信及其他净信而净信、已倾向的人。“于离贪与寂灭中”(virāgūpasame)意为于作为一切贪染、一切烦恼的究竟离贪之因,以及究竟寂灭之因中。“于乐中”(sukhe)是指于具有轮回苦灭尽的状态和诸行寂灭乐的状态的安乐中。显示巴利原文
Gāthāsu aggatoti agge ratanattaye, aggabhāvato vā pasannānaṃ. Aggaṃ dhammanti aggasabhāvaṃ buddhasubuddhataṃ dhammasudhammataṃ saṅghasuppaṭipattiṃ ratanattayassa anaññasādhāraṇaṃ uttamasabhāvaṃ , dasabalādisvākkhātatādisuppaṭipannatādiguṇasabhāvaṃ vā vijānataṃ vijānantānaṃ. Evaṃ sādhāraṇato aggappasādavatthuṃ dassetvā idāni asādhāraṇato taṃ vibhāgena dassetuṃ ‘‘agge buddhe’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha pasannānanti aveccappasādena itarappasādena ca pasannānaṃ adhimuttānaṃ. Virāgūpasameti virāge upasame ca, sabbassa rāgassa sabbesaṃ kilesānaṃ accantavirāgahetubhūte accantaupasamahetubhūte cāti attho. Sukheti vaṭṭadukkhakkhayabhāvena saṅkhārūpasamasukhabhāvena ca sukhe.
“于最胜中行布施”(Aggasmiṃ dānaṃ dadata)的意思是,向最胜的三宝行布施,弃舍应施之物。其中,有人以四资具奉事、供养、恭敬住世的世尊;也有人为已般涅槃的世尊,而奉事、供养、恭敬舍利塔等,这称为“对佛陀行布施”。有人怀着“我们要恭敬法”的心,以四资具奉事、供养、恭敬持法者,并令正法长久住世,这称为“对法行布施”。同样地,有人以四资具奉事、供养、恭敬圣僧伽,并为了圣僧伽而对其余僧众也如此行持,这称为“对僧伽行布施”。“最胜的福德增长(aggaṃ puññaṃ pavaḍḍhati)”的意思是,像这样以对三宝具足净信之心,生起广大的弃舍、广大的供养与恭敬,他们的最胜、广大的善业便日复一日地增长。现在,为了显示此福德因具有最胜的果报而成为最胜,便接着说出了“最胜的寿命(aggaṃ āyu)”等语句。在此,“最胜的寿命”指天界或人界中最胜、极为广大的寿命。“增长(pavaḍḍhati)”指辗转增上。“容貌(vaṇṇa)”指容色成就。“名声(yasa)”指眷属成显示巴利原文
Aggasmiṃ dānaṃ dadatanti agge ratanattaye dānaṃ dentānaṃ deyyadhammaṃ pariccajantānaṃ. Tattha dharamānaṃ bhagavantaṃ catūhi paccayehi upaṭṭhahantā pūjentā sakkarontā parinibbutañca bhagavantaṃ uddissa dhātucetiyādike upaṭṭhahantā pūjentā sakkarontā buddhe dānaṃ dadanti nāma. ‘‘Dhammaṃ pūjessāmā’’ti dhammadhare puggale catūhi paccayehi upaṭṭhahantā pūjentā sakkarontā dhammañca ciraṭṭhitikaṃ karontā dhamme dānaṃ dadanti nāma. Tathā ariyasaṅghaṃ catūhi paccayehi upaṭṭhahantā pūjentā sakkarontā taṃ uddissa itarasmimpi tathā paṭipajjantā saṅghe dānaṃ dadanti nāma. Aggaṃ puññaṃ pavaḍḍhatīti evaṃ ratanattaye pasannena cetasā uḷāraṃ pariccāgaṃ uḷārañca pūjāsakkāraṃ pavattentānaṃ divase divase aggaṃ uḷāraṃ kusalaṃ upacīyati. Idāni tassa puññassa aggavipākatāya aggabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘aggaṃ āyū’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha aggaṃ āyūti dibbaṃ vā mānusaṃ vā aggaṃ uḷāratamaṃ āyu. Pavaḍḍhatīti uparūpari brūhati. Vaṇṇoti rūpasampadā. Yasoti parivārasampadā. Kittīti thutighoso. Sukhanti kāyikaṃ cetasikañca sukhaṃ. Balanti kāyabalaṃ ñāṇabalañca.
“最胜的施主”(Aggassa dātā),是指对最胜三宝的施主,或者说,是对于最胜的应施之物,作了广大布施后,在那里令福德生起的人。“具足最胜法者”(Aggadhammasamāhito),是指具足、拥有最胜的净信法与布施等法,安住于不动摇的净信之人,或者是指具备了为此果报、为众人喜爱悦意等法的人。“获得最胜者喜悦”(Aggappatto pamodati),是指无论投生于哪一类有情中,都在那里获得了最胜的状态、最上的地位,或者证得了最胜的出世间道果,因此而喜悦、安乐、满足。显示巴利原文
Aggassa dātāti aggassa ratanattayassa dātā, atha vā aggassa deyyadhammassa dānaṃ uḷāraṃ katvā tattha puññaṃ pavattetā. Aggadhammasamāhitoti aggena pasādadhammena dānādidhammena ca samāhito samannāgato acalappasādayutto, tassa vā vipākabhūtehi bahujanassa piyamanāpatādidhammehi yutto. Aggappatto pamodatīti yattha yattha sattanikāye uppanno, tattha tattha aggabhāvaṃ seṭṭhabhāvaṃ adhigato, aggabhāvaṃ vā lokuttaramaggaphalaṃ adhigato pamodati abhiramati paritussatīti.
第二 谋生方式经注释显示巴利原文
2. Jīvikasuttavaṇṇanā
91 第二经是因事缘而说的。一时,世尊住在迦毗罗卫的尼拘律园中,那时,比丘们为客比丘铺设坐卧具、存放衣钵,而沙弥们在分配利养的地方,每当有比丘到来,便去领取利养,因而发出响亮、嘈杂的声音。世尊听见后,便遣散了那些比丘。据说他们都是新近才来到这法与律中的。大梵天得知此因缘后,便前来为那些被遣散的比丘请求摄受,说:“尊者!愿世尊欢喜比丘僧团!”世尊予以许可。于是大梵天心想:“我已得到世尊的许可了。”便礼敬世尊,右绕离去。之后,世尊向阿难尊者示意:“让比丘僧团前来。”于是,那些比丘被阿难尊者召集,面带惭色,来到世尊面前,在一旁坐下。世尊思惟何种法开示适合他们,心想:“他们是因为贪图利养而被遣散的,所以关于钵食正命的法开示对他们适合。”于是,便开示了此法:“比丘们!这是极端…”显示巴利原文
91. Dutiyaṃ aṭṭhuppattivasena desitaṃ. Ekasmiñhi samaye bhagavati kapilavatthusmiṃ nigrodhārāme viharante bhikkhū āgantukabhikkhūnaṃ senāsanāni paññāpentā pattacīvarāni paṭisāmentā sāmaṇerā ca lābhabhājanīyaṭṭhāne sampattasampattānaṃ lābhaṃ gaṇhantā uccāsaddā mahāsaddā ahesuṃ. Taṃ sutvā bhagavā bhikkhū paṇāmesi. Te kira sabbeva navā adhunāgatā imaṃ dhammavinayaṃ. Taṃ ñatvā mahābrahmā āgantvā ‘‘abhinandatu, bhante, bhagavā bhikkhusaṅgha’’nti (ma. ni. 2.158) tesaṃ paṇāmitabhikkhūnaṃ anuggaṇhanaṃ yāci. Bhagavā tassa okāsaṃ akāsi. Atha mahābrahmā ‘‘katāvakāso khomhi bhagavatā’’ti bhagavantaṃ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṃ katvā pakkāmi. Atha bhagavā ‘‘bhikkhusaṅgho āgacchatū’’ti ānandattherassa ākāraṃ dassesi. Atha te bhikkhū ānandattherena pakkositā bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamitvā sārajjamānarūpā ekamantaṃ nisīdiṃsu. Bhagavā tesaṃ sappāyadesanaṃ vīmaṃsanto ‘‘ime āmisahetu paṇāmitā, piṇḍiyālopadhammadesanā nesaṃ sappāyā’’ti cintetvā ‘‘antamidaṃ, bhikkhave’’ti imaṃ desanaṃ desesi.
此处,‘anta(边、极端)’一词,于‘比丘们!有些沙门婆罗门是前际论者,持前际见者’等句中,指‘分位’;于‘他作苦之边际,此世界有边且周圆’等句中,指‘界限’;于‘青草边、路旁、岩边’等句中,指‘边际’;于‘肠与肠间膜’等句中,指‘体内部分’;于‘他们游行世间,被眷属覆盖,内里不净,外观光华’等句中,指‘心’;于‘有些青莲花、红莲花或白莲花,生于水中,长于水中,随水而出,内里深潜滋养’等句中,指‘内部’。显示巴利原文
Tatrāyaṃ antasaddo ‘‘santi, bhikkhave, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā pubbantakappikā pubbantānudiṭṭhino’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.29) koṭṭhāse āgato. ‘‘Antamakāsi dukkhassa, antavā ayaṃ loko parivaṭumo’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.55) paricchede. ‘‘Haritantaṃ vā pathantaṃ vā selantaṃ vā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.304) mariyādāyaṃ. ‘‘Antaṃ antaguṇa’’ntiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.377; khu. pā. 3.dvattiṃsākāra) sarīrāvayave ‘‘caranti loke parivārachannā, anto asuddhā bahi sobhamānā’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.122; mahāni. 191) citte. ‘‘Appekaccāni uppalāni vā padumāni vā puṇḍarīkāni vā udake jātāni udake saṃvaḍḍhāni udakānuggatāni anto nimuggaposīnī’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.69; saṃ. ni. 1.172; mahāva. 9) abbhantare.
‘诸兽之中豺为劣,诸鸟之中则是鸦’——此中,‘anta(劣)’指低劣、下等。
‘诸树之中蓖麻劣,三种劣者相聚合’——此中,‘anta(劣)’亦指低劣。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Migānaṃ koṭṭhuko anto, pakkhīnaṃ pana vāyaso; Eraṇḍo anto rukkhānaṃ, tayo antā samāgatā’’ti. (jā. 1.3.135) –
在前面的这些语句中,“anta”都表示“低劣”。这里同样也应将其理解为低劣。因此,“比丘们!这是极端,即诸谋生方式的极端”的意思是:比丘们!这是诸谋生方式中最极端的、最低下、最卑劣的,是一切活命手段中最下贱的一种。“也就是此托钵”的意思是:即通过寻取团食、沿街乞食来维生者的活命方式。而在此处,词义是这样:因为为了团食而奔走晃动,所以称为“托钵者”,他的这种行为就叫做“托钵”,意思就是以寻取团食活命。显示巴利原文
Ādīsu lāmake. Idhāpi lāmake eva daṭṭhabbo. Tasmā antamidaṃ bhikkhave jīvikānanti bhikkhave idaṃ jīvikānaṃ antaṃ pacchimaṃ lāmakaṃ, sabbanihīnaṃ jīvitanti attho. Yadidaṃ piṇḍolyanti yaṃ idaṃ piṇḍapariyesanena bhikkhācariyāya jīvikaṃ kappentassa jīvitaṃ. Ayaṃ panettha padattho – piṇḍāya ulatīti piṇḍolo, tassa kammaṃ piṇḍolyaṃ, piṇḍapariyesanena jīvikāti attho.
“咒骂”即呵斥、责骂。因为忿怒的人们会这样咒骂自己的怨敌:“你该穿着破布片,手持头盖骨,四处乞食游荡。”或者骂:“你还有什么做不出来的事?明明拥有如此大的精进力,竟舍弃惭与愧,像个可怜悯者一样,托着钵四处游走。”这也是咒骂。而“此即所谓”的意思是:那如同被咒骂一般的托钵生活。善男子们具足义利而出家,是指在我教法中,出身良善的善男子和行持端正的善男子,他们是具足义利、为达成目标,依于正当的动机而出家的。显示巴利原文
Abhisāpoti akkoso. Kupitā hi manussā attano paccatthikaṃ ‘‘pilotikakhaṇḍaṃ nivāsetvā kapālahattho piṇḍaṃ pariyesamāno careyyāsī’’ti akkosanti. Atha vā ‘‘kiṃ tuyhaṃ akātabbaṃ atthi, yo tvaṃ evaṃ balavīriyūpapannopi hirottappaṃ pahāya kapaṇo piṇḍolo vicarasi pattapāṇī’’ti evampi akkosantiyeva. Tañcakho etanti taṃ etaṃ abhisapampi samānaṃ piṇḍolyaṃ. Kulaputtā upenti atthavasikāti mama sāsane jātikulaputtā ca ācārakulaputtā ca atthavasikā kāraṇavasikā hutvā kāraṇavasaṃ paṭicca upenti upagacchanti.
在'国王所押'等句中,指的是那些吃了国王的东西,被国王关进牢狱,然后逃走出来出家的人,因为他们是被国王押送关押的,所以称为「国王所押」。「贼所押」指的是,那些在森林里被盗贼抓住,眼看一部分人要被杀害时,另一部分人求情说:'主人!如果我们被你们放了,我们不会回家,而是直接出家,我们会在各个地方修习供养佛陀等功德,并将这些功德回向给你们。'结果被释放后真的去出家的人,因为他们是被盗贼带到可能被杀的地步,所以称为「贼所押」。「为债所迫」指的是那些借了债还不起,逃走出来出家的人。然而,善男子们在我教法中,既不是因为被国王所押……也不是因为被邪命所败才出家的,而是因为深切体会到'我们陷于生……是否能得以明了'这样的危机感而出家的。这便是文句之间的内在联系。显示巴利原文
Rājābhinītātiādīsu ye rañño santakaṃ khāditvā raññā bandhanāgāre bandhāpitā palāyitvā pabbajanti, te raññā bandhanaṃ abhinītattā rājābhinītā nāma. Ye pana corehi aṭaviyaṃ gahetvā ekaccesu māriyamānesu ekacce ‘‘mayaṃ sāmi tumhehi vissaṭṭhā gehaṃ anajjhāvasitvā pabbajissāma, tattha tattha yaṃ yaṃ buddhapūjādipuññaṃ karissāma, tato tato tumhākaṃ pattiṃ dassāmā’’ti tehi vissaṭṭhā pabbajanti, te corābhinītā nāma corehi māretabbataṃ abhinītattā. Ye pana iṇaṃ gahetvā paṭidātuṃ asakkontā palāyitvā pabbajanti, te iṇaṭṭā nāma. Tañca kho etaṃ piṇḍolyaṃ kulaputtā mama sāsane neva rājābhinītā…pe… na ājīvikāpakatā upenti, apica kho ‘‘otiṇṇamhā jātiyā…pe… paññāyethā’’ti upentīti padasambandho.
此处,「otiṇṇamhā」意为我们已陷入。就「生」等而言:在各类有情身中,诸蕴的初次生起称为生,诸蕴的成熟称为老,诸蕴的坏灭称为死。遭遇亲族衰败、疾病、财产损失、戒行缺失、见解错误时,内心所感的煎熬即是愁;由此发出悲哀言语即是悲叹。当不可意触撞击身体时,所生的身苦即是苦;对可嗔的境界,内心受伤所生的心苦即是忧。因亲族衰败等打击,即便悲叹也无力承受,心中生起的极度焦灼即是绝望。被这些生、老、死等所淹没,即是被苦淹没,是被这些生、老、死等苦厄彻底渗入内心。所谓「为苦所败」,即是被那些苦的事相所征服。因为生、老、死等是苦生起的源头,所以它们本身即是苦;而愁、悲叹、苦、忧、绝望,因其本质就是苦,故而也即是苦。如此,或许便能了知整个轮回苦蕴的彻底断除与终结。显示巴利原文
Tattha otiṇṇamhāti otiṇṇā amhā. Jātiyātiādīsu tamhi tamhi sattanikāye khandhānaṃ paṭhamābhinibbatti jāti, paripāko jarā, bhedo maraṇaṃ. Ñātirogabhogasīladiṭṭhibyasanehi phuṭṭhassa santāpo anto nijjhānaṃ soko, tehi phuṭṭhassa vacīvippalāpo paridevo. Aniṭṭhaphoṭṭhabbapaṭihatakāyassa kāyapīḷanaṃ dukkhaṃ, āghātavatthūsu upahatacittassa cetopīḷanaṃ domanassaṃ. Ñātibyasanādīhi eva phuṭṭhassa paridevenapi adhivāsetuṃ asamatthassa cittasantāpasamuṭṭhito bhuso āyāso upāyāso. Etehi jātiādīhi otiṇṇā dukkhotiṇṇā, tehi jātiādidukkhehi anto anupaviṭṭhā. Dukkhaparetāti tehi dukkhadukkhavatthūhi abhibhūtā. Jātiādayo hi dukkhassa vatthubhāvato dukkhā, dukkhabhāvato ca sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsā dukkhāti. Appeva nāma…pe… paññāyethāti imassa sakalassa vaṭṭadukkharāsissa paricchedakaraṇaṃ osānakiriyā api nāma paññāyeyya.
「他是有贪欲的」这一段,是为说明:有些善男子最初生起‘我要灭尽苦’的心而出家,后来却无法令出家修行达到那样的境地。其中,「有贪欲的」指对他人物品的贪求者。「极重染著」指非常强烈的贪染。「心怀嗔害」指内心因嗔恨而腐坏、心意败坏。「恶意思维」指如头角锋利的暴牛,以伤害他人为本性的邪恶心意。「忘失正念」指如弃饭引来乌鸦、弃肉引来野狗一般,失去了正念,在此处所作,不记得在彼处曾作。「不正知」指无有智慧,不能简择五蕴等诸法。「心不定」指如急流中系缚的船,心神不宁、无法安稳。「乱心」指如路上受惊之鹿,心意迷乱散逸。「不护根门」指如在家人,因无有防护,面对眷属、财产时六根敞开、不知收敛,因而成为不守护根门之人。显示巴利原文
So ca hoti abhijjhālūti idaṃ yo kulaputto ‘‘dukkhassantaṃ karissāmī’’ti pubbe cittaṃ uppādetvā pabbajito aparabhāge taṃ pabbajjaṃ tathārūpaṃ kātuṃ na sakkoti, taṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Tattha abhijjhālūti parabhaṇḍānaṃ abhijjhāyitā. Tibbasārāgoti balavarāgo. Byāpannacittoti byāpādena pūtibhūtattā vipannacitto. Paduṭṭhamanasaṅkappoti tikhiṇasiṅgo viya caṇḍagoṇo paresaṃ upaghātavasena duṭṭhacitto. Muṭṭhassatīti bhattanikkhittakāko viya, maṃsanikkhittasunakho viya ca naṭṭhassati, idha kataṃ ettha na sarati. Asampajānoti nippañño khandhādiparicchedarahito. Asamāhitoti caṇḍasote baddhanāvā viya asaṇṭhito. Vibbhantacittoti panthāruḷhamigo viya bhantamano. Pākatindriyoti yathā gihī saṃvarābhāvena pariggahaparijane olokenti asaṃvutindriyā, evaṃ asaṃvutindriyo hoti.
「腐尸焦木」指火化尸体的地方那些烧焦的木头。「两端烧燃、中间涂粪」是指一根长约八指的木柴,两端燃烧,中间涂上了粪便。「既非村中」的意思是:如果这块木头能用来制作轭、犁、椽、翼板或椽端等,那么在村里它还可以当作木柴用;如果能用来铺田野小屋的柴床或作卧床等,那么在树林里它也可以当作木柴用。但由于两端燃烧、中间沾粪,在两处都用不上,因此这么说。「我作此譬喻」是指我用这个如同腐尸焦木的譬喻,来说明前面所讲的那种补特伽罗。「从在家物用中退失」是说,当在家人的遗产被分割时,假如某个人本应得到某些受用却失去了,即是从在家物用中退失。「沙门义利」是指依止亲教师与老师的教导,应当通过教理通达与证悟通达而获得的沙门利益,他却未能圆满完成。应知,大师并非针对破戒者而引用此喻,而是针对那些戒行清净却懈怠、内心被贪欲等过失所染污的补特伽罗而引用的。显示巴利原文
Chavālātanti chavānaṃ daḍḍhaṭṭhāne alātaṃ. Ubhatopadittaṃ majjhe gūthagatanti pamāṇena aṭṭhaṅgulamattaṃ ubhato dvīsu koṭīsu ādittaṃ majjhe gūthamakkhitaṃ. Neva gāmeti sace hi taṃ yuganaṅgalagopānasipakkhapāsakādīnaṃ atthāya upanetuṃ sakkā assa gāme kaṭṭhatthaṃ phareyya. Sace khettakuṭiyā kaṭṭhattharamañcakādīnaṃ atthāya upanetuṃ sakkā assa, araññe kaṭṭhatthaṃ phareyya. Yasmā pana ubhayatthāpi na sakkā, tasmā evaṃ vuttaṃ. Tathūpamāhanti tathūpamaṃ chavālātasadisaṃ ahaṃ imaṃ yathāvuttapuggalaṃ vadāmi. Gihibhogā ca parihīnoti yo agāre vasantehi gihīhi dāyajje bhājiyamāne aññathā ca bhogo laddhabbo assa, tato ca parihīno. Sāmaññatthañcāti ācariyupajjhāyānaṃ ovāde ṭhatvā pariyattipaṭivedhavasena pattabbaṃ sāmaññatthañca na paripūreti. Imaṃ pana upamaṃ satthā na dussīlassa vasena āhari , parisuddhasīlassa pana alasassa abhijjhādīhi dosehi dūsitacittassa puggalassa vasena āharīti veditabbaṃ.
在偈颂中,“从在家物用”指退失了对感官欲乐的享受。“退失”即减损、失去。“沙门义”指证悟上的多闻与教理上的多闻。那样的人由于懈怠,既不能听闻未闻之法,也不能令已闻之法更为明净。“极恶运者”指运气极衰、不吉祥、耳黑(不祥之人)。“正在毁坏”即正在坏灭。“散坏”即散乱、破坏。这一切都是针对未来沙门义无法生起而说的。“如腐尸焦木般消亡”,是指那样的人,如同前面所说的腐尸或焦木一般,对任何人都毫无用处,由于从两方面都退失,便这样灭去。如此,通过显示‘即使身语未曾违犯,但若不净化内心,也会这样灭去,更何况已经违犯的无德之人’,揭示了无德者的过患——他们将堕入苦处。大师为使众生远离,而说了“袈裟绕颈”等两首偈颂,其义如前所释。显示巴利原文
Gāthāsu gihibhogāti kāmasukhasambhogato. Parihīnoti jīno. Sāmaññatthanti paṭivedhabāhusaccañceva pariyattibāhusaccañca. Tādiso hi asutaṃ sotuṃ sutaṃ pariyodāpetuṃ na sakkoti alasabhāvato. Duṭṭhu bhagoti dubbhago, alakkhiko kāḷakaṇṇipuriso. Paridhaṃsamānoti vinassamāno. Pakiretīti vikireti viddhaṃseti. Sabbametaṃ bhāvino sāmaññatthassa anuppādanameva sandhāya vuttaṃ. Chavālātaṃva nassatīti so tādiso puggalo yathāvuttaṃ chavālātaṃ viya kassaci anupayujjamāno eva nassati ubhato paribhaṭṭhabhāvato. Evaṃ ‘‘kāyavācāhi akatavītikkamopi cittaṃ avisodhento nassati, pageva katavītikkamo dussīlo’’ti tassa apāyadukkhabhāgibhāvadassanena dussīle ādīnavaṃ dassetvā tato satte vivecetukāmo ‘‘kāsāvakaṇṭhā’’tiādinā gāthādvayamāha. Tassattho heṭṭhā vutto eva.
《僧伽帝角经》的注疏显示巴利原文
3. Saṅghāṭikaṇṇasuttavaṇṇanā
92 第三部经中,“僧伽梨角”指袈裟的边缘。“抓住”指拉住、触碰。若是“就这样跟随、追随着他”,意思是:就会跟在他后面,紧追不舍。所要说明的是:“比丘们,这就像有比丘用手抓住我所披着的善逝大衣一角,这样跟随着我,以这种方式亲近我而住。”“将足置于足”是指:在我行走时,我刚从落脚处抬脚,他便紧接着把脚放在我踩过的地方。这两者都表明:“他希望在行住坐卧一切时中都不离开我,始终在我身边。”然而,如果那位比丘不实践我所教导的修行之道,那么他实际上离我很远,我也离他很远。藉此,世尊指出:以肉眼看见如来、与如来色身共住,并无意义;唯有以慧眼见到法、与法身共住,才是关键。因此,世尊说:“比丘们,若比丘不看见法,那么不看见法的人也就不看见我。”这里的“法”,指的是九种出世间法。由于内心被贪欲等过失所染污的人无法见到法,所以他不看见法,也就不看见法身了。如经文所说:显示巴利原文
92. Tatiye saṅghāṭikaṇṇeti cīvarakoṭiyaṃ. Gahetvāti parāmasitvā. Anubandho assāti anugato bhaveyya. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ‘‘bhikkhave, idhekacco bhikkhu attano hatthena mayā pārutassa sugatamahācīvarassa kaṇṇe parāmasanto viya maṃ anugaccheyya, evaṃ mayhaṃ āsannataro hutvā vihareyyā’’ti. Pāde pādaṃ nikkhipantoti gacchantassa mama pāde pādaṃ nikkhittaṭṭhāne pāduddhāraṇānantaraṃ attano pādaṃ nikkhipanto. Ubhayenāpi ‘‘ṭhānagamanādīsu avijahanto sabbakālaṃ mayhaṃ samīpe eva vihareyya cepī’’ti dasseti. So ārakāva mayhaṃ, ahañca tassāti so bhikkhu mayā vuttaṃ paṭipadaṃ apūrento mama dūreyeva, ahañca tassa dūreyeva. Etena maṃsacakkhunā tathāgatadassanaṃ rūpakāyasamodhānañca akāraṇaṃ, ñāṇacakkhunāva dassanaṃ dhammakāyasamodhānameva ca pamāṇanti dasseti. Tenevāha ‘‘dhammañhi so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu na passati, dhammaṃ apassanto na maṃ passatī’’ti. Tattha dhammo nāma navavidho lokuttaradhammo. So ca abhijjhādīhi dūsitacittena na sakkā passituṃ, tasmā dhammassa adassanato dhammakāyañca na passatīti. Tathā hi vuttaṃ –
“婆迦梨,你看这个腐烂发臭的身体有何意义?婆迦梨,以见法为见我,以见我为见法。”(《相应部》3.87)显示巴利原文
‘‘Kiṃ te, vakkali, iminā pūtikāyena diṭṭhena? Yo kho, vakkali, dhammaṃ passati so maṃ passati; yo maṃ passati, so dhammaṃ passatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.87).
“是法身,是梵身”(《中部·根本五十经》1.203;《无碍解道》3.5)等。显示巴利原文
‘‘Dhammabhūto brahmabhūto’’ti (ma. ni. 1.203; paṭi. ma. 3.5) ca.
“法身即是,梵身即是”(《长部》3.118)等。显示巴利原文
‘‘Dhammakāyo itipi, brahmakāyo itipī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.118) ca ādi.
“百由旬”是指在百由旬的范围,意为百由旬的顶端。其余的内容,应当反过来、依照与前述相反的方式去理解。而他由于证得了圣道,应被视为已成就无贪等状态。显示巴利原文
Yojanasateti yojanasate padese, yojanasatamatthaketi attho. Sesaṃ vuttavipariyāyena veditabbaṃ. Ariyamaggādhigamavasena cassa anabhijjhāluādibhāvo daṭṭhabbo.
在偈颂中,“大欲者”:因对欲乐强烈贪著,故称大欲者。“有恼害者”:因心生邪思维而对众生怀有瞋恨,又因大欲而不得所求,故成为有恼害者。“随贪逐流者”:如同成为名为“贪欲”的渴爱的奴仆,随顺其而行。“未寂灭者”:因被贪等烦恼的炽燃所压倒,故称未寂灭者。“贪婪者”:因对色等境界期盼执取,故称贪婪者。请看,差距何其遥远:对于无贪欲者、已寂灭者、离贪者、正自觉者,即使地理位置上近在咫尺,然而那大欲、有恼害、随贪逐流、未寂灭、贪婪的愚痴凡夫,却从法性上与正自觉者相隔甚远。请看那种遥远,甚至难以言喻——这便是其含义。正如所说:显示巴利原文
Gāthāsu mahicchoti kāmesu tibbasārāgatāya mahāiccho. Vighātavāti paduṭṭhamanasaṅkappatāya sattesu āghātavasena mahicchatāya icchitālābhena ca vighātavā. Ejānugoti ejāsaṅkhātāya taṇhāya dāso viya hutvā taṃ anugacchanto. Rāgādikilesapariḷāhābhibhavena anibbuto. Rūpādivisayānaṃ abhikaṅkhanena giddho. Passa yāvañca ārakāti anejassa nibbutassa vītagedhassa sammāsambuddhassa okāsavasena samīpepi samāno mahiccho vighātavā ejānugo anibbuto giddho bālaputhujjano dhammasabhāvato yattakaṃ dūre, tassa so dūrabhāvo passa, vattumpi na sukaranti attho. Vuttañhetaṃ –
“天空是遥远的,大地也是遥远的,”
据说,大海的彼岸同样也是远的;
因此,人们说,比这些还要遥远得多。
即是善者之法、非善者之法,以及国王(即非善者之法)。”(《增支部》4.47;《本生经》2.21.414)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Nabhañca dūre pathavī ca dūre, Pāraṃ samuddassa tathāhu dūre; Tato have dūrataraṃ vadanti, Satañca dhammo asatañca rājā’’ti. (a. ni. 4.47; jā. 2.21.414);
「胜知了法」:在前分阶段,以所知遍知、审度遍知,如理证知、了知四圣谛法。「了知了法」:在后分阶段,依道智以遍知等方式,于其所限范围内,了知此同法。「为智者」:因证悟与多闻而称为智者。「如无风处的湖」:犹如无风处的湖,他无贪欲、远离烦恼的动摇,寂然而止。正如湖在无风处不被风扰动,平静安住,同样,这位烦恼完全止息、远离烦恼动摇的人,依阿拉汉果定而止息,于一切时本性寂静。「无贪欲者」:那具有无贪欲等本性的阿拉汉,对具有无贪欲等本性的正自觉者而言,纵使地理位置遥远,从法性上看则非遥远,即在近处。显示巴利原文
Dhammamabhiññāyāti catusaccadhammaṃ abhiññāya aññāya ñātatīraṇapariññāhi yathārahaṃ pubbabhāge jānitvā. Dhammamaññāyāti tameva dhammaṃ aparabhāge maggañāṇena pariññādivasena yathāmariyādaṃ jānitvā. Paṇḍitoti paṭivedhabāhusaccena paṇḍito. Rahadova nivāte cāti nivātaṭṭhāne rahado viya anejo kilesacalanarahito upasammati, yathā so rahado nivātaṭṭhāne vātena anabbhāhato sannisinnova hoti, evaṃ ayampi sabbathāpi paṭippassaddhakileso kilesacalanarahito arahattaphalasamādhinā vūpasammati, sabbakālaṃ upasantasabhāvova hoti. Anejoti so evaṃ anejādisabhāvo arahā anejādisabhāvassa sammāsambuddhassa okāsato dūrepi samāno dhammasabhāvato adūre santike evāti.
第四《火经》注释显示巴利原文
4. Aggisuttavaṇṇanā
93 在第四经中,「火」是指燃烧的意思;贪本身即是火,所以称为「贪火」。因为贪生起时,会燃烧、烧灼有情,故称为「火」。其余二者(嗔与痴)也是同样的道理。其中,就像火依靠任何燃料生起,便烧毁那燃料,并产生强烈热恼一样,这些贪等也是如此:它们在哪个相续中自身生起,就烧毁那个相续,产生强烈且难以熄灭的热恼。其中,因贪的热恼而内心备受煎熬、因求不得苦而死的有情,其数量无法计算。这是贪的燃烧性质。嗔的燃烧,特别以「心恼怒的天人」为例;痴的燃烧,以「游戏放逸的天人」为例。因为那些天人由于痴而失去正念,沉浸于游戏而错过进食时间,导致死亡。这是贪等在此生中的燃烧情形。至于来世的燃烧,则是透过驱使众生投生于地狱等处,更为恐怖且难以忍受。这个道理应当藉由燃烧的法门来阐明。显示巴利原文
93. Catutthe anudahanaṭṭhena aggi, rāgo eva aggi rāgaggi. Rāgo hi uppajjamāno satte anudahati jhāpeti, tasmā ‘‘aggī’’ti vuccati. Itaresupi dvīsu eseva nayo. Tattha yathā aggi yadeva indhanaṃ nissāya uppajjati, taṃ nidahati, mahāpariḷāho ca hoti, evamimepi rāgādayo yasmiṃ santāne sayaṃ uppannā, taṃ nidahanti, mahāpariḷāhā ca honti dunnibbāpayā. Tesu rāgapariḷāhena santattahadayānaṃ icchitālābhadukkhena maraṇappattānaṃ sattānaṃ pamāṇaṃ natthi. Ayaṃ tāva rāgassa anudahanatā. Dosassa pana anudahanatāya visesato manopadosikā devā, mohassa anudahanatāya khiḍḍāpadosikā devā ca nidassanaṃ. Mohavasena hi tesaṃ satisammoso hoti, tasmā khiḍḍāvasena āhāravelaṃ ativattentā kālaṃ karonti. Ayaṃ tāva rāgādīnaṃ diṭṭhadhammiko anudahanabhāvo. Samparāyiko pana nirayādīsu nibbattāpanavasena ghorataro duradhivāso ca. Ayañca attho ādittapariyāyena vibhāvetabbo.
偈颂中,「于诸欲贪著」是指对于所依的物质欲望,以势必堕落的方式,陷入痴迷、愚钝、放逸和邪行的人。「嗔害」与「燃烧」相连,意即嗔害之心在燃烧。「对于杀人者」这句是关于嗔火的部分。「于圣法不善巧」是指那些于蕴、处等法,完全不曾通过诵习、遍问与作意而善巧于圣法的人。他们被痴所征服,特别被称为「极大痴迷」者。「不知这些火」是指不知道「这些贪火等在此生和来世都会燃烧」,因此没有通过遍知通达和断除通达而彻知。「喜身见」是指对于身见——即五取蕴——以渴爱、邪见、我慢与欢喜而取乐。「增长」是指透过反复生起而使它们增长、累积。「地狱」指八大地狱、十六种近边地狱等一切地狱。「傍生之趣」即畜生道。「阿修罗」指阿修罗身和饿鬼趣,这些也都会增长——此为句子的连接。显示巴利原文
Gāthāsu kāmesu mucchiteti vatthukāmesu pātabyatāvasena mucchaṃ bālyaṃ pamādaṃ micchācāraṃ āpanne. Byāpanneti byāpannacitte dahatīti sambandho. Nare pāṇātipātinoti idaṃ dosaggissa. Ariyadhamme akovideti ye khandhāyatanādīsu sabbena sabbaṃ uggahaparipucchāya manasikārarahitā ariyadhammassa akusalā, te sammohena abhibhūtā visesena sammūḷhā nāmāti vuttā. Ete aggī ajānantāti ‘‘ete rāgaggiādayo idha ceva samparāye ca anudahantī’’ti ajānanttāā pariññābhisamayavasena pahānābhisamayavasena ca appaṭivijjhantā. Sakkāyābhiratāti sakkāye upādānakkhandhapañcake taṇhādiṭṭhimānanandanābhiratā. Vaḍḍhayantīti punappunaṃ uppajjanena vaḍḍhayanti ācinanti. Nirayanti aṭṭhavidhaṃ mahānirayaṃ, soḷasavidhaṃ ussadanirayanti sabbampi nirayaṃ. Tiracchānañca yoniyoti tiracchānayoniyo ca. Asuranti asurakāyaṃ pettivisayañca vaḍḍhayantīti sambandho.
到此,透过指出贪火等在此生与来世的燃烧性质,显示了轮回。现在,为了透过熄灭它们而显示还灭,故说「于日夜……」等。此处「具足」是指透过修习精进而具足。于何处具足?于正自觉者的教法中。这句话显示,在其他教法中并无熄灭贪火等方法。的确,为了简要开示那种不共外道的熄灭方法——不净业处,而说:显示巴利原文
Ettāvatā rāgaggiādīnaṃ idha ceva samparāye ca anudahanabhāvadassanamukhena vaṭṭaṃ dassetvā idāni nesaṃ nibbāpanena vivaṭṭaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ye ca rattindivā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yuttāti bhāvanānuyogavasena yuttā. Kattha? Sammāsambuddhasāsane. Tena aññasāsane rāgaggiādīnaṃ nibbāpanābhāvaṃ dasseti. Tathā hi anaññasādhāraṇaṃ tesaṃ nibbāpanavidhiṃ asubhakammaṭṭhānaṃ saṅkhepeneva dassento –
常修不净想者,能熄灭贪火;
最胜之人,则以慈心熄灭嗔火;
以通达之慧,熄灭痴火。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Te nibbāpenti rāgaggiṃ, niccaṃ asubhasaññino; Dosaggiṃ pana mettāya, nibbāpenti naruttamā; Mohaggiṃ pana paññāya, yāyaṃ nibbedhagāminī’’ti. –
注疏中说:其中,“不净想者”是指依三十二身分及膨胀相等修习不净观,从而具有不净想的人。“慈心”是指如经中所说“以慈俱行之心遍满一方而安住”的慈心修习。于此应了知:以不净禅那为基,借由所生起的不来道,能熄灭贪火与嗔火。“智慧”是指与观智相应的道智,因此说“那能带来通达”,因为这种智慧能穿透烦恼蕴而运作。“完全般涅槃”是指:以阿拉汉道完全熄灭贪火等烦恼之后,安住于有余涅槃界;因智慧增上而成为贤善者;因先前以正勤彻底断除懈怠;因进入果等至而无有疲倦;日夜不懈;在最后之心灭尽时,于无余涅槃界完全般涅槃。如是,彻底而无余地超越了轮回之苦。显示巴利原文
Āha . Tattha asubhasaññinoti dvattiṃsākāravasena ceva uddhumātakādivasena ca asubhabhāvanānuyogena asubhasaññino. Mettāyāti ‘‘so mettāsahagatena cetasā ekaṃ disaṃ pharitvā viharatī’’ti (a. ni. 3.64, 66) vuttāya mettābhāvanāya. Ettha ca asubhajjhānañca pādakaṃ katvā nibbattitaanāgāmimaggena rāgaggidosaggīnaṃ nibbāpanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Paññāyāti vipassanāpaññāsahitāya maggapaññāya. Tenevāha ‘‘yāyaṃ nibbedhagāminī’’ti. Sā hi kilesakkhandhaṃ vinivijjhantī gacchati pavattatīti nibbedhagāminīti vuccati. Asesaṃ parinibbantīti arahattamaggena asesaṃ rāgaggiādiṃ nibbāpetvā saupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā ṭhitā paññāvepullappattiyā nipakā pubbeva sammappadhānena sabbaso kosajjassa suppahīnattā phalasamāpattisamāpajjanena akilāsubhāvena ca rattindivamatanditā carimakacittanirodhena anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā asesaṃ parinibbanti. Tato ca asesaṃ nissesaṃ vaṭṭadukkhaṃ accaguṃ atikkamaṃsu.
如是,在显示了以无余涅槃而寂灭那些熄灭贪火等烦恼者之后,又以所证得的功德作赞叹而说出结尾偈颂。其中,“圣见者”:因涅槃是佛陀等圣者所应见的,或因远离烦恼而称为圣的涅槃;又或指已观见四圣谛者,故称圣见者。“达吠陀者”:“吠陀”指道智;具此智者,或依此智到达轮回之尽者,称达吠陀者。“正确了知”:以正智如实了知一切应知,如善等法及蕴等。其余如前所说。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ ye rāgaggiādike nibbāpenti, tesaṃ anupādisesanibbānena nibbutiṃ dassetvā idāni paṭividdhaguṇehi thomento osānagāthamāha. Tattha ariyaddasāti ariyehi buddhādīhi passitabbaṃ kilesehi vā ārakattā ariyaṃ nibbānaṃ, ariyaṃ catusaccameva vā diṭṭhavantoti ariyaddasā. Vedassa maggañāṇassa, tena vā vedena saṃsārassa pariyosānaṃ gatāti vedaguno. Sammadaññāyāti sammadeva sabbaṃ ājānitabbaṃ kusalādiṃ khandhādiñca jānitvā. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
5. 审察经注释显示巴利原文
5. Upaparikkhasuttavaṇṇanā
94 94. 第五部经中:“如是如是”指以此或以彼方式。“应审察”指应探究、衡量或思察。“当……审察之时”指当那位比丘如此审察时。“外部的识无散乱、无分散”:对于外部的色等所缘,因无有散乱生起,故识无散乱,安住于定;由此亦无分散。此段义涵:诸比丘,当已着手修观的比丘以种种方式审察、思察诸行时,他先前以取定相的方式把握止的征象,而后恭敬地、无间断地让思察智生起。在此过程中,他的修观心,于其业处,不应于外部色等所缘生起散乱,也不应因精进过猛而滑向掉举。比丘即应以种种方式审察、衡量。“内不滞著”:当精进力过弱,而定力过强,懈怠占优势时,心便向内收缩,停滞于内在的、名为“内部行处”的业处所缘,此即“滞著”。然而,若以平等精进策励,心则不滞著,而步入修行轨道。于其审察时,显示巴利原文
94. Pañcame tathā tathāti tena tena pakārena. Upaparikkheyyāti vīmaṃseyya parituleyya sammaseyya vā. Yathā yathāssa upaparikkhatoti yathā yathā assa bhikkhuno upaparikkhantassa. Bahiddhācassa viññāṇaṃ avikkhittaṃ avisaṭanti bahiddhā rūpādiārammaṇe uppajjanakavikkhepābhāvato avikkhittaṃ samāhitaṃ, tato eva avisaṭaṃ siyā . Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – bhikkhave, yena yena pakārena imassa āraddhavipassakassa bhikkhuno upaparikkhato saṅkhāre sammasantassa pubbe samāhitākārasallakkhaṇavasena samathanimittaṃ gahetvā sakkaccaṃ nirantaraṃ sammasanañāṇaṃ pavattentassa attano vipassanācittaṃ kammaṭṭhānato bahiddhā rūpādiārammaṇe uppajjanakaṃ na siyā, accāraddhavīriyatāya uddhaccapakkhiyaṃ na siyā, tena tena pakārena bhikkhu upaparikkheyya parituleyyāti. Ajjhattaṃ asaṇṭhitanti yasmā vīriye mandaṃ vahante samādhissa balavabhāvato kosajjābhibhavena ajjhattaṃ gocarajjhattasaṅkhāte kammaṭṭhānārammaṇe saṅkocavasena ṭhitattā saṇṭhitaṃ nāma hoti, vīriyasamatāya pana yojitāya asaṇṭhitaṃ hoti vīthiṃ paṭipannaṃ. Tasmā yathā yathāssa upaparikkhato viññāṇaṃ ajjhattaṃ asaṇṭhitaṃ assa, vīthipaṭipannaṃ siyā, tathā tathā upaparikkheyya. Anupādāya na paritasseyyāti yathā yathāssa upaparikkhato ‘‘etaṃ mama, eso me attā’’ti taṇhādiṭṭhiggāhavasena rūpādīsu kañci saṅkhāraṃ aggahetvā tato eva taṇhādiṭṭhiggāhavasena na paritasseyya, tathā tathā upaparikkheyyāti sambandho. Kathaṃ pana upaparikkhato tividhampetaṃ siyāti? Uddhaccapakkhiye kosajjapakkhiye ca dhamme vajjento vīriyasamataṃ yojetvā pubbeva vipassanupakkilesehi cittaṃ visodhetvā yathā sammadeva vipassanāñāṇaṃ vipassanāvīthiṃ paṭipajjati, tathā sammasato.
如此,世尊为一位以四圣谛为业处的比丘,开示了在次第修习道智见清净的过程中,如何净化那颗被过猛精进、过缓精进与观的随烦恼所染污的心。现在,为开示以此方式净化观智后,便能迅速将观与道结合,从而超越一切轮回之苦,故说此语。接下来的经文,其义理与先前所说一致。其中‘未来,生、老死的苦、集、生起便不再产生’的意思是:如此将观与道结合后,依修道次第,以最上之道无余地断尽烦恼,于未来际,凡此称为生与老死的一切轮回之苦的‘集’与‘生起’,便不再出现。或者也可以理解为:被称为‘生’之苦的集,与被称为‘老死’之苦的生起,皆不再出现。显示巴利原文
Iti bhagavā catusaccakammaṭṭhānikassa bhikkhuno anukkamena paṭipadāñāṇadassanavisuddhiyā āraddhāya accāraddhavīriyaatisithilavīriyavipassanupakkilesehi cittassa visodhanūpāyaṃ dassetvā idāni tathā visodhite vipassanāñāṇe na cirasseva vipassanaṃ maggena ghaṭetvā sakalavaṭṭadukkhasamatikkamāya saṃvattantīti dassento ‘‘bahiddhā, bhikkhave, viññāṇe’’tiādimāha, taṃ vuttanayameva. Yaṃ pana vuttaṃ – ‘‘āyatiṃ jātijarāmaraṇadukkhasamudayasambhavo na hotī’’ti, tassattho – evaṃ vipassanaṃ maggena ghaṭetvā maggapaṭipāṭiyā aggamaggena anavasesato kilesesu khīṇesu āyatiṃ anāgate jātijarāmaraṇasakalavaṭṭadukkhasamudayasaṅkhāto sambhavo uppādo ca na hoti, jātisaṅkhāto vā dukkhasamudayo jarāmaraṇasaṅkhāto dukkhasambhavo ca na hoti.
偈颂中,‘断七结者’是指:由于断除了贪爱结、邪见结、慢结、嗔恚结、无明结、烦恼结、恶行结这七种结,故称为断七结者。但也有人主张:‘七种随眠即是七结。’‘已断导向者’是指:已切断‘有’之导向的人。‘生之轮回已灭尽’是指:此轮回因一再出生,而以生为其因,故称‘生之轮回’。此人因‘有’的导向已被切断,故其轮回便已灭尽、彻底终结,正因如此,他不再有后有。显示巴利原文
Gāthāyaṃ sattasaṅgappahīnassāti taṇhāsaṅgo, diṭṭhisaṅgo, mānasaṅgo, kodhasaṅgo, avijjāsaṅgo, kilesasaṅgo, duccaritasaṅgoti imesaṃ sattannaṃ saṅgānaṃ pahīnattā sattasaṅgappahīnassa. Keci pana ‘‘sattānusayā eva satta saṅgā’’ti vadanti. Netticchinnassāti chinnabhavanettikassa . Vikkhīṇo jātisaṃsāroti punappunaṃ jāyanavasena pavattiyā jātihetukattā ca jātibhūto saṃsāroti jātisaṃsāro, so bhavanettiyā chinnattā vikkhīṇo parikkhīṇo, tato eva natthi tassa punabbhavoti.
6. 欲再生经注释显示巴利原文
6. Kāmūpapattisuttavaṇṇanā
95 第六经中,‘欲再生’指获得诸欲或享受诸欲。‘现前欲者’指系缚于恒常之欲、恒常之所缘者,如同人类那样。人类确实于恒常的对象上起支配作用。他们对所系缚的对象心生恋着,即便花费百千钱财,也要将那女子娶来,享受恒常的欲乐。一部分天神也是如此。从四大王天开始,欲界的四类天人居士皆于恒常的对象上起支配作用。此处可以五髻的事例作为例证。同样地,除地狱众生外,其余一部分恶趣众生也都在恒常的对象上起支配作用。因为鱼执著于自己的母鱼,龟执著于自己的母龟,一切畜生、饿鬼、堕恶道者莫不如此。因此,除了地狱众生,从其余恶趣众生乃至兜率天,这些有情都称为‘现前欲者’。‘化乐天’指那些乐于自己所化现之物者,故称化乐天。他们不论想要什么样的容貌,青色、黄色等,便能化现出那样的容貌而享乐,如同在尊者阿那律面前出现的可爱身天神一般。‘他化自在天’指那些于他人所化现的诸欲中起支配作用、自在享受者。显示巴利原文
95. Chaṭṭhe kāmūpapattiyoti kāmapaṭilābhā kāmapaṭisevanā vā. Paccupaṭṭhitakāmāti nibaddhakāmā nibaddhārammaṇā yathā taṃ manussā. Manussā hi nibaddhavatthusmiṃ vasaṃ vattenti. Yattha paṭibaddhacittā honti, satampi sahassampi datvā tameva mātugāmaṃ ānetvā nibaddhabhogaṃ bhuñjanti. Ekacce ca devā. Cātumahārājikato paṭṭhāya hi catudevalokavāsino nibaddhavatthusmiṃyeva vasaṃ vattenti. Pañcasikhavatthu cettha nidassanaṃ. Tathā ekacce āpāyike nerayike ṭhapetvā sesaapāyasattāpi nibaddhavatthusmiṃyeva vasaṃ vattenti. Macchā hi attano macchiyā, kacchapo kacchapiyāti evaṃ sabbepi tiracchānā petā vinipātikā ca. Tasmā nerayike ṭhapetvā sesaapāyasatte upādāya yāva tusitakāyā ime sattā paccupaṭṭhitakāmā nāma, nimmānaratinoti sayaṃ nimmite nimmāne rati etesanti nimmānaratino. Te hi nīlapītādivasena yādisaṃ yādisaṃ rūpaṃ icchanti, tādisaṃ tādisaṃ nimminitvā ramanti āyasmato anuruddhassa purato manāpakāyikā devatā viya. Paranimmitavasavattinoti parehi nimmite kāme vasaṃ vattentīti paranimmitavasavattino. Tesañhi manaṃ ñatvā pare yathārucitaṃ kāmabhogaṃ nimminanti, te tattha vasaṃ vattenti. Kathaṃ te parassa manaṃ jānantīti? Pakatisevanāvasena. Yathā hi kusalo sūdo rañño bhuñjantassa yaṃ yaṃ ruccati, taṃ taṃ jānāti, evaṃ pakatiyā abhirucitārammaṇaṃ ñatvā tādiseyeva nimminanti, te tattha vasaṃ vattenti, methunasevanādivasena kāme paribhuñjanti. Keci pana ‘‘hasitamattena olokitamattena āliṅgitamattena hatthaggahaṇamattena ca tesaṃ kāmakiccaṃ ijjhatī’’ti vadanti, taṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘etaṃ pana natthī’’ti paṭikkhittaṃ. Na hi kāyena aphusantassa phoṭṭhabbaṃ kāmakiccaṃ sādheti. Channampi kāmāvacaradevānaṃ kāmā pākatikā eva. Vuttañhetaṃ –
此六种欲界居处,圆满具足一切欲乐;
总为一类而言,其寿量有多长?
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Cha ete kāmāvacarā, sabbakāmasamiddhino; Sabbesaṃ ekasaṅkhātaṃ, āyu bhavati kittaka’’nti. (vibha. 1023);
在偈颂中,「以及其余」(ye caññe)指:除如上所说的诸天之外,其余的欲乐者——包括人类及一部分往生恶趣者,所有这些。「此状与异状」(itthabhāvaññathābhāvaṃ)的意思是:依所获得的身(此状),以及称为再生他有的另一状态(异状)——这两类差别的轮回,他们无法超越、不能跨过。「应弃舍一切欲」(sabbe pariccaje kāme)是说:对于天等种种欲,无论是依止欲还是烦恼欲,皆应弃舍。当以不还道断除烦恼欲时,即名为舍离了依止欲。「耽著于可爱可乐」(piyarūpasātagadhitaṃ)的意思是:对于可爱形态的色等事物,以乐受之味而耽著、贪染。「断除难渡之流」(chetvā sotaṃ duraccayaṃ)是说:以阿拉汉道,将他人难以渡越的渴爱之流彻底断除。其余义同前释。显示巴利原文
Gāthāsu ye caññeti ye yathāvuttadevehi aññe ca kāmabhogino manussā ceva ekacce apāyūpagā ca sabbe te. Itthabhāvaññathābhāvanti imaṃ yathāpaṭiladdhattabhāvañceva, upapattibhavantarasaṅkhātaṃ ito aññathābhāvañcāti dvippabhedaṃ saṃsāraṃ nātivattare na atikkamanti. Sabbe pariccaje kāmeti dibbādibhede sabbepi kāme vatthukāme ca kilesakāme ca pariccajeyya. Kilesakāme anāgāmimaggena pajahantoyeva hi vatthukāme pariccajati nāma. Piyarūpasātagadhitanti piyarūpesu rūpādīsu sukhavedanassādena gadhitaṃ giddhaṃ. Chetvā sotaṃ duraccayanti aññehi duraccayaṃ duratikkamaṃ taṇhāsotaṃ arahattamaggena samucchinditvā. Sesaṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayamevāti.
第七 欲轭经注疏显示巴利原文
7. Kāmayogasuttavaṇṇanā
96 第七经中,“欲轭相应者”:对五欲功德的贪爱,名为欲轭;被此所系缚者,称为欲轭相应者,这是尚未断尽欲贪者的同义语。对色界、无色界有的欲贪,名为有轭;同样,对禅那的陶醉以及与常见相伴的贪爱,亦属有轭。与此相应者,名为“有轭相应者”,意为未断除有贪者。“来者”:即使住于梵天界者,也会由结生而有来此人界的习性,因此佛陀说“来至此性”。所谓“此性”,指人的身躯,具有来此的法性,意谓有再生于人间的习性。当然,在此处,欲轭是来至此性的原因。然而,为了显示“欲轭相应者也必定是有轭相应者”,故将二者合说:“诸比丘,欲轭相应者,即有轭相应者。”显示巴利原文
96. Sattame kāmayogayuttoti pañcakāmaguṇiko rāgo kāmayogo, tena yutto kāmayogayutto, asamucchinnakāmarāgassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Rūpārūpabhavesu chandarāgo bhavayogo, tathā jhānanikanti sassatadiṭṭhisahagato ca rāgo, tena yutto bhavayogayutto, appahīnabhavarāgoti attho. Āgāmīti brahmaloke ṭhitopi paṭisandhiggahaṇavasena imaṃ manussalokaṃ āgamanasīlo. Tenevāha ‘‘āgantā itthatta’’nti. Manussattabhāvasaṅkhātaṃ itthabhāvaṃ āgamanadhammo , manussesu upapajjanasīloti attho. Kāmañcettha kāmayogo itthattaṃ āgamanassa kāraṇaṃ. Yo pana kāmayogayutto, so ekantena bhavayogayuttopi hotīti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘kāmayogayutto, bhikkhave, bhavayogayutto’’ti ubhayampi ekajjhaṃ katvā vuttaṃ.
「已离欲轭者」:在此,即使不净禅那也是离欲轭,但以它为基而证得的不来道,才绝对是离欲轭,因此,安住于第三道果的圣者被称为「已离欲轭者」。然而,由于对色界、无色界有的欲贪并未被不来道所断除,所以他因未断有轭而被称为「与有轭相应者」。「不来者」:由于不再以结生的方式来到欲界,故称不来者。正是由于离欲轭,连同无余断除五下分结,从而成就了内在结缚的断除,不再来至此界,在那里般涅槃,成为不还法者。至于那位已无余断除有轭的人,由于无明轭等残余烦恼与它同处一体的关系,也一并被断除了,因此,他是有结已尽者,被称为「阿拉汉、漏尽者」。由此而说:「诸比丘,已离欲轭、已离有轭者,是阿拉汉、漏尽者。」在此应知:说已离欲轭的不来者,如同第四禅舍离了乐、苦、喜与忧,也如同第三道彻底灭尽了见、疑、戒禁取结,是为了赞叹第四道而说。第一句摄尽了一切凡夫以及入流者、一来者;第二句则摄尽了一切不来者;第三句摄尽了阿拉汉。如此,以阿拉汉果为顶点,结束了说法。显示巴利原文
Kāmayogavisaṃyuttoti ettha asubhajjhānampi kāmayogavisaṃyogo, taṃ pādakaṃ katvā adhigato anāgāmimaggo ekanteneva kāmayogavisaṃyogo nāma, tasmā tatiyamaggaphale ṭhito ariyapuggalo ‘‘kāmayogavisaṃyutto’’ti vutto. Yasmā pana rūpārūpabhavesu chandarāgo anāgāmimaggena na pahīyati, tasmā so appahīnabhavayogattā ‘‘bhavayogayutto’’ti vutto. Anāgāmīti kāmalokaṃ paṭisandhiggahaṇavasena anāgamanato anāgāmī. Kāmayogavisaṃyogavaseneva hi saddhiṃ anavasesaorambhāgiyasaṃyojanasamugghātena ajjhattasaṃyojanābhāvasiddhito itthattaṃ anāgantvā hoti, tattha parinibbāyī anāvattidhammo. Yassa pana anavasesaṃ bhavayogo pahīno, tassa avijjāyogādiavasiṭṭhakilesāpi tadekaṭṭhabhāvato pahīnā eva hontīti , so parikkhīṇabhavasaṃyojano ‘‘arahaṃ khīṇāsavo’’ti vuccati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘kāmayogavisaṃyutto, bhikkhave, bhavayogavisaṃyutto arahaṃ hoti khīṇāsavo’’ti. Ettha ca kāmayogavisaṃyogo anāgāmī catutthajjhānassa sukhadukkhasomanassadomanassappahānaṃ viya, tatiyamaggassa diṭṭhivicikicchāsīlabbataparāmāsasaṃyojanaparikkhayo viya ca catutthamaggassa vaṇṇabhaṇanatthaṃ vuttoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Paṭhamapadena sotāpannasakadāgāmīhi saddhiṃ sabbo puthujjano gahito, dutiyapadena pana sabbo anāgāmī, tatiyapadena arahāti arahattanikūṭena desanaṃ niṭṭhāpesi.
在偈颂中,「ubhayaṃ」意为以两者,即与欲轭、与有轭相应。「众生流转轮回」:凡夫、入流者、一来者,这三种众生由于未断除欲轭与有轭,故流转轮回。正是因此,他们成为走向生与死者。在此,三种入流者(一种子者、家家者、七返有者)中,最钝根的七返有者不会再生第八有,只是在自己限定的生数内流转,其余两类也是如此。一来者中,那些在此世证得一来道、生于天界、再回至此世受生的人,也只是依自己限定的生数流转。然而,其他那些一来者,若不以混杂的方式,而只是在各处的天界或人界分别受生,他们为了证得更高的道,直到诸根成熟,会一再地出生,确实仍在流转。至于凡夫,就更不用说了,因为一切有结完全未断。因此说:显示巴利原文
Gāthāsu ubhayanti ubhayena, kāmayogena, bhavayogena ca saṃyuttāti attho. Sattā gacchanti saṃsāranti puthujjanā sotāpannā sakadāgāminoti ime tividhā sattā kāmayogabhavayogānaṃ appahīnattā gacchanti saṃsāranti. Tato eva jātimaraṇagāmino honti. Ettha ekabījī, kolaṃkolo, sattakkhattuparamoti tīsu sotāpannesu sabbamudu sattakkhattuparamo, so aṭṭhamaṃ bhavaṃ na nibbatteti, attano paricchinnajātivasena pana saṃsarati, tathā itarepi. Sakadāgāmīsupi yo idha sakadāgāmimaggaṃ patvā devaloke uppajjitvā puna idha nibbattati, so attano paricchinnajātivaseneva saṃsarati. Ye pana sakadāgāmino vomissakanayena vinā tattha tattha devesuyeva manussesuyeva vā nibbattanti, te uparimaggādhigamāya yāva indriyaparipākā punappunaṃ uppajjanato saṃsarantiyeva. Puthujjane pana vattabbameva natthi sabbabhavasaṃyojanānaṃ aparikkhīṇattā. Tena vuttaṃ –
为欲轭所系缚,亦为有轭所系缚;
众生流转轮回,趣向生死。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Kāmayogena saṃyuttā, bhavayogena cūbhayaṃ; Sattā gacchanti saṃsāraṃ, jātimaraṇagāmino’’ti.
“已断诸欲”:以不来道断除名为欲贪的烦恼欲。“已断疑惑者”:即已彻底断除疑惑,但这实际上是由入流道所断。然而,为了赞叹第四道才如此说。此处“已断疑惑者”实指阿拉汉。因此接着说“已尽慢与后有者”:对于他们,九种慢及未来的后有均已彻底灭尽,故称已尽慢与后有者。在此,通过提及“慢”,由于同处一体或以特相的方式,也包含了所有为第四道所断的烦恼。由于慢已尽,故说有余涅槃界;由于后有已尽,故说无余依涅槃界。其余的道理容易理解。显示巴利原文
Kāme pahantvānāti kāmarāgasaṅkhāte kilesakāme anāgāmimaggena pajahitvā. Chinnasaṃsayāti samucchinnakaṅkhā, tañca kho sotāpattimaggeneva. Vaṇṇabhaṇanatthaṃ pana catutthamaggassa evaṃ vuttaṃ. Arahanto hi idha ‘‘chinnasaṃsayā’’ti adhippetā. Tenevāha ‘‘khīṇamānapunabbhavā’’ti. Sabbaso khīṇo navavidhopi māno āyatiṃ punabbhavo ca etesanti khīṇamānapunabbhavā. Mānaggahaṇena cettha tadekaṭṭhatāya lakkhaṇavasena vā sabbo catutthamaggavajjho kileso gahitoti. Khīṇamānatāya ca saupādisesā nibbānadhātu vuttā hoti, khīṇapunabbhavatāya anupādisesā. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva.
第八 善戒经注疏显示巴利原文
8. Kalyāṇasīlasuttavaṇṇanā
97 「善戒者」:指具足善妙、殊胜、圆满之戒的人。其中,戒的圆满由两种因缘而得成就:正确洞见戒缺失的过患,以及洞见戒具足的功德。而在此处,是就完全脱离一切障碍、于一切行相中圆满的道戒与果戒,来说其善。「善法者」:指所有的菩提分法,因此,具足善的念处等菩提分法的人,称为善法者。「善慧者」:也是依道与果的慧而说为善慧。因为唯出世间之戒等诸法,才以其不动摇的自性而被称为究竟善。有些人说:依四遍净戒而说善戒,依观与道法而说善法,依道与果慧而说善慧。另有人说:唯无学者的戒、法、慧,方称为善。还有人说:入流者与一来者的道果戒,名为善戒,因此「善戒者」一词包含了入流者与一来者,他们是于戒上圆满者。不来道果法及最上道法,名为善法,因为其中的菩提分法已达修习圆满。因此,「善法者」一词包含了从第三道位起的三位圣者。因慧的作用臻于顶点,故最胜果中的慧名为善慧,因此,慧达广大的阿拉汉称为「善慧者」。如是,便将相应个体摄入。然而,这些繁琐之论有何必要?在此,「善戒」等所指即是无上道果法——这是我们认可的看法。显示巴利原文
97. Aṭṭhame kalyāṇasīloti sundarasīlo, pasatthasīlo, paripuṇṇasīlo. Tattha sīlapāripūrī dvīhi kāraṇehi hoti sammadeva sīlavipattiyā ādīnavadassanena, sīlasampattiyā ca ānisaṃsadassanena. Idha pana sabbaparibandhavippamuttassa sabbākāraparipuṇṇassa maggasīlassa phalasīlassa ca vasena kalyāṇatā veditabbā. Kalyāṇadhammoti sabbe bodhipakkhiyadhammā adhippetā, tasmā kalyāṇā satipaṭṭhānādibodhipakkhiyadhammā etassāti kalyāṇadhammo. Kalyāṇapaññoti ca maggaphalapaññāvaseneva kalyāṇapañño. Lokuttarā eva hi sīlādidhammā ekantakalyāṇā nāma akuppasabhāvattā. Keci pana ‘‘catupārisuddhisīlavasena kalyāṇasīlo, vipassanāmaggadhammavasena kalyāṇadhammo, maggaphalapaññāvasena kalyāṇapañño’’ti vadanti. Asekkhā eva te sīladhammapaññāti eke. Apare pana bhaṇanti – sotāpannasakadāgāmīnaṃ maggaphalasīlaṃ kalyāṇasīlaṃ nāma, tasmā ‘‘kalyāṇasīlo’’ti iminā sotāpanno sakadāgāmī ca gahitā honti. Te hi sīlesu paripūrakārino nāma. Anāgāmimaggaphaladhammā aggamaggadhammā ca kalyāṇadhammā nāma. Tattha hi bodhipakkhiyadhammā bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchanti. Tasmā ‘‘kalyāṇadhammo’’ti iminā tatiyamaggaṭṭhato paṭṭhāya tayo ariyā gahitā honti. Paññākiccassa matthakappattiyā aggaphale paññā kalyāṇapaññā nāma, tasmā paññāvepullappatto arahā ‘‘kalyāṇapañño’’ti vutto. Evameva puggalā gahitā hontīti. Kiṃ iminā papañcena? Aggamaggaphaladhammā idha kalyāṇasīlādayo vuttāti ayamamhākaṃ khanti. Dhammavibhāgena hi ayaṃ puggalavibhāgo, na dhammavibhāgoti.
「完全者」:此处,「完全」是指因不与任何事物相杂而远离一切有为法的涅槃,由于证得彼故,阿拉汉名为完全者。或复,由于断除与修习之圆满,以及最终无过失法之圆满,阿拉汉果即因其善的含义与无杂染的安乐性而称为「完全」;由证得此果,漏尽者名为完全者。「已住梵行者」:意指已修习道梵行住,并将其圆满终结而安住。或复,因其具足最上、至高之无学法,故称为「上人」。显示巴利原文
Kevalīti ettha kevalaṃ vuccati kenaci avomissakatāya sabbasaṅkhatavivittaṃ nibbānaṃ, tassa adhigatattā arahā kevalī. Atha vā pahānabhāvanāpāripūriyā pariyosānaanavajjadhammapāripūriyā ca kalyāṇakaṭṭhena abyāsekasukhatāya ca kevalaṃ arahattaṃ, tadadhigamena kevalī khīṇāsavo. Maggabrahmacariyavāsaṃ vasitvā pariyosāpetvā ṭhitoti vusitavā. Uttamehi aggabhūtehi vā asekkhadhammehi samannāgatattā ‘‘uttamapuriso’’ti vuccati.
「具戒者」:此处是依何种含义而说「戒」?以「戒行」的含义而说为「戒」。何为戒行?即等持;依随良善习性,使身业等保持统一而不散乱之义。或复,戒的含义是「持受」;即作为禅那等善法安立之所依,而发挥支持作用之义。因此,或取「戒行」,或取「持受」,故名之为戒。以上是依词相分析的方法来阐明戒的含义。另有一些阿阇梨以语源学的方法解释为:最上、殊胜之义即戒的含义,清凉之义即戒的含义,吉祥之义即戒的含义。此人因戒达至圆满或极为殊胜而拥有彼,故称「具戒者」,意思是依四遍净戒而戒行具足。在此,有些阿阇梨的用意在于详细阐明那最根本的戒,所以才会接着说「具足巴帝摩卡防护」等。显示巴利原文
Sīlavāti ettha kenaṭṭhena sīlaṃ? Sīlanaṭṭhena sīlaṃ. Kimidaṃ sīlanaṃ nāma? Samādhānaṃ, susīlyavasena kāyakammādīnaṃ avippakiṇṇatāti attho. Atha vā upadhāraṇaṃ, jhānādikusaladhammānaṃ patiṭṭhānavasena ādhārabhāvoti attho. Tasmā sīlati, sīletīti vā sīlaṃ. Ayaṃ tāva saddalakkhaṇanayena sīlaṭṭho. Apare pana ‘‘siraṭṭho sīlaṭṭho, sītalaṭṭho sīlaṭṭho, sivaṭṭho sīlaṭṭho’’ti niruttinayena atthaṃ vaṇṇayanti. Tayidaṃ pāripūrito atisayato vā sīlaṃ assa atthīti sīlavā, catupārisuddhisīlavasena sīlasampannoti attho. Tattha yaṃ jeṭṭhakasīlaṃ , taṃ vitthāretvā dassetuṃ ‘‘pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvuto’’tiādi vuttanti ekaccānaṃ ācariyānaṃ adhippāyo.
然而,另有一些阿阇梨说:世尊在两种场合所开示的,都是巴帝摩卡律仪。因为,唯有巴帝摩卡律仪才是真正的戒。其余者:根律仪仅是守护六根门而已;活命遍净仅是依法获得资具而已;资具依止仅是在得到资具后,省察‘这是有利益的’而后受用而已。略而言之,唯独巴帝摩卡律仪才是戒。若它遭到破坏,那人便如同被砍断头颅,不能说‘残余的肢体会保护’手足。相反,若它完好无损,就如头颅未断之人,才能使那些残余的肢体恢复正常而起到保护作用。因此,‘具戒者’其实唯指巴帝摩卡戒;为了详细说明它,才说‘具足巴帝摩卡防护’等。显示巴利原文
Aparena pana bhaṇanti – ubhayatthāpi pātimokkhasaṃvaro bhagavatā vutto. Pātimokkhasaṃvaro eva hi sīlaṃ, itaresu indriyasaṃvaro chadvārarakkhaṇamattameva, ājīvapārisuddhi dhammena paccayuppādanamattameva, paccayasannissitaṃ paṭiladdhapaccaye ‘‘idamattha’’nti paccavekkhitvā paribhuñjanamattameva. Nippariyāyena pātimokkhasaṃvarova sīlaṃ. Yassa so bhinno, so sīsacchinno puriso viya hatthapāde ‘‘sesāni rakkhissatī’’ti na vattabbo. Yassa pana so arogo, acchinnasīso viya puriso, tāni puna pākatikāni katvā rakkhituṃ sakkoti. Tasmā sīlavāti iminā pātimokkhasīlameva uddisitvā taṃ vitthāretuṃ ‘‘pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvuto’’tiādi vuttanti.
此处,「巴帝摩卡」是指学处戒。因为,若有人护持、守护它,它便能令彼人从地狱等恶趣之苦中解脱,故称巴帝摩卡。「律仪」意为防护,即不通过身业与语业去违犯。巴帝摩卡本身就是律仪,故称「巴帝摩卡律仪」;以此律仪防护自身、关闭身语恶行的人,即「具足巴帝摩卡防护」。这是在说明他稳固地立足于该戒的状态。「住」是说明他具备与戒相应的安住状态。「具足行处与行境」是说明那个既能资助基础(巴帝摩卡律仪),也能资助上层(增上勤修)的法。「于微小罪也见到怖畏」是说明他具有从巴帝摩卡戒中不退转、不毁坏的法性。「受持」是说明他对学处毫无遗漏地领受与执持。「学」是说明他正在圆满地修学。「于学处」是说明所应当修学的法。显示巴利原文
Tattha pātimokkhanti sikkhāpadasīlaṃ. Tañhi yo naṃ pāti rakkhati, taṃ mokkheti moceti āpāyikādīhi dukkhehīti pātimokkhaṃ. Saṃvaraṇaṃ saṃvaro, kāyavācāhi avītikkamo. Pātimokkhameva saṃvaro pātimokkhasaṃvaro, tena saṃvuto pihitakāyavācoti pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvuto. Idamassa tasmiṃ sīle patiṭṭhitabhāvaparidīpanaṃ. Viharatīti tadanurūpavihārasamaṅgibhāvaparidīpanaṃ. Ācāragocarasampannoti heṭṭhā pātimokkhasaṃvarassa, upari visesānuyogassa ca upakārakadhammaparidīpanaṃ. Aṇumattesu vajjesu bhayadassāvīti pātimokkhasīlato acavanadhammatāparidīpanaṃ. Samādāyāti sikkhāpadānaṃ anavasesato ādānaparidīpanaṃ. Sikkhatīti sikkhāya samaṅgibhāvaparidīpanaṃ. Sikkhāpadesūti sikkhitabbadhammaparidīpanaṃ.
另一种解释:因烦恼力量强盛,恶行易作,善行难行,故有情屡屡堕入恶趣,因此称为「堕者」,指的是凡夫。或者,因为无常,在诸有中被业力抛掷,犹如不停转动的机械,无法安住而流转,由于这种运转的习性,故称为「堕者」;或是以死亡为因,在种种众生类中不断投下自身,「堕者」是指众生的相续,或指心。能使此「堕者」从轮回之苦中解脱的,即是「巴帝摩卡」。因为,众生是透过心的解脱而得解脱的。如经中所说:‘由心清净,而得净化’,以及‘无取著,心从诸漏解脱’。又或说,以无明等为因,在轮回中堕落、迁流、辗转生起的,称为「堕」。如经云:‘那些为无明所覆、被爱结所系的众生,流转、轮回。’彼「堕者」众生,因其渴爱等三种烦恼,依此而得解脱,故称「巴帝摩卡」。对于此词,应如理解‘喉骨’等复合词那般,了知其构词方式。显示巴利原文
Aparo nayo – kilesānaṃ balavabhāvato pāpakiriyāya sukarabhāvato puññakiriyāya ca dukkarabhāvato bahukkhattuṃ apāyesu patanasīloti pātī, puthujjano. Aniccatāya vā bhavādīsu kammavegakkhitto ghaṭiyantaṃ viya anavaṭṭhānena paribbhamanato gamanasīloti pātī, maraṇavasena vā tamhi tamhi sattanikāye attabhāvassa pātanasīloti pātī, sattasantāno, cittameva vā. Taṃ pātinaṃ saṃsāradukkhato mokkhetīti pātimokkho. Cittassa hi vimokkhena satto vimutto . ‘‘Cittavodānā visujjhantī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.100) ‘‘anupādāya āsavehi cittaṃ vimutta’’nti (ma. ni. 2.206) ca vuttaṃ. Atha vā avijjādinā hetunā saṃsāre patati gacchati pavattatīti pāti. ‘‘Avijjānīvaraṇānaṃ sattānaṃ taṇhāsaṃyojanānaṃ sandhāvataṃ saṃsarata’’nti (saṃ. ni. 2.124; 5.520) hi vuttaṃ. Tassa pātino sattassa taṇhādisaṃkilesattayato mokkho etenāti pātimokkho. ‘‘Kaṇṭhekālo’’tiādīnaṃ viyassa samāsasiddhi veditabbā.
又或者,能使心坠落并堕入痛苦者,称为「堕」,此处指心。正如经中所说:“世间被心所引导,被心所牵引。”此「堕者」赖以解脱的方法,即是「巴帝摩卡」。或者,令其堕入恶趣之苦与轮回之苦者,称为「堕」,即渴爱等杂染。正如经中所说:“渴爱造作出这个人”,以及“那个以渴爱为伴侣的人”等等。能从该「堕」中解脱的,即是「巴帝摩卡」。或者,作为堕落之处所者,称为「堕」,即六内处与六外处。正如经中所说:“世间依此六处生起,并于六处建立亲昵关系。”能从名为六内处、六外处的「堕」中解脱的,即是「巴帝摩卡」。或者,有下堕、恶趣之处,称为「有堕」,指轮回本身。从此中解脱的,即是「巴帝摩卡」。又或者,因世尊统御一切世间、于法自在,故称为「主」。依此而解脱,即为「解脱」。主的解脱因其而施设,故为「主解脱」,「主解脱」即是「巴帝摩卡」。又或者,由于是一切功德生起的根本,以最殊胜义称为「主」;同时,由于具有前面所说的……显示巴利原文
Atha vā pāteti vinipāteti dukkheti pāti, cittaṃ. Vuttañhi ‘‘cittena nīyati loko, cittena parikassatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.62). Tassa pātino mokkho etenāti pātimokkho. Patati vā etena apāyadukkhe saṃsāradukkhe cāti pāti, taṇhādisaṃkileso. Vuttañhi ‘‘taṇhā janeti purisaṃ (saṃ. ni. 1.56-57), taṇhādutiyo puriso’’ti (itivu. 15, 105; cūḷani. pārāyanānugītigāthāniddesa 107) ca ādi. Tato pātito mokkhoti pātimokkho. Atha vā patati etthāti pāti, cha ajjhattikāni bāhirāni ca āyatanāni. Vuttañhi ‘‘chasu loko samuppanno, chasu kubbati santhava’’nti (saṃ. ni. 1.70). Tato chaajjhattikabāhirāyatanasaṅkhātato pātito mokkhoti pātimokkho. Atha vā pāto vinipāto assa atthīti pātī, saṃsāro. Tato mokkhoti pātimokkho. Atha vā sabbalokādhipatibhāvato dhammissaro bhagavā patīti vuccati, muccati etenāti mokkho, patino mokkho tena paññattattāti patimokkho, patimokkho eva pātimokkho. Sabbaguṇānaṃ vā mūlabhāvato uttamaṭṭhena pati ca so yathāvuttaṭṭhena mokkho cāti patimokkho, patimokkho eva pātimokkho. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘pātimokkhanti mukhametaṃ pamukhameta’’nti (mahāva. 135) vitthāro.
又或者,“pati”有种种方式之义,“ati”是表示彻底、终极的不变词。因此,「巴帝摩卡」意为:以种种方式彻底地使人解脱。因为此戒本身便能依彼分断而解脱;当它与定配合、与慧配合时,则能依镇伏断及正断,让人彻底地解脱、出离,故称「巴帝摩卡」。又或者说,它是「各别解脱」,意即从每一种、每一种应当避免的违犯过失中,各别各别地解脱出来,故名「各别解脱」,也就是「巴帝摩卡」。或者,「解脱」是指涅槃,而巴帝摩卡是那解脱的映照或缩影。巴帝摩卡戒律仪,犹如日出前的曙光,是涅槃生起的先兆,如同涅槃的倒影一般,这是基于它能随顺时机地息灭烦恼,故称为巴帝摩卡;巴帝摩卡也就是「巴帝摩卡」。或者,它是朝着解脱的方向运作、面向解脱的,所以是「向解脱」,「向解脱」就是「巴帝摩卡」。关于「巴帝摩卡」一词的意义,应当先以上述这些方式来理解。显示巴利原文
Atha vā paiti pakāre, atīti accantatthe nipāto. Tasmā pakārehi accantaṃ mokkhetīti pātimokkho. Idañhi sīlaṃ sayaṃ tadaṅgavasena, samādhisahitaṃ paññāsahitañca vikkhambhanavasena samucchedavasena ca accantaṃ mokkheti mocetīti pātimokkhaṃ. Pati pati mokkhoti vā patimokkho, tamhā tamhā vītikkamitabbadosato pati paccekaṃ mokkhoti attho. Patimokkho eva pātimokkho. Mokkhoti vā nibbānaṃ, tassa mokkhassa paṭibimbabhūtanti patimokkhaṃ. Pātimokkhasīlasaṃvaro hi sūriyassa aruṇuggamanaṃ viya nibbānassa udayabhūto tappaṭibhāgo viya hoti yathārahaṃ kilesanibbāpanatoti patimokkhaṃ, patimokkhaṃ eva pātimokkhaṃ. Atha vā mokkhaṃ pati vattati mokkhābhimukhanti patimokkhaṃ, patimokkhameva pātimokkhanti evaṃ tāvettha pātimokkhasaddassa attho veditabbo.
「律仪」:藉此而防护、遮盖,故称「律仪」。巴帝摩卡本身就是律仪,所以叫作「巴帝摩卡律仪」。从义理来看,它就是从种种会被违犯的恶行中,决意远离或发起的思心所。以这样的巴帝摩卡律仪来装备自己、完全具备它的人,就被称为「具足巴帝摩卡防护」。这在《分别论》中也有说明:显示巴利原文
Saṃvarati pidahati etenāti saṃvaro, pātimokkhameva saṃvaroti pātimokkhasaṃvaro. Atthato pana tato tato vītikkamitabbato viratiyo cetanā vā, tena pātimokkhasaṃvarena upeto samannāgato pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvutoti vutto. Vuttañhetaṃ vibhaṅge –
他以此别解脱律仪,得以具足、充分具足、亲近、充分亲近、圆满、成就。因此,说为‘具足别解脱律仪防护’。显示巴利原文
‘‘Iminā pātimokkhasaṃvarena upeto hoti samupeto upagato samupagato sampanno samannāgato. Tena vuccati pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvuto’’ti (vibha. 511).
「住」:指以威仪而住,即活动、运转。「行仪行境具足」:由于不作竹施等邪命、不作身粗鲁等行为,彻底舍离一切非行仪,成就了所谓“身不违越、语不违越”这种与比丘相应的行仪;又舍离了妓女等非行境,具足为了托钵等目的而可以前往的适当处所——这称为行境,因此成就了行仪与行境两者的圆满,故称行仪行境具足。另外,若有比丘对导师恭敬、顺从,对同梵行者恭敬、顺从,具足惭与愧,善着下衣、善披上衣,以端正庄严的前进、后退、前视、旁视、屈伸和垂目而行,威仪圆满,守护根门,饮食知量,精勤觉醒,具足正念正知,少欲、知足、远离、不混杂,对于增上行仪殷重而行、常怀恭敬而住,那么这位比丘便称为行仪具足。显示巴利原文
Viharatīti iriyāpathavihārena viharati, iriyati, vattati. Ācāragocarasampannoti veḷudānādimicchājīvassa kāyapāgabbhiyādīnañca akaraṇena, sabbaso anācāraṃ vajjetvā ‘‘kāyiko avītikkamo, vācasiko avītikkamo’’ti evaṃ vuttabhikkhusāruppaācārasampattiyā vesiyādiagocaraṃ vajjetvā piṇḍapātādiatthaṃ upasaṅkamituṃ yuttaṭṭhānasaṅkhātagocarena ca sampannattā ācāragocarasampanno. Apica yo bhikkhu satthari sagāravo sappatisso sabrahmacārīsu sagāravo sappatisso hirottappasampanno sunivattho supāruto pāsādikena abhikkantena paṭikkantena ālokitena vilokitena samiñjitena pasāritena okkhittacakkhu iriyāpathasampanno indriyesu guttadvāro bhojane mattaññū jāgariyānuyutto satisampajaññena samannāgato appiccho santuṭṭho pavivitto asaṃsaṭṭho ābhisamācārikesu sakkaccakārī garucittīkārabahulo viharati, ayaṃ vuccati ācārasampanno.
而「行境」则有三种:依止行境、守护行境、系念行境。其中,具足十种论事功德、具备如前所说特征的善知识,依止他,便能听闻未闻之法,令已闻之法清净,度脱疑惑,正直知见,让心净信;又随学于他,而令信增长、戒增长、闻增长、舍增长、慧增长——这是「依止行境」。若有比丘进入村落,在街道上行走时,垂目只看一轭之远,防护而行,不东张西望地看象、看马、看车、看步兵、看女人、看男人,不向上看、不向下看,也不环顾四方四维而行——这是「守护行境」。「系念行境」则是四念住,比丘将心系念于此。这确实是世尊所说的:显示巴利原文
Gocaro pana – upanissayagocaro, ārakkhagocaro, upanibandhagocaroti tividho. Tattha dasakathāvatthuguṇasamannāgato vuttalakkhaṇo kalyāṇamitto yaṃ nissāya asutaṃ suṇāti, sutaṃ pariyodapeti, kaṅkhaṃ vitarati, diṭṭhiṃ ujukaṃ karoti, cittaṃ pasādeti, yassa ca anusikkhanto saddhāya vaḍḍhati, sīlena, sutena, cāgena, paññāya vaḍḍhati, ayaṃ upanissayagocaro. Yo bhikkhu antaragharaṃ paviṭṭho vīthiṃ paṭipanno okkhittacakkhu yugamattadassāvī saṃvuto gacchati, na hatthiṃ olokento, na assaṃ, na rathaṃ, na pattiṃ, na itthiṃ, na purisaṃ olokento, na uddhaṃ olokento, na adho olokento, na disāvidisā pekkhamāno gacchati, ayaṃ ārakkhagocaro. Upanibandhagocaro pana cattāro satipaṭṭhānā, yattha bhikkhu attano cittaṃ upanibandhati. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā –
诸比丘,什么是比丘自己本分的、传承而来的行境?即四念住。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ko ca, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno gocaro sako pettiko visayo? Yadidaṃ – cattāro satipaṭṭhānā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.372).
如此,因具备了如前所述的行仪成就与此行境成就,故称“行仪行境具足”。显示巴利原文
Iti yathāvuttāya ācārasampattiyā imāya ca gocarasampattiyā samannāgatattā ācāragocarasampanno.
「于微细罪见怖畏」:对于微细、极微细、并非故意违犯的众学法,以及不善心生起等种种罪过,具有见其怖畏的习性。若比丘将极微细的罪过,视同高达六万八千由旬的须弥山王;又有比丘将极轻微的一句恶语,视同违犯波罗夷,此比丘便称为于微细罪见怖畏者。「于诸学处受持而学」:即于一切学处中,凡所应学,以一切方式、全然、毫无遗漏地受持而学、奉行、圆满——此即是其义。「如是具善戒」:依此方式而成为具足善戒者。其实,这是就人而解说戒,在“诸比丘,比丘如是具足善戒”一句中,也是就所说之人而作总结;而为了在“善法”部分开演法义,点明“此戒为他们法之基础”,故又说“如是具善戒”。“七菩提分等”的内容,其义悉皆如前所述。复说“具善戒”等,是总结之语。显示巴利原文
Aṇumattesu vajjesu bhayadassāvīti appamattakesu aṇuppamāṇesu asañcicca āpannasekhiyaakusalacittuppādādibhedesu vajjesu bhayadassanasīlo. Yo hi bhikkhu paramāṇumattaṃ vajjaṃ aṭṭhasaṭṭhiyojanasatasahassubbedhasinerupabbatarājasadisaṃ katvā passati, yopi bhikkhu sabbalahukaṃ dubbhāsitamattaṃ pārājikasadisaṃ katvā passati, ayaṃ aṇumattesu vajjesu bhayadassāvī nāma. Samādāya sikkhati sikkhāpadesūti yaṃ kiñci sikkhāpadesu sikkhitabbaṃ, taṃ sabbena sabbaṃ sabbathā sabbaṃ anavasesaṃ samādiyitvā sikkhati vattati, pūretīti attho. Iti kalyāṇasīloti iminā pakārena kalyāṇasīlo samāno. Puggalādhiṭṭhānavasena hi niddiṭṭhaṃ sīlaṃ ‘‘evaṃ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu kalyāṇasīlo hotī’’ti vuttapuggalādhiṭṭhānavaseneva nigametvā ‘‘kalyāṇadhammo’’ti ettha vuttadhamme niddisitukāmena ‘‘tesaṃ dhammānaṃ idaṃ sīlaṃ adhiṭṭhāna’’nti dassetuṃ puna ‘‘iti kalyāṇasīlo’’ti vuttaṃ. Sattannaṃ bodhipakkhiyānantiādi sabbaṃ heṭṭhā vuttatthameva. Puna kalyāṇasīlotiādi nigamanaṃ.
在偈颂中:「恶作」意为所作不善,即恶行。「具惭者」指有惭、具足惭者,本性即对一切恶行生起感到厌恶;或说「具惭者」指与惭俱起之心。应知此处以「惭」一词,实亦包含「愧」。借由点明惭与愧,显示一切恶行不生的原因,由此从因上阐明善戒的性质。「正觉」即圣智;前往它、亲近它,故称「趣向正觉者」,意为菩提分法。「无增上慢」即没有贪等增上慢。或有读作「如是类者」,意为:如先所说「专精修习菩提分诸法」,即属此类、此状态。「于苦」:指轮回之苦,或轮回苦之因。「即于此而自知灭尽」:由证得漏尽而自知,彼流转苦之因——属集谛的烦恼聚,即于此生、此有身中已灭尽、无余;或说,于轮回苦本身,由最后心灭尽而知其灭尽、已尽之相。「具足他们法」:即具足如前所说戒等种种法。「无所依」:因已断除爱、见等依止,故无所依,于任何处皆不依止。「于一切世间」:指一切有情世间。其余义如前说。显示巴利原文
Gāthāsu dukkaṭanti duṭṭhu kataṃ, duccaritanti attho. Hirimananti hirimantaṃ hirisampannaṃ, sabbaso pāpapavattiyā jigucchanasabhāvanti attho. Hirimananti vā hirisahitacittaṃ. Hiriggahaṇeneva cettha ottappampi gahitanti veditabbaṃ. Hirottappaggahaṇena ca sabbaso duccaritābhāvassa hetuṃ dassento kalyāṇasīlataṃ hetuto vibhāveti. Sambodhīti ariyañāṇaṃ, taṃ gacchanti bhajantīti sambodhigāmino, bodhipakkhikāti attho. Anussadanti rāgussadādirahitaṃ. ‘‘Tathāvidha’’ntipi paṭhanti. ‘‘Bodhipakkhikānaṃ dhammānaṃ bhāvanānuyogamanuyutto’’ti yathā yathā pubbe vuttaṃ, tathāvidhaṃ tādisanti attho. Dukkhassāti vaṭṭadukkhassa, vaṭṭadukkhahetuno vā. Idheva khayamattanoti āsavakkhayādhigamena attano vaṭṭadukkhahetuno samudayapakkhiyassa kilesagaṇassa idheva imasmiṃyeva attabhāve khayaṃ anuppādaṃ pajānāti, vaṭṭadukkhasseva vā idheva carimakacittanirodhena khayaṃ khīṇabhāvaṃ pajānāti. Tehi dhammehi sampannanti tehi yathāvuttasīlādidhammehi samannāgataṃ. Asitanti taṇhādiṭṭhinissayānaṃ pahīnattā asitaṃ, katthaci anissitaṃ. Sabbalokassāti sabbasmiṃ sattaloke. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
第九:施经注释显示巴利原文
9. Dānasuttavaṇṇanā
98 「施」:指所应施舍之物;或以具体事物为依处的思心所,这也是「舍弃成就」的别名。「财施」:以四种资具作为可施舍物,称为财施。这些资具因可被贪爱等所染着,故称为「财」。或者,舍弃这些资具的思心所即为财施。「法施」:此处,有人如此分别善与不善业道,说:「这些法是善的,这些法是不善的;这些法有罪,这些法无罪;这些法受智者呵斥,这些法受智者称赞;这些法若成就、受持,则带来不利与痛苦,这些法则带来利益与安乐。」他如此辨析业与业果,令其于此世与他世如同目睹般清晰显现,使人们从不善法回转,安住于善法,这就是法施。又有人开示诸谛,说:「这些法应了知,这些法应遍知,这些法应断除,这些法应证悟,这些法应修习。」为证得不死而教导行道之法,这便是达到顶点的法施。「此最上」:此即最上。「即此」:即所说之法施,于两种布施中为最上、最殊胜、最第一。因为借由导向出离的法施,能从一切灾厄中解脱,超越一切轮回苦。而世间法施,则是一切布施之因,一切成就显示巴利原文
98. Navame dānanti dātabbaṃ, savatthukā vā cetanā dānaṃ, sampattipariccāgassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Āmisadānanti cattāro paccayā deyyabhāvavasena āmisadānaṃ nāma. Te hi taṇhādīhi āmasitabbato āmisanti vuccanti. Tesaṃ vā pariccāgacetanā āmisadānaṃ. Dhammadānanti idhekacco ‘‘ime dhammā kusalā, ime dhammā akusalā, ime dhammā sāvajjā, ime dhammā anavajjā, ime viññugarahitā, ime viññuppasatthā; ime samattā samādinnā ahitāya dukkhāya saṃvattanti, ime hitāya sukhāya saṃvattantī’’ti kusalākusalakammapathe vibhajanto kammakammavipāke idhalokaparaloke paccakkhato dassento viya pākaṭaṃ karonto akusalehi dhammehi nivattāpento, kusalesu dhammesu patiṭṭhāpento, dhammaṃ deseti, idaṃ dhammadānaṃ. Yo pana ‘‘ime dhammā abhiññeyyā , ime pariññeyyā, ime pahātabbā, ime sacchikātabbā, ime bhāvetabbā’’ti saccāni vibhāvento amatādhigamāya paṭipattidhammaṃ deseti, idaṃ sikhāppattaṃ dhammadānaṃ nāma. Etadagganti etaṃ aggaṃ. Yadidanti yaṃ idaṃ dhammadānaṃ vuttaṃ, etaṃ imesu dvīsu dānesu aggaṃ seṭṭhaṃ uttamaṃ. Vivaṭṭagāmidhammadānañhi nissāya sabbānatthato parimuccati, sakalaṃ vaṭṭadukkhaṃ atikkamati. Lokiyaṃ pana dhammadānaṃ sabbesaṃ dānānaṃ nidānaṃ sabbasampattīnaṃ mūlaṃ. Tenāha –
法乐胜一切乐,灭尽渴爱,胜一切苦。(《法句经》354)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Sabbadānaṃ dhammadānaṃ jināti, sabbarasaṃ dhammaraso jināti; Sabbaratiṃ dhammaratī jināti, taṇhakkhayo sabbadukkhaṃ jinātī’’ti. (dha. pa. 354) –
应知,此处的「无畏施」已为「法施」所摄。显示巴利原文
Abhayadānamettha dhammadāneneva saṅgahitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
本着共受用的意乐,对于本应自己受用的四种资具,不独享而分施他人,此即「财施」。同样本着共受用的意乐,对于自己已了知、已证得的法,不独自沉溺,而教导他人,此即「法施」。以四种资具及四种摄事饶益、哀愍他人,此即「财摄」。以如前所述之法饶益、哀愍他人,此即「法摄」。余如前释。显示巴利原文
Sādhāraṇabhogitādhippāyena attanā paribhuñjitabbato catupaccayato sayameva abhuñjitvā paresaṃ saṃvibhajanaṃ āmisasaṃvibhāgo. Sādhāraṇabhogitādhippāyeneva attanā viditassa adhigatassa dhammassa appossukko ahutvā paresaṃ upadeso dhammasaṃvibhāgo. Catūhi paccayehi catūhi ca saṅgahavatthūhi paresaṃ anuggaṇhanaṃ anukampanaṃ āmisānuggaho. Vuttanayeneva dhammena paresaṃ anuggaṇhanaṃ anukampanaṃ dhammānuggaho. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
偈颂中所说“布施为最上”:此指由于心、福田、所施物三者皆极殊胜而成为最上、最高的布施;或从能圆满财富等成就的果报而言,是至上的;或因能摧破、制伏与之相违的贪、悭等,故诸佛世尊称之为“最上”。所谓“无上”:指因思等成就达到极致,既为最上而无更在其上,且能成就无上果报的布施,故名为“无上”。于此处“分施”一词,也应将“最上”与“无上”两个词引来一同理解。“所称叹”:即赞叹说:“诸比丘!施与食物者,施主即给予受者五种处所。”(《增支部》5.37),以及“诸比丘!若众生能如是了知布施与分享的果报……”(《如是语》26)等。为显示布施与分施如何成为最上与无上,故说“在最胜的……”等。其中,“在最胜的”:指具足戒等殊胜功德的最胜无上福田,也就是正自觉者及圣者僧团。“具足净信的心”:指依靠对业果的相信及对三宝的深信,使心变得清净、确然。若内心成就、福田成就,即使所施物品微薄,那样的布施也会有大神力、大光辉……显示巴利原文
Gāthāsu yamāhu dānaṃ paramanti yaṃ dānaṃ cittakhettadeyyadhammānaṃ uḷārabhāvena paramaṃ uttamaṃ, bhogasampattiādīnaṃ vā pūraṇato phalanato, parassa vā lobhamacchariyādikassa paṭipakkhassa maddanato hiṃsanato ‘‘parama’’nti buddhā bhagavanto āhu. Anuttaranti yaṃ dānaṃ cetanādisampattiyā sātisayapavattiyā aggabhāvena aggavipākattā ca uttararahitaṃ anuttarabhāvasādhanaṃ cāti āhu. Yaṃ saṃvibhāganti etthāpi ‘‘paramaṃ anuttara’’nti padadvayaṃ ānetvā yojetabbaṃ. Avaṇṇayīti kittayi, ‘‘bhojanaṃ, bhikkhave, dadamāno dāyako paṭiggāhakānaṃ pañca ṭhānāni detī’’tiādinā (a. ni. 5.37), ‘‘evaṃ ce, bhikkhave, sattā jāneyyuṃ dānasaṃvibhāgassa vipāka’’ntiādinā (itivu. 26) ca pasaṃsayi. Yathā pana dānaṃ saṃvibhāgo ca paramaṃ anuttarañca hoti, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘aggamhī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha aggamhīti sīlādiguṇavisesayogena seṭṭhe anuttare puññakkhette sammāsambuddhe ariyasaṅghe ca. Pasannacittoti kammaphalasaddhāya ratanattayasaddhāya ca cittaṃ pasādento okappento. Cittasampattiyā hi khettasampattiyā ca parittepi deyyadhamme dānaṃ mahānubhāvaṃ hoti mahājutikaṃ mahāvipphāraṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ –
若心具足净信,则无有所谓微少的布施;
不论是对如来、正自觉者,还是对其弟子们。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Natthi citte pasannamhi, appakā nāma dakkhiṇā; Tathāgate vā sambuddhe, atha vā tassa sāvake’’ti. (vi. va. 804; netti. 95);
「智者」指具智慧者。「了知」即正如实地了知布施的果报与布施的利益。在合适的时机,谁会不作供养呢?在恰当的时候,谁又不行布施呢?因为只有当信心、施物、受者这三者现前时,布施才能成就,否则便不能;或者,是在适合布施给受者的时机。显示巴利原文
Viññūti sappañño. Pajānanti sammadeva dānaphalaṃ dānānisaṃsaṃ pajānanto. Ko na yajetha kāleti yuttappattakāle ko nāma dānaṃ na dadeyya? Saddhā, deyyadhammo, paṭiggāhakāti imesaṃ tiṇṇaṃ sammukhibhūtakāleyeva hi dānaṃ sambhavati, na aññathā, paṭiggāhakānaṃ vā dātuṃ yuttakāle.
如是,第一颂显示了财施、财分施与财摄之后,现在为了显示法施、法分施与法摄,而说出「他们宣说」等第二颂。此处,「两者」指所述「宣说者」与「听受者」。这里的略义是:凡在善逝世尊的教法中,于正法生起净信心,安住于解脱处的最高境地,作为宣说者与受法者而说法、听法之人,对他们而言,这即是法施、法分施与法摄的利益。由于成就了最究竟的意义,故为最上;以清除贪爱等一切烦恼的垢秽而成为清净。能得此清净者为何样人?即那些「于善逝教法中不放逸」之人。如是说:显示巴利原文
Evaṃ paṭhamagāthāya āmisadānasaṃvibhāgānuggahe dassetvā idāni dhammadānasaṃvibhāgānuggahe dassetuṃ ‘‘ye ceva bhāsantī’’ti dutiyagāthamāha. Tattha ubhayanti ‘‘bhāsanti suṇantī’’ti vuttā desakā paṭiggāhakāti ubhayaṃ. Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepattho – ye sugatassa bhagavato sāsane saddhamme pasannacittā vimuttāyatanasīse ṭhatvā desenti paṭiggaṇhanti ca, tesaṃ desakapaṭiggāhakānaṃ so dhammadānadhammasaṃvibhāgadhammānuggahasaṅkhāto attho. Paramatthasādhanato paramo. Taṇhāsaṃkilesādisabbasaṃkilesamalavisodhanena visujjhati. Kīdisānaṃ? Ye appamattā sugatassa sāsane. Ye ca –
‘‘Sabbapāpassa akaraṇaṃ, kusalassa upasampadā; Sacittapariyodapanaṃ, etaṃ buddhāna sāsana’’nti. (dī. ni. 2.90; dha. pa. 183) –
简而言之,在正自觉者的教法中,凡于教诫与教导不放逸、恭敬修习增上戒学等者,他们的清净即依阿拉汉果的清净而变得极为洁白、纯净。显示巴利原文
Saṅkhepato evaṃ pakāsite sammāsambuddhassa sāsane ovāde anusiṭṭhiyaṃ appamattā adhisīlasikkhādayo sakkaccaṃ sampādenti. Tesaṃ visujjhati, arahattaphalavisuddhiyā ativiya vodāyatīti.
第十、三明经注释。显示巴利原文
10. Tevijjasuttavaṇṇanā
99 第十经中,“依法”即依循正理,也就是称为正行道的因缘。使人成为三明的那条行道,在此即称为“法”。那么,这条行道是什么呢?就是“行成就”与“明成就”。“三明”指具足宿住随念智等三种明。“婆罗门”指已舍弃恶行的婆罗门。“我宣说”意为:我使他知晓、确认他是婆罗门。“不以徒有言说之虚诳而”即:不因他人仅凭出身,或仅凭八支等而徒有言说、不清不实,便称他们为婆罗门,我不如此宣说。另一种解释,“徒有言说之虚诳”指仅仅讽诵咒文。这两种解释都是在破斥那些认为“只要通过讽诵三吠陀等便成为三明婆罗门”的人。世尊为了阐明:“这些自称为婆罗门的人,从究竟意义上并非三明婆罗门,他们被无明遮蔽,却自称‘三明婆罗门’;而如此所说者,才是真正的三明婆罗门。”于是随顺能觉悟者的心意,开始了这次开示。显示巴利原文
99. Dasame dhammenāti ñāyena, sammāpaṭipattisaṅkhātena hetunā kāraṇena. Yāya hi paṭipadāya tevijjo hoti, sā paṭipadā idha dhammoti veditabbā. Kā pana sā paṭipadāti? Caraṇasampadā ca vijjāsampadā ca. Tevijjanti pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇādīhi tīhi vijjāhi samannāgataṃ. Brāhmaṇanti bāhitapāpabrāhmaṇaṃ. Paññāpemīti ‘‘brāhmaṇo’’ti jānāpemi patiṭṭhapemi. Nāññaṃ lapitalāpanamattenāti aññaṃ jātimattabrāhmaṇaṃ aṭṭhakādīhi lapitamattavippalapanamattena brāhmaṇaṃ na paññāpemīti. Atha vā lapitalāpanamattenāti mantānaṃ ajjhenaajjhāpanamattena. Ubhayathāpi yaṃ pana brāhmaṇā sāmavedādivedattayaajjhenena tevijjaṃ brāhmaṇaṃ vadanti, taṃ paṭikkhipati. Bhagavatā hi ‘‘paramatthato atevijjaṃ brāhmaṇaṃyeva cete bhovādino avijjānivutā ‘tevijjo brāhmaṇo’ti vadanti, evaṃ pana tevijjo brāhmaṇo hotī’’ti dassanatthaṃ tathā bujjhanakānaṃ puggalānaṃ ajjhāsayena ayaṃ desanā āraddhā.
其中,具有明者必定也具足行成就,因为若无行成就,则明成就无从存在。因此,将行成就含摄在内,唯以“明”为名来施设婆罗门,世尊便发起此开示:“诸比丘,我依法施设三明婆罗门。”为令理解,他提问:“诸比丘,我如何依法施设三明婆罗门?”然后以补特伽罗为立足点,通过开示分析三明,说道:“诸比丘,于此,有比丘……”等。显示巴利原文
Tattha yasmā vijjāsampanno caraṇasampannoyeva hoti caraṇasampadāya vinā vijjāsampattiyā abhāvato, tasmā caraṇasampadaṃ antogadhaṃ katvā vijjāsīseneva brāhmaṇaṃ paññāpetukāmo ‘‘dhammenāhaṃ, bhikkhave, tevijjaṃ brāhmaṇaṃ paññāpemī’’ti desanaṃ samuṭṭhāpetvā ‘‘kathañcāhaṃ, bhikkhave, dhammena tevijjaṃ brāhmaṇaṃ paññāpemī’’ti kathetukamyatāya pucchaṃ katvā puggalādhiṭṭhānāya desanāya vijjattayaṃ vibhajanto ‘‘idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhū’’tiādimāha.
其中,“多种的”就是种种的,或以多种方式发生的,被详细描述的。“宿住”指从紧接着的过去生开始,在各个地方安住的诸蕴相续。“所住”就是所居住、所经验的,在自己相续中生起而后灭去的;或者是所住的法;或者依行境而住,即被自己识所了知的,或者其他识所了知,如在断灭行者随念等中那样。“随念”就是按“一生、二生”等生的次第随顺而忆念,或一再随顺而忆念,当心转向时,在遍作之后无间地忆念。显示巴利原文
Tattha anekavihitanti anekavidhaṃ, anekehi vā pakārehi pavattitaṃ, saṃvaṇṇitanti attho. Pubbenivāsanti samanantarātītabhavaṃ ādiṃ katvā tattha tattha nivutthakkhandhasantānaṃ. Nivutthanti ajjhāvutthaṃ anubhūtaṃ, attano santāne uppajjitvā niruddhaṃ, nivutthadhammaṃ vā nivutthaṃ, gocaranivāsena nivutthaṃ, attano viññāṇena viññātaṃ paraviññāṇaviññātampi vā chinnavaṭumakānussaraṇādīsu. Anussaratīti ‘‘ekampi jātiṃ dvepi jātiyo’’ti evaṃ jātipaṭipāṭivasena anugantvā sarati, anudeva vā sarati, citte abhininnāmite parikammasamanantaraṃ sarati.
“如下”(Seyyathidaṃ)一词,是显示所提及类别之词。正是通过它,为了显示那已开始的宿住智的类别,而说“一生”等。其中,“一生”指以一次结生为根本、以死亡为终点,包含在一期有中的蕴相续。对于“二生”等,也是如此。而在“许多坏劫”等中,正在衰坏的劫称为“坏劫”,正在增长的劫称为“成劫”。于此,由于坏劫是坏住劫的根本,故以坏劫含摄坏住劫;以成劫含摄成住劫。因此,《增支部》所说:“诸比丘,有这些四种不可计数的劫。何等为四?坏劫、坏住劫、成劫、成住劫”(A.4.156),这四种不可计数劫便都被包含了。显示巴利原文
Seyyathidanti āraddhappakāradassanatthe nipāto. Teneva yvāyaṃ pubbenivāso āraddho hoti, tassa pakāraṃ dassento ‘‘ekampi jāti’’ntiādimāha. Tattha ekampi jātinti ekampi paṭisandhimūlakaṃ cutipariyosānaṃ ekabhavapariyāpannaṃ khandhasantānaṃ. Esa nayo dvepi jātiyotiādīsu. Anekepi saṃvaṭṭakappetiādīsu pana parihāyamāno kappo saṃvaṭṭakappo , vaḍḍhamāno vivaṭṭakappo. Tattha saṃvaṭṭena saṃvaṭṭaṭṭhāyī gahito hoti tammūlakattā, vivaṭṭena ca vivaṭṭaṭṭhāyī. Evañhi sati yāni tāni ‘‘cattārimāni, bhikkhave, kappassa asaṅkhyeyyāni. Katamāni cattāri? Saṃvaṭṭo, saṃvaṭṭaṭṭhāyī, vivaṭṭo, vivaṭṭaṭṭhāyī’’ti (a. ni. 4.156) vuttāni cattāri asaṅkhyeyyāni, tāni pariggahitāni honti.
于此,有三种毁灭:火毁灭、水毁灭、风毁灭。三种毁灭的界限分别为:光音天、遍净天、广果天。当劫以火毁灭时,从光音天以下皆被火焚烧;当以水毁灭时,从遍净天以下皆被水消融;当以风毁灭时,从广果天以下皆被风吹散。广而言之,百千俱胝轮围世界同时坏灭。如此,这位忆念宿住的比丘,能随念众多坏劫、众多成劫、众多成坏劫。他是如何随念的呢?即通过“我在彼处”等方法。显示巴利原文
Tattha tayo saṃvaṭṭā – tejosaṃvaṭṭo, āposaṃvaṭṭo, vāyosaṃvaṭṭoti. Tisso saṃvaṭṭasīmā – ābhassarā, subhakiṇhā, vehapphalāti. Yadā kappo tejena saṃvaṭṭati, ābhassarato heṭṭhā agginā ḍayhati. Yadā udakena saṃvaṭṭati, subhakiṇhato heṭṭhā udakena vilīyati. Yadā vātena saṃvaṭṭati, vehapphalato heṭṭhā vātena viddhaṃsiyati. Vitthārato pana koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷaṃ ekato vinassati. Iti evarūpo ayaṃ pubbenivāsaṃ anussaranto bhikkhu anekepi saṃvaṭṭakappe anekepi vivaṭṭakappe anekepi saṃvaṭṭavivaṭṭakappe anussarati. Kathaṃ? Amutrāsintiādinā nayena.
其中,“amutrāsiṃ(我在彼处)”,是指在那个坏劫,或在那种有、那种胎、那种趣、那种识住、那种有情居、那种有情类中,我曾存在。“如是名”:如帝须或弗沙。“如是姓”:如乔达摩或迦叶。“如是容貌”:如白色或黑色。“如是食”:以米饭肉食为食,或以自然果实为食。“如是感受苦乐”:感受种种身、心的苦与乐,或有依著、无依著等种种苦乐。“如是寿限”:有百岁左右的寿量,或有八万四千劫的寿量。“我从彼处没,转生他处”:即我从彼有、彼胎、彼趣、彼识住、彼有情居、彼有情类死后,又在某名、某姓等相应的有、胎、趣、识住、有情居、有情类中出生。“在那里也是如此”:即又在彼有……乃至彼有情类中,我再度存在。而对于“如是名”等的说明,与前述相同。显示巴利原文
Tattha amutrāsinti amumhi saṃvaṭṭakappe amumhi bhave vā yoniyā vā gatiyā vā viññāṇaṭṭhitiyā vā sattāvāse vā sattanikāye vā ahamahosiṃ. Evaṃnāmoti tisso vā phusso vā. Evaṃgottoti gotamo vā kassapo vā. Evaṃvaṇṇoti odāto vā sāmo vā. Evamāhāroti sālimaṃsodanāhāro vā pavattaphalabhojano vā. Evaṃsukhadukkhappaṭisaṃvedīti anekappakārānaṃ kāyikacetasikānaṃ sāmisanirāmisādippabhedānaṃ vā sukhadukkhānaṃ paṭisaṃvedī. Evamāyupariyantoti evaṃ vassasataparimāṇāyupariyanto vā caturāsītikappasatasahassaparimāṇāyupariyanto vā. So tato cuto amutra udapādinti sohaṃ tato bhavato yonito gatito viññāṇaṭṭhitito sattāvāsato sattanikāyato vā cuto puna amukasmiṃ nāma bhave yoniyā gatiyā viññāṇaṭṭhitiyā sattāvāse sattanikāye vā udapādiṃ. Tatrāpāsinti atha tatrapi bhave yoniyā gatiyā viññāṇaṭṭhitiyā sattāvāse sattanikāye vā puna ahosiṃ. Evaṃnāmotiādi vuttanayameva.
或者,由于“amutrāsiṃ(我在彼处)”是对于渐次向上追溯者,依照其志向、尽其所能的忆念;而“so tato cuto(他从彼处殁)”是对于返转省察者,是省察。因此,紧接着“idhūpapanno(生于此世)”之后,便说“amutra udapādi(转生他处)”。“tatrāpāsiṃ(在彼亦如是)”:在彼有……乃至在彼有情类中,我亦存在。“如是名”:如德多或密多。“如是姓”:如婆悉吒或迦叶。“如是容貌”:如黑色或白色。“如是食”:如以净食为食,或以米饭等为食。“如是感受苦乐”:感受天界之乐,或感受人间之苦乐。“如是寿限”:具有如是各自的寿量极限。“我从彼处没”:即我从彼有等处死亡。“生于此世”:即在此最后有中,生为人而出生、转起。显示巴利原文
Atha vā yasmā ‘‘amutrāsi’’nti idaṃ anupubbena ārohantassa attano abhinīhārānurūpaṃ yathābalaṃ saraṇaṃ, ‘‘so tato cuto’’ti paṭinivattantassa paccavekkhaṇaṃ, tasmā ‘‘idhūpapanno’’ti imissā idhūpapattiyā anantaraṃ ‘‘amutra udapādi’’nti vuttaṃ. Tatrāpāsinti tatrapi bhave…pe… sattanikāye vā āsiṃ. Evaṃnāmoti datto vā mitto vā, evaṃgottoti vāseṭṭho vā kassapo vā. Evaṃvaṇṇoti kāḷo vā odāto vā. Evamāhāroti sudhāhāro vā sāliodanādiāhāro vā. Evaṃsukhadukkhappaṭisaṃvedīti dibbasukhappaṭisaṃvedī vā mānusasukhadukkhappaṭisaṃvedī vā. Evamāyupariyantoti evaṃ taṃtaṃparamāyupariyanto. So tato cutoti sohaṃ tato bhavādito cuto. Idhūpapannoti idha imasmiṃ carimabhave manusso hutvā upapanno nibbatto.
“iti”意为“如此”。“sākāraṃ sauddesaṃ”(有特征、有指示):以姓名等作为“指示”,以肤色等作为“特征”。众生依姓名而被指示为“提舍”“乔达摩”,依肤色等而被了知为“黑”“白”等种种差异。因此,姓名是“指示”,其余即是“特征”。“这是他证得的第一明”:这位比丘由于最初证得,故称“第一”;以令知为义,故称“明”;此明已被证得、已被现证。那么它令知什么呢?它令知宿住。“无明”:即对于那宿住,以令不知为义,而成为其覆盖的痴。“暗”:那个痴,由于覆盖义,说为“暗”。“光”:那个明,由于照亮义,说为“光”。在此,“明已证得”是实质义,其余的是赞叹之辞。这里的连接是:这位比丘确实已证得明;对于已证得明的他,无明被破坏,即已灭尽。为什么呢?因为明已生起。其余两句的道理也一样。显示巴利原文
Itīti evaṃ. Sākāraṃ sauddesanti nāmagottādivasena sauddesaṃ, vaṇṇādivasena sākāraṃ. Nāmagottena hi sattā ‘‘tisso gotamo’’ti uddisīyanti, vaṇṇādīhi ‘‘sāmo odāto’’ti nānattato paññāyanti. Tasmā nāmagottaṃ uddeso, itare ākārā. Ayamassa paṭhamā vijjā adhigatāti ayaṃ iminā bhikkhunā paṭhamaṃ adhigamavasena paṭhamā, viditakaraṇaṭṭhena vijjā adhigatā sacchikatā hoti. Kiṃ panāyaṃ viditaṃ karoti? Pubbenivāsaṃ. Avijjāti tasseva pubbenivāsassa aviditakaraṇaṭṭhena tassa paṭicchādakamoho vuccati. Tamoti sveva moho paṭicchādakaṭṭhena tamoti vuccati. Ālokoti sā eva vijjā obhāsakaraṇaṭṭhena āloko. Ettha ca vijjā adhigatāti ayaṃ attho, sesaṃ pasaṃsāvacanaṃ. Yojanā panettha – ayaṃ kho tena bhikkhunā vijjā adhigatā, tassa adhigatavijjassa avijjā vihatā, vinaṭṭhāti attho. Kasmā? Yasmā vijjā uppannāti. Sesapadadvayepi eseva nayo.
“yathā taṃ”(正如那样):此处的“yathā”是比喻义,“taṃ”仅为小品词。由于念住不散失,故为“不放逸者”。由于精勤的热忱,故为“热忱者”。由于对身体与生命无所顾恋,故为“策励心者”“已奋发心者”。这是说:正如一位不放逸、热忱、策励心而住的人,他的无明可被破坏,明可生起,暗可被破坏,光可生起;同样,那位比丘的无明已被破坏,明已生起,暗已被破坏,光已生起,他便获得了与精勤修行相应的果报而住。显示巴利原文
Yathā tanti ettha yathāti opammatthe, tanti nipātamattaṃ. Satiyā avippavāsena appamattassa. Vīriyātāpena ātāpino. Kāye ca jīvite ca anapekkhatāya pahitattassa pesitacittassāti attho. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yathā appamattassa ātāpino pahitattassa viharato avijjā vihaññeyya, vijjā uppajjeyya, tamo vihaññeyya, āloko uppajjeyya; evameva tassa bhikkhuno avijjā vihatā, vijjā uppannā , tamo vihato, āloko uppanno, tassa padhānānuyogassa anurūpameva phalaṃ labhitvā viharatīti.
关于“以天眼”等,此处应说的,前面已经讲过了。“清净”:由于观见死与生而成为见清净之因,故称清净。为什么呢?若人唯见死而不见生,则执取断见;若唯见生而不见死,则执取有新众生出现的恶见。若人死与生两者皆见,则超越此二恶见,因此,他的这种观见便成为见清净之因。这位佛弟子正是两者皆见。所以说“由于观见死与生而成为见清净之因,故称清净”。或者,清净也可指远离了十一种随烦恼。如经中说:“‘疑是心的随烦恼’——如是知已,他舍离了疑这心的随烦恼;不作意……乃至昏沉睡眠、惊悚、高举、粗重、过度精进、过度懈怠、期望、种种想、对色的过度观察,都是心的随烦恼。”像这样,由于不被这十一种随烦恼所染污,故称清净。“超越人”:因为超越了人类感官的领域,能见诸色,故称超越人;或因为超越了肉眼,故称超越人。以那清净、超越人的天眼。显示巴利原文
Dibbenacakkhunāti ettha yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā vuttameva. Visuddhenāti cutūpapātadassanena diṭṭhivisuddhihetubhāvato visuddhaṃ. Yo hi cutimattameva passati na upapātaṃ, so ucchedadiṭṭhiṃ gaṇhāti. Yo upapātamattameva passati na cutiṃ, so navasattapātubhāvadiṭṭhiṃ gaṇhāti. Yo pana tadubhayaṃ passati, so yasmā duvidhampi taṃ diṭṭhigataṃ ativattati, tasmāssa taṃ dassanaṃ diṭṭhivisuddhihetu hoti, tadubhayampāyaṃ buddhaputto passati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘cutūpapātadassanena diṭṭhivisuddhihetubhāvato visuddha’’nti. Ekādasaupakkilesavirahato vā visuddhaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘vicikicchā cittassa upakkilesoti – iti viditvā vicikicchaṃ cittassa upakkilesaṃ pajahiṃ, amanasikāro…pe… thinamiddhaṃ, chambhitattaṃ, uppillaṃ, duṭṭhullaṃ, accāraddhavīriyaṃ, atilīnavīriyaṃ, abhijappā, nānattasaññā, atinijjhāyitattaṃ rūpānaṃ cittassa upakkileso’’ti (ma. ni. 3.242) evaṃ vuttehi ekādasahi upakkilesehi anupakkiliṭṭhattā visuddhaṃ. Manussūpacāraṃ atikkamitvā rūpadassanena atikkantamānusakaṃ, maṃsacakkhuṃ vā atikkantattā atikkantamānusakaṃ. Tena dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena. Satte passatīti manussamaṃsacakkhunā viya satte passati dakkhati āloketi.
「正死、正生者」:此处,死亡刹那与结生刹那,即使以天眼也无法看见。然而,“正死者”意指那些临近死亡、即将死去的人;“正生者”意指那些已经取得结生或刚刚化生的人。经文正显示他见到这样的正死者和正生者。「卑下」:由于与痴的等流相应,因低贱的种姓、家族、财富等而卑微、受人轻视。「胜妙」:由于与无痴的等流相应,情况与此相反。「美貌」:由于与无嗔的等流相应,具有可爱、令人满意、可意的色泽。「丑陋」:由于与嗔的等流相应,具有不可爱、不令人满意、不可意的色泽;这也是美丽与丑陋的意思。「善趣」:生于善趣;或者由于与无贪的等流相应,成为富裕、大财富者。「恶趣」:生于恶趣;或者由于与贪的等流相应,成为贫穷、饮食匮乏者。「随业而生」:随各自所造作累积的业而往生。在这里,前面“正死者”等语句说明了天眼的作用,而这一句则说明随业而趣向。显示巴利原文
Cavamāne upapajjamāneti ettha cutikkhaṇe upapattikkhaṇe vā dibbacakkhunāpi daṭṭhuṃ na sakkā. Ye pana āsannacutikā idāni cavissanti, te cavamānā. Ye ca gahitapaṭisandhikā sampatinibbattā vā, te upapajjamānāti adhippetā. Te evarūpe cavamāne upapajjamāne ca passatīti dasseti. Hīneti mohanissandayuttattā hīnānaṃ jātikulabhogādīnaṃ vasena hīḷite paribhūte. Paṇīteti amohanissandayuttattā tabbiparīte. Suvaṇṇeti adosanissandayuttattā iṭṭhakantamanāpavaṇṇayutte. Dubbaṇṇeti dosanissandayuttattā aniṭṭhaakantāmanāpavaṇṇayutte. Abhirūpe virūpetipi attho. Sugateti sugatigate, alobhanissandayuttattā vā aḍḍhe mahaddhane. Duggateti duggatigate, lobhanissandayuttattā vā dalidde appannapānabhojane. Yathākammūpageti yaṃ yaṃ kammaṃ upacitaṃ, tena tena upagate . Tattha purimehi ‘‘cavamāne’’tiādīhi dibbacakkhukiccaṃ vuttaṃ, iminā pana padena yathākammūpagañāṇakiccaṃ.
此智的生起次第是这样的:此处,有比丘向下朝地狱方向扩大光亮,看见地狱众生正在承受巨大的痛苦,这种看见正是天眼智的作用。他如此作意:“这些众生造了什么业,才承受这样的痛苦?”接着,对“他们造了这种业”生起以该业为所缘的智慧。同样,他向上朝天界方向扩大光亮,在欢喜园、杂合园、粗涩园等处看见有情正在享受天界成就,这种看见也是天眼智的作用。他如此作意:“这些有情造了什么业,才享受这样的成就?”接着,对“他们造了这种业”生起以该业为所缘的智慧,这就叫作随业趣智。此智没有单独的遍作。如同此智,未来分智也没有单独的遍作。因为这些智都以天眼为足处,与天眼一起成就。对于“以身恶行……”等所应说的内容,与前面所说的方法相同。在这里,「明」指天眼智明。「无明」指遮蔽众生死亡与结生的无明。其余内容如前所述。显示巴利原文
Tassa ca ñāṇassa ayaṃ uppattikkamo – idha bhikkhu heṭṭhā nirayābhimukhaṃ ālokaṃ vaḍḍhetvā nerayike satte passati mahantaṃ dukkhaṃ anubhavamāne, idaṃ dassanaṃ dibbacakkhuñāṇakiccameva. So ca evaṃ manasi karoti ‘‘kiṃ nu kho kammaṃ katvā ime sattā etaṃ dukkhaṃ anubhavantī’’ti, athassa ‘‘idaṃ nāma katvā’’ti taṃkammārammaṇaṃ ñāṇaṃ uppajjati. Tathā upari devalokābhimukhaṃ ālokaṃ vaḍḍhetvā nandanavanamissakavanaphārusakavanādīsu satte passati dibbasampattiṃ anubhavamāne, idampi dassanaṃ dibbacakkhuñāṇakiccameva. So evaṃ manasi karoti ‘‘kiṃ nu kho kammaṃ katvā ime sattā etaṃ sampattiṃ anubhavantī’’ti? Athassa ‘‘idaṃ nāma katvā’’ti taṃkammārammaṇaṃ ñāṇaṃ uppajjati, idaṃ yathākammūpagañāṇaṃ nāma. Imassa visuṃ parikammaṃ nāma natthi. Yathā cimassa, evaṃ anāgataṃsañāṇassapi. Dibbacakkhupādakāneva hi imāni dibbacakkhunā saheva ijjhanti. Kāyaduccaritenātiādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayameva. Idha vijjāti dibbacakkhuñāṇavijjā. Avijjāti sattānaṃ cutipaṭisandhicchādikā avijjā. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
在第三转中,「明」指阿拉汉道智明。「无明」指遮蔽四圣谛的无明。其余如前所述,容易理解。像是“如是已……”等是总结。显示巴利原文
Tatiyavāre vijjāti arahattamaggañāṇavijjā. Avijjāti catusaccappaṭicchādikā avijjā. Sesaṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayattā suviññeyyameva. Evaṃ khotiādi nigamanaṃ.
偈颂的简略含义是:他如所说地了知宿住,即依照前述方式,清晰明了地知道。或读作“他已了知”,意思是已经觉知并安住于此。他凭借天眼,依照前述方式,照见包含六欲天在内的二十六重天界,以及四种恶趣。而在此之后,他便证得了生已尽的阿拉汉果,或者说,就是涅槃本身。因此,依靠最胜的智慧——即殊胜的道智,他了达了所应了知的四圣谛,由于所作已办,达到究竟圆满。他具足牟尼法,是真正的牟尼,是漏尽者。因为圆满具足了前面所说的这三种明,并且由于第三明而彻底断除了一切恶,所以被称为三明婆罗门。因此,我只称这样的人为三明婆罗门;其他那些只是口头谈论、诵持夜柔吠陀等咒语、以背诵为生的人,我不称他们为三明婆罗门,不认为他们是真正的三明。显示巴利原文
Gāthāsu ayaṃ saṅkhepattho – yo yathāvuttaṃ pubbenivāsaṃ aveti avagacchati, vuttanayena pākaṭaṃ katvā jānāti. ‘‘Yovedī’’tipi pāṭho, yo avedi viditaṃ katvā ṭhitoti attho. Chabbīsatidevalokasaṅkhātaṃ saggaṃ catubbidhaṃ apāyañca vuttanayeneva dibbacakkhunā passati. Athoti tato paraṃ jātikkhayasaṅkhātaṃ arahattaṃ nibbānameva vā patto adhigato. Tato eva abhiññā abhivisiṭṭhāya maggapaññāya jānitabbaṃ catusaccadhammaṃ jānitvā kiccavosānena vosito niṭṭhānappatto. Moneyyadhammasamannāgamena muni, khīṇāsavo yasmā etāhi yathāvuttāhi tīhi vijjāhi samannāgatattā tato tatiyavijjāya sabbathā bāhitapāpattā ca tevijjo brāhmaṇo nāma hoti. Tasmā tameva ahaṃ tevijjaṃ brāhmaṇaṃ vadāmi, aññaṃ pana lapitalāpanaṃ yajuādimantapadānaṃ ajjhāpanaparaṃ tevijjaṃ brāhmaṇaṃ na vadāmi, tevijjoti taṃ na kathemīti.
应当了知:在这一品中,第二经阐述了轮回,第五、第八与第十经阐述了还灭,而其余诸经则同时阐述了轮回与还灭。显示巴利原文
Iti imasmiṃ vagge dutiyasutte vaṭṭaṃ kathitaṃ, pañcamaaṭṭhamadasamasuttesu vivaṭṭaṃ kathitaṃ, itaresu vaṭṭavivaṭṭaṃ kathitanti veditabbaṃ.